RSi H2 Series

Variable Frequency Drive

7.5 to 25 HP - 230V
7.5 to 800 HP - 460V
7.5 to 125 HP - 575V

Instruction Manual

890053-00-01
© 2022 Benshaw Inc.
Benshaw retains the right to change specifications and illustrations in text without prior notification. The contents of this document may
not be copied without the explicit permission of Benshaw.

i
ii
 Safety

Safety Information
Read and follow all safety instructions in this manual to avoid unsafe operating conditions, property
damage, personal injury, or death.

Safety symbols in this manual

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in severe injury or
death.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in injury or death.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in minor injury or
property damage.

Safety information

• Do not open the cover of the equipment while it is on or operating. Likewise, do not
operate the inverter while the cover is open. Exposure of high voltage terminals or
charging area to the external environment may result in an electric shock. Do not
remove any covers or touch the internal circuit boards (PCBs) or electrical contacts
on the product when the power is on or during operation. Doing so may result in
serious injury, death, or serious property damage.
• Do not open the cover of the equipment even when the power supply to the inverter
has been turned off unless it is necessary for maintenance or regular inspection.
Opening the cover may result in an electric shock even when the power supply is
off.
• The equipment may hold charge long after the power supply has been turned off.
Use a multi-meter to make sure that there is no voltage before working on the
inverter, motor or motor cable.

• This equipment must be grounded for safe and proper operation.

• Do not supply power to a faulty inverter. If you find that the inverter is faulty,
disconnect the power supply and have the inverter professionally repaired.
• The inverter becomes hot during operation. Avoid touching the inverter until it has
cooled to avoid burns.
• Do not allow foreign objects, such as screws, metal chips, debris, water, or oil to
get inside the inverter. Allowing foreign objects inside the inverter may cause the
inverter to malfunction or result in a fire.
• Do not operate the inverter with wet hands. Doing so may result in electric shock

iii
 Safety

• Do not modify the interior workings of the inverter. Doing so will void the
warranty.
• The inverter is designed for 3-phase motor operation. Do not use the inverter to
operate a single phase motor.
• Do not place heavy objects on top of electric cables. Doing so may damage the
cable and result in an electric shock.

Short Circuit Current Ratings

The maximum allowed short-circuit current at the input power connection is defined in UL 508C (now
UL-61800-5-1) as 100 kA. Depending on the selected over current protective device (OCPD), the
VFD's are suitable for use in circuits capable of delivering up to a maximum of 100 kA RMS
symmetrical amperes at the inverter's maximum rated voltage. The following table shows the
recommended circuit breaker frame (100F, 150F, etc.) and interrupt rating codes (EF, NF, etc.) for
various SCCR ratings (RMS symmetrical amperes). Select the appropriate breaker for the SCCR
requirements of the system.

100F 150F 250F 400F 600F 800F 1200F

Voltage
(EF/NF/HF) (NF/HF/LF) (NF/HF/LF) (NF/HF/LF) (NF/HF/LF) (NF/HF/LF) (NF/HF/LF/PF)
240V 50/65/100kA 65/100kA 65/100kA 65/100kA 65/100kA 65/100kA 50/65/100kA
480V 25/35/65kA 35/65/100kA 35/65/100kA 35/65/100kA 35/65/100kA 35/65/100kA 35/65/100/50kA
600V 14/18/35kA 18/35/50kA 18/35/50kA 18/35/50kA 18/35/50kA 18/35/50kA 18/25/35/50kA

480V Interrupt Rating Codes

EF = Standard Fault 25kA (100F Frame Size)
NF = Normal Fault 35kA (100F - 1200F Frame Size)
HF = High Fault 65kA (100F - 1200F Frame Size)
LF = Extra High Fault 100kA (150F - 1200F Frame Size)
PF = Standard Fault 50kA (1200F Frame Size)

iv
890053-00-01 Table of Contents

Table of Contents
1 Preparing the Installation .................................................................................. 1
1.1 Product Identification ................................................................................. 1
1.2 Part Identification ....................................................................................... 2
1.3 Installation Considerations ...................................................................... 10
1.4 Selecting and Preparing a Site for Installation....................................... 11
1.5 Cable Selection........................................................................................ 14
2 Installing the Inverter ....................................................................................... 17
2.1 Mounting the Inverter .............................................................................. 20
2.2 Enabling the RTC (Real-Time Clock) Battery ........................................ 24
2.2.1 Battery Access ............................................................................ 24
2.2.2 Battery Specifications ................................................................. 26
2.3 Cable Wiring............................................................................................. 27
2.3.1 575V Inverter - DC Reactor Installation..................................... 35
2.4 Post-Installation Checklist ....................................................................... 49
2.5 Test Run ................................................................................................... 51
2.6 Run Quick Start ....................................................................................... 52
3 Performing Basic Operations ........................................................................ 53
3.1 LCD Display/Keypad ............................................................................... 53
3.1.1 Operation Buttons ....................................................................... 54
3.1.2 About the Display ........................................................................ 55
3.1.3 LCD Display Modes .................................................................... 59
3.2 Learning to Use the Keypad ................................................................... 62
3.2.1 HAND - OFF - AUTO Buttons Operation .................................. 62
3.2.2 Switching Operation Modes (HAND / OFF / AUTO) ................. 64
3.2.3 Moving among LCD Display Modes .......................................... 70
3.2.4 Switching Parameter Groups in Parameter Mode (PAR) ........ 71
3.2.5 Viewing and Changing Parameter Values and Settings .......... 72
3.2.6 Navigating Parameters using “Jump Codes” ............................ 74
3.2.7 Setting the Monitor Mode Display Line Items ........................... 75
3.2.8 Selecting the Status Bar Display Item ....................................... 76
3.3 Fault Monitoring ....................................................................................... 77
3.3.1 Monitoring Faults during Inverter Operation.............................. 77
3.3.2 Monitoring Multiple Faults .......................................................... 78
3.3.3 Viewing Fault History .................................................................. 78
3.4 Parameter Initialization ............................................................................ 79

v
Table of Contents 890053-00-01

4 Parameter Lists and Quick Reference.......................................................... 80

4.1 Quick Reference Table ............................................................................ 80
4.2 Parameter Lists........................................................................................ 81
4.2.1 Drive Group (DRV) ..................................................................... 81
4.2.2 Motor Group (MOT) .................................................................... 83
4.2.3 Basic Group (BAS) ..................................................................... 84
4.2.4 Advanced Group (ADV) ............................................................. 86
4.2.5 Control Group (CON).................................................................. 88
4.2.6 Input Group (IN) .......................................................................... 91
4.2.7 Output Group (OUT) ................................................................... 93
4.2.8 Protection Group (PRT) .............................................................. 96
5 Parameter Descriptions .................................................................................. 99
5.1 Drive Group (DRV) .................................................................................. 99
5.1.1 DRV-01 Command Frequency .................................................. 99
5.1.2 DRV-03, DRV-04 Acceleration and Deceleration Times ........ 100
5.1.3 DRV-06 Command Source Configuration (Start/Stop) ........... 103
5.1.4 DRV-07 Frequency Reference Source .................................... 106
5.1.5 DRV-09 Control Mode .............................................................. 116
5.1.6 DRV-11 Jog Frequency ............................................................ 117
5.1.7 DRV-15 Torque Boost ............................................................... 117
5.1.8 DRV-19 Start Frequency .......................................................... 119
5.1.9 DRV-21 Changing the Displayed Units (Hz-Rpm) ................. 119
5.1.10 DRV-30 Changing the Displayed Units (kW/HP) .................... 119
5.1.11 DRV-31 Quick Start .................................................................. 120
5.2 MOT Group (MOT) ................................................................................ 121
5.2.1 MOT-01 Set the motor related parameters. ............................ 121
5.2.2 MOT-07 Output Voltage Setting ............................................... 121
5.2.3 MOT-09 Trim Power % ............................................................. 122
5.2.4 MOT-10 Power Source - Voltage and Frequency .................. 122
5.2.5 MOT-11 Auto Tuning ................................................................. 123
5.3 Basic Group (BAS) ................................................................................ 126
5.3.1 BAS-01 2nd Operating Mode - 2nd Source ............................. 126
5.3.2 BAS-03 Operating with Auxiliary References ......................... 127
5.3.3 BAS-07 V/F (Voltage/Frequency) Control ............................... 130
5.4 Advance Group (ADV) .......................................................................... 137
5.4.1 ADV-01 Acc/Dec Pattern Configuration................................... 137
5.4.2 ADV-07 Start Mode Setting ...................................................... 139
5.4.3 ADV-08 Stop Mode Setting....................................................... 140

vi
890053-00-01 Table of Contents

5.4.4 ADV-09 Forward or Reverse Run Prevention......................... 142

5.4.5 ADV-10 Power-on Run ............................................................. 143
5.4.6 ADV-20 Dwell Operation .......................................................... 145
5.4.7 ADV-24 Frequency Limits - Upper/Lower Limit Frequency.... 146
5.4.8 ADV-27 Frequency Jump ......................................................... 147
5.4.9 ADV-41 Brake Control .............................................................. 148
5.4.10 ADV-50 Energy Saving Operation ........................................... 150
5.4.11 ADV-64 Cooling Fan Control.................................................... 151
5.4.12 ADV-74 Press Regeneration Prevention................................. 152
5.5 Control Group (CON) ............................................................................ 153
5.5.1 CON-04 Carrier Frequency Settings ....................................... 153
5.5.2 CON-13 Anti-hunting Regulation (Resonance Prevention) .... 154
5.5.3 CON-70 Speed Search Operation........................................... 155
5.5.4 CON-77 Kinetic Energy Buffering Operation .......................... 158
5.6 Input Group (IN)..................................................................................... 160
5.6.1 Analog Inputs ............................................................................ 160
5.6.2 IN-60 Safe Operation Mode ..................................................... 160
5.6.3 Digital Inputs .............................................................................. 162
5.6.4 Digital Input Descriptions .......................................................... 163
5.6.5 Speed-L, Speed-M, Speed-H, Multi-Step Frequencies ......... 167
5.6.6 XCEL-L, XCEL-M, XCEL-H Multi-Step Accel/Decel Times ... 167
5.6.7 Stopping the Acc/Dec Operation.............................................. 167
5.6.8 RUN Enable (Safety Stop) ....................................................... 167
5.6.9 3-Wire ........................................................................................ 168
5.6.10 2nd Source.................................................................................. 168
5.6.11 Exchange .................................................................................. 169
5.6.12 Up-Down Operation .................................................................. 170
5.6.13 Frequency Hold by Analog Input .............................................. 172
5.6.14 I-Term Clear............................................................................... 172
5.6.15 PID Openloop............................................................................ 172
5.6.16 PID PGain2 ............................................................................... 173
5.6.17 PID Ref Change ........................................................................ 173
5.6.18 Pre-Excite .................................................................................. 173
5.6.19 Timer In ...................................................................................... 173
5.6.20 Dis Aux Ref................................................................................ 174
5.6.21 FWD JOG / REV JOG .............................................................. 174
5.6.22 Fire Mode .................................................................................. 174
5.6.23 Time Event En........................................................................... 175
5.6.24 Pre Heat .................................................................................... 175
vii
Table of Contents 890053-00-01

5.6.25 Damper Open ........................................................................... 175

5.6.26 Pump Clean .............................................................................. 175
5.6.27 Sleep Wake Chg ....................................................................... 175
5.6.28 PID Step Ref L, PID Step Ref M, PID Step Ref H .................. 176
5.6.29 Digital Input Terminal Control .................................................... 176
5.7 Output Group (OUT) ............................................................................. 178
5.7.1 OUT-01, OUT-07 Analog Outputs............................................ 178
5.7.2 OUT-31 Digital Outputs ............................................................ 182
5.7.3 OUT-41 Digital Output Status .................................................. 186
5.7.4 OUT-30 Fault Output using Relay or Q1 Terminals ................ 186
5.7.5 OUT-50 Multi-function Output Terminal Delay Time Settings 188
5.7.6 OUT-67 Relay Output On/Off Control...................................... 189
5.8 Protection Group (PRT) ........................................................................ 190
5.8.1 PRT-01 Backspin Timer............................................................ 190
5.8.2 PRT-05 Phase Loss Protection................................................ 191
5.8.3 PRT-08 Automatic Reset and Restart...................................... 191
5.8.4 PRT-11 Keypad Loss and Speed Reference Loss ................. 194
5.8.5 PRT-17 Overload Trip and Early Warning ............................... 196
5.8.6 PRT-23 Under Load Fault and Warning .................................. 198
5.8.7 PRT-31 No Motor Trip............................................................... 199
5.8.8 PRT-34 Motor Over Heat Sensor ............................................ 200
5.8.9 PRT-40 Electronic Thermal Prevention (ETH) ........................ 202
5.8.10 PRT-44 Fire Mode .................................................................... 204
5.8.11 PRT-50 Stall Prevention and Flux Braking .............................. 206
5.8.12 PRT-60 Pipe Break Detection................................................... 210
5.8.13 PRT-66 Dynamic Braking (DB) Resistor Configuration.......... 211
5.8.14 PRT-70 Level Detection............................................................ 213
5.8.15 PRT-79 Fan Fault Detection..................................................... 216
5.8.16 PRT-80 Option Card Trip .......................................................... 216
5.8.17 PRT-81 Low Voltage Fault ....................................................... 217
5.8.18 PRT-82 Selecting Low Voltage 2 Fault During Operation ...... 217
5.8.19 PRT-90 Low Battery Voltage Warning ..................................... 217
5.8.20 PRT-91 Broken Belt .................................................................. 218
6 PID Control Group (PID) ................................................................................ 219
6.1 PID Parameter List ................................................................................ 219
6.2 PID Basic Operation.............................................................................. 223
6.3 Application Group 1 (AP1) .................................................................... 232
6.3.1 AP1 Parameter List................................................................... 232

viii
890053-00-01 Table of Contents

6.3.2 PID Sleep Mode ........................................................................ 232

6.3.3 Pre-PID and Soft Fill Operation ............................................... 234
6.3.4 PID Switching (PID Open loop) ............................................... 236
6.3.5 Flow Compensation .................................................................. 237
7 Sensorless Vector Control............................................................................ 238
7.1 IM (Induction Motors) ............................................................................ 238
7.1.1 Sensorless Vector Control Operation Setting ......................... 240
7.1.2 Sensorless Vector Control Operation Guide ........................... 243
7.2 PM (Permanent-Magnet) Motors ......................................................... 245
7.2.1 Sensorless Vector Control Operation for PM motor ............... 247
7.2.2 PM Auto Tuning......................................................................... 248
7.2.3 Detecting the Initial Pole Position............................................. 250
7.2.4 CON-69 Speed Search Operation for PM motor.................... 250
8 Application Groups ........................................................................................ 255
8.1 Application Group 2 (AP2) .................................................................... 256
8.1.1 AP2 Parameter List................................................................... 256
8.1.2 AP2-01 Load Tuning ................................................................. 257
8.1.3 AP2-15 Pump Clean Operation ............................................... 259
8.1.4 AP2-38 Decelerating Valve Ramping ...................................... 263
8.1.5 AP2-40 Start & End Ramp Operation ..................................... 264
8.1.6 AP2-45 Damper Operation ...................................................... 265
8.1.7 AP2-46 Lubrication Operation.................................................. 266
8.1.8 AP2-48 Pre-Heat Function ....................................................... 267
8.2 Application Group 3 (AP3) .................................................................... 269
8.2.1 Time Event Scheduling............................................................. 269
8.2.2 AP3 Time Event Parameter List............................................... 269
9 LCD Display Modes ....................................................................................... 280
9.1 LCD Display Mode Selection ................................................................ 280
9.2 Monitor Mode (MON) ............................................................................ 281
9.3 Parameter Mode (PAR)......................................................................... 282
9.4 User & Macro Mode (U&M) .................................................................. 282
9.4.1 User Group Setting Details....................................................... 282
9.4.2 Macro Groups (MC1, MC2, MC3) ........................................... 284
9.5 Trip Mode (TRP) .................................................................................... 289
9.5.1 Fault and Warning List .............................................................. 290
9.6 Configure Mode (CNF).......................................................................... 292
9.6.1 Configure Mode Parameter List ............................................... 292
9.6.2 CNF-20 Monitor Mode (MON) ................................................. 294

ix
Table of Contents 890053-00-01

9.6.3 CNF-40 Parameter Initialization ............................................... 294

9.6.4 CNF-41 Changed Parameter Display ..................................... 295
9.6.5 CNF-42 User & Macro Mode (U&M) ....................................... 295
9.6.6 CNF-43 Macro Selection .......................................................... 295
9.6.7 CNF-44 Delete Trip History ...................................................... 296
9.6.8 CNF-46 Read, Write, and Save Parameters .......................... 296
9.6.9 CNF-50 Parameter View Lock ................................................. 297
9.6.10 CNF-52 Parameter Lock .......................................................... 297
9.6.11 CNF-61 Quick Start Menu ........................................................ 298
9.6.12 CNF-70 Operation Time Monitor ............................................. 298
10 RS-485 Communication Features ............................................................... 300
10.1 Communication Standards ................................................................... 300
10.2 Communication System Configuration ................................................ 301
10.2.1 Communication Line Connection............................................. 301
10.2.2 Setting Communication Parameters........................................ 302
10.2.3 Setting Operation Command and Frequency ......................... 304
10.2.4 Command Loss Protective Operation ..................................... 304
10.3 Modbus-RTU Communication .............................................................. 306
10.3.1 Setting Virtual Multi-function Inputs ......................................... 306
10.3.2 Saving Parameters Defined by Communication..................... 306
10.3.3 Total Memory Map for Communication ................................... 307
10.3.4 Parameter Group for Data Transmission ................................ 308
10.3.5 Parameter Group for User/Macro Group ................................ 308
10.3.6 Modbus-RTU Protocol .............................................................. 309
10.3.7 Compatible Common Area Parameter .................................... 312
10.3.8 H2 Expansion Common Area Parameter ............................... 316
10.4 BACnet Communication ....................................................................... 327
10.4.1 What is BACnet Communication? ........................................... 327
10.4.2 BACnet Communication Standards ........................................ 327
10.4.3 BACnet Quick Communication Start ....................................... 327
10.4.4 Protocol Implementation........................................................... 330
10.4.5 Object Map ................................................................................ 330
10.5 Metasys-N2 Communication ................................................................ 337
10.5.1 Metasys-N2 Quick Communication Start ................................ 337
10.5.2 Metasys-N2 Communication Standard ................................... 337
10.5.3 Metasys-N2 Protocol I/O Point Map ........................................ 338
11 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................. 342
11.1 Trip and Warning ................................................................................... 342

x
890053-00-01 Table of Contents

11.1.1 Faults ......................................................................................... 342

11.1.2 Warning Messages ................................................................... 345
11.2 Troubleshooting Faults .......................................................................... 347
11.3 Troubleshooting Other Faults................................................................ 349
12 Maintenance .................................................................................................... 353
12.1 Periodic Inspection Summary ............................................................... 353
12.2 Periodic Inspection Items ...................................................................... 354
12.3 Storage ................................................................................................... 356
12.4 Disposal ................................................................................................. 356
13 Technical Specifications ............................................................................... 358
13.1 Input and Output Specifications............................................................ 358
13.2 Product Specification Details ................................................................ 364
13.3 External Dimensions ............................................................................. 367
13.4 Terminal Screw Specification ................................................................ 374
13.5 Dynamic Braking Resistor Specification .............................................. 375
13.5.1 Basic Wiring - DBR and DBU .................................................. 377
13.6 Continuous Rated Current Derating..................................................... 378
13.6.1 Derating for Single Phase Input ............................................... 378
13.6.2 Derating based on Carrier Frequency ..................................... 379
13.6.3 Derating based on Input Voltage ............................................. 380
13.6.4 Derating based on Ambient Temperature ............................... 380
13.7 Heat Emission and Efficiency ............................................................... 381

xi
Table of Contents 890053-00-01

xii
 890053-00-01 Preparing the Installation

1 Preparing the Installation

This chapter provides details on product identification, part names, installation and cable
specifications. To install the inverter correctly and safely, carefully read and follow the instructions.

1.1 Product Identification

The H2 Series Inverter is manufactured within a range based on inverter capacity (HP/kW) and power
source specifications (240V/480V/575V). Product name and specifications are detailed on the name
plate. Check the name plate before installing the product and make sure that the product meets your
requirements. For more detailed product specifications, refer to 13.1, Input and Output Specifications on
page 358.

Note
Check the product name, open the packaging, and then confirm that the product is free from
defects. Contact your supplier if you have any issues or questions about your product.

1
Preparing the Installation 890053-00-01

1.2 Part Identification

The illustrations below displays part names. Details may vary between product groups.

240V, 7.5 HP ~ 25 HP (5.5 kW ~ 18.5 kW)

480V, 7.5 HP ~ 40 HP (5.5 kW ~ 30 kW)

USB Port
WinDRIVE only

2
 890053-00-01 Preparing the Installation

575V, 7.5 HP ~ 40 HP (5.5 kW ~ 30 kW)

USB Port
WinDRIVE only

3
Preparing the Installation 890053-00-01

480V and 575V

50 HP ~ 125 HP (37 kW ~ 90 kW)

USB Port
WinDRIVE only

4
 890053-00-01 Preparing the Installation

480V
150 HP ~ 200 HP (110 kW ~ 132 kW)

USB Port
WinDRIVE only

5
Preparing the Installation 890053-00-01

480V
250 HP ~ 300 HP (160 kW ~ 185 kW)

USB Port
WinDRIVE only

6
 890053-00-01 Preparing the Installation

480V, 400 HP (250 kW)

USB Port
WinDRIVE only

7
Preparing the Installation 890053-00-01

480V, 500 HP ~ 650 HP (315 kW ~ 400 kW)

USB Port
WinDRIVE only

8
 890053-00-01 Preparing the Installation

480V, 800 HP (500 kW)

USB Port
WinDRIVE only

9
Preparing the Installation 890053-00-01

1.3 Installation Considerations

Inverters are composed of various precision, electronic devices, and therefore the installation
environment can significantly impact the life span and reliability of the product. The table below details
the ideal operation and installation conditions for the inverter.

Items Description
14°F~104°F (- 10°C~40°C)
Ambient Temperature* 2.5% per °C current derating up to 122°F (50°C) max.
No ice or frost should be present.
Ambient Humidity 95% relative humidity (no condensation)
Storage Temperature -4°F–149°F (-20⁰C-65⁰C)
An environment free from corrosive or flammable gases, oil residue or
Environmental Factors
dust
Maximum 3,280 ft (1,000m) above sea level for standard operation.
Above that derate the inverter rated voltage and the rated output
Altitude
current derating by 1% for every 328 ft (100m) up to 13,123 ft
(4,000m).
Vibration Less than 1.0 G (9.8m/sec2)
Air Pressure 10 - 15 PSIg (70 –106 kPa)
* The ambient temperature is the temperature measured at a point 2” (5 cm) from the
surface of the inverter.

Do not allow the ambient temperature to exceed the allowable range while operating the
inverter.

10
 890053-00-01 Preparing the Installation

1.4 Selecting and Preparing a Site for Installation

When selecting an installation location consider the following points:

The inverter must be installed on a wall that can support the inverter’s weight.
The location must be free from vibration. Vibration can adversely affect the operation of the inverter.
The inverter can become very hot during operation. Install the inverter on a surface that is fire-resistant or
flame-retardant and with sufficient clearance around the inverter to allow air to circulate. The illustrations
below detail the required installation clearances.

11
Preparing the Installation 890053-00-01

Ensure sufficient air circulation is provided around the inverter when it is installed. If the inverter is to
be installed inside a panel, enclosure, or cabinet rack, carefully consider the position of the inverter’s
cooling fan and the ventilation louver. The cooling fan must be positioned to efficiently transfer the
heat generated by the operation of the inverter.

If you are installing multiple inverters in one location, arrange them side-by-side and remove the vent
covers. Use a flat head screwdriver to remove the vent covers. Only the H2 inverters rated for up to 30
kW may be installed side-by-side.

12
 890053-00-01 Preparing the Installation

NOTE
• The vent covers must be removed for side-by-side installations.
• Side-by-side installation cannot be used for the H2 inverters rated for 37 kW and above.
• For the H2 inverters rated for 37 kW and above, if the installation site satisfies the UL
Open Type requirements and there is no danger of foreign objects getting inside the
inverter, the vent cover may be removed to improve cooling efficiency.

If you are installing multiple inverters of different ratings, provide sufficient clearance to meet the
clearance specifications of the larger inverter. The H2 inverters rated up to 30 kW may be installed
side-by-side.

13
Preparing the Installation 890053-00-01

1.5 Cable Selection

Use cables that meet the required specification for the safe and reliable operation of the product. Refer to
NEC Articles 430.2 and 430.6 along with Table 310-16 for selecting the correct wire sizing. In some areas local
codes may take precedence over the NEC. Refer to the following information to assist you with cable
selection.

Wherever possible, use cables with the largest cross-sectional area for mains power wiring to
ensure that voltage drop does not exceed 2%.
Use copper cables rated for 600 V, 75⁰ for power terminal wiring.
Use copper cables rated for 300 V, 75⁰ for control terminal wiring.
The inverters must be grounded with fixed connections.
The minimum size of the protective ground conductor shall comply with the local safety
regulations for high protective grounding.
Inverters rated <125 HP should only have one conductor per terminal connected.

Ground Cable and Power Cable Specifications

Ground Wire Input/Output Power Wire

Voltage kW HP mm2 AWG
mm2 AWG
R/S/T U/V/W R/S/T U/V/W
5.5 7.5 4 4 12 12
7.5 10 10 10 6 6 10 10
240V 11 15 10 10 8 8
15 20 16 16 6 6
14 6
18.5 25 25 22 4 4

Ground Wire Input/Output Power Wire

Voltage kW HP mm2 AWG
mm2 AWG
R/S/T U/V/W R/S/T U/V/W
5.5 7.5 2.5 2.5 14 14
7.5 10 4 12 4 2.5 12 14
11 15 4 4 12 12
15 20 6 6 10 10
16 8
18.5 25 16 10 6 8
22 30 16 10 6 8
14 6
30 40 25 16 4 6
37 50 25 25 4 4
45 60 25 4 25 25 4 4
480V
55 75 50 50 1/0 1/0
75 100 70 70 1/0 1/0
38 2
90 125 70 70 1/0 1/0
1/0 x2 1/0 x2
110 150 50x2 1x2 70x2 70x2
300 300
2/0 x2 2/0 x2
132 200 50x2 1x2 95x2 95x2
400 400
50x2
160 250 1/0 x2 95x2 95x2 4/0 x2 4/0 x2
70x2

14
 890053-00-01 Preparing the Installation

Ground Wire Input/Output Power Wire

Voltage kW HP mm2 AWG
mm2 AWG
R/S/T U/V/W R/S/T U/V/W
70x2
185 300 3/0 x2 120x2 120x2 250 x2 250 x2
95x2
250 400 95x2 300 x2 185x2 185x2 350 x2 350 x2
60x4
315 500 2/0 x4 185x2 185x2 350 x2 350 x2
150x2
95x4 120x4 120x4 250 x4 250 x4
400 650 4/0 x4
200x2 400x2 400x2 800 x2 800 x2
120x4 4/0 x4 185x4 185x4 350 x4 350 x4
500 800
350x2 750x2 630x2 630x2 1500 x2 1500 x2

Ground Wire Input/Output Power Wire

Voltage kW HP mm2 AWG
mm2 AWG
R/S/T U/V/W R/S/T U/V/W
5.5 7.5 14 14 14
7.5 10 2.5 12 2.5 2.5 14 12
11 15 10 12 10
15 20 4 10 4 4 10 10
18.5 25 6 8 4 6 8 8
22 30 8 6 8 8
575V 10 10
30 40 6 10 8 6
37 50 16 16 4 4
45 60 16 4 16 25 4 4
55 75 25 35 3 2
75 100 25 3 50 50 1 1/0
90 125 35 2 70 70 2/0 2/0

Signal (Control) Cable Specifications

Wire thickness 1)
Terminals
mm2 AWG
P1–P7/CM/VR/V1/I2/24/TI 0.33–1.25 16–22
AO1/AO2/CM/Q1/EG 0.33–2.0 14–22
A1/B1/C1/A2/C2/A3/C3/A4/C4/A5/C5 0.33–2.0 14–22
S+,S-,SG 0.75 18
1) Use STP (shielded twisted-pair) cables for signal wiring.

15
 890053-00-01

16
 890053-00-01 Installing the Inverter

2 Installing the Inverter

This chapter describes the physical and electrical installation of the H2 series inverters, including
mounting and wiring of the product. Refer to the flowchart and basic configuration diagram provided
below to understand the procedures and installation instructions to be followed to install the product
correctly.

Installation Flowchart

The following flowchart lists the sequence to be followed during installation. The steps cover
equipment installation and testing of the product. More information on each step is referenced in the
steps.

Product Identification (p.1)

Select the Installation Location (p.10)

Mounting the Inverter (p.20)

Wiring the Ground Connection (p.27)

Power and Signal Wiring (p.27)

Post-Installation Checks (p.49)

Turn on the Inverter

Parameter Configuration (p.72)

Testing (p.51)

17
Installing the Inverter 890053-00-01

Basic configuration diagram

The reference diagram below shows a typical system configuration showing the inverter and
peripheral devices.

Prior to installing the inverter, ensure that the product is suitable for the application (power rating,
capacity, etc). Ensure that all of the required peripherals and optional devices (contactors, reactors,
noise filters, etc.) are available.

240V: 7.5 HP ~ 25 HP (5.5 kW ~ 18.5kW)

480V: 7.5 HP ~ 40 HP (5.5 kW ~ 30kW)

480V: 50 HP ~ 800 HP (37 kW ~ 500 kW)

18
 890053-00-01 Installing the Inverter

575V: 7.5 HP ~ 40 HP (5.5 kW ~ 30 kW)

575V: 50 HP ~ 125 HP (37 kW ~ 90 kW)

• Figures in this manual are shown with covers removed to show a more detailed view of the
installation arrangements. Install covers before operating the inverter. Operate the product
according to the instructions in this manual.
• Do not start or stop the inverter using a magnetic contactor installed on the input power
supply.
• If the inverter is damaged and loses control, the machine may cause a dangerous
situation. Install an additional safety device such as an emergency brake to prevent these
situations.
• High levels of current draw during power-on can affect the system. Ensure that correctly
rated circuit breakers are installed to operate safely during power-on situations.
• Line Reactors can be installed to improve the power factor. Note that reactors may be
installed within 32.8 ft (10 m) from the power source if the input power exceeds 600 kVA.

19
Installing the Inverter 890053-00-01

2.1 Mounting the Inverter

Mount the inverter on a wall or inside a panel following the procedures provided below. Before
installation, ensure that there is sufficient space to meet the clearance specifications, and that there
are no obstacles impeding the cooling fan’s air flow.

Select a wall or panel suitable to support the installation. For all inverters, refer to 13.3, External
Dimensions on page 367 and check the inverter’s mounting dimensions.

Use a level to draw a horizontal line on the mounting surface, and then carefully mark the upper
mounting points. Drill the two upper mounting bolt holes and then install the mounting bolts. Do not
fully tighten the bolts at this time. For smaller inverters, mount the inverter on the wall or inside a panel
using the two upper bolts. Verify it is level. Mark the lower mounting points. Remove the Inverter and
drill the lower bolt holes. Install the lower mounting bolts but do not fully tighten. Mount the inverter
and fully tighten all mounting bolts. For larger inverters, refer to 13.3, External Dimensions on page
367.

240V, 7.5 HP ~ 25 HP (5.5 kW ~ 18.5 kW)

480V, 7.5 HP ~ 40 HP (5.5 kW ~ 30 kW)

Ensure that the inverter is placed flat on the mounting surface and that the installation surface can
securely support the weight of the inverter

20
 890053-00-01 Installing the Inverter

575V, 7.5 HP ~ 40 HP (5.5 kW ~ 30 kW)

480V, 50 HP ~ 125 HP (37 kW ~ 90 kW)

575V, 50 HP ~ 125 HP (37 kW ~ 90 kW)

21
Installing the Inverter 890053-00-01

480V, 150 HP ~ 800 HP (37 kW ~ 500 kW)

• Do not transport the inverter by lifting with the inverter’s covers or plastic
surfaces. The cover may come loose causing the inverter to be dropped which
can cause injuries or damage to the product. Always support the inverter using
the metal frames when moving it.
• Hi-capacity inverters are very heavy and bulky. Use an appropriate transport
and lifting methods that are suitable for the weight.

The larger H2 VFD’s have provisions for Eye Bolts. See diagram and table below. Eyebolts are not
included with the VFD’s.

Weight Eye Bolt

HP
(lbs) (course)
150 123.0 M10
200 123.0 M10
250 164.7 M10
300 164.7 M10
400 264.6 M12
500 409.0 M12
650 409.0 M12
800 584.0 M16

22
890053-00-01 Installing the Inverter

Do not install the inverter on the floor or mount it sideways against a wall. The inverter must be installed
vertically on a wall or inside a panel with its rear flat on the mounting surface.

23
Installing the Inverter 890053-00-01

2.2 Enabling the RTC (Real-Time Clock) Battery

The H2 Series inverter comes from the factory with a CR2032 lithium-manganese battery pre-installed
on the I/O CPU PCB. The battery powers the inverter’s built-in RTC. The battery is installed with a
protective insulation strip to prevent battery discharge. Remove this protective film before installing
and using the inverter.

ESD (Electrostatic discharge) from the human body may damage sensitive electronic components
on the PCB’s. Therefore, be extremely careful not to touch the PCB or the components on the
PCB with bare hands while you work on the I/O CPU PCB.

To prevent damage to the PCB from ESD, touch a metal object with your hands to discharge any
electrical charge before working on the PCB, or wear an anti-static wrist strap and ground it on a
metal object.

2.2.1 Battery Access

Follow the instructions below to activate (or replace) the battery. Remove the protective insulation strip
underneath the battery to enable the RTC feature on the H2 series inverters.

Ensure that the inverter is turned off and DC bus voltage has dropped to a safe level before
opening the terminal cover when enabling or replacing the RTC battery.

Loosen the screw(s) on the power cover then remove the power cover.

240V: 7.5 HP ~ 25 HP (5.5 kW ~ 18.5 kW) 480V, 575V: 50 HP ~ 125 HP (37 kW ~ 90 kW)
480V: 7.5 HP ~ 40 HP (5.5 kW ~ 30 kW)
575V: 7.5 HP ~ 40 HP (5.5 kW ~ 30 kW)

24
 890053-00-01 Installing the Inverter

480V: 150 HP ~ 300 HP (110 kW ~ 185 kW) 480V: 400 HP ~ 800 HP (250 kW ~ 500 kW)

For 7.5 ~ 125 HP only. Remove the keypad from the inverter body.

240V: 7.5 HP ~ 25 HP (5.5 kW ~ 18.5 kW) 480V, 575V: 50 HP ~ 125 HP (37 kW ~ 90 kW)
480V: 7.5 HP ~ 40 HP (5.5 kW ~ 30 kW)
575V: 7.5 HP ~ 40 HP (5.5 kW ~ 30 kW)

25
Installing the Inverter 890053-00-01

For 7.5 HP ~ 125 HP only. Loosen the screws securing the front cover, and remove the front cover by
lifting it. The I/O CPU PCB is exposed.

240V: 7.5 HP ~ 25 HP (5.5 kW ~ 18.5 kW) 480V, 575V: 50 HP ~ 125 HP (37 kW ~ 90 kW)
480V: 7.5 HP ~ 40 HP (5.5 kW ~ 30 kW)
575V: 7.5 HP ~ 40 HP (5.5 kW ~ 30 kW)

Locate the RTC battery holder on the I/O CPU PCB and remove the protective insulation strip by gently
pulling it. If replacing, gently pry out the battery and replace.

Reattach the front cover, the power cover, and the keypad back onto the inverter body.

2.2.2 Battery Specifications

Model type: CR 2032 (lithium-manganese) Nominal voltage: 3 V

Nominal capacity: 220 mAh
Operating temperature range: -20–80 degrees C
Life span (approximately): 53,300 hrs (inverter on) / 25,800 hrs (inverter off)

26
 890053-00-01 Installing the Inverter

2.3 Cable Wiring

Complete the cable connections by connecting an appropriately rated cable to the terminals on the
power and control terminal blocks. Read the following information carefully and follow all warning
instructions.

Do not connect power to the inverter until installation has been fully completed and the inverter is
ready to be operated.

Power supply wiring must be connected to the R, S, and T terminals. Arrangement of the input phase
sequence is not necessary. Connecting power supply cables to other terminals will cause internal
damage to the inverter.
Motor cables must be connected to the U, V, and W Terminals. Arrangement of the output phase
sequence will affect motor rotation direction.
Ground cables must be connected to the designated ground terminals. Do not connect ground wires to
the DC bus negative bus (N-) terminal.
Use cables with the largest possible cross-sectional area to insure that voltage drop is minimized over
long cable runs. Lowering the carrier frequency or installing a micro surge filter will also help reduce
voltage drop.
Use copper cables rated at 600 V, 75 ° for the power terminal wiring.
Use copper cables rated at 300 V, 75 ° for the control terminal wiring
Voltage drop is calculated with the following formula.

Apply rated torques to the terminal screws. Loose screws cause heated connections and can lead to
short circuits and malfunctions. Tightening the screws too much may damage the terminals.
The inverter’s power terminal connections can cause harmonics that may interfere with other
communication devices located near to the inverter. To reduce interference the installation of noise
filters or line filters may be required.
Long cable runs can cause reduced motor torque in low frequency applications due to voltage
drop. Long cable runs also increase the circuits susceptibility to stray capacitance and may
trigger over current protection within the inverter or result in malfunction of equipment
connected to the inverter.
Motor Cable Length:
• 7.5 HP → 800 HP-----492 ft. (150 m).
To increase the service life of the motor and the inverter, Benshaw recommends adding an
output reactor with motor lead lengths up to 100 ft. For motor lead lengths between 100 ft. up
to 1500 ft., install a Long Lead (dV/dT) filter.
To avoid circuit interruption or damaging connected equipment, do not install PFCC’s, surge
protection or EMC filters on the output side of the inverter.
When connecting a contactor to the output of the inverter, avoid ON / OFF contactor operation while
inverter is running. It may cause the inverter to trip or short circuit the output of the inverter.
Route signal cables away from power cables to avoid interference.

27
Installing the Inverter 890053-00-01

Step 1 Terminal Cover and Cable Guide

The terminal cover and cable guide must be removed to install cables. Refer to the following
procedures to remove the covers and cable guide. The steps to remove these parts may vary
depending on the inverter model.

Loosen the bolt(s) that secure the terminal cover. Then remove the cover by lifting it from the bottom and
away from the front.

240V: 7.5 HP ~ 25 HP (5.5 kW ~ 18.5 kW) 480V, 575V: 50 HP ~ 125 HP (37 kW ~ 90 kW)
480V: 7.5 HP ~ 40 HP (5.5 kW ~ 30 kW)
575V: 7.5 HP ~ 40 HP (5.5 kW ~ 30 kW)

480V: 150 HP ~ 300 HP (110 kW ~ 185 kW) 480V: 400 HP ~ 800 HP (250 kW ~ 500 kW)

28
 890053-00-01 Installing the Inverter

Remove Cable Guide

(①) Push and hold the levers on both sides of the cable guide and then (②) remove the
cable guide by pulling it directly away from the front of the inverter.
In some models (50 HP ~ 125 HP, 37 kW ~ 90kW) the cable guide is secured by a bolt. Remove the bolt
first.

240V: 7.5 HP ~ 25 HP (5.5 kW ~ 18.5 kW) 480V, 575V: 50 HP ~ 125 HP (37 kW ~ 90 kW)
480V: 7.5 HP ~ 40 HP (5.5 kW ~ 30 kW)

575V: 7.5 HP ~ 40 HP (5.5 kW ~ 30 kW)

Connect the cables to the power terminals and the control terminals. For cable specifications, refer to 1.5
Cable Selection on page 14.

29
Installing the Inverter 890053-00-01

Step 2 Ground Connection

Install the ground connection for the inverter.

Locate the ground terminal and connect an appropriately rated ground cable to the terminals. Refer to
1.5 Cable Selection on page 14 to find the appropriate cable specification for your installation.

240V: 7.5 HP ~ 25 HP (5.5 kW ~ 18.5 kW) 480V, 575V: 50 HP ~ 125 HP (37 kW ~ 90 kW)
480V: 7.5 HP ~ 40 HP (5.5 kW ~ 30 kW)

480V: 150 HP ~ 300 HP (110 kW ~ 185 kW) 480V: 400 HP ~ 800 HP (250 kW ~ 500 kW)

Connect the other ends of the ground cables to the supply ground terminal.
Note
• 240 V products require Class 3 grounding. Resistance to ground must be ≤ 100 Ω.
• 480V/575V products require Special Class 3 grounding. Resistance to ground must be ≤ 10 Ω.

Install ground connections for the inverter and the motor by following the correct specifications to
ensure safe and accurate operation. Using the inverter and the motor without the specified
grounding connections may result in electric shock.

This product can cause a D.C current in the ground conductor. If a ground fault device (RCD or
monitoring RCM) is used for protection, only Type B is allowed on supply side of this product.

30
 890053-00-01 Installing the Inverter

Step 3 Power Terminal Wiring

The following illustration shows the terminal layout on the power terminal block. Refer to the power
terminal descriptions to understand the function and location of each terminal before making wiring
connections. Ensure that the cables selected meet or exceed the specifications in 1.5 Cable Selection
on page 14 before installing them.

240V: 7.5 HP ~ 25 HP (5.5 kW ~ 18.5 kW)

480V: 7.5 HP ~ 40 HP (5.5 kW ~ 30 kW)

Power Terminal Labels and Descriptions

Terminal Labels Name Description

R(L1) / S(L2) / T(L3) AC power input terminal Mains supply AC power connections.
P2(+) / N(-) DC bus terminal DC voltage terminals.
DC Reactor connection. Remove shorting bar
P1(+) / P2(+) DC Reactor terminal
when you add a DC Reactor.
P2(+) / B Brake resistor terminals Brake resistor wiring connection.
U/V/W Motor output terminals 3-phase induction motor wiring connections.

31
Installing the Inverter 890053-00-01

480V: 50 HP ~ 125 HP (37 kW ~ 90 kW)

Power Terminal Labels and Descriptions

Terminal Labels Name Description

R(L1) / S(L2) / T(L3) AC power input terminal Mains supply AC power connections.
P2(+) / N(-) DC bus terminals DC voltage terminals.
Brake unit (DBU)
P3(+) / N(-) Brake unit (module) wiring connection.
terminals
U/V/W Motor output terminals 3-phase induction motor wiring connections.

32
 890053-00-01 Installing the Inverter

480V: 150 HP ~ 400 HP (110 kW ~ 250 kW)

P(+)

N(-)

Power Terminal Labels and Descriptions

Terminal Labels Name Description

R(L1) / S(L2) / T(L3) AC power input terminal Mains supply AC power connections.
Not used - does not include a braking
B -
transistor (IGBT).
DC bus terminal DC voltage terminals.
P(+) / N(-)
(or DBU connection terminals) (or Brake unit wiring connection)
3-phase induction motor wiring
U/V/W Motor output terminals
connections.

33
Installing the Inverter 890053-00-01

480V: 500 HP ~ 800 HP (315 kW ~ 500 kW)

Terminal Labels Name Description

R(L1) / S(L2) / T(L3) AC power input terminal Mains supply AC power connections.
DC bus terminal DC voltage terminals.
P(+) / N(-)
(or DBU connection terminals) (or Brake unit wiring connection)
3-phase induction motor wiring
U/V/W Motor output terminals
connections.

34
 890053-00-01 Installing the Inverter

2.3.1 575V Inverter - DC Reactor Installation

For 575V inverters (7.5 HP ~ 40 HP), a DC Reactor is supplied mounted in a conduit box. It requires
mounting and connection to the inverter. Follow the steps below to install and connect the DC
Reactor.

7.5 HP ~ 40 HP

a. Remove the Terminal cover from the

inverter.
b. Remove the Cable Guide/Bracket from
the inverter.
c. Remove the top cover of the DC
Reactor/Conduit Box.
d. Mount the DC Reactor/Conduit Box to
the inverter.

e. Remove the Jumper (Shorting Bar)

from terminals P1 and P2.

Remove P1-P2 Short Bar

f. Connect DC Reactor wires to terminals

P1 and P2.

g. Reinstall the Cable Guide/Bracket.

h. Inverter can be mounted at this time.
i. Complete the remaining Power wiring.
j. Complete the Control wiring.
k. Reinstall the Terminal cover.
l. Install the top cover of the DC Reactor/Conduit Box.

35
Installing the Inverter 890053-00-01

575V: 7.5 HP ~ 25 HP (5.5 kW ~ 18.5 kW, Built-in DC Reactor)

Power Terminal Labels and Descriptions

Terminal Labels Name Description

R(L1) / S(L2) / T(L3) AC power input terminal Mains supply AC power connections.
P2(+) / N(-) DC bus terminal DC voltage terminals.

P1(+) / P2(+) DC Reactor terminal DC Reactor wiring connection.

P2(+) / B Brake resistor terminals Brake resistor wiring connection.

U/V/W Motor output terminals 3-phase induction motor wiring connections.

36
 890053-00-01 Installing the Inverter

575V: 25 HP ~ 40 HP (22 kW ~ 30 kW, Built-in DC Reactor)

Power Terminal Labels and Descriptions

Terminal Labels Name Description

R(L1) / S(L2) / T(L3) AC power input terminal Mains supply AC power connections.
P2(+) / N(-) DC bus terminal DC voltage terminals.

P1(+) / P2(+) DC Reactor terminal DC Reactor wiring connection.

P2(+) / N(-) Brake unit (DBU) terminals Brake unit wiring connection.
3-phase induction motor wiring
U/V/W Motor output terminals
connections.

37
Installing the Inverter 890053-00-01

575V: 50 HP ~ 125 HP (37 kW ~ 90 kW, Built-in DC Reactor)

Power Terminal Labels and Descriptions

Terminal Labels Name Description

R(L1) / S(L2) / T(L3) AC power input terminal Mains supply AC power connections.
P2(+) / N(-) DC bus terminal DC voltage terminals.
P3(+) / N(-) Brake unit (DBU) terminals Brake unit wiring connection.
3-phase induction motor wiring
U/V/W Motor output terminals
connections.

38
 890053-00-01 Installing the Inverter

Step 4 Control Terminal Wiring

The illustrations below show the layout of control wiring terminals and control board switches located
on the I/O TB PCB. Refer to the detailed information provided below and 1.5 Cable Selection on page
14 before installing control terminal wiring.

Switch Symbols and Description

Switch Description Factory Default

SW1 Terminating Resistor (RS-485) selection switch (Left: On, Right: Off) Right: OFF
SW2 NPN/PNP mode selection switch (Left: PNP, Right: NPN) Right: NPN
Analog Input Terminal V1 - V1/T1 Input mode selection switch
SW3 Left: V1
(Left: V1, Right: T1, PTC)
Analog Input Terminal I2 - Current/Voltage input selection switch
SW4 Left: I2
(Left: I2, Right: V2)
Analog Output Terminal AO1 - Voltage Output/Current (I) Output
SW5 Right: IO
selection switch (Left: VO, Right: IO)

39
Installing the Inverter 890053-00-01

Input Output Control Terminal Block Wiring Diagram

40
 890053-00-01 Installing the Inverter

Input Output Terminal Block (IO TB PCB)

Input Terminal Labels and Descriptions

Function Label Name Description

Configurable multi-function input terminals.
Factory default settings are as follows :
P1~P7 Multi-function Inputs 1-7 P1: Fx P2: Rx P3: BX P4: RST
Multi-function P5: Speed-L P6: Speed-M P7: Speed-H
input terminal
configuration Common terminal for multi-function input
terminals and analog input/output terminals.
CM Common
All three CM terminals are the same circuit.
10 VDC Voltage Reference Source: Used as
the 10 VDC source to power potentiometer.
Potentiometer power
VR Maximum Voltage Output: 12 V Maximum
supply
Current Output: 12 mA
Potentiometer : 1 ~ 5k Ω
Switch between Voltage (V1) and PTC (T1)
input modes using SW3 on the IO TB
Analog input board.
configuration Voltage input for frequency
reference V1 - Modify a frequency reference via
analog voltage input.
V1/(T1)
Unipolar: 0 ~ 10 V (12 V Max)
Bipolar: -10 ~ 10 V (±12 V Max)
Thermistor (PTC) input for T1 - Analog input to monitor motor
motor temperature monitor temperature via the motor thermistor
and protection (PTC).

41
Installing the Inverter 890053-00-01

Function Label Name Description

Switch between current (I2) and voltage
(V2) input modes using SW4 on the IO TB
board.

I2 - Modify a frequency reference via

analog current input.
Analog input Current/Voltage input for
I2/(V2)
configuration frequency reference input
V2 - Modify a frequency reference via
analog voltage input.

Input current: 0–20 mA

Maximum Input: 24 mA
Input resistance 249 Ω
Modify a frequency reference via Pulse
Frequency Reference
Pulsed Input TI Train input from 0 to 32 kHz.
input via Pulse Train
Low Level: 0–0.8 V, High Level: 3.5–12 V.

Outputs/Communication Terminal Labels and Descriptions

Function Label Name Description

Switch between current (IO) and voltage (VO)
output modes using SW5 on the IO TB board.

IO - 4-20mA output representing various inverter

information. Set OUT-01 to output frequency, output
current, output voltage and others.

Voltage/Current VO - 0-10VDC output.

AO1
Output
Output Signal Specifications:
Output current: 0–20 mA
Analog Maximum output current: 24 mA
Outputs
Output voltage: 0–10 V
Maximum output voltage/current: 12 V/12 mA
Factory default 4-20mA OUT-01: Frequency
0-10VDC output representing various inverter
information. Set OUT-07 to output frequency, output
current, output voltage and others.
Voltage Output
AO2
(only) Output Signal Specifications:
Output voltage: 0–10 V
Maximum output voltage/current: 12 V/12 mA
Factory default 0-10V OUT-07: Frequency

42
890053-00-01 Installing the Inverter

Function Label Name Description

Form C, configurable output terminal. Activates
based on OUT-31 setting.
Normal operation: B1-C1 closed. A1-C1 open
Multi-function output Activated condition: A1-C1 closed, B1-C1 open
Relay
A1/C1/B1 relay
Outputs
(Form C) Specifications:
N.O.: AC250 V, < 2 A , DC 30 V, < 3 A
N.C.: AC250 V, < 1 A, DC 30 V, < 1 A
Factory default: OUT-31: Trip
Form A, configurable output terminals. Activate
based on OUT-32 ~ OUT-36 settings.
A2/C2
Multi-function
Relay A3/C3 Specifications:
output relays
Outputs A4/C4 AC 250 V, < 5 A, DC 30 V, < 5 A.
(Form A)
A5/C5 Factory defaults:
OUT-32: Run
OUT-33~36: None
Open collector, configurable output terminal.
Activates based on OUT-36 setting. Use the “24”
terminal or external power source.
Multi-function (Open
Can provide a pulsed output (Set OUT-36 = TO)
Q1/(TO) Collector) / Pulse
configurable to OUT-61 settings.
Output
Specifications: DC 26 V, 50 mA or less
Pulsed output frequency: 0–32 kHz., 0–12 V
Digital
Output EG Common Ground terminal for Q1 (open collector).
Primary use is for supplying the digital input
terminals in PNP mode. May be used for other
purposes (EX: 2-wire transducer). Caution on the
24 VDC power
24 limited power rating of the “24” terminal.
supply
Specifications:
24VDC Maximum output current: 100 mA
Send / receive RS-485 signals. Refer to 10, RS-485
RS-485 S+/S-/SG RS-485 signal line Communication Features on page 300 for more
details.

Note

• STP (Shielded Twisted Pair) cable has a highly conductive shielded screen around
twisted cable pairs. STP cables protect conductors from electromagnetic interference.

• When making wiring connections at the control terminals ensure that the total cable length
does not exceed 165 ft (50 m).
• Ensure that the length of any safety related wiring does not exceed 100 ft (30 m).
• Ensure that the cable length between the keypad and the inverter does not exceed 10 ft
(3.04 m). Cable connections longer than 10 ft (3.04 m) may cause signal errors.
• Use a ferrite core to protect signal cables from electro-magnetic interference.
• When using cable ties on control wiring, apply the cable ties no closer than 6 inches from
the inverter. This provides sufficient access to fully close the terminal cover. 43
Installing the Inverter 890053-00-01

Step 5 PNP/NPN Mode Selection

The H2 inverter supports both PNP (Source) and NPN (Sink) modes for activating the digital inputs at
the terminal block. Select an appropriate mode to suit switching requirements using the PNP/NPN
selection switch (SW2) on the IO TB board. The following describes each mode along with connection
diagrams. Switch position (status) can be viewed at parameter IN-90.

NPN Mode (Sink)

This is the factory default setting of the inverter. With SW2 (on IO TB PCB) in the NPN position,
connect an external contact (switch, relay, transistor) between Px and CM. When the external contact
closes, the input is activated by connecting the internal 24V source to CM (sink). CM is the common
ground terminal for all digital input terminals.

PNP Mode (Source)

With SW2 (on the IO TB PCB) in the PNP position, the input is activated by applying 24V to the digital
input. Connect an external contact (switch, relay, transistor) between 24 and Px terminal. When the
contact closes, the input is activated by applying 24V to the digital input. The 24V source can be from
the inverter’s “24” terminal or an external supply. When using an external 24V source, connect the
external source (-) to the CM terminal. CM is the common ground terminal for all digital inputs.

44
 890053-00-01 Installing the Inverter

Step 6 Disabling the EMC Filter for Power Sources with Asymmetrical Grounding

H2 inverters have built-in EMC filters (exception All 240V, 480V:100 HP and 125 HP). An EMC filter
prevents electromagnetic interference by reducing radio emissions from the inverter. Using the built in
EMC filter is not always recommended as it increases leakage current. Before using the inverter,
confirm the power supply’s grounding system. If the inverter is connected to a power source with
an asymmetrical grounding connection, the EMC filter must be disconnected.

Asymmetrical Grounding Connection

Intermediate
One phase of a
grounding point
delta
on one phase
connection is
of a delta
grounded (TN
connection (TN
Systems)
Systems)

A 3-phase
The end of a
connection
single phase is
without
grounded (TN
grounding (TN
Systems)
Systems)

Disconnect the EMC filter if the inverter is connected to a power source with an
asymmetrical grounding structure (Examples above). Personal injury or death by electric
shock may result.
Wait at least 10 minutes before opening the covers and exposing the terminal connections.
Before starting work on the inverter, test the connections to ensure all DC voltage has been
fully discharged. Personal injury or death by electric shock may result.

45
Installing the Inverter 890053-00-01

Disabling the Built-in EMC Filter

7.5 HP - 40 HP (5.5–30 kW) Inverters

Refer to the figures below to locate the EMC filter on/off terminal and replace the metal bolt with the
plastic bolt. If the EMC filter is required in the future, reverse the steps and replace the plastic bolt with
the metal bolt to reconnect the EMC filter.

Disabling the Built-in EMC Filter

50 HP ~ 75 HP (37–55 kW) Inverters

Remove the EMC ground cover located at the bottom

of the inverter.

The terminal on the right is used to ENABLE the EMC

filter (factory default). The terminal on the left is used to
DISABLE the EMC filter.

Remove the EMC ground cable from the right terminal

(EMC filter-ON / factory default), and connect it to the
left terminal (EMC filter-OFF).

If the EMC filter is required in the future, reverse the

steps and connect the EMC ground cable to the right
terminal to enable the EMC filter.

46
 890053-00-01 Installing the Inverter

Disabling the Built-in EMC Filter

125 HP - 800 HP (110–500 kW) Inverters

Follow the instructions listed below to disable the EMC filters for the H2 inverters rated 125 HP - 800 HP
(110–500 kW).

Remove the front cover located at the top of the inverter. NOTE: With 400 HP and larger inverters, the LCD
cable is connected to the back of the cover and will need disconnected.
Remove the EMC ground cable from the right terminal (EMC filter-ON / factory default), and connect it to
the left terminal (EMC filter-OFF / for power sources with asymmetrical grounding).

150 HP - 200 HP (110–132 kW) 250 HP - 300 HP (160–185 kW)

400 HP (250 kW) 500 HP - 800 HP (315~500 kW)

47
Installing the Inverter 890053-00-01

Step 7 Re-assembling the Covers and Routing Bracket

Re-assemble the cable routing bracket and the covers after completing the wiring and basic
configurations. Note that the assembly procedure may vary according to the product group or frame
size of the product.

48
 890053-00-01 Installing the Inverter

2.4 Post-Installation Checklist

After completing the installation, check the items in the following table to make sure that the inverter
has been safely and correctly installed.

Items Check Point Ref. Result

Is the installation location appropriate? p.11
Does the environment meet the inverter’s operating p.10
Installation conditions?
Location/Power Does the power source match the inverter’s rated input? p.358
I/O Verification
Is the inverter’s rated output sufficient to supply the
equipment? Degraded performance will result in certain
circumstances. Refer to 13.6 Continuous Rated Current p.378
Derating on page 378 for details.

Is a circuit breaker installed on the input side of the

inverter? -

Is the circuit breaker correctly rated? -

Are the power source cables correctly connected to the
R/S/T terminals of the inverter? p.27
(Caution: connecting the power source to the U/V/W
terminals may damage the inverter.)
Are the motor output cables connected in the correct
Power Terminal phase rotation (U/V/W)? p.27
Wiring (Caution: motors will rotate in reverse direction if three
phase cables are not wired in the correct rotation.)
Are the cables used in the power terminal connections p.14
correctly rated?

Is the inverter grounded correctly? p.27

Are the power terminal screws and the ground terminal p.372
screws tightened to their specified torques?

Are the overload protection circuits installed correctly on

the motors (only if multiple motors are run using one -
inverter)?
Is the inverter separated from the power source by a -
magnetic contactor (if a braking unit/resistor is in use)?
Are PFCC’s, surge protection and electromagnetic
interference filters installed correctly? (These devices p.27
MUST NOT be installed on the output side of the inverter.)
Check Motor Lead Length
7.5 HP (5.5kW) -> 800 HP (500kW) ----492 ft (150 m) p.27

49
Installing the Inverter 890053-00-01

Items Check Point Ref. Result

Are STP (shielded twisted pair) cables used for control -
terminal wiring?

Is the shielding of the STP wiring properly grounded? -

If 3-wire operation is required, are the multi-function input

terminals defined prior to the installation of the control p.168
Control Terminal wiring connections?
Wiring
Are the control cables properly wired? p.27

Are the control terminal screws tightened to their specified p.372

torques?

Is the total cable length of all control wiring < 165 ft (100 -
m)?

Is the total length of safety wiring < 100 ft (30 m)? -

Are optional cards connected correctly? -

Is there any debris left inside the inverter? -

Are any cables contacting adjacent terminals, creating a -

potential short circuit risk?

Miscellaneous Are the control terminal connections separated from the -

power terminal connections?

Have the capacitors been replaced if they have been in p.353

use for > 2 years?

Has a fuse been installed for the power source? -

Are the connections to the motor separated from other -

connections?

Note
STP (Shielded Twisted Pair) cable has a highly conductive shielded screen around twisted cable
pairs. STP cables protect conductors from electromagnetic interference.

50
890053-00-01 Installing the Inverter

2.5 Test Run

1. After the post-installation checklist has been completed, follow the instructions below to test the
inverter.
2. Turn on the power supply to the inverter. Ensure that the keypad display light is on.
3. Choose to Run Quick Start?
4. Select the command source.
5. Set a frequency reference, and then check the following:
• If V1 is selected as the frequency reference source, does the reference change according to the
input voltage at VR?
• If V2 is selected as the frequency reference source, is the voltage/current selector switch (SW4)
set to ‘voltage’, and does the reference change according to the input voltage?
• If I2 is selected as the frequency reference source, is the voltage/current selector switch (SW4)
set to ‘current’, and does the reference change according to the input current?
6. Set the acceleration and deceleration time.
7. Start the motor and check the following:
• Ensure that the motor rotates in the correct direction (refer to the note below).
• Ensure that the motor accelerates and decelerates according to the set times, and that the motor
speed reaches the frequency reference.
Note
If the forward command (Fx) is on, the motor should rotate counterclockwise when viewed from
the load side of the motor. If the motor rotates in the reverse direction, switch the cables at the U
and V terminals.

Check the parameter settings before running the inverter. Parameter settings may have
to be adjusted depending on the load.
To avoid damaging the inverter, do not supply the inverter with an input voltage that
exceeds the rated voltage for the equipment.
Before running the motor at maximum speed, confirm the motor’s rated capacity. As
inverters can be used to easily increase motor speed, use caution to ensure that motor
speeds do not accidently exceed the motor’s rated capacity.
Verifying the Motor Rotation
1 On the keypad, set DRV-07 to ‘1 (Keypad)’.
2 Set a frequency reference.
3 If the inverter is in OFF mode, press the [AUTO] button twice on the keypad to
operate the inverter in the forward (Fx) direction.
4 If the inverter is operating in AUTO mode, press the [AUTO] button once on the
keypad to operate the inverter in the forward (Fx) direction.
5 Observe the motor’s rotation from the load side and ensure that the motor rotates
Counterclockwise.

51
Installing the Inverter 890053-00-01

2.6 Run Quick Start

The inverter LCD boots up to the “Quick Start” menu on power up. The parameters in the below
table will be displayed in order to quickly setup the inverter. These include the Control Source,
Frequency Reference Source, Motor and Protection parameters. The Quick Start menu contains
basic parameter settings for control and protection of a standard induction motor. The default
settings are used for a standard induction motor controlled with a linear (fixed) V/Hz. pattern with a
base frequency of 60 Hz.
• During programming, use escape (ESC) to exit the Quick Start menu.
• To access the Quick Start menu when already powered up, set DRV.31 (PopUp Q. Start) to “Yes” to return
to the Run Quick Start menu.
• The inverter will display the Quick Start menu on every power up. Parameter CNF-61 (Run Quick Start?) is
set to “Yes” by default. To disable the Quick Start menu at power up, set CNF-61 to “No”.
PopUp Q. 0 No
DRV 31 Quick Start Pop Up menu 0-1
Start 1 Yes
Run 0 No
CNF 61 Quick Start menu setting 0-1
QuickStart? 1 Yes

Quick Start Setting Details

Code Description
Select “Yes” at the Run QuickStart display. Make selections for each of the parameters in the Quick
Start menu. After making all selections, the display will return to the Monitor menu.
Make selections of the following parameters on the LCD keypad. To escape from the Quick Start menu,
press the [ESC] key.

CNF-43 Select Macro

AP3-01 Set Date
AP3-02 Set Time
DRV-06 Cmd Source: Set start command source.
DRV-07 Freq Ref Src: Set Frequency Reference.
MOT-01 Motor Capacity: Set motor capacity.
MOT-03 Pole Number: Set # of motor poles.
MOT-05 Rated Curr: Set motor rated current.
MOT-06 NoLoad Curr: Set motor no load current
MOT-07 Motor Volt: Set motor rated voltage.
MOT-10 AC Input Volt: Set source/supply voltage.
ADV-09 Run Prevent: Set run prevent direction.
PRT-05 Phase Loss Chk: Set phase loss protection.
PRT-20 OL Trip Select: Set OL trip response.
CNF-61 Run PRT-21 OL Trip Level: Set OL trip level.
QuickStart? PRT-22 OL Trip Time: Set OL trip time.
PRT-40 ETH Trip Sel: Set ETH trip response.
PRT-41 Motor Cooling: Set motor cooling mode.
PRT-42 ETH 1min: Set ETH (thermal) 1 minute trip level.
PRT-43 ETH Cont: Set ETH continuous running (service factor) level.

If DRV-07, Freq Ref Source is set to Keypad-1, program the reference frequency at the first
line of the Monitor menu or at parameter DRV-01, Cmd Frequency..

If DRV-06, Cmd Source (Start/Stop) is set to Keypad, the inverter can be started with the
AUTO button on the LCD Keypad.
NOTE: The HAND button is used for local (keypad) operation of the inverter. Both start/stop
and speed reference are from the Keypad.

When the settings are completed, the minimum parameter settings for motor control and
protection have been made. The LCD keypad will return to a monitoring display. Now the
motor can be operated with the command source set at DRV-06 and the reference frequency
set at DRV-07.

52
 890053-00-01 Performing Basic Operations

3 Performing Basic Operations

This chapter describes the keypad layout and functions. It also introduces parameter groups/codes
and LCD Display Modes required to perform basic operations. The chapter also outlines the correct
operation of the inverter before advancing to more complex applications. Examples are provided to
demonstrate keypad operation.

3.1 LCD Display/Keypad

The keypad is composed of two main components – the LCD display and the operation buttons. Refer
to the following illustration.

53
Performing Basic Operations 890053-00-01

3.1.1 Operation Buttons

The following table lists the names and functions of the keypad’s operation buttons.

54
 890053-00-01 Performing Basic Operations

3.1.2 About the Display

3.1.2.1 Monitor Mode

Status Bar

The following table lists display icons and their names/functions.

No. Name Description
Displays one of the following inverter modes: Use MODE
button to move through modes.
MON: Monitor mode
1 Operation mode PAR: Parameter mode
U&M: User Group and Macro mode
TRP: Trip mode
CNF: Configure mode
Displays the motor’s rotational direction:
2 Rotational direction

Displays a combination of a command source and a

frequency reference source.
Command source
K: Keypad
T: Terminal block (digital input)
O: Optional Fieldbus module
A: Application option
E: Time event
R: Built-in RS-485 communication
Command Source / Frequency reference source
3 Frequency reference K: Keypad
(EX: T / K) V: V1 terminal
X: I2 terminal
P: Pulse terminal
U: Up operation frequency (Up-down operation)
D: Down operation frequency (Up-down operation)
S: Stop operation frequency (Up-down operation)
O: Optional Fieldbus module
J: Jog frequency
R: Built-in RS-485 communication
1~7: Multi-step frequency (Fixed Speeds)

55
Performing Basic Operations 890053-00-01

No. Name Description

The function of the “MULTI” button is selected with
parameter CNF-42. It can be used to register or delete
parameters in the User group or can also be used for
Time/Date display.
Multi-function button
4
configuration

Displays one of the following operating states:

STP: Stop
FWD: Forward operation
REV: Reverse operation
DC: DC output
WAN: Warning
STL: Stall
SPS: Speed search
5 Operating status OSS: S/W over current protection is on
OSH: H/W overcurrent protection
TUN: Auto tuning
PHT: Pre-heat
FIR: Fire mode operation
SLP: Sleep mode operation
LTS: Load tuning
PCL: Pump clean
Displays data selected with parameter CNF-20 (Anytime
6 Status Bar Display item
Para). Default: Frequency
Displays data selected with parameter CNF-21 (Monitor
7 Monitor mode item 1
Line-1). Default: Frequency
Displays data selected with parameter CNF-22 (Monitor
8 Monitor mode item 2
Line-2). Default: Output Current
Displays data selected with parameter CNF-23 (Monitor
9 Monitor mode item 3
Line-3). Default: Output Voltage
10 Monitor mode cursor Used to highlight currently selected items.

56
 890053-00-01 Performing Basic Operations

3.1.2.2 Parameter Program Mode

The following table lists display icons and their names/functions.

No. Name Description

Displays one of the following inverter modes: Use MODE
button to move through modes.
MON: Monitor mode
1 Operation mode PAR: Parameter mode
U&M: User defined and Macro mode
TRP: Trip mode
CNF: Config mode
Displays the motor’s rotational direction:
2 Rotational direction

Displays one of the following parameter group names:

DRV: Drive group
MOT: Motor group
BAS: Basic group
ADV: Advanced group
CON: Control group
3 IN: Input group
Parameter group
OUT: Output group
COM: Communication group
PID: PID group
AP1, AP2, AP3: Application groups
PRT: Protection function group

57
Performing Basic Operations 890053-00-01

No. Name Description

The function of the “MULTI” button is selected with parameter
CNF-42. It can be used to register or delete parameters in
the User group or can also be used for Time/Date display.
Multi-function button
4
configuration

Displays one of the following operation states:

STP: Stop
FWD: Forward operation
REV: Reverse operation
DC: DC output
WAN: Warning
STL: Stall
SPS: Speed search
5 Operating status
OSS: S/W over current protection is on
OSH: H/W overcurrent protection
TUN: Auto tuning
PHT: Pre-heat
FIR: Fire mode operation
SLP: Sleep mode operation
LTS: Load tuning
PCL: Pump clean
Displays data selected with parameter CNF-20 (Anytime
6 Status Bar Display item
Para). Default: Frequency
Displays the value of currently selected parameter. Can be
7 Parameter value
changed at this screen (Arrow buttons).
8 Setting range Displays the range of values for the selected parameter.

9 Set value Displays the currently set value for the parameter.

10 Default Displays the factory default value for the parameter.

Displays the number and name of the currently selected

11 Parameter # and name
code/number.

58
 890053-00-01 Performing Basic Operations

3.1.3 LCD Display Modes

The H2 inverter uses 5 modes to monitor or configure various inverter functions. The majority of
parameters are in the Parameter Mode (PAR Mode). The inverter boots up in the Monitor Mode (MON).
The MON Mode can be configured to display data most important to the user. Refer to table 3.1.3.1 for
descriptions of each mode.

59
Performing Basic Operations 890053-00-01

3.1.3.1 Table of LCD Display Modes

The following table describes the 5 display modes used to monitor and program the inverter functions.
Refer to section 9 LCD Display Modes on page 280 for more detail on the LCD Display Modes.

Mode Name Keypad Display Description

Displays the inverter’s operation status information. In

this mode, information including the inverter’s frequency
Monitor mode MON reference, operation frequency, output current, and
voltage may be monitored.
Used to configure the parameters and functions required
Parameter mode PAR to operate the inverter. The parameters are divided into 14
groups based on purpose and complexity.
This mode will be displayed when a User Group has been
created or a macro has been selected. The User-selected
parameters allow specific parameters to be grouped and
managed in a separate User group. A macro group is a
User & Macro mode U&M predefined group of parameters related to an application.
These modes are not displayed when you navigate
through the modes if a User group or Macro group has not
been defined or selected.
Used to monitor the inverter’s fault information including
the fault history.
When a fault occurs during inverter operation, the inverter
Trip mode TRP stores nine (9) pieces of data about the fault. Including
operation frequency, output current, output voltage and
date/time. This mode is not displayed if the inverter does
not have a fault or a fault history.
Used to configure the inverter features that are not
directly related to the operation of the inverter. The
settings you can configure in the Config mode include
Config mode CNF Monitor (MON) mode displayed items, parameter
initialization, parameter Read/Write and Save,
Password setting and inverter Run Time and On Time.

60
 890053-00-01 Performing Basic Operations

3.1.3.2 Parameter Mode (PAR)

The following table lists the groups of parameters in Parameter (PAR) mode. When in PAR mode, use
the right and left arrow buttons to move through the groups of parameters. At the parameter level, you
can set parameter values to turn specific functions on or off or decide how the functions will be used.
For detailed information on the parameters in each parameter group, refer to section 4.2 Parameter
Lists on page 81.

Function Group Name Keypad Display Description

Configures basic operation parameters. These include
Drive DRV Accel/Decel times, Start/Stop sources, Speed Reference
Source, jog operation and torque boost.
Configures all Motor parameters along with Sensorless
Motor MOT
selection and Auto tuning..
Configures basic operation parameters. These parameters
Basic BAS include 2nd Source selections, V/Hz. pattern, and multi-step
frequency parameters.
Configures acceleration or deceleration patterns, start/stop
Advanced ADV modes, frequency limits, energy saving features and
regeneration prevention features.
Configures the features related to carrier frequency, speed
Control CON
search and KEB (kinetic energy buffering).
Configures input terminal functions including assigning
Input Terminals IN
digital and analog inputs, pulsed input.
Configures output terminal functions including assigning relay
Output Terminals OUT
outputs, analog outputs, pulsed output (Q1 terminal).
Configures the communication related features for RS-485,
Modbus-RTU, Metasys N2, and BACnet. Optional
Communication COM
communication module related features may be configured
as well, if one is installed.
PID process PID Configures the PID control-related features.
Configures the Sleep/Wake Up, Boost, and Soft Fill
Application 1 AP1
features related to the PID control.
Configures pump related features including load tuning,
Application 2 AP2 pump cleaning, Damper control, Oil Pump control and
motor Pre-Heat functions.
Configures the Event Timer functions including
Application 3 AP3
scheduling for 24/7 operation.
Protection PRT Configures motor and inverter protection features.

61
Performing Basic Operations 890053-00-01

3.2 Learning to Use the Keypad

The keypad includes HAND, OFF and AUTO buttons that are described further.

3.2.1 HAND - OFF - AUTO Buttons Operation

The inverter is operable only when it is in HAND or AUTO mode. HAND mode is for local control using
the keypad, while AUTO mode is primarily for remote control via terminal strip or communications. The
inverter stops operating when it is in OFF mode. Select one of the modes (HAND or AUTO) to operate
the inverter or OFF to stop the operation.

3.2.1.1 HAND Button

The HAND button is used for local (keypad) operation of the drive. Both start/stop and speed
reference are from the Keypad. The inverter will ignore all digital inputs except for BX, External Trip,
Fire Mode and Fixed Speed inputs (Speed-L, Speed-M and Speed-H).

• Pressing the HAND button will start the inverter. The HAND button acts as a start button.
• The default speed is zero (0) Hz.
• To set speed, at the Monitor display (MON), Frequency is on Line-1. The speed can be changed at this
screen using Up, Down, Left and Right arrow buttons only. The PROG/ENT button is not required.
• The speed can be changed while running in Hand mode or while stopped (OFF button).
• Hand mode disregards the settings of DRV-06 (Cmd Source) and DRV-07 (Freq Ref Src).
• IN HAND MODE, the frequency (speed) displayed at the Monitor display (MON) is duplicating parameter
DRV-25, “HAND Cmd Freq”. The default speed is 0 Hz.

3.2.1.2 AUTO Button

The AUTO button on the keypad is primarily used to put the inverter in the ready mode for remote
start/stop operation. The AUTO button may be used to start and stop the inverter locally depending on
DRV-06 settings described below.

DRV-06 (Cmd Source) default setting is Fx/Rx-1 for remote start command.
DRV-07 (Freq Ref Src) default setting is Keypad-1 for changing speed (frequency).
• With these default settings, the AUTO button will not start the inverter.
• The inverter is looking for a remote start command at terminal P1 (IN-65 default is Fx,
Forward).
• The AUTO button must be pressed once to put the inverter in the Ready mode (Green LED
blinking).
• When the remote start command is made, the inverter will start and the AUTO LED will remain
on (solid). This is the normal running mode of the inverter.
• If a remote start command is already made (at P1) during power up, the inverter will not start.
The start command has to be deactivated (opened) and re-activated (closed) to start the
inverter.
• The speed (frequency) can be set at the Monitor display (MON). Frequency is on Line-1.
• Press the PROG/ENT button.
• Use the Up, Down, Left and Right arrow buttons.
• Press the PROG/ENT button again to save the change.
• Other remote Frequency References (DRV-07) may be used.

62
 890053-00-01 Performing Basic Operations

Changing DRV-06 (Cmd Source) to Keypad

The AUTO button is now the start and stop command for the inverter.
Pressing the AUTO button once puts the inverter in Ready mode (AUTO LED blinking).
Pressing the AUTO button a second time, will start the inverter.

• From the OFF state, pressing the AUTO button once (Green LED blinking) puts inverter in
Ready mode.
• Pressing the AUTO button a second time, starts the inverter.
• Pressing the AUTO button while running, stops the inverter.
• Pressing the OFF button also stops the inverter.
• The speed (frequency) is still Keypad-1 and can be set at the Monitor display (MON).
Frequency is on Line-1.
o Pressing the PROG/ENT button
o Use the Up, Down, Left and Right arrow buttons.
o Press the PROG/ENT button again to save the change.
o The inverter will go to the newly programmed speed.
• Other remote Frequency References (DRV-07) may be used.
• In Auto mode, the frequency (speed) displayed at the Monitor display (MON) is duplicating
parameter DRV-01 (Cmd Frequency). The default speed is 0 Hz.

Changing DRV-07 (Freq Ref Src)

DRV-07 - Keypad-1 vs Keypad-2

When changing speed (frequency) at the Keypad in AUTO mode, the difference between Keypad-1
and Keyypad-2 settings is:
• Both - Still have to press the PROG/ENT button to change the speed.
• Use the Up, Down, Left and Right arrow buttons to change the speed.
• Keypad-1 - Press the PROG/ENT button again to save the newly set speed. The inverter will
go to the newly programmed speed.
• Keypad-2 - The speed is changing while setting the new speed.

DRV-07 - Other Frequency Reference Sources

When setting DRV-07 to the other frequency refernce sources listed below, the inverter simply looks
at the designated terminal for the frequency reference signal.
Choices are:
• Analog: V1, V2, I2 and with Ext IO Bd. V3, I3
• Communications: Int 485 (Modbus)
• Field bus: Other Communication Option Cards
• Pulse: High Frequency signal

OFF Button

The OFF button puts the inverter in the OFF Mode, Red LED on solid. It will not start until put in HAND
mode or AUTO mode with a remote start command. Note: A Fire mode input can be applied and is
active in the OFF mode.

63
Performing Basic Operations 890053-00-01

3.2.2 Switching Operation Modes (HAND / OFF / AUTO)

The H2 Series inverters have two operating modes–the HAND and AUTO modes. HAND mode is used
for local control using the keypad. AUTO mode is used for remote operation using the terminal inputs or
network commands.

3.2.2.1 HAND Mode Operation

Follow the instructions listed below to operate the inverter in HAND mode.

• Pressing the HAND button starts the inverter.

1. Press the [HAND] button. The inverter starts operating in HAND mode. The display is now in the
Monitor mode. The HAND LED turns on.
At the Monitor menu (Line 1 of the MON display) set the running frequency using the [Up], [Down],
[Left], and [Right] buttons.
Press the [OFF] button. The OFF LED turns on and the inverter stops operating.

3.2.2.2 AUTO Mode Operation

Follow the instructions listed below to operate the inverter in AUTO mode.

2. Press the [AUTO] button to switch to AUTO mode. AUTO LED is blinking.
Operate the inverter based on the settings of DRV-06, Cmd Source and DRV-07, Freq Ref Src. The
MON display will show these in the upper left corner (EX: T/V).
Press the [OFF] button. The OFF LED turns on and the inverter stops operating.

• In AUTO mode, if DRV-06. Cmd Source is set as ‘keypad’, the Auto button will start
the inverter. If DRV-07, Freq Ref Src is set to Keypad (-1 or -2), the inverter will go
to the speed set in DRV-01, Cmd Frequency.

64
 890053-00-01 Performing Basic Operations

3.2.2.3 Mode Buttons and LED Status

Buttons / LED Description

Used to enter the HAND operating mode and start the inverter.

Used to enter the OFF mode (standby mode) or to reset faults.

Used to enter the AUTO operating mode or to start and stop inverter operation in
AUTO mode.

HAND LED Turns on green (steady) during HAND mode operation.

Turns on red (steady) while the inverter is in OFF mode (standby) and flashes
OFF LED when a fault occurs. Pressing the OFF button again. The LED turns on red (steady)
when the fault is reset.
Turns on green (flashing) when the inverter is in AUTO (Read) mode, but is not
AUTO LED
operating. Turns on (steady) when the inverter operates in Auto mode.

65
Performing Basic Operations 890053-00-01

3.2.2.4 Basic HAND / OFF / AUTO Mode Operations

Mode Description
In HAND mode, Start/Stop operation is available only by the keypad HAND and
OFF buttons. The frequency reference is set at the Monitor mode, Line-1 and
is displayed at all times. The same frequency reference is also reflected in
parameter DRV-25, HAND Cmd Freq.

Also, in HAND mode:

• The first monitoring item is used to adjust the frequency with the
up/down and left/right buttons.
HAND Mode • The motor’s rotation direction can be set at DRV-02 (Keypad Run Dir).
(Locally controlled • Terminal block functions do not operate (with the exception of BX,
operation mode) External Trip, Fire Mode and Fixed Speed inputs (Speed-L, Speed-M
and Speed-H).
• Fire mode commands take the highest priority (if any are given).
• The following advanced features are not available:
- PID
- Flow compensation
- Pump clean
- Load tuning
- Motor preheating
- Time scheduling
- PowerOn resume
- Multiple motor control
• Inverter monitoring and protection features are available in HAND
mode.
In OFF mode, the inverter operation stops. Pressing the OFF button during
HAND/AUTO mode operations will cause the OFF LED to turn on. The
inverter stops operating and stops according to the deceleration options set
OFF Mode at ADV-08, Stop Mode.
(Standby)
Also, in OFF mode:
• Terminal block functions do not operate (with the exception of BX,
External Trip, Fire Mode and Fixed Speed inputs (Speed-L, Speed-M
and Speed-H).
• Fire mode commands take the highest priority (if any are given).
In AUTO mode, the inverter operates based on the command from the
AUTO Mode command source set at DRV-06 (Cmd Source) and the frequency reference
(Remotely from the source set at DRV-07 (Freq Ref Src).
controlled If the frequency reference is set to Keypad, program the speed at the
operation mode) Monitor display (MON), Frequency is on Line-1. Alternately, set the
speed at DRV-01, Cmd Frequency.

66
 890053-00-01 Performing Basic Operations

3.2.2.5 Parameters related to HAND/OFF/AUTO Operation Modes

Codes / Functions Description

DRV-01
Frequency reference in AUTO mode when DRV-07 is set to’ KeyPad’.
Cmd Frequency
Rotation direction of the keypad start/run command in the HAND or AUTO
mode.
DRV-02 Settings
KeyPad Run Dir 0 Forward
1 Reverse

To make HAND-OFF-AUTO buttons enabled/disabled.

Settings Description
HAND-OFF-AUTO buttons are disabled . If pressed,
0 Locked Message displayed as:
DRV-05
KPD H.O.A Lock KPD H.O.A Lock
If DRV-06, Cmd Source is Fx/Rx-1, Fx/Rx-2, Int485 or
1 During Run fieldbus, HAND-OFF-AUTO buttons are disabled during
running.
3 Unlocked HAND-OFF-AUTO buttons are enabled all the time.
Frequency displayed at the monitor display item (Monitor Line-1) when the
DRV-25
HAND button is pressed in other modes (default frequency reference for
HAND Cmd Freq
HAND mode).
Settings Description
The inverter operates based on the rotation
Hand direction set at DRV-02 (Kepad Run Dir) and the
0
Parameter frequency reference set at DRV-25 (HAND Cmd
Freq).
DRV-26 The inverter takes over the rotation direction and
HAND Ref Mode the frequency reference from the settings for AUTO
mode and keeps performing the same operation. If
1 Follow Auto the inverter was stopped in AUTO mode, the
operation direction is set as Fx and the frequency
reference is set as 0 (no inverter output).
OUT-31–36
Set AUTO State (36) to ensure that the inverter is in AUTO mode.
Relay 1–5, Q1
OUT-31–36
Set HAND State (37) to ensure that the inverter is in HAND mode.
Relay 1–5, Q1

67
Performing Basic Operations 890053-00-01

3.2.2.6 Switching between the HAND/OFF/AUTO Modes

Mode Description
Press the HAND button in AUTO mode to switch to HAND mode. The inverter
operates as follows based on the setting at DRV-26 (Hand Ref Mode).
Settings Description
The inverter operates based on the rotation
Hand direction set at DRV-02 (Kepad Run Dir) and the
0
Parameter frequency reference set at DRV-25 (HAND Cmd
①AUTO➔HAND Freq).
The inverter takes over the rotation direction and
the frequency reference from the settings for AUTO
mode and keeps performing the same operation. If
1 Follow Auto the inverter was stopped in AUTO mode, the
operation direction is set as Fx and the frequency
reference is set as 0 (no inverter output).

Press the AUTO button in HAND mode to switch to AUTO mode. The inverter
operates based on the command source and frequency reference settings set
②HAND➔AUTO
at DRV-06 and DRV-07. If DRV-06 (Cmd Source) is set to ‘keypad’ press the
AUTO button once again to start inverter operation.

Press the OFF button in AUTO mode to stop the inverter operation (the
③AUTO➔OFF
inverter enters OFF mode).

Press the AUTO button in OFF mode to switch to AUTO mode. The inverter
operates based on the command source and frequency reference settings
④ OFF➔AUTO
set at DRV-06 and DRV-07. If DRV-06 (Cmd Source) is set to ‘keypad’ press
the AUTO button once again to start inverter operation.

Press the OFF button in HAND mode to stop the inverter operation (the
⑤ HAND➔OFF
inverter enters OFF mode).

Press the HAND button in OFF mode to switch to HAND mode. The inverter
⑥ OFF➔HAND operates (Starts) based on the operation direction set at DRV-02 (Keypad
Run Dir) and the frequency reference set at DRV-25 (HAND Cmd Freq).

68
 890053-00-01 Performing Basic Operations

Operation Mode at Power Recovery

If a power interruption occurs during inverter operation in the OFF or HAND mode, the inverter halts the
operation with low voltage fault. Then, when the power is recovered, the inverter turns on in the OFF
mode.
If the inverter was operating in AUTO mode at the time of the power interruption, the inverter powers up
in AUTO mode and the operation may vary depending on the inverter’s ‘Power-on Run’ and ‘PowerOn
Resume’ settings. Refer to 5.4.5 ADV-10 Power-on Run on page 143.

Note
• To operate the inverter using the keypad in AUTO mode, set DRV-06 (CMD Source) to
‘KeyPad’ and press the AUTO button to enter AUTO mode (LED blinking). Then, press the
AUTO button on the keypad once again to start the inverter operation.
• If a fault occurs during an operation in the AUTO or HAND mode, the inverter can be reset
by pressing the OFF button (flashing during fault). After the reset and the fault is cleared, the
inverter enters OFF mode.
• If a fault occurs during an operation in the AUTO mode, the inverter can be reset using the
reset signal from the digital input terminal. In this case, the inverter returns to the AUTO mode
after the fault is reset.

Use caution when the inverter is set to operate in AUTO mode by commands over
communication. If COM-96 (PowerOn Resume) is set to ‘yes’, the motor will begin rotating when
the inverter starts up, without additional run commands.

69
Performing Basic Operations 890053-00-01

3.2.3 Moving among LCD Display Modes

Pressing the MODE button will move through the various LCD display modes.

MON T/K U STP 0.0Hz

On power up, the LCD boots up in the monitor
Frequency
(MON) mode.
0.00 Hz
0.0 A •Press the MODE button once to move to the
parameter (PAR) mode.
0 V

PAR DRV U STP 0.0Hz

00 Jump Code Parameter (PAR) mode is displayed.
9 CODE
01 Cmd Frequency •Press the MODE button once again to move
0.00 Hz to the User & Macro (U&M) mode.
02 Keypad Run Dir
Forward

U&M USR U STP 0.0Hz •The User & Macro (U&M) mode is displayed
00 Jump Code showing the USR group of parameters.
1 CODE
01 Acc Time Note: If a User or Macro has not been
20.0 sec selected, the menu will skip the U&M Mode.
02 Cmd Source
Fx-Rx-1 •Press the MODE button once again.

TRP Last-1 •The Trip (TRP) mode is displayed showing the

00 Trip Name most recent fault.
Fuse Open
01 Output Freq Note: If the inverter does not have any fault
29.00 Hz history, the menu will skip the TRP Mode.
02 Output Current
74.6 A •Press the MODE button once again.

CNF U STP 0.0Hz

00 Jump Code
42 CODE •The Configure (CNF) mode is displayed. This
is the last mode.
01 Language Sel
English •Press the MODE button once again.
02 LCD Contrast

MON T/K U STP 0.0Hz

Frequency After the last mode (CNF), the menu returns to
0.00 Hz the first mode. The Monitor (MON) mode is
displayed.
0.0 A
0 V

70
 890053-00-01 Performing Basic Operations

3.2.4 Switching Parameter Groups in Parameter Mode (PAR)

After entering Parameter mode from Monitor mode, press the Right arrow button to move to the next
parameter group. Press the Left arrow button to go back to the previous group.

MON K/K N STP 0.0Hz

On power up, the LCD boots up in the monitor
Frequency
(MON) mode.
0.00 Hz
0.0 A •Press the MODE button once to move to the
parameter (PAR) mode.
0 V

PAR DRV N STP 0.0Hz

00 Jump Code
Parameter (PAR) mode is displayed.
9 CODE
•The Drive (DRV) group of parameters is the
01 Cmd Frequency first parameter group to be displayed.
0.00 Hz
02 Keypad Run Dir •Press the right arrow button.
Forward

PAR MOT N STP 0.0Hz

00 Jump Code
10 CODE •The Motor (MOT) group of parameters is the
01 Motor Capacity second parameter group to be displayed.
7.5 HP
•Press the right arrow button.
02 Base Freq
60.00 Hz

PAR BAS N STP 0.0Hz

00 Jump Code •The Basic (BAS) group of parameters is the
20 CODE third parameter group to be displayed.
01 Cmd 2nd Src
•Press the right arrow button 10 times to
Fx/Rx-1
move through the remaining parameter
02 Freq 2nd Src groups.
Keypad-1
ADV -> CON -> IN -> OUT -> COM -> PID -> AP1 -> AP2 -> AP3 -> PRT

PAR PRT N STP 0.0Hz

00 Jump Code
40 CODE •The Protection (PRT) group of parameters is
01 Backspin Time the last parameter group to be displayed.
0.0 sec
•Press the right arrow button.
04 Load Duty
Normal Duty

PAR DRV N STP 0.0Hz

00 Jump Code
9 CODE After the last group (PRT), the menu returns to
01 Cmd Frequency the first group, the Drive (DRV) group of
0.00 Hz parameters is displayed.
02 Keypad Run Dir
Forward

71
Performing Basic Operations 890053-00-01

3.2.5 Viewing and Changing Parameter Values and Settings

3.2.5.1 Changing Parameters with Numerical Values

The following example shows how to view and change Accel Time (DRV-03).

MON K/K N STP 0.0Hz

On power up, the LCD boots up in the monitor
Frequency
(MON) mode.
0.00 Hz
0.0 A •Press the MODE button once to move to the
parameter (PAR) mode.
0 V

PAR DRV N STP 0.0Hz

00 Jump Code Parameter (PAR) mode is displayed.
9 CODE •The Drive (DRV) group of parameters is the
first parameter group to be displayed.
01 Cmd Frequency
0.00 Hz
•Press the down arrow button 3 times to get to
02 Keypad Run Dir parameter DRV-03.
Forward

PAR DRV N STP 0.0Hz

01 Cmd Frequency
0.00 Hz
•With parameter DRV-03 highlighted, press the
02 Keypad Run Dir
PROG/ENT button.
Forward
03 Acc Time
20.0 sec

PAR DRV N STP 0.0Hz

03 Acc Time
•The cursor is highlighting the tenths digit.
20.00 sec
0.0 ~ 600.0 sec
D:20.0 C:20.0

PAR DRV N STP 0.0Hz

03 Acc Time
Using left arrow button, move the cursor to the
220.0 sec tens digit with the "2" highlighted.
0.0 ~ 600.0 sec
D:20.0 C:20.0

PAR DRV N STP 0.0Hz

03 Acc Time
Press the down arrow button once, changing
120.0 sec the "2" to a "1".
0.0 ~ 600.0 sec
D:20.0 C:20.0

PAR DRV N STP 0.0Hz

01 Cmd Frequency
0.00 Hz
Press the PROG/ENT button, the Accel Time
02 Keypad Run Dir
has been changed to 10.0 seconds.
Forward
03 Acc Time
10.0 sec

72
 890053-00-01 Performing Basic Operations

3.2.5.2 Changing Parameters with Lists

The following example shows how to view and change the command source (DRV-06).
MON K/K N STP 0.0Hz
On power up, the LCD boots up in the monitor
Frequency
(MON) mode.
0.00 Hz
0.0 A •Press the MODE button once to move to the
parameter (PAR) mode.
0 V

PAR DRV N STP 0.0Hz

00 Jump Code Parameter (PAR) mode is displayed.
9 CODE •The Drive (DRV) group of parameters is the
first parameter group to be displayed.
01 Cmd Frequency
0.00 Hz
•Press the down arrow button 6 times to get to
02 Keypad Run Dir parameter DRV-06.
Forward

PAR DRV N STP 0.0Hz

04 Decel Time
30.0 sec
•With parameter DRV-06 highlighted, press the
05 KPD H.O.A Lock
PROG/ENT button.
During Run
06 Cmd Source
Fx-Rx-1

PAR DRV N STP 0.0Hz

06 Cmd Source •A list of settings for parameter DRV-06 appears
0 Keypad (0, 1, 2) showing the default and the current
setting (DC).
1 Fx/Rx-1 DC
2 Fx/Rx-2

PAR DRV N STP 0.0Hz

06 Cmd Source Using the up arrow button, move the cursor to
0 Keypad highlight the (0) Keypad selection.
1 Fx/Rx-1
2 Fx/Rx-2

PAR DRV N STP 0.0Hz

04 Decel Time
30.0 sec Press the PROG/ENT button, the Command
05 KPD H.O.A Lock Source parameter, DRV-06 has been changed
During Run to Keypad.
06 Cmd Source
Keypad

73
Performing Basic Operations 890053-00-01

3.2.6 Navigating Parameters using “Jump Codes”

The Jump Code feature allows moving directly to a specific parameter. The Jump Code is the first
code/number of each mode. The Jump Code feature is convenient when navigating for a specific
code/number in a function group that has many parameters.

The following example shows how to navigate directly to parameter DRV- 16 from the initial parameter
(DRV-00, Jump Code) in the Drive group.
MON K/K N STP 0.0Hz
On power up, the LCD boots up in the monitor
Frequency
(MON) mode.
0.00 Hz
0.0 A •Press the MODE button once to move to the
parameter (PAR) mode.
0 V

PAR DRV N STP 0.0Hz

00 Jump Code Parameter (PAR) mode is displayed.
9 CODE •The Drive (DRV) group of parameters is the
first parameter group to be displayed.
01 Cmd Frequency
0.00 Hz
•At parameter DRV-00, Jump Code press the
02 Keypad Run Dir PROG/ENT button.
Forward

PAR DRV N STP 0.0Hz

00 Jump Code
9 CODE •The parameter code "9" is highlighted.
1 ~ 99 Code
D:9 C:9

PAR DRV N STP 0.0Hz

00 Jump Code
16 CODE •Using the up arrow button, scroll up to 16.
Press the PROG/ENT button.
1 ~ 99 Code
D:9 C:9

PAR DRV N STP 0.0Hz

16 Fwd Boost
2.0 %
The menu "Jumps" to parameter DRV-16. It can
17 Rev Boost
be changed here using the PROG/ENT button.
2.0 %
19 Start Freq
0.50 Hz

PAR DRV N STP 0.0Hz

00 Jump Code
16 CODE
Pressing the ESC button returns menu to DRV-
01 Cmd Frequency
00.
0.00 Hz
02 Keypad Run Dir
Forward

74
 890053-00-01 Performing Basic Operations

3.2.7 Setting the Monitor Mode Display Line Items

In Monitor (MON) mode, 3 different line items are displayed. The items displayed on the LCD can be
changed by the user. In HAND mode and in OFF mode, the first line item is permanently fixed as the
frequency reference.
The following example shows how to configure the Line-3 to display Output Power (kW).

MON K/K N STP 0.0Hz On power up, the LCD boots up in the monitor
Frequency (MON) mode.
0.00 Hz
•The default settings of the monitored items are
0.0 A Line-1: Output Frequency, Line-2: Output Amps
0 V and Linie-3: Output Voltage.

CNF N STP 0.0Hz

00 Jump Code
42 CODE
01 Language Sel Press the MODE button to move to the
English Configure (CNF) mode.

02 LCD Contrast

CNF N STP 0.0Hz

21 Monitor Line-1
Frequency •Press the down arrow button to get to
22 Monitor Line-2 parammeters CNF-21, CNF-22 and CNF-23.
Output Current Press the PROG/ENT button on CNF-23
23 Monitor Line-3
Output Voltage

CNF N STP 0.0Hz

•Highlights the present setting of CNF-23.
23 Monitor Line-3
To see the available display items for Line-3,
0 Speed use the up/down arrow buttons.
1 Output Current
2 Output Voltage

CNF N STP 0.0Hz

23 Monitor Line-3
At "4 Output Power", press the PROG/ENT
2 Output Current button to select Output Power as Line-3.
3 Output Voltage
4 Output Power

CNF N STP 0.0Hz

21 Monitor Line-1
Frequency
22 Monitor Line-2 Display returns to the CNF parameter list.
Output Current
23 Monitor Line-3
Output Power

MON K/K N STP 0.0Hz

Frequency
0.00 Hz Press the MODE button to return to the monitor
(MON) mode.
0.0 A
0 kW

75
Performing Basic Operations 890053-00-01

3.2.8 Selecting the Status Bar Display Item

At the top-right corner of the LCD display’s status bar is another frequency item. This item refers to the
frequency reference when the inverter stopped and the output frequency when the inverter is
operating. In HAND or OFF modes, this monitoring item always displays frequency reference. This
monitoring item can be changed to show the type of information that suits your needs. If changed, the
new item will show when in AUTO mode.
The following example shows how to change this monitoring item to Output Amps.

MON K/K N STP 0.0Hz On power up, the LCD boots up in the monitor
Frequency (MON) mode.
0.00 Hz •In the status bar, at the top-right corner of the
0.0 A display is the frequency reference/output
frequency (default). This displayed setting can
0 V be changed with parameter CNF-20.

CNF N STP 0.0Hz

00 Jump Code
42 CODE
01 Language Sel Press the MODE button to move to the
English Configure (CNF) mode.

02 LCD Contrast

CNF N STP 0.0Hz

20 AnyTime Para
Frequency
•Press the down arrow button to get to
21 Monitor Line-1
parameter CNF-20, AnyTime Parameter.
Frequency
22 Monitor Line-2
Output Current

CNF N STP 0.0Hz

•Press the PROG/ENT button. The default and
20 AnyTime Para current (present) setting is Frequency DC.

0 Frequency DC Use the up/down arrow buttons.to see the

1 Speed available display items for CNF-20.
2 Output Current

CNF N STP 0.0Hz

20 AnyTime Para At "2" Output Current, press the PROG/ENT
button to select Output Current as the displayed
0 Frequency DC item for CNF-20.
1 Speed
2 Output Current

CNF N STP 0.0Hz

20 AnyTime Para
Output Current
21 Monitor Line-1 Display returns to the CNF parameter list.
Frequency
22 Monitor Line-2
Output Current

MON K/K N STP 0.0A

Frequency
0.00 Hz Press the MODE button to return to the monitor
(MON) mode.
0.0 A
0 kW

76
 890053-00-01 Performing Basic Operations

3.3 Fault Monitoring

3.3.1 Monitoring Faults during Inverter Operation

The following example shows how to view fault information that occurred during inverter operation.
TRP Current
Over Voltage (01)
When a fault occurs, the inverter enters the trip
01 Output Frequency
(TRP) mode and displays the active fault
36.00 Hz
(flashing).
02 Output Current
77.3 A

TRP Current
03 Inverter State
Steady
04 DCLink Voltage Press the down arrow button to view additional
820 V information at the time of the fault.

05 Temperature
22 °C

MON T/K N STP 0.0A

Frequency
0.00 Hz •When the fault is cleared and the inverter is
reset, the display returns to the previous screen,
0.0 A prior to the fault.
0 kW

77
Performing Basic Operations 890053-00-01

3.3.2 Monitoring Multiple Faults

The following example shows how to monitor multiple faults that occur at the same time.

TRP Current
When more than one fault occurs at the same
Over Voltage (02) time, the number of faults is displayed to the
01 Output Frequency right of the present fault.
36.00 Hz
02 Output Current Press the PROG/ENT button to display all
77.3 A faults.

TRP Current Press the down arrow button to view all faults.
Over Voltage (02)
01 Over Voltage Press the PROG/ENT button to display
02 External Trip information about the highlighted fault.

3.3.3 Viewing Fault History

The fault history information can be viewed in the trip (TRP) mode. The inverter stores five (5) of the
most recent faults.

TRP Last-1
00 Trip Name (1) •Press the MODE button to move to the trip
Over Voltage (TRP) mode. The most recent fault (Last-1) is
01 Output Frequency displayed.
36.00 Hz
Use the down arrow button to view this fault
02 Output Current information.
77.3 A

TRP Last-2
00 Trip Name (2)
External Trip
Press the right arrow button to move to the
01 Output Frequency
next fault (Last-2) in the fault history.
57.00 Hz
02 Output Current
96.7 A

78
 890053-00-01 Performing Basic Operations

3.4 Parameter Initialization

The following example demonstrates how to reset all the parameter settings back to the factory default
settings. Parameter initialization may be performed on individual parameter groups as well.

CNF N STP 0.0Hz

00 Jump Code
42 CODE
Press the MODE button to move to the
01 Language Sel
English Configure (CNF) mode.

02 LCD Contrast

CNF N STP 0.0Hz

40 Parameter Init
------------- No ------------ •Press the down arrow button to get to
41 Changed Para parammeter CNF-40.
View All
Press the PROG/ENT button at CNF-40.
42 Multi-Key Sel
None

CNF N STP 0.0Hz

•Displays the list of options.
40 Parameter Init Press the down arrow button to highlight "1 All
Grp".
0 ------------ No ---------- DC Press the PROG/ENT button to initialize All
1 All Grp Groups.
2 DRV Grp

CNF N STP 0.0Hz

40 Parameter Init
------------- No ------------ The display will return to parameter CNF-40
41 Changed Para after parameter initialization.
View All
42 Multi-Key Sel
None

79
Parameter Lists 890053-00-01

4 Parameter Lists and Quick Reference

4.1 Quick Reference Table
Refer to the below table for a list of functions and a link to the parameter description pages.

Groups Description Ref.

DRV Group Move to DRV Group p.99
MOT Group Move to MOT Group p.121
BAS Group Move to BAS Group p.126
ADV Group Move to ADV Group p.137
CON Group Move to CON Group p.153
IN Group Move to IN Group p.160
OUT Group Move to OUT Group p.178
COM Group Move to COM Group p.300
PID Group Move to PID Group p.219
AP1 Group Move to AP1 Group p.232
AP2 Group Move to AP2 Group p.256
AP3 Group Move to AP3 Group p.269
PRT Group Move to PRT Group p.190
CNF Mode Move to CNF Mode p.280
Quick Start menu Quick Set Up of basic parameters. p.52
Basic Tasks Description Ref.
HAND / OFF / AUTO buttons Select the operation mode. p.62
Acc/Dec times Set acceleration and deceleration times. p.100
Start Stop control sources Set Start Stop sources. p.103
Frequency Reference sources
Configure Frequency Reference sources. p.106
(Keypad, Analog Inputs)
Digital Inputs Configure Digital Input Terminals p.162
Set Digital Input to NC Configure a Normally Closed Digital input p.176
Analog Outputs Configure Analog Output Terminals p.178
Relay Outputs Configure Digital Output Relays p.182
Set Relay Output to NC Configure a Noramally Closed Relay Output p.188
Motor Data Set Motor Parameters p.121
PID Control Set PID Control settings p.219
Control Mode (V/Hz., Slip Comp) Set Motor control settings p.116
Set Volts/Hz. pattern Configure Linear, Squared, User V/Hz. Curve p.130
Control Mode (SVC) Set Sensorless Vector Control settings p.238
Auto Tuning Run Motor Auto Tuning p.123
Start Modes Set Accel or DC Injection Starting p.139
Dual Ramps Set a Switch Frequency for Dual Ramps p.134
Stop Modes Set Coast, Decel, Braking Stop Methods p.140
Jogging Set Jog speed and jog accel/decel times. p.165
Torque Boost Set boost levels. Set manual or automatic boost. p.117
Frequency Limits Set Frequency Limits on inverter output. p.146
Speed Search Start into a spinning load. p.155
Regen Avoidance Handle energy in operating in Regen Mode. p.152

80
 890053-00-01 Parameter Lists

4.2 Parameter Lists

Press the MODE button on the Keypad to move to the PAR Mode (upper left corner of LCD).
Press the right and left arrow buttons to move through the parameter groups.

The following tables list the parameter groups and all the parameters within each group. Set the
parameters according to your operating requirements.

Parameters shaded in gray will be displayed when a related parameter has been selected.
The column labeled “Property” shows whether the parameter can be changed while the inverter
is running according to the following:

O: Write enabled during run, Δ: Write Disabled during run, X : Read/View only.

Additionally, an “I” or a “P” (or both) in the Property column relate to parameter DRV-09,
Control Mode settings for Sensorless Vector Control and indicate which Sensorless Control
Mode they apply to according to the following: I: Induction Motor, P: Permanent Magnet Motor.

4.2.1 Drive Group (DRV)

Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Initial value Property* Ref.
00 Jump Code Jump Code 1–99 9 O p.74
01 Target frequency Cmd Frequency 0.00, Low Freq– High Freq 0.00 O p.67
0 Reverse
02 Keypad run direction Keypad Run Dir 1 Forward O p.67
1 Forward
20.0 7.5~125HP
03 Acceleration time Acc Time 0.0–600.0 (sec) 60.0 150~400HP O p.99
100.0 500~800HP
30.0 7.5~125HP
04 Deceleration time Dec Time 0.0–600.0 (sec) 90.0 150~400HP O p.99
150.0 500~800HP
0 Locked
HAND-OFF- AUTO Key
05 KPD H.O.A Lock 1 During Run 1 During Run Δ p.67
Lock
2 Unlocked
0 Keypad p.103
1 Fx/Rx-1 p.103
2 Fx/Rx-2 p.104
06 Command source Cmd Source 1 Fx/Rx-1 Δ
3 Int 485 p.115
4 Field Bus
5 Time Event p.175
0 Keypad-1
1 Keypad-2
2 V1
4 V2
Frequency reference 5 I2
07 Freq Ref Src 0 Keypad-1 Δ p.106
source 6 Int 485
7 FieldBus
9 Pulse
101 V3
111 I3
0 V/F p.130
1 Slip Compen p.116
09 Control mode Control Mode 0 V/F Δ
3 IM Sensorless p.238
4 PM Sensorless2 p.245
11 Jog frequency Jog Frequency 0.00, Low Freq–High Freq 10.00 O
12 Jog acceleration time Jog Acc Time 0.0–600.0 (sec) 20.0 O p.165
13 Jog deceleration time Jog Dec Time 0.0–600.0 (sec) 30.0 O
0 Manual
15 Torque boost options Torque Boost 1 Auto 1 0 Manual Δ p.116
2 Auto 2

81
Parameter Lists 890053-00-01

Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Initial value Property* Ref.
240V, 480V
2.0
7.5~125HP
575V
163 Forward Torque boost Fwd Boost 0.0–15.0 (%) 1.2 Δ p.116
7.5~150HP
480V
1.0
150~800HP
240V, 480V
2.0
7.5~125HP
575V
17 Reverse Torque boost Rev Boost 0.0–15.0 (%) 1.2 Δ p.116
7.5~150HP
480V
1.0
150~800HP
19 Start frequency Start Freq 0.01–10.00 (Hz) 0.50 Δ p.119
40.00-400.00 (Hz) 240V,
480V p.119
40.00-120.00 (Hz) 575V
20 Maximum frequency Max Freq 40.00-120.00 (Hz) 60.00 Δ
p.119
IM Sensorless
40.00-180.00 (Hz)
p.119
PM Sensorless2
0 Hz Display
21 Select speed unit Hz/Rpm Sel 0 Hz Display O p.119
1 RPM Display
Auto torque boost filter
224 ATB Filt Gain 1 – 9999 (msec) 10 O p.116
gain
23 Auto torque boost voltage ATB Volt Gain 0.0-300.0% 100.0 O p.116
Hand mode operation
25 HAND Cmd Freq 0.00, Low Freq- High Freq 0.00 O p.64
frequency
Hand mode operation 0 HAND Parameter
26 Frequency reference HAND Ref Mode 0 HAND Parameter Δ p.64
1 Follow AUTO
source
0 kW
30 kW/HP unit selection kW/HP Unit Sel 1 HP O p.119
1 HP
0 No
31 Quick Start PopUp Q.Start No X p.52
1 Yes
95 Inverter Temperature Temperature XXX °C X -
96 Inverter Software Version Inv S/W Ver 201.00
97 Inverter Software Version Inv Debug Ver 0.02
X -
98 I/O Software Version I/O S/W Ver 1 201.00
99 I/O Software Version I/O S/W Ver 2 0.00
[1] ‘10(V3) and 11(I3)’ of DRV-07 are available when Extended IO Bd. is installed. Refer to Extended IO option manual for more detailed
information.
[2] PM Sensorless: < 125 HP and does not apply to all 575V inverters.
[3] DRV-16–17 are displayed when DRV-15 is set to ‘0 (Manual)’.
[4] DRV-22, 23 are displayed when DRV-15 is set to 'Auto-2'.

82
 890053-00-01 Parameter Lists

4.2.2 Motor Group (MOT)

Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Initial value Property* Ref.
00 Jump Code Jump Code 1–99 10 O p.74
9 7.5HP (5.5 kW)
10 10.0HP (7.5 kW)
11 15.0HP (11.0 kW)
12 20.0HP (15.0 kW)
13 25.0HP (18.5 kW)
14 30.0HP22.0 kW ()
15 40.0HP (30.0 kW)
16 50.0HP (37.0 kW)
17 60.0HP (45.0 kW)
18 75.0HP (55.0 kW) Dependent on motor
01 Motor capacity Motor Capacity Δ p.121
19 100.0HP (75.0kW) setting
20 125.0HP (90.0kW) [1]
21 150.0HP (110.0kW)
22 200.0HP (132.0kW)
23 250.0HP (160.0kW)
24 300.0HP (185.0kW)
26 400.0HP (250.0kW)
27 500.0HP (315.0kW)
29 650.0HP (400.0kW)
30 800.0HP (500.0kW)
30.00–400.00 (Hz)
02 Base frequency Base Freq 40.00-120.00(Hz) IM S/L 60.00 Δ p.121
30.00–180.00 (Hz) PM S/L2
03 Number of motor poles Pole Number 2-48 Δ
04 Rated slip speed Rated Slip 0-3000 (RPM) Dependent on motor Δ
05 Motor rated current Rated Curr 0.0-1000.0 (A) capacity setting, MOT-01 Δ
p.121
06 Motor no- load current Noload Curr 0.0-1000.0 (A) Δ
07 Motor rated voltage Motor Volt 0, 170-480 (V), 525-600 (V) 230V/460V/575V Δ
08 Motor efficiency Efficiency 70-100 (%) Dependent on MOT-01 Δ
09 Trim power display Trim Power % 70-130 (%) 100 O p.121
170~264V (7.5HP~25HP) 240 V
320~528V (7.5HP~125HP)
10 Input power voltage AC Input Volt 480 V O p.122
320~550V (150HP~800HP)
446-660V (7.5HP~125HP) 600 V
0 None
1 All (Rotation type)
2 All (Stdstl) Static type
Rs+ Lsigma (Rotation
11 Auto Tuning Auto Tuning 3 0 None Δ p.123
type)
4 Tr (Stdstl) Static type
5 DeadT-volt
6 All (PM)2
12 Stator resistance Rs 0.000-9.999 (Ω) I
13 Leakage inductance Lsigma 0.00-99.99 (mH) Dependent on motor I
p.123
143 Stator inductance Ls 0.00-999.9 (mH) setting MOT-01 I
15 Rotor Time Constant Tr 25-5000 (ms) I
Dependent on motor
164 PM Stator resistance Rs (PM) 0.000-9.999 (Ω) P
setting
17 D-axis inductance Ld (PM) 0.000~1000.0 (mH) 0 P
18 Q-axis inductance Lq (PM) 0.000~1000.0 (mH) 0 P
p.123
19 Flux reference PM Flux Ref 0.000~1.000 (Wb) 0.147 P
20 Q-axis inductance scale Lq(PM) Scale 50~150% 100 P
21 PM auto tuning level Ld,Lq Tune Lev 20.0~50.0% 33.3 P
22 PM auto tuning frequency Ld,Lq Tune Hz 80.0~150.0% 150.0/100.0 P
[1] Maximum setting of (20) 125 HP when DRV-09 is set to (4) PM Sensorless
[2] PM Sensorless: < 125 HP and does not apply to all 575V inverters.
[3] MOT-14 and MOT-15 displayed when DRV-09 is set to '3' IM Sensorless.
[4] MOT-16 ~ MOT-22 displayed when DRV-09 is set to '4' PM Sensorless.

83
Parameter Lists 890053-00-01

4.2.3 Basic Group (BAS)

Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Initial value Property* Ref.
00 Jump Code Jump Code 1-99 20 O p.74
0 Keypad
p.126
1 Fx/Rx-1
2 Fx/Rx-2
01 Second command source Cmd 2nd Src 1 Fx/Rx-1 Δ
3 Int 485
4 FieldBus
5 Time Event p.175
0 Keypad-1
1 Keypad-2
2 V1
4 V2
5 I2
02 Second frequency source Freq 2nd Src 0 Keypad-1 O p.126
6 Int 485
7 FieldBus
9 Pulse
101 V3
11 I3
0 None
1 V1
3 V2
4 I2
03 Auxiliary reference source Aux Ref Src 6 Pulse 0 None Δ p.127
7 Int 485
8 FieldBus
102 V3
11 I3
0 M + (G * A)
1 M * (G * A)
2 M / (G * A)
3 M + (M * (G * A))
Aux Calc
043 Auxiliary command calculation type 4 M + G * 2 * (A- 50) 0 M+(G*A) Δ p.127
Type
5 M * (G * 2 * (A- 50))
6 M / (G * 2 * (A- 50))
7 M + M * G * 2 * ( A-
50)
05 Auxiliary command gain Aux Ref Gain -200.0-200.0 (%) 100.0 O p.127
0 Linear p.130
1 Square p.131
07 V/F pattern options V/F Pattern 0 Linear Δ
2 User V/F p.132
3 Square 2 p.132
0 Max Freq
08 Acc/Dec standard frequency Ramp T Mode 0 Max Freq Δ p.100
1 Delta Freq
0 0.01 sec
09 Time scale settings Time Scale 1 0.1 sec 1 0.1 sec Δ
p.100
2 1 sec
0 60 Hz
10 Input power frequency 60/50 Hz Src 0 60 Hz Δ p.122
1 50 Hz
0.00-Maximum frequency
414 User frequency 1 User Freq 1 15.00 Δ
(Hz)
42 User voltage1 User Volt 1 0–100 (%) 25 Δ
0.00-Maximum frequency
43 User frequency 2 User Freq 2 30.00 Δ
(Hz)
44 User voltage2 User Volt 2 0-100 (%) 50 Δ
p.132
0.00-Maximum frequency
45 User frequency 3 User Freq 3 45.00 Δ
(Hz)
46 User voltage3 User Volt 3 0-100 (%) 75 Δ
0.00-Maximum frequency
47 User frequency 4 User Freq 4 60.00 Δ
(Hz)
48 User voltage4 User Volt 4 0-100 (%) 100 Δ
505 Multi-step speed frequency 1 Step Freq-1 Low Freq- High Freq 10.00 O
51 Multi-step speed frequency 2 Step Freq-2 Low Freq- High Freq 20.00 O
52 Multi-step speed frequency 3 Step Freq-3 Low Freq- High Freq 30.00 O
53 Multi-step speed frequency 4 Step Freq-4 Low Freq- High Freq 40.00 O p.133
54 Multi-step speed frequency 5 Step Freq-5 Low Freq- High Freq 50.00 O
55 Multi-step speed frequency 6 Step Freq-6 Low Freq- High Freq 60.00 O
56 Multi-step speed frequency 7 Step Freq-7 Low Freq-High Freq 60.00 O

84
 890053-00-01 Parameter Lists

Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Initial value Property* Ref.
Xcel Change 0.00-Maximum frequency
69 Acc/Dec time transition frequency 0.00 Δ p.134
Fr (Hz)
70 Multi-step acceleration time1 Acc Time-1 0.0-600.0 (sec) 20.0 O
71 Multi-step deceleration time1 Dec Time-1 0.0-600.0 (sec) 20.0 O
726 Multi-step acceleration time2 Acc Time-2 0.0-600.0 (sec) 30.0 O
73 Multi-step deceleration time2 Dec Time-2 0.0-600.0 (sec) 30.0 O
74 Multi-step acceleration time3 Acc Time-3 0.0-600.0 (sec) 40.0 O
75 Multi-step deceleration time3 Dec Time-3 0.0-600.0 (sec) 40.0 O
76 Multi-step acceleration time4 Acc Time- 4 0.0-600.0 (sec) 50.0 O
p.135
77 Multi-step deceleration time4 Dec Time-4 0.0-600.0 (sec) 50.0 O
78 Multi-step acceleration time5 Acc Time- 5 0.0-600.0 (sec) 40.0 O
79 Multi-step deceleration time5 Dec Time-5 0.0-600.0 (sec) 40.0 O
80 Multi-step acceleration time6 Acc Time- 6 0.0-600.0 (sec) 30.0 O
81 Multi-step deceleration time6 Dec Time-6 0.0-600.0 (sec) 30.0 O
82 Multi-step acceleration time7 Acc Time- 7 0.0-600.0 (sec) 20.0 O
83 Multi-step deceleration time7 Dec Time-7 0.0-600.0 (sec) 20.0 O
0 None
Angle
947 Initial pole position estimation type Init Angle Sel 1 Angle Detect 1 P p.250
Detect
2 Alignment
PD Repeat
95 Initial pole position estimateion retry 0~10 2 p.250
Num
96 Initial pole position estimation interval Pulse Interval 1~100msec 20msec P p.250
Initial pole position estimation pulse
97 Pulse Curr % 10~100% 25% p.250
current (%)
Initial pole position estimation pulse
98 Pulse Volt % 100~4000 500 P p.250
voltage (%)
[1] ‘10(V3) and 11(I3)’ of BAS-02 are available when Extended IO Bd. is installed. Refer to Extended IO option manual for more detailed
information.
[2] ‘12(V3) and 13(I3)’ of BAS-03 are available when Extended IO Bd. is installed. Refer to Extended IO option manual for more detailed
information.
[3] BAS-04–05 are displayed when BAS-03 is not ‘0 (None)’.
[4] BAS-41–48 are displayed when BAS-07 or M2-25 is set to ‘2 (User V/F)’.
[5] BAS-50–56 are displayed when IN-65-71 is set to ‘Speed-L/M/H’.
[6] BAS-72–83 are displayed when IN-65–71 is set to ‘Xcel-L/M/H’
[7] BAS-94-98 are displayed when DRV-09 is set to '4' (PM Sensorless)

85
Parameter Lists 890053-00-01

4.2.4 Advanced Group (ADV)

Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Initial value Property* Ref.
00 Jump Code Jump Code 1-99 O p.74
0 Linear
01 Acceleration pattern Acc Pattern 0 Linear Δ
1 S-curve p.137
0 Linear
02 Deceleration pattern Dec Pattern 0 Linear Δ
1 S-curve
S-curve acceleration start point
031 Acc S Start 1–100 (%) 40 Δ
gradient
S-curve acceleration end point
04 Acc S End 1–100 (%) 40 Δ
gradient
p.137
S-curve deceleration start point
052 Dec S Start 1–100 (%) 40 Δ
gradient
S-curve deceleration end point
06 Dec S End 1–100 (%) 40 Δ
gradient
0 Acc
07 Start Mode Start Mode 0 Acc Δ p.139
1 DC-Start
0 Dec
1 DC-Brake
08 Stop Mode Stop Mode 2 Free-Run 0 Dec Δ p.140
4 Power
Braking
0 None
09 Selection of rotation prevention Run Prevent 1 Forward Prev 0 None Δ p.142
2 Reverse Prev
0 No
10 Starting with power on Power- on Run 0 No O p.143
1 Yes
3
11 Power-on run delay time Power- On Delay 0.0 -6000.0 (sec) 0.0 O p.108
124 DC braking time at startup DC-Start Time 0.00-60.00 (sec) 0.00 Δ
p.139
13 Amount of applied DC DC Inj Level 0–200 (%) 50 Δ
Output blocking time before 0.00 7.5~125HP
145 DC-Block Time 0.00- 60.00 (sec) Δ
DC braking 2.00 150~800HP
15 DC braking time DC-Brake Time 0.00- 60.00 (sec) 1.00 Δ p.140
16 DC braking rate DC-Brake Level 0–200 (%) 50 Δ
17 DC braking frequency DC-Brake Freq Startfrequency- 60 Hz 5.00 Δ
Dwell frequency on Start frequency- Maximum
20 Acc Dwell Freq 5.00 Δ
acceleration frequency (Hz)
Dwell operation time on
21 Acc Dwell Time 0.0-60.0 (sec) 0.0 Δ
acceleration
p.145
Dwell frequency on Start frequency- Maximum
22 Dec Dwell Freq 5.00 Δ
deceleration frequency (Hz)
Dwell operation time on
23 Dec Dwell Time 0.0-60.0 (sec) 0.0 Δ
deceleration
0 No
24 Frequency limit Freq Limit 0 No Δ p.119
1 Yes
0.00-Upper limit frequency
256 Frequency lower limit value Freq Limit Lo 0.50 Δ
(Hz)
p.119
Lower limit frequency-
26 Frequency upper limit value Freq Limit Hi Max freq Δ
Maximum frequency (Hz)
0 No
27 Frequency jump Jump Freq 0 No Δ p.147
1 Yes
0.00-Jump frequency upper
287 Jump frequency lower limit1 Jump Lo 1 10.00 O
limit1 (Hz)
Jump frequency lower limit1-
29 Jump frequency upper limit1 Jump Hi 1 15.00 O
Maximum frequency (Hz)
0.00-Jump frequency upper
30 Jump frequency lower limit2 Jump Lo 2 20.00 O
limit2 (Hz)
p.147
Jump Hi 2 Jump frequency lower limit2-
31 Jump frequency upper limit2 25.00 O
Maximum frequency (Hz)
Jump Lo 3 0.00-Jump frequency upper
32 Jump frequency lower limit3 30.00 O
limit3 (Hz)
Jump Hi 3 Jump frequency lower limit3-
33 Jump frequency upper limit3 35.00 O
Maximum frequency (Hz)
8
41 Brake Open Current BR Rls Curr 0.0 - 180.0% 50.00
42 Brake Open Delay Time BR Rls Dly 0.0 - 10.0 (sec) 1.00
p.146
Brake Open Forward
44 0 - Maximum Frequency 1.00
Frequency BR Rls Fwd Fr
Brake Open Reverse
45 0 - Maximum Frequency 1.00 p.146
Frequency BR Rls Rev Fr

86
 890053-00-01 Parameter Lists

Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Initial value Property* Ref.
46 Brake Close Delay Time BR Eng Dly 0.0 - 10.0 (sec) 1.00
47 Brake Close Frequency BR Eng Fr 0 - Maximum Frequency 2.00
0 None
50 Energy saving operation E-Save Mode 1 Manual 0 None Δ p.150
2 Auto
519 Energy saving level Energy Save 0–30 (%) 0 O
Energy saving point search p.150
52 E-Save Det T 0.0-100.0 (sec) 20.0 Δ
time
0 During Run
64 Cooling fan control Fan Control 1 Always ON 0 During Run O p.151
2 Temp Control
Selection of regeneration 0 No
74 RegenAvd Sel 0 No Δ
evasion function for press 1 Yes
240V: 300-400 V 350 p.152
Voltage level of regeneration
75 RegenAvd Level 480V: 600-800 V 700 Δ
evasion motion for press
575V: 800-980V 870
Compensation frequency limit
7610 of regeneration evasion for CompFreq Limit 0.00-60.00 Hz 1.00 Δ
press
Regeneration evasion for 240V, 480V 0.0-100.0% 50.0 p.152
77 RegenAvd Pgain O
press, P- Gain 575V 0.0-200.0% 100.0
Regeneration evasion for
78 RegenAvd Igain 20–30000 (msec) 500 O
press, I gain
[1] ADV-03–04 are displayed when ADV-01 is set to ‘1 (S-curve)’.
[2] ADV-05–06 are displayed when ADV-02 is set to ‘1 (S-curve)’.
[3] ADV-11 is displayed when ADV-10 is set to ‘1 (Yes)’.
[4] ADV-12 and 13 are displayed when ADV-07 is set to ‘1 (DC-Start)'.
[5] ADV-14 - 17 are displayed when ADV-08 is set to ‘1 (DC-Brake)’.
[6] ADV-25 and 26 are displayed when ADV-24 is set to '1' (Yes)
[7] ADV-28–33 are displayed when ADV-27 is set to ‘1 (Yes)’.
[8] ADV-41 - 47 are displayed if either OUT-31 ~ 36 are set to 42 (BR Control).
[9] ADV-51 is displayed when ADV-50 is set to ‘1 (Manual)’. ADV-52 is displayed when ADV-50 is set to ‘2 (Auto)’.
[10] ADV-76–78 are displayed when ADV-74 is set to ‘1 (Yes)’.

87
Parameter Lists 890053-00-01

4.2.5 Control Group (CON)

Prop
Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Initial value *
Ref.
00 Jump Code Jump Code 1-99 4 O p.74
240V, 480V:
3.0
1.0~15.0 7.5~125HP
(kHz) 575V:
2.3
7.5~30HP
1.0~5.0 480V:
2.0
(kHz) 150~500HP
04 Carrier frequency Carrier Freq O p.153
1.0~4.0 480V: 650-
1.5
(kHz) 800HP
1.0~10.0 575V:
2.3
(kHz) 40~75HP
1.0~7.0 575V:
2.3
(kHz) 100~125HP
0 Normal PWM
Normal
05 Switching mode PWM Mode Low leakage 0 Δ p.153
1 PWM
PWM
91 Initial Excitation Time PreExTime 0.00 - 60.00 (sec) 1.00 I p.238
111 Continued Operation Duration Hold Time 0.00 - 60.00 (sec) 0.00 IP p.245
0 No
13 Anti-hunting regulator mode AHR Sel 1 Yes Δ
1 Yes
14 Anti-hunting regulator P- Gain AHR P-Gain 0-32767 1000 O
Anti-hunting regulator start 0.00-AHR High Freq
15 AHR Low Freq 0.50 O
frequency p.154
Anti-hunting regulator end
16 AHR High Freq AHR Low Freq-400.00 400.00 O
frequency
Anti-hunting regulator
17 AHR limit 0-20 2 O
compensation voltage limit rate
3
24 SL Speed Controller P Gain1 ASR-SL P Gain1 0 - 5000 % I
25 SL Speed Controller I Gain1 ASR-SL I Gain1 10 - 9999 (ms) I
26 SL Speed Controller P Gain2 ASR-SL P Gain2 1 - 1000 % I
27 SL Speed Controller I Gain2 ASR-SL I Gain2 1 - 1000 % I
28 SL Speed Controller I Gain0 ASR-SL I Gain0 1 - 1000 % Depends on Motor I
p.238
29 Flux Estimator P Gain Flux P Gain 10 - 200 % Capacity I
30 Flux Estimator I Gain Flux I Gain 10 - 200 % I
31 Speed Estimator P Gain 1 S-Est P Gain 1 0 - 32767 I
32 Speed Estimator I Gain 1 S-Est I Gain 1 100 - 1000 I
33 Speed Estimator I Gain 2 S-Est I Gain 2 100 - 10000 I
345 PM speed controller P gain 1 ASR P Gain 1 0~5000 100 P
35 PM speed controller I gain 1 ASR I Gain 1 0~5000 150 P
p.245
36 PM speed controller P gain 2 ASR P Gain 2 0~5000 100 P
37 PM speed controller I gain 2 ASR I Gain 2 0~9999 150 P
Speed estimator feedforward
38 PM Flux FF % 0~1000% 300% P
high speed range (%)
PM speed estimator proportional
39 PM SpdEst Kp 0 0~200% 30% P
gain 0
PM speed estimator integral gain
40 PM SpdEst Ki 0 0~200% 30% P
0
PM speed estimator proportional
41 PM SpdEst Kp 1 0~300% 70% P
gain 1
PM speed estimator integral gain
42 PM SpdEst Ki 1 0~300% 70% P
1 p.245
PM speed estimator proportional
43 PM SpdEst Kp 2 0~300% 100% P
gain 2
PM speed estimator integral gain
44 PM SpdEst Ki 2 0~300% 100% P
2
PM D-axis back-EMF estimated
45 PM EdGain Perc 0~300% 100% P
gain (%)
PM Q-axis back-EMF estimated
46 PM EqGain Perc 0~300% 100% P
gain (%)
47 PM dead-time voltage (%) PMdeadVolt Per 50~200% 100% P
Current controller proportional
48 ACR P-Gain 0~10000 1200 IP p.238
gain
p.245
49 Current controller integral gain ACR I-Gain 10~1000 120 IP
50 Voltage controller limit V Con HR 0~100.0% 10.00% P
p.245
51 Voltage controller I Gain V Con Ki 0~1000.0% 10.00% P
523 Torque Controller Output Filter Torque Out LPF 0~2000 msec 0 msec IP p.238

88
 890053-00-01 Parameter Lists

Prop
Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Initial value *
Ref.
0 Keypad-1
1 Keypad-2
2 V1
4 V2
5 I2
53 Torque Limit setting options Torque Lmt Src 0 Keypad-1 I p.238
6 Int 485
7 FieldBus
9 Pulse
10 V3
11 I3
Forward direction retrograde
543 FWD +Trq Lmt 0-200% 180.00% [4] IP
torque limit
Forward direction regenerative
55 FWD -Trq Lmt 0-200% 180.00% IP
torque limit p.238
Reverse direction regenerative p.245
56 REV +Trq Lmt 0-200% 180.00% IP
torque limit
Reverse direction retrograde
57 REV -Trq Lmt 0-200% 180.00% IP
torque limit
5
69 PM Speed Search Pulse Current SS Pulse Curr 10~100% 15.00% P p.245
0 Flying Start-1
1 Flying Start-2 Flying Start-
70 Speed search mode selection SS Mode 0 IP p.155
2 Flying Start-3 1
(PM)10
Bit 0000-1111
Speed 0000
Bit 0 search on
acceleration bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0

Restart after 1 1 1 1
Bit 1 trips (other
71 Speed search operation selection Speed Search 0 0 0 0 Δ p.155
than LV trip)
Restart after
Bit 2 instantaneou
s interruption
Power- on
Bit 3
run
90 7.5~400HP
726 Speed search reference current SS Sup- Current 50–120 (%) O
80 500~800HP
Flying
100
Start-1
737 Speed search proportional gain SS P-Gain 0-9999 O
Dep. on Flying
MOT-01 Start-2
p.155
Flying
200
Start-1
74 Speed search integral gain SS I-Gain 0-9999 O
Dep. on Flying
MOT-01 Start-2
Output block time before speed
75 SS Block Time 0.0-60.0 (sec) 1.0 Δ
search
0 No
77 Energy buffering selection KEB Select 0 No Δ p.158
1 Yes
125.0 7.5~125HP
788 Energy buffering start level KEB Start Lev 110.0-140.0 (%) 115.0 150~800HP Δ
130.0 575V only
130.0 7.5~125HP
79 Energy buffering stop level KEB Stop Lev CON-78 ~ 145.0 (%) 125.0 150~800HP Δ
135.0 575V only
300 230V/460V
80 Energy buffering slip gain KEB Slip Gain 0-20000 O
25 575V
1000 230V/460V
575V p.158
3000
(7.5~50HP)
81 Energy buffering P-Gain KEB P-Gain 0-20000 O
575V
1500 (60~125HP
)
500 230V/460V
82 Energy buffering I-Gain KEB I-Gain 1-20000 O
200 575V
10.0 7.5~125HP
Energy buffering acceleration
83 KEB Acc Time 0.0-600.0 sec 30.0 150~800HP O
time
5.0 575V
859 Flux estimator proportional gain 1 Flux P Gain 1 100 - 700 370 230V, 460V I p.238

89
Parameter Lists 890053-00-01

Prop
Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Initial value *
Ref.
0-500 170 575V
0 - 100 0 230V, 460V
86 Flux estimator proportional gain 2 Flux P Gain 2 I
70-120 90 575V
87 Flux estimator proportional gain 3 Flux P Gain 3 0 - 500 100 I
50 230V, 460V p.238
88 Flux estimator integral gain 1 Flux I Gain 1 0 - 200 I
80 575V
89 Flux estimator integral gain 2 Flux I Gain 2 0 - 200 50 I
90 Flux estimator integral gain 3 Flux I Gain 3 0 - 200 50 I
Sensorless voltage compensation 0 - 60 35 230V, 460V
91 SL Volt Comp 1 I
1 60-400 110 575V
Sensorless voltage compensation 0 - 60 20 230V, 460V
92 SL Volt Comp 2 I p.238
2 0-400 110 575V
Sensorless voltage compensation
93 SL Volt Comp 3 0 - 60 20 I
3
Sensorless field weakening start
94 SL FW Freq 0 - 110% 100 I
frequency
p.238
Sensorless gain switching
95 SL Fc Freq 0.00 - 8.00 Hz 2.00 I
frequency
97 Sensorless Slip Compensation1 SL Slip Comp1 0-200 100 (575V only) I
p.238
98 Sensorless Slip Compensation2 SL Slip Comp2 0-200 50 (575V only) I
[1] CON-09 is displayed when DRV-09 is set to '3' (IM Senslorless).
[3] CON-24 - 33 and CON-52 - 57 are displayed when DRV-09 is set to '3' (IM Sensorless). CON-52 - 57 are displayed when DRV-09 is
set to '4' (PM Sensorless).
[4] When ADV.74 is set to Yes, defaults change to 150%.
[5] CON-34 - 47 and CON-69 are displayed when DRV-09 is set to '4' (PM Sensorless). Also, not applicable to 575V.
[6] CON-72 is displayed after Flying Start-1 and when any CON-71 bit is set to ‘1’.
[7] CON-73–75 are displayed when any CON-71 bit is set to ‘1’.
[8] CON-78–83 are displayed when CON-77 is set to ‘1 (Yes)’.
[9] CON-85 ~ 95 are displayed when DRV-09 is set to '3' IM Sensorless.
[10] PM Sensorless: < 125 HP and does not apply to all 575V inverters.

90
 890053-00-01 Parameter Lists

4.2.6 Input Group (IN)

Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Initial value Property* Ref.
00 Jump Code Jump Code 1-99 65 O p.74
p.107
Start Frequency - Maximum p.110
01 Frequency at maximum analog input Freq at 100% O
Maximum Freqency (Hz) Frequency p.112
p.114
0-12.00(V) or - X
051 V1 input voltage display V1 Monitor (V) 0.00
12.00~12.00 (V)
0 Unipolar
06 V1 input polarity selection V1 Polarity 0 Unipolar Δ
1 Bipolar
07 V1 input filter time V1 Filter 0–10000 (ms) 10 O p.107
08 V1 minimum input voltage V1 Volt x1 0.00-10.00 (V) 0.00 O
09 Output at V1 minimum voltage (%) V1 Perc y1 0.00-100.00 (%) 0.00 O
10 V1 maximum input voltage (%) V1 Volt x2 0.00-12.00 (V) 10.00 O
11 Output at V1 maximum voltage (%) V1 Perc y2 0.00-100.00 (%) 100.00 O
122 V1 input at minimum voltage (%) V1 –Volt x1’ -10.00- 0.00 (V) 0.00 O
13 Output at V1 minimum voltage (%) V1 –Perc y1’ -100.00-0.00 (%) 0.00 O
p.110
14 V1 maximum input voltage (%) V1 –Volt x2’ -12.00- 0.00 (V) -10.00 O
15 Output at V1 maximum voltage (%) V1 –Perc y2’ -100.00-0.00 (%) -100.00 O
0 No
16 V1 rotation direction change V1 Inverting 0 No O
1 Yes p.107
17 V1 quantization change V1 Quantizing 0.003, 0.04-10.00 (%) 0.04 O
204 Temperature monitor T1 Monitor 0.00 - 100.00 (%) - X p.200
355 V2 input rate monitor V2 Monitor (V) 0.00-12.00 (V) 0.00 O
37 V2 input filter time V2 Filter 0-10000 (msec) 10 O
38 V2 minimum input voltage V2 Volt x1 0.00-10.00 (V) 0.00 O
39 Output at V2 minimum voltage (%) V2 Perc y1 0.00-100.00 (%) 0.00 O
40 V2 maximum input voltage V2 Volt x2 0.00-10.00 (V) 10.00 O p.113
41 Output at V2 maximum voltage (%) V2 Perc y2 0.00-100.00 (%) 100.00 O
0 No
46 V2 Rotation direction options V2 Inverting 0 No O
1 Yes
47 V2 Quantizing level V2 Quantizing 0.004, 0.04- 10.00 (%) 0.04 O
506 I2 input monitor I2 Monitor (mA) 0–24 (mA) 0.00 O
52 I2 input filter time I2 Filter 0–10000 (msec) 10 O
53 I2 minimum input current I2 Curr x1 0.00-20.00 (mA) 4.00 O
54 Output at I2 minimum current (%) I2 Perc y1 0.00-100.00 (%) 0.00 O
55 I2 maximum input current I2 Curr x2 I2 Curr x1 - 24.00 (mA) 20.00 O p.112
56 Output at I2 maximum current (%) I2 Perc y2 0.00-100.00 (%) 100.00 O
0 No O
57 I2 rotation direction options I2 Inverting 0 No
1 Yes
58 I2 Quantizing level I2 Quantizing 0.004, 0.04- 10.00 (%) 0.04 O
0 No
59 Up/Down operation frequency save U/D Save Mode 0 No O p.170
1 Yes
0 Always Enable
Always
60 Safe operation selection Run En Mode 1 DI 0 Δ
Enable
Dependent
0 Free-Run p.160
617 Safe operation stop options Run Dis Stop 1 Q-Stop 0 Free-Run Δ
2 Q-Stop Resume
62 Safe operation deceleration time Q-Stop Time 0.0-600.0 (sec) 5.0 O
0 None
65 P1 terminal configuration P1 Define 1 Fx Δ p.163
1 Fx
66 P2 terminal configuration P2 Define 2 Rx 2 Rx Δ p.163
67 P3 terminal configuration P3 Define 3 RST 5 BX Δ p.163
68 P4 terminal configuration P4 Define 4 External Trip 3 RST Δ p.163
69 P5 terminal configuration P5 Define 5 BX 7 Speed-L Δ p.167
70 P6 terminal configuration P6 Define 6 JOG 8 Speed-M Δ p.165
71 P7 terminal configuration P7 Define 7 Speed-L 9 Speed-H Δ
8 Speed-M p.167
9 Speed-H
11 XCEL-L
12 XCEL-M
p.167167
13 XCEL-H
14 XCEL Stop
15 RUN Enable p.167
16 3-Wire p.168
17 2nd Source p.168

91
Parameter Lists 890053-00-01

Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Initial value Property* Ref.
18 Exchange p.169
19 Up
20 Down p.170
22 U/D Clear
23 Analog Hold p.172
24 I-Term Clear p.219
25 PID Openloop p.236
26 PID Gain2 p.219
27 PID Ref Change p.219
28 Pre Excite p.173
29 Timer In p.173
31 dis Aux Ref p.127
32 FWD JOG p.166
33 REV JOG p.166
34 Fire Mode p.174
35 Time Event En p.175
36 Pre Heat p.267
37 Damper Open p.175
38 Pump Clean p.175
39 Sleep Wake Chg p.232
40 PID Step Ref L
41 PID Step Ref M p.176
42 PID Step Ref H
728 P8 terminal configuration P8 Define Same as P1 - P7
739 P9 terminal configuration P9 Define Same as P1 - P7
P9 P8 P7 P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1

83 DI On Delay Selection DI On DelayEn 0 0000 0000-1 1111 1111 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Δ p.176
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

P9 P8 P7 P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1

84 DI Off Delay Selection DI Off DelayEn 0 0000 0000-1 1111 1111 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Δ p.176
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

85 Multi-function input terminal On filter DI On Delay 0–10000 (msec) 10 O p.176

86 Multi-function input terminal Off filter DI Off Delay 0–10000 (msec) 3 O p.176
DI NC/NO Sel P9 P8 P7 P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1

87 Multi-function input terminal selection 1 NC (B Type) 0 0000 0000-1 1111 1111 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Δ p.176
0 NO (A Type) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

89 Multi-step command delay time In Check Time 1–5000 (msec) 1 Δ p.135

DI Status
90 Multi-function input terminal status 1 ON 0 0000 0000-1 1111 1111 O p.176
0 OFF
91 Pulse input amount display TI Monitor 0.00-50.00 (kHz) 0.00 X
92 TI input filter time TI Filter 0–9999 (msec) 10 O
93 TI minimum input pulse TI Pls x1 0 - TI Pls x2 0.00 O
94 Output at TI minimum pulse (%) TI Perc y1 0.00-100.00 (%) 0.00 O
95 TI maximum input pulse TI Pls x2 TI Pls x1-32.00 32.00 O p.114
96 Output at TI maximum pulse (%) TI Perc y2 0.00-100.00 (%) 100.00 O
0 No
97 TI rotation direction change TI Inverting 0 No O
1 Yes
4
98 TI quantization level TI Quantizing 0.00 , 0.04-10.00 (%) 0.04 O
[1] 'IN-05' setting range can be changed accordinig to 'IN-06' settings.
[2] IN-12–17 are displayed when IN-06 is set to ‘1 (Bipolar)’.
[3] Quantizing is disabled if ‘0’ is selected.
[4] IN-20 is displayed when the V1/T1 terminal selection switch (SW3) is selected for T1 (PTC Input).
[5] IN-35–47 are displayed when the analog current/voltage input circuit selection switch (SW4) is selected on V2.
[6] IN-50–62 are displayed when the analog current/voltage input circuit selection switch (SW5) is selected on I2.
[7] IN-61 and IN-62 are displayed when IN-60 is set to ‘1 (DI Dependent)’.
[8] IN-72 and IN-73 are available when Extended IO Bd. is installed. Refer to Extended IO option manual for more detailed information.

92
 890053-00-01 Parameter Lists

4.2.7 Output Group (OUT)

Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Initial value Property* Ref.
Jump
00 Jump Code 1-99 30 O p.74
Code
0 Frequency
1 Output Current
2 Output Voltage
3 DCLink Voltage
4 Output Power
Analog
01 AO1 Mode 7 Target Freq 0 Frequency O p.178
output1
8 Ramp Freq
9 PID Ref Value
10 PID Fdb Value
11 PID Output
12 Constant
Analog
02 output1 AO1 Gain -1000.0-1000.0 (%) 100.0 O p.178
gain
Analog
03 output1 AO1 Bias -100.0-100.0 (%) 0.0 O p.178
bias
Analog
04 output1 AO1 Filter 0–10000 (msec) 5 O p.178
filter
Analog
05 constant AO1 Const 0.0-100.0 (%) 0.0 O p.178
output1
Analog
06 output1 AO1 Monitor 0.0-1000.0 (%) 0.0 X p.178
monitor
Analog Identical to the OUT-01 (AO1 Mode)
07 AO2 Mode 0 Frequency p.178
output2 selectoin range
Analog
08 output2 AO2 Gain -1000.0-1000.0 (%) 100.0 O p.178
gain
Analog
09 output2 AO2 Bias -100.0-100.0 (%) 0.0 O p.178
bias
Analog
10 output2 AO2 Filter 0–10000 (msec) 5 O p.178
filter
Analog
11 constant AO2 Const 0.0-100.0 (%) 0.0 O p.178
output2
Analog
12 output2 AO2 Monitor 0.0-1000.0 (%) 0.0 X p.178
monitor
bit 000-111 010
Fault bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Bit 0 Low voltage
30 output Trip OutMode 1 1 1 O p.186
Bit 1 Any faults other than low voltage
item 0 0 0
Bit 2 Automatic restart final failure
31 Multi-
function Relay 1 0 None 23 Trip
relay1
Multi-
32 function Relay 2 1 FDT-1 14 RUN
relay2
Multi-
33 function Relay 3 2 FDT-2 0 None
relay3
O p.182
Multi-
34 function Relay 4 3 FDT-3 0 None
relay4
Multi-
35 function Relay 5 4 FDT-4 0 None
relay5
Multi-
36 function 1 Q1 Define 5 Over Load 0 None
item

93
Parameter Lists 890053-00-01

Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Initial value Property* Ref.
6 IOL
7 Under Load
8 Fan Warning
9 Stall
10 Over Voltage
11 Low Voltage
12 Over Heat
13 Lost Command
14 Run
15 Stop
16 Steady
17 Inverter Line
18 Comm Line
19 Speed Search
20 Ready
21 Reserved
22 Timer Out
23 Trip
p.182
24 Lost Keypad
25 DB Warn%ED
26 On/Off Control
27 Fire Mode
28 Pipe Broken
29 Damper Err
30 Lubrication
31 Pump Clean
32 Level Detect
33 Damper Control
36 AUTO State
37 Hand State
38 TO
39 Except Date
40 KEB Operating
41 BrokenBelt
42 BR Control
43 2nd Source
371 Multi-
function Relay 6 Note 1
relay6
38 Multi-
function Relay 7 Note 1
relay7
39 Multi-
function Relay 8 Note 1
relay8
Multi- R8 R7 R6 Q1 R5 R4 R3 R2 R1
DO Status
function 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
41 1 Closed 0 0000 0000 X p.186
output
0 Open 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
monitor
Multi-
function
50 DO On Delay 0.00-100.00 (sec) 0.00 O p.188
output On
delay
Multi-
function
51 DO Off Delay 0.00-100.00 (sec) 0.00 O
output Off p.188
delay
Multi-
function DO NC/NO Sel
52 output 1 NC (B type) 0 0000 0000 Δ p.188
contact 0 NO (A Type)
selection
Fault
53 output On Trip Out On Dly 0.00-100.00 (sec) 0.00 O p.186
delay
Fault
54 output Off Trip Out Off Dly 0.00-100.00 (sec) 0.00 O p.186
delay
Timer On 0.00-100.00 (sec) 0.00 O
55 Timer On Delay p.173
delay

94
 890053-00-01 Parameter Lists

Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Initial value Property* Ref.
Timer Off
56 Timer Off Delay 0.00-100.00 (sec) 0.00 O p.173
delay
Detected
57 FDT Frequency 0.00-Maximum frequency (Hz) 30.00 O p.182
frequency
Detected
58 frequency FDT Band 0.00-Maximum frequency (Hz) 10.00 O p.182
band
0 Frequency
1 Output Current
2 Output Voltage
3 DCLink Voltage
Pulse 4 Output Power
61 output TO Mode 7 Target Freq 0 Frequency O p.180
item 8 Ramp Freq
9 PID Ref Value
10 PID Fdb Value
11 PID Output
12 Constant
Pulse
62 output TO Gain -1000.0-1000.0 (%) 100.0 O p.180
gain
Pulse
63 output TO Bias -100.0-100.0 (%) 0.0 O p.180
bias
Pulse
64 output TO Filter 0–10000 (msec) 5 O p.180
filter
Pulse
output
65 TO Const % 0.0-100.0 (%) 0.0 O p.180
constant
outpuut 2
Pulse
66 output TO Monitor 0.0-1000.0 (%) 0.0 X p.180
monitor
0 None
Output 1 V1
contact 3 V2
67 On/Off OnOff Ctrl Src 4 I2 0 None O p.189
control 6 Pulse
options 72 V3
8 I3
Output
68 contact On Ctrl Level Output contact off level to 100.00% 90.00 Δ p.189
On level
Output
69 contact Off Ctrl Level -100.00 to output contact on level (%) 10.00 Δ p.189
Off level
[1] OUT-37, 38, 39 are available when Extended IO Bd. is installed. Refer to Extended IO option manual for more detailed information.
[2] ‘7 (V3) and 8 (I3)’ of OUT-67 are available when Extended IO Bd. is installed. Refer to Extended IO option manual for more detailed
information.

95
Parameter Lists 890053-00-01

4.2.8 Protection Group (PRT)

LCD
Code Name Setting Range Initial Value Property* Ref.
Display
00 Jump Code Jump Code 1–99 40 O p.74
01 Back Spin Timer Backspin Time 0.0 - 6000.0 (sec) 0 O p.190
0 Normal Duty
04 Load Duty Load Duty 0 Normal Duty Δ p.196
1 Heavy Duty
Bit 00–11 00
Bit Output open
Input/output open-phase
05 Phase Loss Chk 0 phase Δ p.191
protection
Bit Input open phase
1
Input voltage range during 15 240V, 480V
06 IPO V Band 1–100 (V) O p.191
open-phase 40 575V
3.0 7.5~125HP
07 Deceleration time at fault trip Trip Dec Time 0.0–600.0 (sec) O p.194
90.0 150~800HP
Bit 00–11
Bit Faults other than 00
08 Selection of startup on trip reset RST Restart 0 LV trip O p.191
Bit LV Trip
1
09 Number of automatic restarts Retry Number 0–10 0 O p.191
10 Automatic restart delay time Retry Delay 0.1–600.0 (sec) 5.0 O p.191
0 None
Keypad command loss 1 Warning
11 Lost KPD Mode 0 None O p.194
operation mode 2 Free-Run
3 Dec
0 None
1 Free-Run
Speed command loss operation 2 Dec
12 Lost Cmd Mode 0 None O p.194
mode 3 Hold Input
4 Hold Output
5 Lost Preset
Time to determine speed
131 Lost Cmd Time 0.1–120.0 (sec) 1.0 O p.194
command loss
Operation frequency at speed 0.00, Low Freq–High
14 Lost Preset F 0.00 O p.194
command loss Freq
0 Half of x1
15 Analog input loss decision level AI Lost Level 0 Half of x1 O p.194
1 Below x1
0 No
17 Overload warning selection OL Warn Select 0 No O p.196
1 Yes
18 Overload warning level OL Warn Level 30–OL Trip Level(%) 110 O p.196
19 Overload warning time OL Warn Time 0.0–30.0 (sec) 10.0 O p.196
0 None
20 Motion at overload trip OL Trip Select 1 Free-Run 1 Free-Run O p.196
2 Dec
21 Overload trip level OL Trip Level 30–150 (%) 120 O p.196
22 Overload trip time OL Trip Time 0.0–60.0 (sec) 60.0 O p.196
0 Output Current
23 Under load detection Source UL Source 0 Output Current Δ p.198
1 Output Power
24 Under load detection band UL Band 0.0–100.0 (%) 10.0 Δ p.198
0 No
25 Under load warning selection UL Warn Sel 0 No O p.198
1 Yes
26 Under load warning time UL Warn Time 0.0–600.0 (sec) 10.0 O p.198
0 None
27 Under load trip selection UL Trip Sel 1 Free-Run 0 None O p.198
2 Dec
28 Under load trip timer UL Trip Time 0.0–600.0 (sec) 30.0 O p.198
0 None
31 Operation on no motor trip No Motor Trip 1 Free-Run O p.199
1 Free-Run
32 No motor trip current level No Motor Level 1–100 (%) 5 O p.199
33 No motor detection time No Motor Time 0.1–10.0 (sec) 3.0 O p.199
0 None
Operation at motor overheat
34 Thermal-T Sel 1 Free-Run 0 None O p.200
detection
2 Dec
0 Thermal In
35 Thermal sensor input Thermal In Src 0 Thermal In O p.200
1 V2
36 Thermal sensor fault level Thermal-T Lev 0.0–100.0 (%) 50.0 O p.200

96
 890053-00-01 Parameter Lists

LCD
Code Name Setting Range Initial Value Property* Ref.
Display
0 Low
37 Thermal sensor fault range Thermal-T Area 0 Low O p.200
1 High
382 Motor overheat detection sensor Thermal Monitor - - X p.200
0 None
Electronic thermal prevention
40 ETH Trip Sel 1 Free-Run 1 Free-Run O p.202
fault selection
2 Dec
0 Self-cool
41 Motor cooling fan type Motor Cooling 0 Self-cool O p.202
1 Forced- cool
Electronic thermal one minute
42 ETH 1 min CON-43–150 (%) 115 O p.202
rating
Electronic thermal prevention
43 ETH Cont 50–CON-42 (%) 100 O p.202
continuous rating
44 Fire mode password Fire Mode PW 0~9999 3473 O p.204
0 None O
453 Fire mode setting Fire Mode Sel 1 Fire Mode 0 None p.204
2 Test Mode
0 Reverse
464 Fire mode direction setting Fire Mode Dir 1 Forward O p.204
1 Forward
5
47 Fire mode frequency setting Fire Mode Freq 0.00–max Freq 60.00 O p.204
48 Number of fire mode operations Fire Mode Cnt - 0 X p.204
bit 0000–1111
Bit During 0000
0 acceleration
Bit At constant bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
50 Stall prevention and flux braking Stall Prevent 1 speed Δ p.206
Bit During 1 1 1 1
2 deceleration 0 0 0 0
Bit During Flux
3 braking (decel)
Start frequency- Stall
51 Stall frequency 1 Stall Freq 1 60.00 O p.206
frequency2 (Hz)
52 Stall level 1 Stall Level 1 30-150 (%) 130 Δ p.206
Stall frequency1- Stall
53 Stall frequency 2 Stall Freq 2 60.00 O p.206
frequency3 (Hz)
54 Stall level 2 Stall Level 2 30-150 (%) 130 Δ p.206
Stall frequency2- Stall
55 Stall frequency 3 Stall Freq 3 60.00 O p.206
frequency 4 (Hz)
56 Stall level 3 Stall Level 3 30–150 (%) 130 Δ p.206
Stall frequency3-
57 Stall frequency 4 Stall Freq 4 Maximum frequency 60.00 O p.206
(Hz)
58 Stall level 4 Stall Level 4 30–150 (%) 130 Δ p.206
7.5-125HP
0–150 (%)
59 Flux braking gain Flux Brake Kp 0 O p.206
150-800HP
0–10 (%)
0 None
1 Warning
60 Pipe break detection setting PipeBroken Sel 0 None O p.210
2 Free-Run
3 Dec
61 Pipe break detection variation PipeBroken Lev 0.0–100.0 (%) 97.5 O p.210
62 Pipe break detection time PipeBroken DT 0.0–6000.0 (Sec) 10.0 O p.210
0 Disabled
66 Braking resistor configuration DB Warn % ED 0 Disabled O p.211
1–30 (%)
0 None
1 Warning
70 Level detect mode selection LDT Sel 0 None O p.213
2 Free-Run
3 Dec
0 Below Level
71 Level detect range setting LDT Area Sel 0 Below Level O p.213
1 Above Level
0 Output Current
1 DC Link Voltage
2 Output Voltage
3 kW
72 Level detect source LDT Source 0 Output Current O p.213
4 HP
5 V1
6 V2
7 I2

97
Parameter Lists 890053-00-01

LCD
Code Name Setting Range Initial Value Property* Ref.
Display
8 PID Ref Value
9 PID Fdb Value
10 PID Output
116 V3
12 I3
73 Level detect delay time LDT Dly Time 0–9999 (sec) 2 O p.213
74 Level detect standard set value LDT Level Source setting Source setting O p.213
75 Level detect band width LDT Band width Source setting Source setting O p.213
76 Level detect frequency LDT Freq 0.00–High Freq (Hz) 20.00 O p.213
77 Level detect trip restart time LDT Restart DT 0.0–3000.0 (Min) 60.0 O p.213
0 Trip
79 Cooling fan fault selection Fan Trip Mode 1 Warning O p.216
1 Warning
0 None O
Operation mode on optional
80 Opt Trip Mode 1 Free-Run 1 Free-Run p.216
card trip
2 Dec
Low voltage trip decision delay
81 LVT Delay 0.0–60.0 (sec) 0.0 Δ p.217
time
Low voltage trip decision during 0 No
82 LV2 Trip Sel 0 No Δ p.217
operation 1 Yes
0 None
90 Low battery voltage setting Low Battery 0 None O p.217
1 Warning
0 None
Setting the function of Broken
91 BrokenBelt Sel 1 Warning 0 None p.218
belt
2 Free-Run
Operating the frequency of
92 BrokenBelt Freq 15.00~MzxFreq 15.00 p.218
Broken belt
93 Motor torque current Current Trq - - X p.218
Torque current of operating
94 BrokenBelt Trq 0.0~100.0 (%) 10.0 p.218
Broken belt
95 Delay of operating Broken belt BrokenBelt Dly 0~600.(sec) 10.0 p.218
967 LDT Auto restart count LDT Rst Cnt 0~6000 1 p.213
97 LDT Auto restart cycle count LDT Rst Cnt M - - X p.213
LDT Auto restart cycle
98 LDT Cnt Clr T 0~6000 60 p.213
Initialization time
[1] PRT-13~15 are dsiplayed when PRT-12 is not set to '0 (none)
[2] PRT-38 is displayed when PRT-34 is not set to ‘0 (NONE)’.
[3] PRT-45 can only be changegd when PRT-44 password is entered.
[4] PRT-46–47 are displayed when PRT-45 is not set to ‘0 (NONE)’.
[5] When Fire mode is set at PRT-45, PRT-46 is automatically set to forward and the frequency set at PRT-47 cannot be changed. When
PRT-45 is set to Test mode, PRT-46 and PRT-47 can be changed.
[6] ‘11(V3)~12(I3)’ of PID-21 are available when Extended IO Bd. is installed. Refer to Extended IO option manual for more detailed
information.
[7] PRT-96-98 are displayed when PRT-70 is not set to ‘0 (NONE)’.

98
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

5 Parameter Descriptions
5.1 Drive Group (DRV)
5.1.1 DRV-01 Command Frequency

The following parameters are related to HAND-OFF-AUTO button operation. Refer to section 3.2.1 for
details.

Codes / Functions Description

DRV-01
Frequency reference in AUTO mode when DRV-07 is set to’ KeyPad’.
Cmd Frequency
Rotation direction of the keypad start/run command in the HAND or AUTO
mode. Settings
DRV-02
KeyPad Run Dir 0 Forward
1 Reverse
To make HAND-OFF-AUTO buttons enabled/disabled.
Settings Description
HAND-OFF-AUTO buttons are disabled . If pressed,
0 Locked Message displayed as:
DRV-05
KPD H.O.A Lock KPD H.O.A Lock
If DRV-06, Cmd Source is Fx/Rx-1, Fx/Rx-2, Int485 or
1 During Run fieldbus, HAND-OFF-AUTO buttons are disabled during
running.
3 Unlocked HAND-OFF-AUTO buttons are enabled all the time.
Frequency displayed at the monitor display item (Monitor Line-1) when the
DRV-25
HAND button is pressed in other modes (default frequency reference for
HAND Cmd Freq
HAND mode).
Settings Description
The inverter operates based on the rotation direction
Hand
0 set at DRV-02 (Kepad Run Dir) and the frequency
Parameter
reference set at DRV-25 (HAND Cmd Freq).
DRV-26 The inverter takes over the rotation direction and the
HAND Ref Mode frequency reference from the settings for AUTO
mode and keeps performing the same operation. If
1 Follow Auto
the inverter was stopped in AUTO mode, the
operation direction is set as Fx and the frequency
reference is set as 0 (no inverter output).
OUT-31–36
Set AUTO State (36) to ensure that the inverter is in AUTO mode.
Relay 1–5, Q1
OUT-31–36
Set HAND State (37) to ensure that the inverter is in HAND mode.
Relay 1–5, Q1

99
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

5.1.2 DRV-03, DRV-04 Acceleration and Deceleration Times

5.1.2.1 Acc/Dec Time Based on Maximum Frequency

Acc/Dec times are based on maximum frequency (BAS-08 set to ‘0, MaxFreq’). Acceleration time set at
DRV-03 (Acceleration time) refers to the time required for the inverter to reach the maximum frequency
from a stopped (0 Hz) state. Likewise, deceleration time set at DRV-04 refers to the time required to
decelerate from the maximum frequency to a stopped state (0 Hz).

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
7.5~125HP
20.0
5.5~90kW
Acceleration 150~400HP
03 Acc Time 60.0 0.0–600.0 sec
time 110~250kW
500~800HP
100.0
315~500kW
7.5~125HP
DRV 30.0
5.5~90kW
Deceleration 150~400HP
04 Dec Time 90.0 0.0–600.0 sec
time 110~250kW
500~800HP
150.0
315~500kW
Maximum
20 Max Freq 60.00 40.00–400.00 Hz
frequency
Acc/Dec
Ramp T
08 reference 0 Max Freq 0–1 -
BAS Mode
frequency
09 Time scale Time scale 1 0.1 sec 0–2 -

Acc/Dec Time Based on Maximum Frequency – Setting Details

Code Description
Set the parameter value to 0 (Max Freq) to setup Acc/Dec time based on
maximum frequency.
Configuration Description
0 Max Freq Set the Acc/Dec time based on maximum frequency.
1 Delta Freq Set the Acc/Dec time based on operating frequency.
Example: Maximum frequency is 60.00 Hz, the Acc/Dec times are set to 5
seconds, and the frequency reference for operation is set at 30 Hz (half of
BAS-08 60 Hz), the time required to reach 30 Hz therefore is 2.5 seconds (half of 5
Ramp T Mode seconds).

100
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

Use the time scale for all time-related values. It is particularly useful when a
more accurate Acc/Dec times are required because of load characteristics,
or when the maximum time range needs to be extended.
BAS-09 Configuration Description
Time scale
0 0.01 sec Sets 0.01 second as the minimum unit.
1 0.1 sec Sets 0.1 second as the minimum unit.
2 1 sec Sets 1 second as the minimum unit.

Note that the range of maximum time values may change automatically when the units are
changed. If for example, the acceleration time is set at 6000 seconds, a time scale change from 1
second to 0.01 second will result in a modified acceleration time of 60.00 seconds.

5.1.2.2 Acc/Dec Time based on Operating Frequency

Acc/Dec times can be set based on the time required to reach the next step frequency from the
existing operation frequency. Set BAS-08 (acc/dec reference) to ‘1 (Delta Freq)’.

Group Code Name LCD Display Settings Setting Range Unit

7.5~125HP
20.0
5.5~90kW
Acceleration 150~400HP
03 Acc Time 60.0 0.0 - 600.0 sec
time 110~250kW
500~800HP
100.0
315~500kW
DRV
7.5~125HP
30.0
5.5~90kW
Deceleration 150~400HP
04 Dec Time 90.0 0.0 - 600.0 sec
time 110~250kW
500~800HP
150.0
315~500kW
Acc/Dec
BAS 08 Ramp T Mode 1 Delta Freq 0-1 -
reference

Acc/Dec Time Based on Operation Frequency – Setting Details

Code Description
Set the parameter value to 1 (Delta Freq) to set Acc/Dec times based on
Maximum frequency.
Configuration Description
0 Max Freq Set the Acc/Dec time based on Maximum frequency.
1 Delta Freq Set the Acc/Dec time based on Operation frequency.

101
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

If Acc/Dec times are set to 5 seconds, and multiple frequency references

BAS-08 are used in the operation in 2 steps, at 10 Hz and 30 Hz, each acceleration
Ramp T Mode stage will take 5 seconds (refer to the graph below).

102
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

5.1.3 DRV-06 Command Source Configuration (Start/Stop)

The H2 Series inverter provides several methods to Start and Stop the inverter. Choices include the
keypad, digital input terminals, RS-485 (Modbus), Fieldbus option cards and an Event Timer feature.
Refer to 8.2 Application Group 3 (AP3) on page 269 for details on the Event Timer.

Group Code Name LCD DisplayParameter Setting Setting Range Unit

0 Keypad
1 Fx/Rx-1
Command 2 Fx/Rx-2
DRV 06 Cmd Source 0–5 -
Source 3 Int 485
4 Field Bus
5 Time Event

5.1.3.1 The Keypad as a Command Source

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Command
DRV 06 Cmd Source 0 KeyPad 0–5 -
source

Set DRV-06 to ‘0 (Keypad)’ to select the keypad as the command source and set the operation direction
at DRV-02 (Keypad Run Dir). Press the [AUTO] button to enter AUTO mode. The display goes to Monitor
mode. The Auto LED flashes to show in Auto mode.

Since the keypad is now the command source, operation starts when the AUTO button is pressed
again. The reference frequency (speed) is based on DRV-07 setting. If DRV-07 is set to ‘0 Keypad’,
the frequency can be set at the Monitor mode, Line-1. Pressing the AUTO button again stops the
inverter.

The OFF button may be used to stop the operation as well, but the inverter operation mode will be
changed to OFF mode.

5.1.3.2 Terminal Block as a Command Source (Fwd/Rev Run)

Digital input terminals can be selected as the start/stop command source. Set DRV-06 (command
source) to 1 (Fx/Rx-1). The default settings for terminals P1 and P2 are 1 (Fx) and 2 (Rx) respectively.
Or set any (2) of the corresponding parameters (IN-65~IN-71) to 1 (Fx) and 2 (Rx). Activating either
terminal constitutes a run command. Activating both terminals constitutes a stop command.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV 06 Command source Cmd Source 1 Fx/Rx-1 0–5 -

Px terminal Px Define 1 Fx
IN 65–71 0–42 -
configuration (Px: P1– P7) 2 Rx

103
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

Fwd/Rev Command by Multi-function Terminal – Setting Details

Code Description
DRV-06
Set to 1 (Fx/Rx-1).
Cmd Source
IN-65–71 Assign a terminal for forward (Fx) operation. Assign a terminal for reverse
Px Define (Rx) operation.

5.1.3.3 Terminal Block as a Command Source (Run and Direction)

Set parameter DRV-06 (command source) to 2 (Fx/Rx-2). This configuration (Fx/Rx-2) assigns the Fx
terminal as the Start/Stop input terminal and assigns the Rx terminal as the rotational direction input
terminal (Open: Fwd, Closed: Rev). Set (2) of the corresponding parameters (IN-65~IN-71) to 1 (Fx)
and 2 (Rx) respectively.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV 06 Command source Cmd Source 2 Fx/Rx-2 0–5 -
Px terminal Px Define 1 Fx
IN 65–71 0–42 -
configuration (Px: P1 – P7) 2 Rx

Run Command and Fwd/Rev Command Using Multi-function Terminal – Setting Details

Code Description
DRV-06
Set to ‘2 (Fx/Rx-2)'.
Cmd Source
IN-65–71 Assign a terminal for run command (Fx).
Px Define Assign a terminal for changing rotation direction (Rx).

104
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

5.1.3.4 RS-485 Communication as a Command Source

Set DRV-06 (command source) in the to ‘3 (Int 485)’. Control the inverter with upper level controllers
(PCs or PLCs) via RS-485 communications using the S+, S- terminals. For more details, refer to 10 RS-
485 Communication Features on page 300.

Communication as the command source

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV 06 Command source Cmd Source 3 Int 485 0–5 -
Integrated
01 communication Int485 St ID 1 1–MaxComID*
-
inverter ID
Integrated
ModBus
02 communication Int485 Proto 0 0–6
RTU -
protocol
COM
Integrated
9600
03 communication Int485 BaudR 3 0–8
bps -
speed
Integrated
D8 / PN
04 communication frame Int485 Mode 0 0–3
/ S1 -
setup
*If COM-02 is set to ‘0’ (Modbus RTU), MaxComID is ‘250’. If set to ‘4’ (BACnet), MaxComID is ‘127’.

105
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

5.1.4 DRV-07 Frequency Reference Source

The H2 Series inverter provides several methods to setup and modify a frequency reference for
operation. These include the keypad, analog inputs (V1, I2, V2 and TI) and RS-485 (digital signals
from higher-level controllers, such as PC or PLC).

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
0 KeyPad-1
1 KeyPad-2
2 V1
4 V2
Frequency 5 I2
DRV 07 Freq Ref Src 0–11 -
reference source 6 Int 485
7 Field Bus
9 Pulse
10* V3
11 I3
* ‘10(V3)~11(I3)’ of DRV-07 are available when Extended IO option bd. is installed. Refer to Extended IO
option manual for more detailed information.

5.1.4.1 Keypad as the Reference Source (KeyPad-1 setting)

You can modify frequency reference by using the keypad and apply changes by pressing the
[ENT/PROG] button. To use the keypad as a frequency reference input source, go to DRV- 07
(Frequency reference source) and change the parameter value to ‘0 (Keypad-1)’. Input the frequency
reference for at DRV-25 (HAND Cmd Freq) or at the Monitor mode (MON) Line-1.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Frequency
07 Freq Ref Src 0 KeyPad-1 0 - 11 -
reference source
DRV
Hand Command 0.00, Low Freq-
25 HAND Cmd Freq 0.00 Hz
Frequency Max Freq*
* You cannot set a frequency reference that exceeds the Max. Frequency, as configured with DRV-20.

5.1.4.2 Keypad as the Reference Source (KeyPad-2 setting)

You can use the [UP] and [DOWN] arrow buttons to modify a frequency reference. Go to DRV-07
(Frequency reference source) and change the parameter value to ‘1 (Keypad-2)’. This allows frequency
reference values to be increased or decreased by pressing the [UP] and [DOWN] arrow buttons.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Frequency
07 Freq Ref Src 1 KeyPad- 2 0–11 -
reference source
DRV
Target 0.00, Low Freq–
01 Cmd Frequency 0.00 Hz
Frequency High Freq*
*You cannot set a frequency reference that exceeds the Max. Frequency, as configured with DRV-20.

106
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

5.1.4.3 IN-05 V1 Terminal as the Frequency Reference Source

You can set and modify a frequency reference by applying voltage inputs to the V1 terminal. Use
voltage inputs ranging from 0–10 V (unipolar) for forward only operation. Also, voltage inputs ranging
from -10 to +10 V (bipolar) can be applied for both directions, where negative voltage inputs are used in
reverse operations.

5.1.4.3.1 Setting a Frequency Reference for 0–10 V Input

Set IN-06 (V1 Polarity) to ‘0 (unipolar)’. Use a voltage output from an external source or use the
voltage output from the VR terminal to provide inputs to V1. Refer to the diagrams below for the wiring
required for each application.

1K - 5K

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Frequency reference
DRV 07 Freq Ref Src 2 V1 0–11 -
source
Frequency at
Maximum 0.00–
01 maximum analog Freq at 100% Hz
frequency Max. Frequency
input
V1
05 V1 input monitor 0.00 0.00–12.00 V
Monitor[V]
06 V1 polarity options V1 Polarity 0 Unipolar 0–1 -
V1 input filter time
07 V1 Filter 10 0–10000 msec
constant
IN
V1 minimum input
08 V1 volt x1 0.00 0.00–10.00 V
voltage
Output at V1
09 V1 Perc y1 0.00 0.00–100.00 %
minimum voltage (%)
V1 maximum input
10 V1 Volt x2 10.00 0 .00– 12.00 V
voltage
Output at V1
11 V1 Perc y2 100.00 0–100 %
maximum voltage (%)
Rotation direction
16 V1 Inverting 0 No 0–1 -
options
IN
V1 0.00, Low Freq–
17 V1 Quantizing level 0.04 %
Quantizing High Freq*

*Quantizing is disabled if ‘0’ is selected.

107
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

0–10 V Input Voltage Setting Details

Code Description
Configures the frequency reference at the maximum input voltage when a
potentiometer is connected to the control terminal block. A frequency set
with parameter IN-01 becomes the maximum frequency only if the value set in
IN-01 parameter IN-11 (or IN-15) is 100 (%).
Freq at 100% • Set parameter IN-01 to 60.00 and use default values for parameters IN-
05–IN-
16. Motor will run at 60.00 Hz when a 10 V input is provided at V1.
• Set parameter IN-11 to 50.00 (%) and use default values for parameters
IN-01–IN-
16. Motor will run at 30.00 Hz (50% of the default maximum frequency 60
Hz) when a 10 V input is provided at V1.
IN-05
Monitors the input voltage at V1.
V1 Monitor[V]
V1 Filter may be used when there are large variations in the applied reference
frequency (noise filter). Variations can be mitigated by increasing the time
constant, but this will delay the response time when changing the reference
frequency. The value t (time) indicates the time required for the frequency to
reach 63% of the reference, when external input voltages are provided in
multiple steps.

IN-07
V1 Filter

These parameters are used to configure the slope and offset values of the
Output Frequency based on a frequency reference of Input Voltage.

IN-08 V1 Volt x1
IN-09 V1 Perc y1
IN-10 V1 Volt x2
IN-11 V1 Perc y2

108
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

Code Description

IN-16 Inverts the direction of rotation. Set this parameter to ‘1 (Yes)’ if you need the
V1 Inverting motor to run in the opposite direction from the current rotation.
Quantizing may be used when the noise level is high in the analog input
signal. The inverter output frequency changes in consistent intervals (steps)
based on measuring (quantizing) the height (value) of the analog input
signal. Delicate control (resolution) of the output frequency is not as good
compared to standard resolution of 0.1%. Parameter values for quantizing
refer to a percentage based on the maximum input. Therefore, when IN-17
is set to 1% of the analog maximum input of 10 V and with a maximum
frequency of 60 Hz, the output frequency will increase or decrease by 0.6
Hz per 0.1V difference.

With quantizing applied, changes to the inverter output frequency for analog
signal increase and analog signal decrease are treated differently. When
the input signal increases, the output frequency starts increasing when the
height becomes equivalent to 3/4 of the quantizing value. From then on, the
output frequency increases according to the quantizing value. When the
input signal decreases, the output frequency starts decreasing when the
height becomes equivalent to 1/4 of the quantizing value.

Although the noise can be reduced using the low-pass filter (IN-07), the
IN-17 inverter output response to the input signal takes longer with higher filter
V1 Quantizing times. It can become difficult to control the output frequency when the input
signal is delayed, a period of long pulse (ripple) may occur on the output
frequency.

109
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

5.1.4.3.2 IN-12 Setting a Frequency Reference for -10–+10 V Input

Set DRV-07 (Frequency reference source) to ‘2 (V1)’, and then set IN- 06 (V1 Polarity) to ‘1 (bipolar)’.
Use the output voltage from an external source to provide a bipolar input to V1.

V1 terminal wiring

Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
Frequency reference
DRV 07 Freq Ref Src 2 V1 0–11 -
source
Frequency at maximum 0– Max
01 Freq at 100% 60.00 Hz
analog input Frequency
05 V1 input monitor V1 Monitor 0.00 -12.00–12.00 V V
06 V1 polarity options V1 Polarity 1 Bipolar 0–1 -
V1 minimum input
12 V1- volt x1 0.00 -10.00–0.00 V V
voltage
IN
V1 output at minimum -100.00–
13 V1- Perc y1 0.00 %
voltage (%) 0.00%
V1 maximum input
14 V1- Volt x2 -10.00 -12.00 –0.00 V V
voltage
V1 output at maximum -100.00–
15 V1- Perc y2 -100.00 %
voltage (%) 0.00%

110
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

Rotational Directions for Different Voltage Inputs

Command / Voltage Input Input voltage

0–+10 V -10–0 V
FWD Forward Reverse
REV Reverse Forward

-10–10 V Voltage Input Setting Details

Code Description
These parameters are used to set the slope and offset value of the
output frequency based on a frequency reference with a negative input
voltage. These parameters are displayed only when IN-06 is set to ‘1
(bipolar)’.
As an example, if the minimum input voltage (at V1) is set to -2 (V) with
10% output ratio, and the maximum voltage is set to -8 (V) with 80%
output ratio respectively, the output frequency will vary within the range
of 6–48 Hz.
IN-12 V1- Volt x1’
IN-13 V1 Perc y1’
IN-14 V1 Volt x2’
IN-15 V1- Perc y2’

For details about the 0–+10 V analog inputs, refer to the code
descriptions IN-08 (V1 volt x1) – IN-11 (V1 Perc y2) on page 89.

111
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

5.1.4.4 IN-50 I2 Terminal as the Frequency Reference Source

You can set and modify a frequency reference by applying inputs to the I2 terminal. Inputs can be 0(4)-
20mA or I2 can be used as a second voltage input (0-10VDC) based on the position of switch SW4.

5.1.4.4.1 Setting a Frequency Reference for 0(4) - 20mA Input

You can modify the frequency reference using the I2 input terminal. First with SW4, select I2 (left is default)
for the current input. Set DRV-07 (Frequency reference source) to ‘5 (I2)’ and apply 0(4)–20 mA input
current to I2. Scaling of the input current is done with IN-53 ~ IN-56. View the input current at IN-50.

Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
Frequency reference
DRV 07 Freq Ref Src 5 I2 0–11 -
source
Frequency at maximum 0–Maximum
01 Freq at 100% 60.00 Hz
analog input Frequency
50 I2 input monitor I2 Monitor 0.00 0.00–24.00 mA
52 I2 input filter time constant I2 Filter 10 0–10000 ms
53 I2 minimum input current I2 Curr x1 4.00 0.00–20.00 mA
I2 output at minimum
54 I2 Perc y1 0.00 0–100 %
current (%)
IN
55 I2 maximum input current I2 Curr x2 20.00 0.00–24.00 mA
I2 output at maximum
56 I2 Perc y2 100.00 0.00–100.00 %
current (%)
I2 rotation direction
61 I2 Inverting 0 No 0–1 -
options
I2 0.00*, 0.04–
62 I2 Quantizing level 0.04 %
Quantizing 10.00
Quantizing is disabled if ‘0’ is selected.

Input Current (I2) Setting Details

Code Description
Configures the frequency reference for operation at the maximum
current (when IN-56 is set to 100%).
• If IN-01 is set to 60.00 Hz and default settings are used for IN-
IN-01 53–56, 20 mA input current (max) to I2 will produce a frequency
Freq at 100% reference of 60.00 Hz.
• If IN-56 is set to 50.00%, and default settings are used for IN-01
(60 Hz) and IN-53–55, 20 mA input current (max) to I2 will produce
a frequency reference of 30.00 Hz (50% of 60 Hz).
IN-50
Monitors input current at I2.
I2 Monitor
IN-52 Configures the time for the operation frequency to reach 63% of target
I2 Filter frequency based on the input current at I2.

112
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

Configures the slope and off-set values of the output frequency based
on a mA input at the I2 terminal.

IN-53 I2 Curr x1
IN-54 I2 Perc y1
IN-55 I2 Curr x2
IN-56 I2 Perc y2

5.1.4.4.2 IN-35 Setting a Frequency Reference for 0-10V Input (I2 Terminal)

You can modify the frequency reference using a voltage input at the I2 terminal. First with SW4, select V2
(right) for the voltage input. Set DRV-07 (Frequency reference source) to ‘4 (V2)’ and apply 0–12V input
voltage to the I2 terminal. Scaling of the input voltage is done with IN-38 ~ IN-41. View the input voltage at IN-
35. Parameters for voltage input (IN-35–47) will only be displayed when I2 is set to receive a voltage
input (DRV-07 is set to ‘4’ (V2)).

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Frequency
DRV 07 Freq Ref Src 4 V2 0–11 -
reference source
35 V2 input display V2 Monitor 0.00 0.00–12.00 V
V2 input filter time
37 V2 Filter 10 0–10000 msec
constant
Minimum V2 input
38 V2 Volt x1 0.00 0.00–10.00 V
voltage
Output % at
39 minimum V2 V2 Perc y1 0.00 0.00–100.00 %
voltage
IN Maximum V2 input
40 V2 Volt x2 10.00 0.00–10.00 V
voltage
Output % at
41 maximum V2 V2 Perc y2 100.00 0.00–100.00 %
voltage
Invert V2 rotational
46 V2 Inverting 0 No 0–1 -
direction
V2 0.00*, 0.04–
47 V2 quantizing level 0.04 %
Quantizing 10.00
Quantizing is disabled if ‘0’ is selected.

113
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

5.1.4.5 IN-91 TI Terminal (Pulse) as the Frequency Reference Source

You can modify the frequency reference using a pulsed frequency input at the TI terminal. Set DRV-07
(Frequency reference source) to ‘9 (Pulse)’ and apply a 0–32 kHz. input to TI. Scaling of the pulsed
input is done with IN-93 ~ IN-96. View the pulsed input at IN-91. Parameters for a pulse input (IN-91–
98) will only be displayed when TI is set to receive a pulsed input (DRV-07 is set to ‘9’ (Pulse)).

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Frequency
DRV 07 Freq Ref Src 9 Pulse 0–11 -
reference source
Frequency at 0.00–
01 maximum analog Freq at 100% 60.00 Maximum Hz
input frequency
91 Pulse input display TI Monitor 0.00 0.00–50.00 kHz
TI input filter time
92 TI Filter 10 0–9999 mse c
constant
TI input minimum
93 TI Pls x1 0.00 0.00–32.00 kHz
pulse
Output% at TI
IN 94 TI Perc y1 0.00 0.00–100.00 %
minimum pulse
TI Input maximum
95 TI Pls x2 32.00 0.00–32.00 kHz
pulse
Output% at TI
96 TI Perc y2 100.00 0.00–100.00 %
maximum pulse
Invert TI direction of
97 TI Inverting 0 No 0–1 -
rotation
TI 0.00*, 0.04–
98 TI quantizing level 0.04 %
Quantizing 10.00
*Quantizing is disabled if ‘0’ is selected.

TI Pulse Input Setting Details

Code Description
Configures the frequency reference at the maximum pulse input. The
frequency reference is based on 100% of the value set with IN-96.
• If IN-01 is set to 40.00 and parameters IN-93–96 are set at default,
IN-01 32 kHz input to TI yields a frequency reference of 40.00 Hz.
Freq at 100%
• If IN-96 is set to 50.00 and parameters IN-01, IN-93–95 are set at
default, 32 kHz input to the TI terminal yields a frequency reference
of 30.00 Hz.
IN-91
Displays the pulse frequency supplied at TI.
TI Monitor
IN-92 Sets the time for the pulse input at TI to reach 63% of its nominal
TI Filter frequency (when the pulse frequency is supplied in multiple steps).

114
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

Configures the slope and offset values for the output frequency based on
a pulse input at the TI terminal.

IN-93 TI Pls x1
IN-94 TI Perc y1
IN-95 TI Pls x2
IN-96 TI Perc y2

IN-97 TI Inverting Identical to IN-16~17 (refer to 5.1.4.3.1 Setting a Frequency Reference

IN-98 TI Quantizing for 0–10 V Input on page 107, V1 Inverting and V1 Quantizing.

5.1.4.6 Setting a Frequency Reference via RS-485 Communication

Control the inverter with upper-level controllers, such as PCs or PLCs, via RS-485 communication. Set
DRV-07 (Frequency reference source) to ‘6 (Int 485)’ and use the RS-485 signal input terminals (S+/S-
/SG) for communication. Refer to 10 RS-485 Communication Features on page 300.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Frequency reference
DRV 07 Freq Ref Src 6 Int 485 0–11 -
source
Integrated RS-485
01 communication inverter Int485 St ID - 1 1–MaxComID* -
ID
0 ModBus RTU
Integrated
02 communication Int485 Proto 4 BACnet 0–5 -
protocol
COM 5 Metasys-N2
Integrated Int485
03 3 9600 bps 0–8 -
communication speed BaudR
0 D8/PN/S1
Integrated 1 D8/PN/S2
04 communication frame Int485 Mode 0–3 -
configuration 2 D8/PE/S1
3 D8/PO/S1
*If COM-02 is set to ‘0’ (Modbus RTU), MaxComID is ‘250’. If set to ‘4’ (BACnet), MaxComID is ‘127’.

115
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

5.1.5 DRV-09 Control Mode

5.1.5.1 V/F Control

The speed of an AC motor when powered by an inverter is controlled by a scalar method. The
most common type of inverter control is referred to as V/F (or V/Hz). This ratio can be
calculated by taking the rated output voltage of the inverter and dividing by the maximum
frequency of the motor. EX: 460V/60 Hz. = 7.67 V/Hz. The ratio can be fixed (linear) or
variable (squared) throughout the speed range. Refer to 5.3.3 BAS-07 V/F (Voltage/Frequency)
Control on page 130 V/F Pattern.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV 09 Control mode Control Mode 0 V/F 0–1 -
MOT 02 Base frequency Base Freq 60.00 30.00–400.00 Hz

5.1.5.2 Slip Compensation Operation

Slip refers to the variation between the set frequency (speed) and actual motor rotation speed.
During operation at a set frequency, the slip will vary as the load changes. As the load increases,
slip will increase. Slip compensation is used for loads that require compensation of these speed
variations.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV 09 Control mode Control Mode 1 Slip Compen - -
Motor 0.75 kW
01 Motor capacity 2 0-15 -
Capacity (0.75kW based)
Number of motor
03 Pole Number 4 2-48 -
poles
04 Rated slip speed Rated Slip 90 (0.75kW based) 0-3000 rpm
MOT
Rated motor
05 Rated Curr 3.6 (0.75kW based) 1.0-1000.0 A
current
Motor no-load
06 Noload Curr 1.6 (0.75kW based) 0.5-1000.0 A
current
08 Motor efficiency Efficiency 72 (0.75kW based) 70-100 %

Slip Compensation Operation Setting Details

Code Description
DRV-09
Set DRV-09 to 2 (Slip Compen) to operate in slip compensation mode.
Control Mode
MOT-01
Set the capacity of the motor connected to the inverter.
Motor Capacity
MOT-03
Enter the number of poles from the motor name plate.
Pole Number
Enter the slip RPM’s from the motor name plate. This may be shown in
Hz. If so, convert to RPM’s. Slip frequency may also be calculated.
𝑅𝑝𝑚 × 𝑃
𝑓𝑠 = 𝑓𝑟 −
MOT-04 120
Rated Slip 𝑓𝑠 =Rated slip frequency
𝑓𝑟 =Rated frequency
𝑟𝑝𝑚=Number of the rated motor rotations
𝑃=Number of motor poles
MOT-05 Enter the rated current from the motor name plate.

116
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

Code Description
Rated Curr
Enter the measured no-load current at the rated frequency. If no-load
MOT-06
current is difficult to measure, enter a current equivalent to 30–50% of
Noload Curr
the rated motor current.
MOT-08
Enter the efficiency from the motor name plate.
Efficiency

For other DRV-09 control mode settings, refer to section 7 Sensorless Vector Control on page 238.

5.1.6 DRV-11 Jog Frequency

The jog operation allows for temporary control of the inverter. There are two was to apply a jog
and start command using the digital input terminals.
• Jog-1 using a digital input terminal set to JOG along with a start command (Fx or Rx).
• Jog-2 using a single digital input set to FWD JOG or REV JOG.
Refer to section 5.6.4.5 JOG operation on page165 for more details on Jog functions using digital
inputs.

5.1.7 DRV-15 Torque Boost

5.1.7.1 Manual Torque Boost

Manual torque boost enables users to adjust output voltage during starting and low speed
operation. This setting improves motor starting properties and increases low speed torque.
Configure manual torque boost for loads that require high starting torque.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
0 Manual
Torque boost
15 Torque Boost 1 Auto 1 0–2 -
options
2 Auto 2
240V, 480V
2.0
7.5~125HP
Forward torque
DRV 16 Fwd Boost 1.2 575V, 7.5~150HP 0.0–15.0 %
boost 480V
1.0
150~800HP
240V, 480V
2.0
7.5~125HP
Reverse torque
17 Rev Boost 1.2 575V, 7.5~150HP 0.0–15.0 %
boost 480V
1.0
150~800HP

117
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

Manual Torque Boost Setting Details

Code Description
DRV-16 Fwd Boost Set torque boost for forward operation.
DRV-17 Rev Boost Set torque boost for reverse operation.

Too much torque boost can result in over-excitation and motor overheating. Over current faults
may also occur.

5.1.7.2 Auto Torque Boost-1

Auto torque boost-1 enables the inverter to automatically calculate the amount of output voltage
required for torque boost based on the entered motor parameters. Because auto torque boost-1
requires motor-related parameters such as stator resistance, inductance, and no-load current, auto
tuning (MOT-11) has to be performed before auto torque boost-1 can be configured. Refer to
section 0.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV 15 Torque boost mode Torque Boost 1 Auto 1 0–2 -
MOT 11 Auto tuning Auto Tuning 3 Rs+Lsigma 0–3 -

5.1.7.3 Auto Torque Boost 2 (No Motor Parameter Tuning Required)

Auto torque boost-2 does not require Auto Tuning. DRV-23 (ATB Volt Gain) value is used to adjust
the amount of compensation required for each load. It prevents stalls or overcurrent faults at start
up.
Group Code Name LCD Display Settings Setting Range Unit
DRV 15 Torque boost mode Torque Boost 2 Auto 2 0–2 -
Auto torque boost
DRV 22 ATB Filt Gain 10 1 - 9999 msec
filter gain
Auto torque boost
DRV 23 ATB Volt Gain 100.0 0 - 300.0 %
voltage gain

118
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

5.1.8 DRV-19 Start Frequency

The inverter output frequency can be limited by setting Start and Maximum frequencies. These include
start frequency, maximum frequency, upper and lower frequency limits. Refer to 5.4.7 ADV-24
Frequency Limits - Upper/Lower Limit Frequency on page 146 for details on frequency limits.

5.1.8.1 Frequency Limit Using Max. Frequency and Start Frequency

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting

Setting Range Unit
19 Start frequency Start Freq 0.50
0.01–10.00 Hz
DRV Maximum 40.00–400.00
20 Max Freq 60.00 Hz
frequency 40.00-120.00*
* 575V
Frequency Limit Using Maximum Frequency and Start Frequency - Setting Details

Code Description
Sets the start frequency. A start frequency is a frequency at which the
DRV-19 Start Freq inverter starts voltage output. The inverter does not produce output voltage
while the frequency reference is lower than the set frequency. However, if a
deceleration stop is made while operating above the start frequency, output
voltage will continue until the operation frequency reaches a full-stop (0 Hz).
If the reference frequency is lower than the start frequency, the parameter
value will be 0.00.
All frequency selections are restricted to frequencies within the Start and
DRV-20 Max Freq Max limits. This restriction also applies when you in input a frequency
reference using the keypad.

5.1.9 DRV-21 Changing the Displayed Units (Hz-Rpm)

You can change the units used to display the operational speed of the inverter by setting DRV- 21
(Speed unit selection) to 0 (Hz Display) or 1 (Rpm Display).

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Speed unit 0 Hz Display
DRV 21 Hz/Rpm Sel 0–1 -
selection 1 Rpm Display

5.1.10 DRV-30 Changing the Displayed Units (kW/HP)

You can change the units used to display the inverter and motor capacity by setting DRV- 30 (kW/HP
Unit Sel) to 0 (kW Display) or 1 (HP Display).

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Kw/HP Unit kW/HP Unit 0 kW Display
DRV 30 0–1 -
Selection Sel 1 HP Display

119
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

5.1.11 DRV-31 Quick Start

The inverter LCD boots up to the “Quick Start” menu on power up. The Quick Start menu contains
basic parameter settings for control and protection of a standard induction motor. The default
settings are used for a standard induction motor controlled with a linear (fixed) V/Hz. pattern with a
base frequency of 60 Hz.
• During programming, use escape (ESC) to exit the Quick Start menu.
• To access the Quick Start menu when already powered up, set DRV-31 (PopUp Q. Start) to “Yes” to return
to the Run Quick Start menu.
• The inverter will display the Quick Start menu on every power up. Parameter CNF-61 (Run Quick Start?) is
set to “Yes” by default. To disable the Quick Start menu at power up, set CNF-61 to “No”.
PopUp Q. 0 No
DRV 31 Quick Start Pop Up menu 0-1
Start 1 Yes
Run 0 No
CNF 61 Quick Start menu setting 0-1
QuickStart? 1 Yes

Refer to section 2.6 Run Quick Start on page 52 for more details on the Quick Start Menu.

120
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

5.2 MOT Group (MOT)

5.2.1 MOT-01 Set the motor related parameters.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
01 Motor capacity Motor Capacity Varies 0-30 -
30.00–400.00 (Hz)
02 Base Frequency Base Freq 60.00(Hz.) 40.00-120.00(Hz) IM S/L
30.00–180.00 (Hz) PM S/L2
03 Number of motor poles Pole Number 4 2-48 -
MOT
04 Rated slip speed Rated Slip Based on MOT-01 0-3000 rpm
05 Rated motor current Rated Curr Based on MOT-01 0.0-1000.0 A
06 Motor no-load current Noload Curr Based on MOT-01 0.0-1000.0 A
07 Motor rated voltage Motor Volt 230V/460V/575V 0, 170-480 (V), 525-600 (V)
08 Motor efficiency Efficiency Based on MOT-01 70-100 %

Motor Data Setting Details

Code Description
MOT-01
Set the capacity of the motor connected to the inverter.
Motor Capacity
MOT-02
Set the name plate frequency of the motor connected to the inverter.
Base Frequency
MOT-03
Enter the number of poles from the motor name plate.
Pole Number
Enter the slip RPM’s from the motor name plate. This may be shown in
Hz. If so, convert to RPM’s. Slip frequency may also be calculated.
𝑅𝑝𝑚 × 𝑃
𝑓𝑠 = 𝑓𝑟 −
MOT-04 120
Rated Slip 𝑓𝑠 =Rated slip frequency
𝑓𝑟 =Rated frequency
𝑟𝑝𝑚=Number of the rated motor rotations
𝑃=Number of motor poles
MOT-05
Enter the rated current from the motor name plate.
Rated Curr
Enter the measured no-load current at the rated frequency. If no-load
MOT-06
current is difficult to measure, enter a current equivalent to 30–50% of
Noload Curr
the rated motor current.
MOT-07
Enter the motor rated voltage. See Output Voltage Setting below.
Motor Volt
MOT-08
Enter the efficiency from the motor name plate.
Efficiency

5.2.2 MOT-07 Output Voltage Setting

Output voltage settings are required when a motor’s rated voltage differs from the input voltage to
the inverter. Set MOT-07 to configure the motor’s rated operating voltage. The set voltage
becomes the output voltage of the inverter’s base frequency. When the inverter operates above the
base frequency and when the motor’s voltage rating is lower than the input voltage at the inverter,
the inverter adjusts the voltage and supplies the motor with the voltage set at MOT-07 (motor rated
voltage). If the motor’s rated voltage is higher than the input voltage at the inverter, the inverter will
supply the inverter input voltage to the motor.

121
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

If MOT-07 (motor rated voltage) is set to ‘0’, the inverter corrects the output voltage based on the
input voltage in the stopped condition. If the frequency is higher than the base frequency, when the
input voltage is lower than the parameter setting, the input voltage will be the inverter output
voltage.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
0, 170-480 (V), 170-480
MOT 07 Motor rated voltage Rated Volt V
525-600 (V) 525-600

5.2.3 MOT-09 Trim Power %

When viewing “Output Power”, use Trim Power % (MOT-09) to scale the displayed power when
compared to measured power.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Trim Power
MOT 09 Trim Power % 100 (%) 70-130 %
display
If the output power displayed on the keypad is lower than expected, increase the set value at MOT-09
(Trim Power %). If the output power displayed on the keypad is higher than expected, decrease this
set value. The output power display is calculated using voltage and current. Use MOT-09 to correct
the error that may occur when the power factor is low.

5.2.4 MOT-10 Power Source - Voltage and Frequency

Set inverter supply (input) voltage. The Low voltage fault level changes automatically based on the set
voltage in MOT-10.

Parameter Setting
Group Code Name LCD Display Unit
Setting Range
240V 240 170–240
MOT 10 Input power voltage AC Input Volt 480V 480 320–480 V
600V 575 446-660

Select the frequency of input power. When the frequency is set to 50 Hz, the frequencies set for
60 Hz (including the maximum frequency and base frequency) will change to 50 Hz. Likewise,
changing the input frequency setting from 50 Hz to 60 Hz will change all related settings from 50
Hz to 60 Hz.

Parameter Setting
Group Code Name LCD Display Unit
Setting Range
BAS 10 Input power frequency 60/50 Hz Src 0 60Hz 0–1 -

122
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

5.2.5 MOT-11 Auto Tuning

The motor parameters can be measured automatically and are used for auto torque boost or
sensorless vector control.

Example - Auto-Tuning Based on 7.5 HP (5.5kW), 230V, 60Hz, 4 Pole Motor

Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
7.5 HP
01 Motor capacity Motor Capacity 1 0-30 -
(5.5 kW)
03 Motor pole number Pole Number 4 2-48 -
04 Rated slip speed Rated Slip 45 0-3000 rpm
Rated motor
05 Rated Curr 21.0 1.0-1000.0 A
current
Motor no-load
06 Noload curr 7.1 0.5-1000.0 A
current
Motor rated
07 Motor Volt 230 170-480 V
voltage
MOT
08 Motor efficiency Efficiency 85 70-100 %
11 Auto tuning Auto Tuning 0 None - -
Depends on the
12 Stator resistance Rs .314 Ω
motor setting
Leakage Depends on the
13 Lsigma 3.19 mH
inductance motor setting
Depends on the
14 Stator inductance Ls - mH
motor setting
Rotor time
15 Tr - 25-5000 ms
constant

Auto Tuning Default Parameter Settings

Motor Rated No-load Rated Slip Stator Leakage

kW HP
Capacity Current(A) Current(A) Frequency(Hz) Resistance(Ω) Inductance(mH)
5.5 7.5 21 7.1 1.5 0.314 3.19
7.5 10 28.2 9.3 1.33 0.169 2.844
230V 11 15 40 12.4 1 0.12 1.488
15 20 53.6 15.5 1 0.084 1.118
18.5 25 65.6 19 1 0.0676 0.819

Motor Rated No-load Rated Slip Stator Leakage

kW HP
Capacity Current(A) Current(A) Frequency(Hz) Resistance(Ω) Inductance(mH)
5.5 7.5 12.1 4.1 1.5 0.94 9.62
7.5 10 16.3 5.4 1.33 0.52 8.53
11 15 23.2 7.2 1 0.36 4.48
15 20 31 9 1 0.25 3.38
460V 18.5 25 38 11 1 0.168 2.457
22 30 44.5 12.5 1 0.168 2.844
30 40 60.5 16.9 1 0.1266 2.133
37 50 74.4 20.1 1 0.1014 1.704
45 60 90.3 24.4 1 0.0843 1.422
123
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

Motor Rated No-load Rated Slip Stator Leakage

kW HP
Capacity Current(A) Current(A) Frequency(Hz) Resistance(Ω) Inductance(mH)
55 75 106.6 28.8 1 0.0693 1.167
75 100 141.6 35.4 1 0.0507 0.852
90 125 167.6 41.9 1 0.0399 0.715
110 150 203.5 48.8 1 0.0326 0.585
132 200 242.3 58.1 1 0.0272 0.488
160 250 290.5 69.7 1 0.0224 0.403
185 300 335 77 1 0.021 0.38
250 400 467.8 104.9 1 0.1455 2.615
315 500 604 132.8 1 0.114 2.04
400 650 782 161.2 1 0.0906 1.616
500 800 985.3 206.2 1 0.07 1.33

Motor Rated No-load Rated Slip Stator Leakage

kW HP
Capacity CurrentA) Current(A) Frequency(Hz) Resistance(Ω) Inductance(mH)
5.5 7.5 7.5 3.6 1.0 1.330 21.83
7.5 10 10.0 4.1 1.33 0.859 19.36
11 15 14.6 6.0 1.16 0.521 10.17
15 20 19.2 8.2 1 0.298 7.67
18.5 25 24.0 8.2 1 0.276 5.58
22 30 29.0 12.8 1 0.189 6.46
575V 30 40 37.0 13.7 0.83 0.1246 4.841
37 50 45.0 14.2 1 0.1109 3.868
45 60 55.0 18.7 0.66 0.1085 3.228
55 75 68.7 20.9 0.66 0.0781 2.649
75 100 89.6 22.9 0.5 0.0459 1.934
90 125 115.0 35.8 0.5 0.0357 1.623
110 150 136.0 39.2 0.5 0.0277 1.328

Auto Tuning Parameter Setting Details

Code Description
MOT-01 ~
Enter motor parameters prior to performing Auto Tuning.
MOT-08
Select one of the auto tuning options and then press the [ENT] button to run the auto
tuning. After Auto Tuning is complete, the parameter value will return to ‘0’.
Setting Function
0 None Auto tuning function is not enabled.
Measures motor parameters during rotation. These include MOT-
12 ~ MOT-15 (stator resistance (Rs), leakage inductance
MOT-11
(Lsigma), stator inductance (Ls), and rotor time constant (Tr). If
Auto Tuning All (rotating
1 the load is connected to the motor, the parameters may not be
type)
measured accurately. For accurate measurements, remove the
load attached to the motor. However, note that the rotor time
constant (Tr) will be measured in a stopped position.
All (static Measures all parameters while the motor is in the stopped
2
type) position. These include MOT-12 ~ MOT-15 (stator resistance

124
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

Code Description
(Rs), leakage inductance (Lsigma), stator inductance (Ls),), rotor
time constant (Tr). The measurements are not affected when the
load is connected to the motor. However, do not rotate the motor
from the load side.
Rs+Lsigma Measures parameters while the motor is rotating. The measured
3 (rotating motor parameters are used for auto torque boost or sensorless
type) vector control.
Measures the rotor time constant (Tr) with the motor in the
Tr (static
4 stopped position and Control Mode (DRV-09) is set to IM
type)
Sensorless
When DRV-09 (Control Mode) is set to 4 (PM Sensorless), the motor
All PM*
parameters are measured in the stopped position. Check the motor’s
nameplate for motor specifications, such as the base frequency (MOT-
*230V/460V
6 02), motor rated voltage (MOT-07), pole number (MOT-03). Then,
only, not
perform auto tuning by setting MOT-11 to 4 [All (PM)]. The auto tuning
applicable to
operation will configure parameters MOT-16 ~ MOT-19 (Rs PM, Ld
575V motors
PM, Lq PM, and PM Flux Ref).
MOT-12~15
(IM) Displays motor parameters measured by auto tuning. For parameters that are not included
MOT-16~22 in the auto tuning measurement list, the default setting will be displayed.
(PM)

Perform auto tuning ONLY after the motor has completely stopped running.
Before you run auto tuning, enter the motor pole number, rated slip, rated current, rated
voltage and efficiency from the motor’s name plate. The default parameter setting is
used for values that are not entered.
Parameter values measured with static auto tuning may be less accurate compared with
rotation type auto tuning where parameters are measured while the motor is rotating.
Inaccuracy of the measured parameters may degrade the performance of sensorless
operation. Therefore, only run static type auto tuning when the motor cannot be rotated
(when gearing and belts cannot be separated easily, or when the motor cannot be
separated mechanically from the load).
In PM synchronous motor sensorless control mode before performing auto tuning enter the
motor’s name plate and other the motor specifications, such as the base frequency,
pole number, rated current and voltage, and efficiency, as the detected parameter
values may not be accurate if the motor’s base specifications are not entered.

125
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

5.3 Basic Group (BAS)

5.3.1 BAS-01 2nd Operating Mode - 2nd Source

Second (2nd) Operating Mode is commonly referred to as Hand-Off-Auto switching or Local-Off-

Remote switching. The inverter can be operated (Start/Stop and Reference Frequency) by two
different operating modes and switch between them as required. The first Start/Stop source and
Reference Frequency source are set with parameters DRV-06 and DRV-07. The second
Start/Stop source and Reference Frequency source are set with parameters BAS-01 and BAS-02.
A digital input terminal set to ‘17, 2nd Source’ will provide the switching input. Set the reference
frequency after switching between operating modes as the inverter will run at the selected
reference frequency.

Select one of the digital input terminals (P1~P7) and set the corresponding parameter (IN-65 ~ IN-
71) to ‘17 2nd Source’. When the digital input is open (or off), parameters DRV-06 and DRV-07
operate the inverter (start/stop and speed). When the input is closed (or on), parameters BAS-01
and BAS-02 operate the inverter (start/stop and speed).

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
06 Command source Cmd Source 1 Fx/Rx-1 0–5 -
DRV Frequency
07 Freq Ref Src 2 V1 0–11 -
reference source
2nd Command
01 Cmd 2nd Src 0 Keypad 0–5 -
source
BAS
2nd Frequency
02 Freq 2nd Src 0 KeyPad-1 0–11 -
reference source
Px terminal Px Define
IN 65~71 17 2nd Source 0–42 -
configuration (Px: P1–P7)

2nd Operation Mode Setting Details

Code Description
Select a 2nd Start/Stop source (BAS-01) and a 2nd Reference
Frequency source (BAS-02). When the digital input set to 2nd source is
BAS-01 Cmd 2nd Src closed, parameters BAS-01 and BAS-02 operate the inverter.
BAS-02 Freq 2nd Src
The 2nd command source settings cannot be changed while operating
with DRV-06 and DRV-07 (Main Sources).

Before switching operating modes using 2nd source, check that the 2nd command
source (Start/Stop) is set correctly. The operating state will change based on the
status of the Start/Stop input.

• Depending on the parameter settings, the inverter may stop operating when you switch
the operating modes. If either DRV-06 (Start/Stop) or BAS-01 (2nd Start/Stop) are set
to Keypad, when switching to Keypad with 2nd source, the inverter decels to a stop.
If both sources are Fx/Rx-1, inverter keeps running when switched to 2nd source
and back to Main (DRV-06).

126
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

5.3.2 BAS-03 Operating with Auxiliary References

Frequency references can be configured with various calculated conditions that use the main
frequency reference and an auxiliary frequency reference simultaneously. The main frequency
reference (DRV-06) is used as the operating frequency, while the auxiliary reference is used to
modify and fine-tune the main reference.

Parameter Setting
Group Code Name LCD Display Unit
Setting Range
Frequency reference
DRV 06 Freq Ref Src 0 Keypad-1 0–12 -
source
Auxiliary frequency
03 Aux Ref Src 1 V1 0–4 -
reference source
Auxiliary frequency
Aux Calc
BAS 04 reference calculation 0 M+(G*A) 0–7 -
Type
type
Auxiliary frequency
05 Aux Ref Gain 0.0 -200.0–200.0 %
reference gain
Px terminal
IN 65–71 Px Define 31 dis Aux Ref 0-42 -
configuration

Auxiliary Reference Setting Details

Code Description
Set the input type to be used for the auxiliary frequency reference.
Setting Description
0 None Auxiliary frequency reference is disabled.
Sets the V1 (voltage) terminal at the control terminal block as the source
1 V1
of auxiliary frequency reference.
BAS-03
Aux Ref Src Sets the V2 (voltage) terminal at the control terminal block as the source
3 V2
of auxiliary frequency reference (SW2 must be set to “voltage”).
Sets the I2 (current) terminal at the control terminal block as the source of
4 I2
auxiliary frequency reference (SW2 must be set to “current”).
Sets the TI (pulse) terminal at the control terminal block as the source of
5 Pulse
auxiliary frequency reference.
The table below list the available calculated conditions for the main and auxiliary
frequency references. Set the auxiliary reference gain with BAS-05 (Aux Ref Gain) to
configure the auxiliary reference and set the percentage to be reflected when
calculating the main reference. Note that items 4–7 below may result in either plus (+)
or minus (-) references (forward or reverse operation) even when unipolar analog inputs
are used.
Configuration Formula for frequency reference
0 M+(G*A) Main reference+(BAS-05xBAS-03xIN-01)
1 M*(G*A) x(BAS-05xBAS-03)
BAS-04 2 M/(G*A) Main reference/(BAS-05xBAS-03)
Aux Calc Type 3 M+{M*(G*A)} Main reference+{Main reference x(BAS-05xBAS-03)}
4 M+G*2*(A-50) Main reference+BAS-05x2x(BAS-03–50)x IN-01
5 M*{G*2*(A-50)} Main reference x{BAS-05x2x(BAS-03–50)}
6 M/{G*2*(A-50)} Main reference/{BAS-05x2x(BAS-03–50)}
7 M+M*G*2*(A-50) Main reference+Main reference x BAS-05x2x(BAS-03–50)
M: Main frequency reference (Hz or rpm)
G: Auxiliary reference gain (%)
A: Auxiliary frequency reference (Hz or rpm) or gain (%)

127
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

Code Description
BAS-05
Adjust the gain of the auxiliary reference source selected in BAS-03 (Aux Ref Src).
Aux Ref Gain
Set one of the multi-function (digital) input terminals to 31 (dis Aux Ref) and activate it to
IN-65–71
disable the auxiliary frequency reference. The inverter will operate using the main
Px Define
frequency reference only.

The tables below provide examples of using the available calculated conditions for the main and
auxiliary frequency references. Refer to the table to see how the calculations apply with each
example. When the maximum frequency value is high, output frequency deviation may result due
to analog input variation and deviations in the calculations.
Auxiliary Reference Operation Example #1
• Keypad Frequency Setting is Main Frequency and V1 Analog Voltage is Auxiliary
Frequency
• Main frequency: Keypad (operation frequency 30Hz)
• Maximum frequency setting (DRV-20): 400Hz
• Auxiliary frequency setting (BAS-03): V1[Display by percentage(%) or auxiliary frequency
(Hz) depending on the operation setting condition]
• Auxiliary reference gain setting (BAS-05): 50%
• Analog Input scaling parameters IN-01–58 are at factory default settings

Example: an input voltage of 6V is supplied to V1, and the frequency corresponding to 10V is
60Hz. The table below shows the auxiliary frequency A as 36Hz[=60Hz X (6V/10V)] or 60%[=
100% X•(6V/10V)].
Setting* Calculating final command frequency**
0 M[Hz]+(G[%]*A[Hz]) 30Hz(M)+(50%(G)x36Hz(A))=48Hz
1 M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%]) 30Hz(M)x(50%(G)x60%(A))=9Hz
2 M[Hz]/(G[%]*A[%]) 30Hz(M)/(50%(G)x60%(A))=100Hz
3 M[Hz]+{M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%])} 30Hz(M)+{30[Hz]x(50%(G)x60%(A))}=39Hz
4 M[Hz]+G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])[Hz] 30Hz(M)+50%(G)x2x(60%(A)–50%)x60Hz=36Hz
5 M[HZ]*{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])} 30Hz(M)x{50%(G)x2x(60%(A)–50%)}=3Hz
6 M[HZ]/{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])} 30Hz(M)/{50%(G)x2x(60%–50%)}=300Hz
7 M[HZ]+M[HZ]*G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%]) 30Hz(M)+30Hz(M)x50%(G)x2x(60%(A)–50%)=33Hz
• *M: main frequency reference (Hz or rpm)
• G: auxiliary reference gain (%)
• A: auxiliary frequency reference (Hz or rpm) or gain (%).
• **If the frequency setting is changed to rpm, it is converted to rpm instead of Hz.

128
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

Auxiliary Reference Operation Example #2

• Keypad Frequency Setting is Main Frequency and I2 Analog Voltage is Auxiliary Frequency
• Main frequency: Keypad (Operation frequency 30Hz)
• Maximum frequency setting (DRV-20): 400Hz
• Auxiliary frequency setting (BAS-03): I2 [Display by percentage(%) or auxiliary
frequency(Hz) depending on the operation setting condition]
• Auxiliary reference gain setting (BAS-05): 50%
• Analog Input scaling parameters IN-01–58 are at factory default settings

Example: an input current of 10.4mA is applied to I2, with the frequency corresponding to 20mA
of 60Hz. The table below shows auxiliary frequency A as 24Hz(=60[Hz] X {(10.4[mA]-
4[mA])/(20[mA] - 4[mA])} or 40%(=100[%] X {(10.4[mA] - 4[mA])/(20[mA] - 4[mA])}.
Setting* Calculating final command frequency**
0 M[Hz]+(G[%]*A[Hz]) 30Hz(M)+(50%(G)x24Hz(A))=42Hz
1 M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%]) 30Hz(M)x(50%(G)x40%(A))=6Hz
2 M[Hz]/(G[%]*A[%]) 30Hz(M)/(50%(G)x40%(A))=150Hz
3 M[Hz]+{M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%])} 30Hz(M)+{30[Hz]x(50%(G)x40%(A))}=36Hz
4 M[Hz]+G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])[Hz] 30Hz(M)+50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–50%)x60Hz=24Hz
5 M[HZ]*{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%]) 30Hz(M)x{50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–50%)} = -3Hz(Reverse)
6 M[HZ]/{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])} 30Hz(M)/{50%(G)x2x(60%–40%)} = -300Hz(Reverse)
7 M[HZ]+M[HZ]*G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%]) 30Hz(M)+30Hz(M)x50%(G)x2x (40%(A)–50%)=27Hz
• *M: main frequency reference (Hz or rpm)
• G: auxiliary reference gain (%)
• A: auxiliary frequency reference Hz or rpm) or gain (%).
• **If the frequency setting is changed to rpm, it is converted to rpm instead of Hz.

Auxiliary Reference Operation Example #3

• V1 is Main Frequency and I2 is Auxiliary Frequency
• Main frequency: V1 (frequency command setting to 5V and is set to 30Hz)
• Maximum frequency setting (DRV-20): 400Hz
• Auxiliary frequency (BAS-03): I2[Display by percentage (%) or auxiliary frequency (Hz)
depending on the operation setting condition]
• Auxiliary reference gain (BAS-05): 50%
• Analog Input scaling parameters IN-01–58 are at factory default settings

Example: an input current of 10.4mA is applied to I2, with the frequency corresponding to 20mA
of 60Hz. The table below shows auxiliary frequency A as 24Hz(=60[Hz]x{(10.4[mA]-
4[mA])/(20[mA]-4[mA])} or 40%(=100[%] x {(10.4[mA] - 4[mA]) /(20 [mA] - 4[mA])}.

Setting* Calculating final command frequency**

0 M[Hz]+(G[%]*A[Hz]) 30Hz(M)+(50%(G)x24Hz(A))=42Hz
1 M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%]) 30Hz(M)x(50%(G)x40%(A))=6Hz
2 M[Hz]/(G[%]*A[%]) 30Hz(M)/(50%(G)x40%(A))=150Hz

129
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

3 M[Hz]+{M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%])} 30Hz(M)+{30[Hz]x(50%(G)x40%(A))}=36Hz
4 M[Hz]+G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])[Hz] 30Hz(M)+50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–50%)x60Hz=24Hz
5 M[HZ]*{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])} 30Hz(M)x{50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–50%)}=-3Hz(Reverse)
6 M[HZ]/{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])} 30Hz(M)/{50%(G)x2x(60%–40%)}=-300Hz(Reverse)
7 M[HZ]+M[HZ]*G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%]) 30Hz(M)+30Hz(M)x50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–50%)=27Hz
• *M: main frequency reference (Hz or rpm)
• G: auxiliary reference gain (%)
• A: auxiliary frequency reference (Hz or rpm) or gain (%).
• **If the frequency setting is changed to rpm, it is converted to rpm instead of Hz.

Note
When the maximum frequency value is high, output frequency deviation may result due to
analog input variation and deviations in the calculations.

5.3.3 BAS-07 V/F (Voltage/Frequency) Control

Configure the inverter’s output voltages, slope, and output patterns to achieve a target output
frequency with V/F control. The amount of torque boost used during low frequency operations can
also be adjusted.

5.3.3.1 Linear V/F Pattern Operation

A linear V/F pattern configures the inverter output voltage and frequency to increase or decrease
at a fixed rate throughout the speed range. This V/F characteristic is referred to as a constant V/Hz
(or V/F) ratio and is applied to loads that require constant torque regardless of speed.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV 09 Control mode Control Mode 0 V/F 0–1 -
MOT 02 Base frequency Base Freq 60.00 30.00–400.00 Hz
DRV 19 Start frequency Start Freq 0.50 0.01–10.00 Hz
BAS 07 V/F pattern V/F Pattern 0 Linear 0–3 -

Linear V/F Pattern Setting Details

Code Description
Sets the base frequency. A base frequency is the inverter’s output frequency
MOT-02 when running at the motor’s rated voltage. Refer to the motor’s name plate to
Base Freq set this parameter value.

130
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

Sets the start frequency. A start frequency is the frequency at which the
inverter starts to output voltage. If a deceleration stop is made while
operating above the start frequency, output voltage will continue until the
operating frequency reaches a full-stop (0 Hz).

DRV-19
Start Freq

5.3.3.2 Square Reduction V/F Pattern Operation

Square reduction V/F pattern is ideal for variable torque loads such as fans and pumps that do not
require high torque at frequencies lower than the base frequency. The inverter provides a non-
linear V/F acceleration and deceleration pattern to sustain enough torque throughout the speed
range.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
1 Square
BAS 07 V/F pattern V/F Pattern 0–3 -
3 Square2

Square Reduction V/F pattern Operation - Setting Details

Code Description
Sets the parameter value to ‘1 (Square)’ or ‘2 (Square2)’ according to the
load’s start characteristics.
Setting Function
BAS-07 V/F 1 Square The inverter produces output voltage proportional to 1.5
Pattern square of the operating frequency.
3 Square2 The inverter produces output voltage proportional to 2
square of the operating frequency. This setup is ideal for
variable torque loads such as fans or pumps.

131
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

5.3.3.3 User V/F Pattern Operation

The H2 Series inverter allows the configuration of a user-defined V/F pattern to suit unique load
characteristics of motors.

Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
07 V/F pattern V/F Pattern 2 User V/F 0–3 -
0–Maximum
41 User Frequency 1 User Freq 1 15.00 Hz
frequency
42 User Voltage 1 User Volt 1 25 0–100% %
0–Maximum
43 User Frequency 2 User Freq 2 30.00 Hz
frequency
BAS 44 User Voltage 2 User Volt 2 50 0–100% %
0–Maximum
45 User Frequency 3 User Freq 3 45.00 Hz
frequency
46 User Voltage 3 User Volt 3 75 0–100% %
Maximum 0–Maximum
47 User Frequency 4 User Freq 4 Hz
frequency frequency
48 User Voltage 4 User Volt 4 100 0–100% %

User V/F pattern Setting Details

Code Description
BAS-41 User Freq 1 – Set the parameter values to assign arbitrary frequencies (User Freq x) for
BAS-48 User Volt 4 start and maximum frequencies. Voltages can also be set to correspond
with each frequency, and for each user voltage (User Volt x).

The 100% output voltage in the figure below is based on the parameter settings of BAS-15 (motor
rated voltage). If BAS-15 is set to ‘0’ it will be based on the input voltage.

When a normal induction motor is in use, care must be taken not to configure the output
pattern away from a linear V/F pattern. Non-linear V/F patterns may cause insufficient
motor torque or motor overheating due to over-excitation.
When a user V/F pattern is in use, forward torque boost (DRV-16) and reverse torque boost
(DRV-17) do not operate.

132
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

5.3.3.4 BAS-50 Multi-step Frequencies (Fixed Speed Inputs)

Multi-step operations (Fixed Speed Inputs) can be assigned to the Px terminals. Seven steps (1
through 7) can be configured using (3) digital input terminals. Step 0 uses the frequency reference
source set with DRV-07. Set Px terminals to 7 (Speed-L), 8 (Speed-M) and 9 (Speed-H). These are
recognized as binary inputs (000 ~ 111) and work in combination with Fx or Rx run commands. The
inverter operates according to the frequencies set with parameters BAS-50–56 and the binary
command combinations.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Multi-step 0.00, Low
BAS 50~56 Step Freq - 1–7 10.00~60.00 Hz. Hz
frequency 1–7 Freq– High Freq*
7 Speed-L -
Px terminal Px Define
65~71 8 Speed-M 0–42 -
configuration (Px: P1~P7)
IN 9 Speed-H -
Multi-step
89 command delay InCheck Time 1 1–5000 ms
time

Multi-step Frequency Setting Details

Code Description

BAS-50 ~ 56 Configure multi-step frequencies 1~7.

Choose the terminals to setup as multi-step inputs. Set the relevant

parameters (IN-65–71) to 7 (Speed-L), 8 (Speed-M), or 9 (Speed-H).
Example below using terminals P5, P6, and P7 have been set to Speed-L,
Speed- M and Speed-H respectively (default settings). The following multi-
step operation will be available.

Speed Fx/Rx P7 P6 P5
0 ✓ - - -
1 ✓ - - ✓
2 ✓ - ✓ -
3 ✓ - ✓ ✓
4 ✓ ✓ - -
Px ✓ ✓
IN-65~71 5 - ✓
Define
6 ✓ ✓ ✓ -
7 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

133
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

Set a time interval for the inverter to check for additional terminal block
IN-89 inputs after receiving an input signal.
InCheck Time After adjusting IN-89 to 100 ms and an input signal is received at P6, the
inverter will search for inputs at other terminals for 100 ms, before
proceeding to accelerate or decelerate based on the configuration at P6.

5.3.3.5 BAS-69 Configuring Acc/Dec Time - Switch Frequency

Set a switch frequency (BAS-69) to switch between 2 different Accel times and 2 different Decel
times. Parameters BAS-70 (step accel time1) and BAS-71 (step decel time1) are in effect below
the switch frequency. Parameters DRV-03 (Accel time) and DRV-04 (Decel time) are in effect
above the switch frequency.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
20.0 7.5~125HP
03 Acceleration time Acc Time 60.0 150~400HP 0.0–600.0 sec
100.0 500~800HP
DRV
30.0 7.5~125HP
04 Deceleration time Dec Time 90.0 150~400HP 0.0–600.0 sec
150.0 500~800HP
Multi-step
70 Acc Time-1 20.0 0.0–600.0 sec
acceleration time1
BAS
Multi-step
71 Dec Time-1 20.0 0.0–600.0 sec
deceleration time1
Acc/Dec time Xcel Change 0–Maximum
BAS 69 30.00 Hz
switch frequency Fr frequency

Acc/Dec Time Switch Frequency Setting Details

Code Description
Set the Acc/Dec transition frequency (BAS-69). Acc/Dec slopes configured at
BAS-70 and BAS-71 will be used when the inverter’s operating frequency is
at or below the switch frequency. When the operating frequency exceeds the
switch frequency, Acc/Dec slopes configured at DRV-03 and DRV-04 will be
BAS-69
used. If you configure any of the P1~P7 digital input terminals for multi-step
Xcel Change Fr
Acc/Dec slopes (XCEL-L, XCEL-M, XCEL-H), inverter operates in
accordance with the multi-step Acc/Dec inputs regardless of the Acc/Dec
switch frequency. The ‘Xcel Change Fr’ parameter is applied only when ADV-24
(Freq Limit Mode) is set to ‘NO’.

134
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

5.3.3.6 BAS-70 Multi-step Acc/Dec Time Configuration

Digital input terminals can be configured for different Acc and Dec times. Up to 7 acceleration
times and 7 deceleration times can be set. Choose (up to 3) digital input terminals (P1 ~ P7) and
set the corresponding parameters (IN-65~IN-71) to 11 (XCEL-L), 12 (XCEL-M) and 13 (XCEL-H).
These are recognized as binary inputs (000 ~ 111). Acc times and Dec times are set with BAS-70
through BAS-83.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
20.0 7.5~125HP
Acceleration 60.0 150~400HP
03 time Acc Time 100.0 500~800HP 0.0–600.0 sec
30.0 7.5~125HP
DRV Deceleration 90.0 150~400HP
04 time Dec Time 150.0 500~800HP 0.0–600.0 sec
Multi-step Acc Time 1–7 x.xx secs 0.0–600.0 sec
BAS 70~83 Acceleration/ Dec Time 1–7 x.xx secs 0.0–600.0 sec
Deceleration
time1–7
11 XCEL-L
65~71 Px terminal Px Define (Px:
12 XCEL-M 0–42
configuration P1–P7) -
13 XCEL-H
IN Multi-step
89 command delay In Check Time 1 1–5000 ms
time

135
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

Acc/Dec Time Setup via Multi-function Terminals – Setting Details

Code Description

BAS-70–82
Set multi-step acceleration time1–7.
Acc Time 1–7
BAS-71–83
Set multi-step deceleration time1–7.
Dec Time 1–7
Choose and configure the terminals to use for multi-step Acc/Dec time
inputs
Configuration Description
11 XCEL-L Acc/Dec command-L
12 XCEL-M Acc/Dec command-M
13 XCEL-H Acc/Dec command-H
Acc/Dec commands are recognized as binary code inputs and will control the
acceleration and deceleration based on parameter values set with BAS-70–
82 and BAS-71–83.
Example: The P6 and P7 terminals are set as XCEL-L and XCEL- M
respectively, the following operation will be available.

IN-65~71
Px Define (P1~P7)

Acc/Dec time P7 P6
0 - -
1 - ✓
2 ✓ -
3 ✓ ✓
[Multi-function terminal P6, P7 configuration]
Set the time for the inverter to check for other terminal block inputs. If IN-89 is
set to 100 ms and a signal is supplied to the P6 terminal, the inverter
IN-89 In Check Time searches for other inputs over the next 100 ms. When the time expires, the
Acc/Dec time will be set based on the input received at P6.

136
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

5.4 Advance Group (ADV)

5.4.1 ADV-01 Acc/Dec Pattern Configuration

A Linear Accel and Decel pattern features a linear increase (and decrease) of the output
frequency at a fixed rate. An S-curve pattern provides a smoother and more gradual increase
(and/or decrease) of output frequency. Acc/Dec slope patterns can be configured to enhance and
smooth the inverter’s acceleration and deceleration curves. An S-curve can be set with ADV-01
(accel) and ADV-02 (decel) and slope can be adjusted using ADV-03 ~ ADV-06.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
BAS 08 Acc/Dec reference Ramp T 0 Max Freq 0–1 -
mode
01 Acceleration pattern Acc Pattern 0 Linear -
0–1
02 Deceleration pattern Dec Pattern 1 S-curve -
03 S-curve Acc start Acc S Start 40 1–100 %
gradient
04 S-curve Acc end Acc S End 40 1–100 %
ADV gradient
05 S-curve Dec start Dec S Start 40 1–100 %
gradient
06 S-curve Dec end Dec S End 40 1–100 %
gradient

Acc/Dec Pattern Setting Details

Code Description
ADV-03 sets the slope at the start of the acceleration curve. The set
percentage applies to 50% below the first half of the total acceleration
curve. When the frequency reference is set at 60 Hz and ADV-03 is set
ADV-03 Acc S to 50%, S-Curve acceleration will be applied to 0–15 Hz. (50% below half
Start the reference frequency). Linear acceleration will be applied to the 15-30
Hz. section.
ADV-04 sets the slope at the end of the acceleration curve. The set
percentage applies to the second half of the total acceleration curve
where operating frequency is reaching the reference frequency. When
ADV-04 Acc S End the reference frequency is 60 Hz. and ADV-04 is set to 50%, S-Curve
acceleration will be applied to 45-60 Hz. (50% above half the reference
frequency). Linear acceleration will be applied to the 30~45 Hz. section.
ADV-05 Dec S Sets the slope at the start of S-curve deceleration. S-Curve
Start deceleration is applied to the portion of the deceleration curve that is
50% above half the reference frequency (60-45 Hz.). Same as S-Curve
End acceleration.
ADV-06 Dec S End Sets the slope at the end of S-curve deceleration. S-Curve
deceleration is applied to the portion of the deceleration curve that is
50% below half the reference frequency (15-0 Hz.). Same as S-Curve
start acceleration.

137
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

Note
The Actual Acc/Dec time during an S-curve application
The actual Acc/Dec times become greater than user defined Acc/Dec times when S-curve
Acc/Dec patterns are applied. Example: The Actual Acc/Dec time during an S-curve
application.
Actual acceleration time = DRV-03 + (DRV-03 x ADV-03/2) + (DRV-03 x ADV-04/2)
Settings: DRV-03 = 10 secs., ADV-03 = 50%, ADV-04 = 50%
Actual acceleration time = 10 + (10 x .5/2) + (10 x .5/2) = 15 secs.
Actual deceleration time = DRV-04 + (DRV-04 x ADV-05/2) + (DRV-04 x ADV-06/2).

Note that actual Acc/Dec times become greater than user defined Acc/Dec times (DRV-03 and
DRV-04) when S-curve Acc/Dec patterns are in use.

138
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

5.4.2 ADV-07 Start Mode Setting

Select the start mode to use when a run command is applied with the motor in the stopped
condition. Select 0 (Acceleration Start) or 1 (DC Brake Start). Excitation current (Pre-Excite) can
also be applied by activating a digital input.

5.4.2.1 Acceleration Start

Acceleration start is the typical start mode used when starting a motor from a stopped condition. If
there are no other settings applied, the motor accelerates to the frequency reference when the run
command is applied.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
ADV 07 Start mode Start mode 0 Acc 0–1 -

5.4.2.2 Start After DC Braking

This start mode supplies a DC voltage and current for a set amount of time to provide DC braking
before the inverter starts to accelerate the motor. Use when the motor is rotating due to its inertia.
DC braking will stop the motor allowing the motor to accelerate from a stopped condition. DC
braking can also be used when a mechanical brake connected to a motor and constant torque is
required after the release of the mechanical brake. DC Brake at start does not operate in
sensorless vector mode (DRV-09 set to 3).

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
07 Start mode Start Mode 1 DC-Start 0–1 -
DC-Start
ADV 12 Start DC braking time 0.00 0.00–60.00 sec
Time
13 DC Injection Level DC Inj Level 50 0–200 %

The amount of DC braking required is based on the motor’s rated current. If the DC Brake
current is too high or brake time is too long, the motor may overheat or be damaged. The
maximum amount of DC current is limited to the inverter rated current.

139
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

5.4.3 ADV-08 Stop Mode Setting

Select a stop mode to stop the inverter operation. Select from 0 (deceleration), 1 (DC Brake), 2
(Free-Run (coast)) or 4 (Power Braking).

5.4.3.1 Deceleration Stop

Deceleration stop is a typical stop mode used when stopping a motor. If there are no other settings
applied, the inverter decelerates the motor from the reference frequency down to 0 Hz and stops.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
ADV 08 Stop mode Stop Mode 0 Dec 0–4 -

5.4.3.2 Stop After DC Braking

DC Braking can be applied to the motor during deceleration. The inverter stops the motor by
supplying DC power to the motor. Settings include a delay time, a brake time, a brake current level
and a brake frequency. During deceleration, when the inverter output frequency reaches the DC
braking frequency, the inverter supplies DC power to the motor and stops it.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
08 Stop mode Stop Mode 1 DC Brake 0–4 -
7.5~125HP
0.00
Output block time DC-Block 5.5~90kW
14 0.00–60.00 sec
before braking Time 150~800HP
2.00
110~500kW
ADV DC-Brake
15 DC braking time 1.00 0–60 sec
Time
DC-Brake
16 DC braking amount 50 0–200 %
Level
DC braking DC-Brake
17 5.00 0.00–60.00 Hz
frequency Freq

140
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

DC Braking After Stop Setting Details

Code Description
Set a delay time after the inverter output turns off and before applying DC
braking. If the inertia of the load is high, or if DC braking frequency (ADV-17) is
ADV-14
set too high, a fault may occur due to overcurrent conditions when the inverter
DC-Block Time
supplies DC voltage to the motor. To prevent overcurrent fault, adjust the delay
time before DC braking.
ADV-15
Set the time duration for the DC voltage supplied to the motor.
DC-Brake Time
Set the amount of DC braking current to apply. The parameter setting is based on
ADV-16 the rated current of the motor. The maximum value of the DC Brake current is
DC-Brake Level limited to the inverter rated current. Maximum DC Brake Level = Inverter
rated current / Rated current of motor X 100%.
Set the frequency to start DC braking. When the inverter output frequency is
ADV-17 reached, the inverter starts DC Braking. If the dwell frequency is set lower than
DC-Brake Freq the DC braking frequency, dwell operation will not work and DC braking will
start instead.

Note that the motor can overheat or be damaged if excessive amount of DC braking is
applied to the motor or DC braking time is set too long.
DC braking is configured based on the motor’s rated current. To prevent overheating or
damaging motors, do not set the current value higher than the inverter’s rated current.
5.4.3.3 Free Run Stop

When the run command is removed, the inverter output turns off and the motor/load coasts to a stop.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
ADV 08 Stop Method Stop mode 2 Free-Run 0–4 -

Note: With high inertia loads the motor will continue to rotate. The inverter does not control the
motor during Free-Run.

141
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

5.4.3.4 Power Braking

Power Braking is applied during deceleration when the inverter’s DC voltage rises above a
specified level due to motor regenerated energy. The inverter determines the optimum
deceleration rate and will either adjust the deceleration rate or will reaccelerate the motor in order
to reduce the regenerated energy. Power braking can be used when short deceleration times are
needed without brake resistors, or when optimum deceleration is needed without causing an over
voltage fault.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
ADV 08 Stop mode Stop Mode 4 Power Braking 0–4 -

• To prevent overheating or damaging the motor, do not apply power braking to the loads that
require frequent deceleration.
• Stall prevention and power braking only operate during deceleration.
• Power Braking takes priority over stall prevention. In other words, when both bit 3 of PRT-50
(stall prevention and flux braking) and ADV-08 (braking options) are set, Power Braking will
take precedence and operate.
• Note that if deceleration time is too short or inertia of the load is too great, an overvoltage fault
may still occur.
• Note when Power Braking is used, the actual deceleration time can be longer than the pre- set
deceleration time.

5.4.4 ADV-09 Forward or Reverse Run Prevention

The rotation direction can be configured to prevent motors from rotating in a specific direction. Setting
ADV-09 to ‘1 Reverse Prev’ will prevent reverse rotation regardless of DRV-02 ‘Keypad Run Direction’
setting or a digital input (Rx) command.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
0 None
Run prevention
ADV 09 Run Prevent 1 Forward Prev 0–2 -
options
2 Reverse Prev

Forward/Reverse Run Prevention Setting Details

Code Description
Choose a direction to prevent.
Setting Description
ADV-09 Run
0 None Do not set run prevention.
Prevent
1 Forward Prev Set forward run prevention.
2 Reverse Prev Set reverse run prevention.

142
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

5.4.5 ADV-10 Power-on Run

The inverter can be set to start operating (output power to the motor) as soon as the inverter powers
up or with some delay time. See caution below. If DRV-06 is set to Keypad, Power-on Run does not
function. In AUTO mode, the inverter starts operating at power-on when the following conditions are met.

With command source set to terminal block (Fx/Rx-1 or Fx/Rx-2).

When ADV-10, Power-on Run is set to Yes with optional delay time.
and a run command remains enabled.

The inverter will start immediately upon power up. Parameter DRV-06 (command source) must be set
to 1 (Fx/Rx-1) or 2 (Fx/Rx-2) along with an active run command.

Group Code Name LCD Display

Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Fx/Rx-1 or
DRV 06 Command source Cmd Source 1, 2 0–5 -
Fx/Rx-2
10 Power-on Run Power-on Run 1 Yes 0–1 -
ADV
11 Power-on Delay Power-on Delay 0.0 0.0 - 6000.0 sec

Power-on Run and Communications (Int 485 or other Field Bus).

With DRV-06 set to ‘3 (Int 485)’ or ‘4 (Field Bus)’ for communications, set COM-96 (PowerOn Resume) to
‘YES’. If the power input to the inverter is cut off due to a power interruption, the inverter memorizes the
run command, frequency reference, and the acc/dec time settings at the time of power interruption. With
COM-96 (PowerOn Resume) set to ‘Yes’, the inverter starts operating based on these settings as soon as
the power supply resumes.

Group Code Name LCD Display Settings Setting Range Unit

3 Int 485
DRV 06 Command source Cmd Source 0-5 -
4 Field Bus
PowerOn 0 No
COM 96 Power-on resume 0-1 -
Resume 1 Yes

143
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

Note
• Power on Run and Speed Search - If the speed search is not enabled, the inverter will
start its operation in a normal V/F pattern and accelerate the motor. A fault may be
triggered if the inverter starts operating while the load is still rotating. To prevent faults
with Power-on Run, enable speed search. Set CON-71, bit 4 to 1. The inverter will perform a
speed search at the beginning of the operation.
• If Power On Run is left disabled and the inverter powers up with an active run
command, it will not start. The digital input (run command) must be first deactivated, and then
reapplied to begin the inverter’s operation.

Use caution when operating the inverter with Power-on Run enabled as the motor will begin
rotating when the inverter starts up.

144
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

5.4.6 ADV-20 Dwell Operation

The dwell operation is used to maintain speed (torque) at programmed frequencies during the
acceleration and deceleration process. This function is used in the application and release of the
mechanical brakes on lift-type loads (elevators). Inverter dwell operation is based on the Acc/Dec
dwell frequency (ADV-20, ADV-22) and the dwell time (ADV-21, ADV-23) set by the user. The
following points also affect dwell operation:

Acceleration Dwell Operation

When a run command is applied, acceleration continues up to the acceleration dwell frequency
(ADV-20) and constant speed is maintained for the acceleration dwell time (ADV-21, Acc Dwell
Time). After the Acc Dwell Time has passed, acceleration is carried out based on the acceleration
time and the operating speed that was originally set.

Deceleration Dwell Operation

When a stop command is applied, deceleration continues down to the deceleration dwell
frequency (ADV-22) and constant speed is maintained for the deceleration dwell time (ADV-23,
Dec Dwell Time). After the Dec Dwell Time has passed, deceleration is carried out based on the
deceleration time that was originally set, then the operation stops.

When DRV-09 (Control Mode) is set to 0 (V/F), the inverter can be used for applications requiring
the use of dwell frequencies. An example is applying and releasing mechanical brakes on lift-type
loads (elevators).

Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
Start frequency
Dwell frequency during Acc Dwell
20 5.00 – Maximum Hz
acceleration Freq
frequency
Operation time during Acc Dwell
21 0.0 0.0–10.0 s
acceleration Time
ADV
Start frequency
Dwell frequency during Dec Dwell
22 5.00 – Maximum Hz
deceleration Freq
frequency
Operation time during Dec Dwell
23 0.0 0 .0-60.0 s
deceleration Time

Note
Dwell operation does not function when:
Dwell operation time is set to 0 sec.

145
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

Re-acceleration is attempted from stop or from a deceleration. Only the first acceleration dwell
operation is valid through the complete process.

[Acceleration dwell operation]

Deceleration dwell operation is carried out only when a stop command is issued and the
decelerating frequency passes through the dwell frequency. Dwell is not performed during a
deceleration based on a frequency (speed reference) change. This is not considered a
deceleration based on a stop operation.

[Deceleration dwell operation]

When a dwell operation is carried out for lift - type loads with mechanical brakes, motors can
be damaged or their life cycle reduced due to higher currents in the motor during the time the
mechanical brake is applied.

5.4.7 ADV-24 Frequency Limits - Upper/Lower Limit Frequency

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
24 Frequency limit Freq Limit 0 No 0–1 -
Frequency lower 0.0–maximum
25 Freq Limit Lo 0.50 Hz
ADV limit value frequency
Frequency upper Maximum min–max
26 Freq Limit Hi
limit value frequency frequency Hz

Frequency Limit Using Upper and Lower Limit Frequencies - Setting Details

Code Description
When set to ‘1 (Yes)’ frequency limits can be applied to the output of the
ADV-24 Freq Limit inverter. Frequencies can be set above the lower limit frequency (ADV-25) and
below the upper limit frequency (ADV-26). Operation is within the specified range.
Set the lower and upper limits of the output frequency. Speed unit parameters are
ADV-25 Freq Limit Lo expressed in Hz or rpm based on DRV-21 setting except for the base frequency
ADV-26 Freq Limit Hi (MOT-02). The Base Frequency (MOT-02) still remains the output frequency at
motor rated voltage.

146
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

When ADV-24 (Freq Limit) is set to ‘Yes,’ the frequency set at ADV-25 (Freq Limit Lo) is the
minimum frequency (Low Freq). If ADV-24 (Freq Limit) is set to ‘No,’ the frequency set at
DRV-19 (Start Freq) becomes the minimum frequency.
When ADV-24 (Freq Limit) is set to ‘Yes,’ the frequency set at ADV-26 (Freq Limit Hi) is the
maximum frequency (High Freq). If ADV-24 (Freq Limit) is set to ‘No,’ the frequency set at
DRV-20 (Max Freq) becomes the maximum frequency.

5.4.8 ADV-27 Frequency Jump

Use jump frequencies to avoid mechanical resonance frequencies. Jump through up to three
frequency bands during acceleration and deceleration. Reference frequencies cannot be set
within the pre-set jump frequency band.

When the reference frequency is increased it will be maintained at the lower limit of a jump
frequency band. As the reference frequency continues to increase and exceeds the range of a
jump frequency band, it will jump to the upper limit of the jump frequency band. Decreasing
reference frequencies operate in the same it will manner, jumping from upper limit to lower limit.
Jump frequencies apply to all reference frequency sources (voltage, current, RS-485
communication, keypad setting).

Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
0 No
27 Frequency jump Jump Freq 0–1 -
1 Yes
Jump frequency 0.00–Jump frequency
28 Jump Lo 1 10.00 Hz
lower limit1 upper limit 1
ADV Jump frequency lower
Jump frequency
29 Jump Hi 1 limit 1–Maximum
upper limit1 15.00 Hz
frequency
Jump frequency 0.00–Jump frequency
30 Jump Lo 2 20.00 Hz
lower limit 2 upper limit 2

147
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

Jump frequency lower

Jump frequency
31 Jump Hi 2 25.00 limit 2–Maximum Hz
upper limit 2
frequency
Jump frequency 0.00–Jump frequency
32 Jump Lo 3 30.00 Hz
lower limit 3 upper limit 3
Jump frequency lower
Jump frequency
33 Jump Hi 3 35.00 limit 3–Maximum Hz
upper limit 3
frequency

5.4.9 ADV-41 Brake Control

This feature controls the On/Off operation of the load’s electro-mechanical braking system.

Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
DRV 09 Control mode Control Mode 0 V/F - -
41 Brake open current BR Rls Curr 50.0 0.0–180% %
Brake open delay
42 BR Rls Dly 1.00 0.0–10.0 sec
time
Brake open forward BR Rls Fwd 0–Maximum
44 1.00 Hz
frequency Fr frequency
ADV Brake open reverse 0–Maximum
45 BR Rls Rev Fr 1.00 Hz
frequency frequency
Brake close delay
46 BR Eng Dly 1.00 0.00–10.00 sec
time
0–Maximum
47 Brake close frequency BR Eng Fr 2.00 Hz
frequency
Multi-function
31~35 Relay 1
Relay1~Relay5
OUT 35 BR Control - -
Multi-function output
36 Q1 Define
Q1 item

Activate Brake Control by setting one of OUT-31~OUT-36 to ’42, BR Control’. When brake control is activated, DC
braking (ADV-12) and Dwell operation (ADV-20~23) do not operate.

148
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

Brake release sequence: When a run command is applied, the inverter accelerates up to brake
release frequency (ADV-44 Forward or ADV-45 Reverse). After reaching the brake release
frequency, when the motor current reaches brake release current (ADV-41 BR Rls Curr), the
output (OUT-31~35 or OUT-36) set to 35 (BR Control) sends a release signal. Once the signal
has been sent, acceleration will begin after maintaining the frequency for the brake release delay
time (ADV-42 BR Rls Dly).
If the output current is less than the release current (ADV-41 BR Rls Curr) for longer than the
brake release delay time (ADV-42 BR Rls Dly), an Ext-Brake fault occurs.

Brake engage sequence: When a stop command is applied, the motor decelerates. When the
output frequency reaches brake engage frequency (ADV-47 BR Eng Fr), the motor stops
deceleration and the output (OUT-31~35 or OUT-36) set to 35 (BR Control) sends a brake engage
signal. Frequency is maintained for the brake engage delay time (ADV-46 BR Eng Dly) and will
become 0 afterwards. If Stop Mode (ADV-08) is set to 1 (DC brake), inverter output is blocked
after DC braking. For DC injection braking, refer to 0section 5.4.3.2 Stop After DC Braking on
page 140.

149
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

5.4.10 ADV-50 Energy Saving Operation

5.4.10.1 Manual Energy Saving Operation

If the inverter output current is lower than the current which is set at MOT-05 (Motor Rated Curr), the
output voltage is reduced by the percentage set in ADV-51 (Energy Save). The voltage before the
energy saving operation starts will become the base value of the percentage. Manual energy saving
operation does not operate during acceleration and deceleration.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Energy saving
50 E-Save Mode 1 Manual - -
operation
ADV
Energy saving
51 Energy Save 0 0–30 %
level

<Manual Energy Saving Operation>

5.4.10.2 Automatic Energy Saving Operation

The inverter calculates the optimal energy saving point for the time set in ADV-52. The energy saving
point is based on the rated current and the output power of the motor. The energy saving operation is
effective for normal duty operations. It does operate when the load level is more than 80% of the rated
motor current.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Energy saving
50 E-Save Mode 2 Auto - -
operation
ADV
Energy saving
52 E-Save Det T 20.0 0.0-100.0 sec
point search time

The inverter will exit the energy saving mode when the reference frequency is changed or
during acceleration and deceleration. The actual Acc/Dec time may take longer than the set
Acc/Dec time due to the time required to return to normal operation.

150
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

5.4.11 ADV-64 Cooling Fan Control

This function controls the operation of the inverter’s heat-sink cooling fan. It is used in situations
with frequent starting and stopping, or noise free environment is required. The correct use of
cooling fan control can extend the life of the cooling fan.

Parameter Setting
Group Code Name LCD Display Unit
Setting Range
ADV 64 Cooling fan control FAN Control 0 During Run 0–2 -

Cooling Fan Control Detail Settings

Code Description
Settings Description
Cooling fan runs when the inverter is running. The cooling fan
stops when the inverter stops. If the inverter heat sink
0 During Run
temperature is higher than a set value, the cooling fan will
ADV-64 operate regardless of the inverter’s operation status.
Fan Control
Cooling fan runs continuously when power is supplied to the
1 Always On
inverter.
With power connected and the start command on, the cooling
Temp
2 fan will not operate unless the temperature in the heat sink
Control
reaches a set temperature.
Note
Regardless of setting ADV-64 to 0 (During Run), if the heat sink temperature reaches a set
level, the cooling fan may run as a protection function.

Inverters 150HP and larger have an internal cooling fan which operates in conjunction with the
heat sink fans.

151
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

5.4.12 ADV-74 Press Regeneration Prevention

Press regeneration prevention is used during press operations to prevent braking during the
regeneration process. When motor regeneration occurs during a press operation, motor operation
speed automatically increases to avoid the regeneration zone.

Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
Select press
74 regeneration RegenAvd Sel 0 No 0–1 -
prevention for press
Press regeneration 350V 230V: 300-400V
RegenAvd
75 prevention operation 700V 460V: 600-800V V
Level
voltage level 870V 575V: 800-980V
Press regeneration
ADV
prevention CompFreq
76 1.00(Hz) 0.00– 10.00Hz Hz
compensation Limit
frequency limit
Press regeneration RegenAvd
77 50.0(%) 0 .0– 100.0% %
prevention P gain Pgain
Press regeneration RegenAvd
78 500(ms) 20–30000ms ms
prevention I gain Igain

Press Regeneration Prevention Setting Details

Code Description
Frequent regeneration voltage from a press load during constant speed motor operation may
ADV-74 force excessive work on the brake unit which may damage or shorten the brake life. To
RegenAvd Sel prevent this situation, select ADV-74 (RegenAvd Sel) to control DC bus voltage and disable
the brake unit operation.
ADV-75
RegenAvd Set the DC bus voltage level to activate Regen Avoidance.
Level
ADV-76
CompFreq Set a frequency limit above operating frequency during Regen Avoidance.
Limit
Set the P gain and I gain in the DC bus voltage suppressor PI controller while in Regen
Avoidance.

ADV-77
RegenAvd
Pgain

ADV-78
RegenAvd
Igain

Note
Press regeneration prevention only operates during constant speed motor operation. It does
not operate during accelerations or decelerations. When regeneration prevention is activated,
output frequency may change within the range set at ADV-76 (CompFreq Limit).

152
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

5.5 Control Group (CON)

5.5.1 CON-04 Carrier Frequency Settings

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
3.0 7.5-125HP 1.0–15.0
04 Carrier Frequency Carrier Freq 2.0 150-500HP 1.0~5.0 kHz
CON 1.5 650-800HP 1.0~4.0
0 Normal PWM
05 Switching Mode PWM* Mode 0–1 -
1 Low Leakage PWM
*PWM: Pulse width modulation

Operational Noise Setting Details

Code Description
Power transistors (IGBT) at the output of the inverter generate and supply a
high frequency switching voltage to the motor. This switching speed is
CON-04
referred to as the carrier frequency. Adjustment of the carrier frequency
Carrier Freq
affects motor operating noise. A higher carrier frequency reduces
operational noise. A lower carrier frequency increases operational noise.
The heat loss and leakage current from the inverter can be reduced by
changing the load rate option at CON-05 (PWM Mode). Selecting 1
(LowLeakage PWM) reduces heat loss and leakage current, compared to
when 0 (Normal PWM) is selected. However, it increases the motor noise.
Low leakage PWM uses 2 phase PWM modulation mode, which helps
minimize degradation and reduces switching loss by approximately 30%.
CON-05 Carrier frequency
PWM Mode Item 1.0kHz 15kHz
Low Leakage PWM Normal PWM
Motor noise ↑ ↓
Heat generation ↓ ↑
Noise ↓ ↑
generation
Leakage current ↓ ↑

Note
• Carrier Frequency at Factory Default Settings:
• H2 Series Inverter Derating Standard (Derating): The over load rate represents an
acceptable load amount that exceeds rated load, and is expressed as a ratio based on the
rated load and the duration. The normal duty overload capacity on the H2 series inverter is
120%/1 min. The current rating differs from the load rating as it also has an ambient
temperature limit. For derating specifications refer to 13.6 Continuous Rated Current
Derating on page 378.

153
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

5.5.2 CON-13 Anti-hunting Regulation (Resonance Prevention)

This function is used to prevent the hunting of a V/F controlled fan or motor caused by current
distortion or oscillations due to mechanical resonance or other reasons.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Enable or disable
anti- hunting 0 No
13 regulation AHR Sel 1 Yes
-
(resonance 1 Yes
prevention)
Anti-hunting
14 regulation P- AHR P-Gain 1000 0–32767 -
Gain
Anti-hunting
CON 0–AHR High
15 regulation start AHR Low Freq 0.5 Hz
Freq
frequency
Anti-hunting
AHR Low Freq–
16 regulation end AHR High Freq 400.00 Hz
400.00
frequency
Anti-hunting
regulation
17 AHR Limit 2 0–20 %
compensation
voltage limit

Anti-hunting Regulation Setting Details

Code Description
Selects the Anti-hunting regulator operation.
Setting Function
CON-13 AHR Sel
0 No Disable anti-hunting regulation.
1 Yes Enable anti-hunting regulation.
Increasing AHR proportional gain improves responsiveness of the
CON-14 AHR P-Gain anti-hunting regulation. However, current oscillation may result if AHR
proportional gain is set too high.
CON-15 AHR Low Freq Sets the lower limit frequency (CON-15) and the maxim limit
CON-16 AHR High Freq frequency (CON-16) for anti-hunting regulation.

154
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

5.5.3 CON-70 Speed Search Operation

Speed Search is used to start the inverter while the motor/load are already spinning (idling).
Speed Search synchronizes the inverter output (voltage and frequency) to that of the spinning
motor. This is accomplished by ramping up the output voltage then ramping down the output
frequency. Speed Search estimates the motor rotation speed based on the inverter output current,
therefore it may not match the exact speed. Speed Search can prevent faults that occur when
starting the inverter while the motor/load are spinning.

There are three modes of Speed Search (Flying Start-1, Flying Start-2 and Flying Start-3 (PM)).
The main difference between -1 and -2 is that Flying Start-2 can detect direction of motor rotation.
Flying Start-3 is for PM Motors. Refer to 7.2 PM (Permanent-Magnet) Motorson pg. 245). There
are also four conditional settings of Speed Search. These include during accelerating (normal)
starting, starting after a fault reset, starting after a power interruption, and auto-starting with the
initial application of power to the inverter.

Setting
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
Range
Speed search mode
70 SS Mode 0 Flying Start-1 - -
selection
Speed search Speed 0000
71 0000-1111 bit
operation selection Search
Speed search SS Sup- 90 7.5-125HP
72 80–200 %
CON reference current Current 80 150-800HP
Speed search
73 SS P-Gain 100 0–9999 -
proportional gain
Speed search
74 SS I-Gain 200 0–9999 -
integral gain
Output block time
75 SS Block Time 1.0 0–60 sec
before speed search
Multi-function relay 1
31-35 Relay 1
item Speed
OUT 19 0-43 -
Multi-function output Search
36 Q1 Define
1 item

155
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

Speed Search Operation Setting Details

Code Description
Select a speed search type.

Setting Function
0 Flying The speed search is carried out as it controls the inverter
Start-1 output current during idling below the CON-72 (SS Sup-
Current) parameter setting. Use when the direction of the
idling motor and the direction of operation command at
restart are the same. A stable speed search function can
be performed at about 10 Hz or lower. However, if the
direction of the idling motor and the direction of the start
command at restart are different, the speed search does
CON-70 not produce a satisfactory results. The direction of the
SS Mode idling motor cannot be established.
1 Flying The speed search is carried out as it PI controls the ripple
Start-2 current which is generated by the counter electromotive
force during no-load rotation. The counter electromotive
force is proportional to the idle speed. This mode
establishes the direction of the idling motor
(forward/reverse) and the speed search function is stable
regardless of the direction of the idling motor and direction
of the start command. However because the ripple current
is used, the frequency is not determined accurately at low
speeds (about 10-15 Hz). Re-acceleration may start from
zero speed.
Type and Functions of Speed Search Setting
Setting Function
Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
Speed search for general
✓
acceleration
✓ Initialization after a fault
Restart after instantaneous power
✓
interruption
✓ Starting with power-on

LCD bit representation in parameter view. When the top segment is black, bit is
set to "ON".
Item Bit Status (On) Bit Status (Off)
CON-71 LCD Display
Speed Search

Speed search can be selected to operate among the following 4 conditions.

Speed search for general acceleration: If bit 0 is set to 1 (enabled), speed

search is enabled for normal accelerating starts with rotating motor/load. The
speed search function prevents faults when starting the inverter with rotating
motor/load.

Initialization after a fault: If Bit 1 is set to 1 (enabled) and PRT-08 (RST

Restart) is set to 1 (Yes), after a fault reset, speed search accelerates the
motor to the operating frequency used before the fault.

Automatic restart after reset of a fault: If bit 2 is set to 1, and if a low voltage
trip occurs due to a power interruption but the power is restored before the

156
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

Code Description
internal power shuts down, the speed search operation accelerates the motor
back to its frequency reference before the low voltage trip.

If the current increases above the value set at CON-72, the voltage stops
increasing and the frequency decreases (t1 zone). If the current decreases
below the value set at CON-72, the voltage increases again and the frequency
stops decelerating (t2 zone). When the normal frequency and voltage are
resumed, speed search accelerates the motor back to its operating frequency
prior to the fault.

Starting with power-on: Set bit 3 to 1 (enabled) and ADV-10 (Power-on Run)
to 1 (Yes). If inverter input power is applied and the run command is active
(on), speed search accelerates the motor up to the frequency reference.
During Flying Start-1 (CON-70 set to 0), the amount of current is controlled.
CON-72
The percentage is based on the motor’s rated current. If CON-70 (SS mode) is
SS Sup-Current
set to 1 (Flying Start-2), this parameter is not visible.
The P/I gain of the speed search controller can be adjusted. If CON-70 (SS
CON-73 SS P-Gain
Mode) is set to 1 (Flying Start-2), different factory defaults are used based on
CON-74 SS I-Gain
motor capacity defined in MOT-01 (Motor Capacity).
CON-75 CON-75 (SS Block Time) prevents overvoltage faults due to counter
SS Block Time electromotive force (emf).

Note
If operated within the rated output, the inverter is designed to withstand instantaneous power
interruptions within 8 ms and maintain normal operation. The DC voltage inside the inverter
may vary depending on the output load. If the power interruption time is longer than 8 ms, a
low voltage trip may occur.

Select the normal acceleration speed search for proper operation during free-run. If the speed
search function is not set, an overcurrent trip or overload trip may occur.

157
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

5.5.4 CON-77 Kinetic Energy Buffering Operation

When the input power is disconnected, the inverter’s DC bus voltage decreases, and a low
voltage trip occurs blocking the output. Kinetic energy buffering operation can be used to
decelerate the motor safely under these conditions. The inverter uses regenerative energy from
the motor during the power outage to maintain the DC bus voltage. This extends the time for a low
voltage trip to occur. For the KEB feature to operate properly, parameter MOT-10 (input voltage)
must be set correctly.

Setting
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
Range
Kinetic energy 0 No
77 KEB Select 0~1 -
buffering selection 1 Yes
Kinetic energy 125.0 230V/460V
78 KEB Start Lev 110.0~140.0 %
buffering start level 130.0 575V
Kinetic energy 130.0 230V/460V
79 KEB Stop Lev Cn-78~145.0 %
buffering stop level 135.0 575V
Energy buffering Slip 300 230V/460V
80 KEB Slip Gain 0-20000 -
gain 25 575V
CON
1000 230V/460V
575V
Energy buffering P 3000
81 KEB P Gain 7.5-50HP 0~20000 -
gain
575V
2400
60-125HP
82 Energy buffering I gain KEB I Gain 500 1~2000.0
Energy buffering 10.0 230V/460V
83 KEB Acc Time 0.0~600.0(s) -
acceleration time 5.0 575V

Kinetic Energy Buffering Operation Setting Details

Code Description
Select the kinetic energy buffering operation when the input power is
disconnected. When KEB Select is selected, it controls the inverter's
output frequency and charges the DC bus with regenerative energy
from the motor.
Setting Function
CON-77 0 None General deceleration is carried out until a low voltage trip
KEB Select occurs.
1 Yes Inverter operation charges the DC bus with regenerated
energy. When the input power is restored, the inverter
changes to normal operation from the KEB operation.
The acceleration time set in CON-83 (KEB Acc Time) is
applied when restoring to normal operation.
CON-.78 Sets the start and stop points of the kinetic energy buffering operation.
KEB Start Lev, The set values must be based on the low voltage trip level as 100% and
CON-79 the stop level (CON-79) must be set higher than the start level (CON-
KEB Stop Lev 78).
CON-80 The slip gain is for preventing a low voltage trip when the kinetic energy
KEB Slip Gain buffering operation starts.
The controller P Gain is for maintaining the voltage of the DC power
CON-81
section during the kinetic energy buffering operation. Increase the
KEB P Gain
setting value when a low voltage trip occurs right after a power failure.
CON-82 The controller I Gain is for maintaining the voltage of the DC power
KEB I Gain section during the kinetic energy buffering operation. Sets the gain value

158
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

Code Description
to maintain the frequency during the kinetic energy buffering operation
until the inverter stops.
CON-.83 Sets the acceleration time of the operating frequency when the inverter
KEB Acc Time returns to normal operation from KEB mode.

• Depending on the duration of Instantaneous power interruptions and the amount of load
inertia, a low voltage trip may occur even during a kinetic energy buffering operation.
• If a low voltage trip occurs after a power interruption, it indicates the load inertia and
level are high. In such cases, the KEB functions can perform better by increasing the
KEB P Gain and the KEB Slip Gain.
• Motors may vibrate during kinetic energy buffering operation for some loads. Better
performance can be achieved by increasing the P Gain and/or decreasing the I Gain.

159
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

5.6 Input Group (IN)

5.6.1 Analog Inputs

Refer to 5.1.4 DRV-07 Frequency Reference Source on page 106 for parameters related to the
analog inputs.

Terminal Range Parameters Section

V1 0-10V IN-05~IN-11 5.1.4.3
V1' 0- (-10)V IN-12~IN-15 5.1.4.3.2
I2 4-20mA IN-50~IN-56 5.1.4.4
I2(V2) 0-10V IN-35~IN-40 5.1.4.4.2
TI Pulsed 32kHz IN-91~IN-98 5.1.4.5
S+,S- RS-485 COM-01~COM-04 5.1.4.6

5.6.2 IN-60 Safe Operation Mode

This safety feature is used as a Run Enable/Disable input. When a digital input is set to 15 (Run
Enable), the inverter will only operate when the input is closed (Enabled). The input must be
closed to recognize other digital input functions. This feature is useful for interlocking operation
with other equipment.

A stop mode can be selected (IN-61, Run Dis Stop) when the Run Enable input is opened during
operation. Selections include coasting to stop, Quick Stop and Quick Stop Resume. The
deceleration time (IN-62, Q-Stop Time) can be set for the Quick Stop functions.

Setting
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
Range
Safe operation
60 Run En Mode 1 DI Dependent - -
selection
0 Free-Run 0-2 -
Safe operation stop 1 Q-Stop
IN 61 Run Dis Stop
mode 2 Q-Stop
Resume
Safe operation
62 Q-Stop Time 5.0 0.0-600.0 sec
deceleration time
Px terminal Px Define
IN 65~71 15 RUN Enable 0-42 -
configuration (Px: P1~P7)

Safe Operation Mode Setting Details

Code Description
IN-65~71 Set one of the multi-function (digital) input terminals to 15 (RUN Enable)
Px Define to operate in safe operation mode.
Setting Function
Enables safe operation mode. Input must be
IN-60 0 Always Enable
closed (Enabled) to operate.
Run En Mode
Operation is in combination with the status of
1 DI Dependent
Run command (Fx input).

160
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

Code Description
Decelerates the motor based on the deceleration time (Q-Stop Time) set
in IN-62. If the Enable input is re-applied during deceleration and the run
command is maintained, the inverter will resume normal operation.
Setting Function
Blocks the inverter output when the multi-function
0 Free Run
terminal is off.
The deceleration time (Q-Stop Time) used in safe
operation mode. It stops after deceleration and
IN-61
then the operation can resume only when the
Run Dis Stop 1 Q-Stop
operation command is entered again. The
operation will not begin if only the multi-function
terminal is on.
The inverter decelerates to the deceleration time
(Q-Stop Time) in safe operation mode. It stops
Q-Stop
2 after deceleration. Then if the multifunction
Resume
terminal is on, the operation resumes as soon as
the operation command is entered again.
IN-62 Sets the deceleration time when IN-61 (Run Dis Stop) is set to 1 (Q-
Q-Stop Time Stop) or 2 (Q-Stop Resume).

Q-Stop Function
When IN-60 (Run En Mode) is set to 1 (DI Dependent) and IN-61 is set to 1 (Q-Stop), if the Run
Enable input is opened during operation, the inverter will decelerate to a stop based on the time
set in IN-62, Q-Stop Time. To re-start, the Enable input must be re-applied and the Run command
(Fx) must be removed then re-applied.

Q-Stop Resume Function

When IN-60 (Run En Mode) is set to 1 (DI Dependent) and IN-61 is set to 2 (Q-Stop Resume), this
allows operation (Start/Stop) of the inverter based on the Run Enable input. If the Run Enable is
opened during operation and the Run command (Fx) is maintained, closure of the Run Enable input
will allow the inverter to operate (resume operation).

161
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

5.6.3 Digital Inputs

The digital input terminals (P1 ~ P7) can be set to a variety of functions. The following table
shows the default settings of parameters IN-65 ~ IN-71.

Code Name LCD Display Setting

IN-65 P1 terminal configuration P1 Define 1 Fx
IN-66 P2 terminal configuration P2 Define 2 Rx
IN-67 P3 terminal configuration P3 Define 5 BX
IN-68 P4 terminal configuration P4 Define 3 RST
IN-69 P5 terminal configuration P5 Define 7 Speed-L
IN-70 P6 terminal configuration P6 Define 8 Speed-M
IN-71 P7 terminal configuration P7 Define 9 Speed-H
IN-72* P8 terminal configuration P8 Define 0 None
IN-73* P9 terminal configuration P9 Define 0 None
* IN-72 and IN-73 are shown when the Extended IO Card is installed.

The following table lists the various functions that can be assigned to the digital input
terminals.
Setting Description Setting Description
0 None Not assigned 22 U/D Clear Clear the saved U/D speed
1 Fx Forward Start/Run 23 Analog Hold Hold the analog input speed reference
2 Rx Reverse Start/Run 24 I-Term Clear Clear the accumulated I-Gains
3 RST Reset 25 PID Openloop Switch to V/Hz mode.
4 External Trip External Trip 26 PID Gain2 Switch to PID Gain2 setting
5 BX Disable Output 27 PID Ref Change Switch PID reference
6 JOG Jog Operation 28 Pre Excite Apply DC to motor at start
7 Speed-L Fixed Speed - Low 29 Timer In Activate timer for relay output
8 Speed-M Fixed Speed - Medium 31 dis Aux Ref Disable the Auxiliary speed reference
9 Speed-H Fixed Speed - High 32 FWD JOG Start at forward jog speed
11 XCEL-L Multi-Step Accel/Decel - Low 33 REV JOG Start at reverse jog speed
12 XCEL-M Multi-Step Accel/Decel - Medium 34 Fire Mode Activate Fire Mode
13 XCEL-H Multi-Step Accel/Decel - High 35 Time Event En Activate Time Event schedule
14 XCEL Stop Disable XCEL Steps 36 Pre Heat Apply DC to motor while stopped
15 RUN Enable Run enable/disable 37 Damper Open Detect Open Damper state
16 3-Wire 3 wire control 38 Pump Clean Perform Pump Clean operation
Switch to 2nd control and frequency
17 2nd Source 39 Sleep Wake Chg Use 2nd Sleep/Wake settings
reference sources
18 Exchange Switch inverter output to line 40 PID Step Ref L Step reference (Low) for PI Control
19 Up Increase speed 41 PID Step Ref M Step reference (Medium) for PI Control
20 Down Decrease Speed 42 PID Step Ref H Step reference (High) for PI Control

162
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

5.6.4 Digital Input Descriptions

5.6.4.1 Fx, Rx (Forward, Reverse) Command Input

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Px terminal setting Px Define 1 Fx
IN 65~71 0-43 -
options (Px: P1–P7) 2 Rx

Assign a terminal for forward (Fx) operation. Assign a terminal for reverse (Rx) operation. Refer to
5.1.3.2 Terminal Block as a Command Source (Fwd/Rev Run) on page 103 for additional details.

5.6.4.2 RST, Reset command input

After a fault, the inverter can be reset with a digital input set to “3, RST”. A fault can also be reset
by pressing the OFF button on the LCD.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Px terminal setting Px Define (Px:
IN 65~71 3 RST 0-43 -
options P1–P7)

Trip Status Reset Setting Details

Code Description
Use a digital input terminal to reset the inverter. Set the digital input terminal to ‘3’
IN-65~71
(RST) and activate the terminal to reset the trip. Pressing the [OFF] button on the
Px Define
keypad will also reset the fault.

5.6.4.3 External Trip

Set one of the multi-function (digital) input terminals P1~P7 (IN-65 ~ IN-71) to 4 (External Trip).
When activated, the inverter trips and blocks the output. The input terminals can be set
independently as NO or NC with IN-87 to activate the trip when closed or when opened.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Px terminal setting Px Define
65~71 4 External Trip 0-42 -
options (Px: P1–P7)
IN 0 0000 0000
Multi-function input DI NC/NO
87 ~
contact selection Sel bit
1 1111 1111

163
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

External Trip Signal Setting Details

Code Description
Select terminal input contact types (NO or NC) for each input terminal.
Type A designates a normally open (NO) contact input, close to
IN-87 activate. Type B designates a normally closed (NC) contact input, open
DI NC/NO Sel to activate.
LCD bit representation in parameter view. When the bottom segment is
black, bit is set to "OFF" (normally open).
Type A Type B
Type
(NO) (NC)
LCD 1 1

Display 0 0
P9 P8 P7 P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Type B
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Type A

5.6.4.4 BX, Output Block

Set one of the digital input terminals (P1 ~ P7) to 5 (BX). When activated, the inverter output is
blocked and operation stops. The LCD displays ‘BX”. The BX input is not a latched fault. When
the digital input is deactivated, operation resumes.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Px terminal setting Px Define
IN 65~71 5 BX 0-42 -
options (Px: P1–P7)

Output Block by Multi-function Terminal Setting Details

Code Description
When the operation of the digital input terminal is set to ‘5 (BX)’ and is activated
during operation, the inverter blocks the output and ‘BX’ is displayed on the
IN-65~71 keypad display. While ‘BX’ is displayed on the keypad screen, the inverter’s
Px Define operation information including the operation frequency and current at the time of
the BX signal can be viewed but is not recorded in the TRP group (fault history).
The inverter resumes operation when the BX terminal deactivated with the run
command still applied.

164
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

5.6.4.5 JOG operation

The jog operation allows for temporary control of the inverter. There are two was to apply a jog
and start command using the digital input terminals.

• Jog-1 using a digital input terminal set to JOG along with a start command (Fx or Rx).
• Jog-2 using a single digital input set to FWD JOG or REV JOG.

5.6.4.5.1 Jog Operation 1-Forward Jog by Multi-function Terminal

The jog operation is available in the forward (or reverse) direction, using two input terminals (Fx
and JOG). The table below lists parameter settings for a forward jog operation with a separate
Run (Fx) command.

Parameter Setting
Group Code Name LCD Display Unit
Setting Range
0.50-
JOG
11 Jog frequency 10.00 Maximum Hz
Frequency
frequency
DRV Jog operation
12 JOG Acc Time 20.00 0.00-600.00 sec
acceleration time
Jog operation
13 JOG Dec Time 30.00 0.00-600.00 sec
deceleration time
Px terminal Px Define
IN 65~71 6 JOG 0-42 -
configuration (Px: P1–P7)

Forward Jog Description Details

Code Description
IN-65–71 Px Define Select 6 (JOG) function from IN-65 ~ 71 for one of the inputs.

[Terminal settings for jog operation]

DRV-11 JOG Set the operation frequency.
Frequency
DRV-12 JOG Acc Set the acceleration speed.
Time
DRV-13 JOG Dec Set the deceleration speed.
Time

165
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

If a signal is applied to the jog terminal while running (FX applied), the operating frequency changes to
the jog frequency.

5.6.4.5.2 Jog Operation 2-Fwd/Rev Jog by Multi-function Terminal

A terminal that is set for a FWD JOG or REV JOG also starts the inverter. The table below lists
parameter settings for a forward (or reverse) jog operation. A separate Run (Fx) command is not
required.

Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
setting
0.50-Maximum
11 Jog frequency JOG Frequency 10.00 Hz
frequency
Jog operation
DRV 12 JOG Acc Time 20.00 0.00-600.00 sec
acceleration time
Operation
13 JOG Dec Time 30.00 0.00-600.00 sec
deceleration time
Px terminal Px Define 32 FWD JOG
IN 65~71 0-42 -
configuration (Px: P1~P7) 33 REV JOG

NOTE: The priorities for speed reference inputs and associated Acc/Dec times via digital inputs
are as follows:
Dwell overrides Jog overrides Up/Down overrides Fixed Speed inputs overrides Frq setting . If a different
operation command is entered during a jog operation (other than dwell), it is ignored and the operation
maintains the jog frequency.

166
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

5.6.5 Speed-L, Speed-M, Speed-H, Multi-Step Frequencies

Multi-step operations (Fixed Speed Inputs) can be assigned to the Px terminals. Seven steps (1
through 7) can be configured using (3) digital input terminals. Refer to section 5.3.3.4, BAS-50 Multi-
step Frequencies (Fixed Speed Inputs) for more details.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
7 Speed-L
Px terminal setting Px Define
IN 65~71 8 Speed-M 0-42 -
options (Px: P1–P7)
9 Speed-H

5.6.6 XCEL-L, XCEL-M, XCEL-H Multi-Step Accel/Decel Times

Digital input terminals can be configured for different Acc and Dec times. Up to 7 acceleration times
and 7 deceleration times can be set. Refer to section 5.3.3.6 BAS-70 Multi-step Acc/Dec Time
Configuration for more details.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
11 XCEL-L
Px terminal setting Px Define 12 XCEL-M
IN 65~71 0-42 -
options (Px: P1–P7) 13 XCEL-H
14 XCEL Stop

5.6.7 Stopping the Acc/Dec Operation

Configure a digital input terminal to stop acceleration or deceleration and operate the inverter at a fixed
frequency.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Px terminal Px Define
IN 65~71 14 XCEL Stop 0–42 -
configuration (Px: P1– P7)

5.6.8 RUN Enable (Safety Stop)

When a digital input is set to 15 (Run Enable), the inverter will only operate when the input is closed
(Enabled). Refer to section 5.6.2 IN-60 Safe Operation Mode for more details.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Px terminal setting Px Define
IN 65~71 15 RUN Enable 0-42 -
options (Px: P1–P7)

167
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

5.6.9 3-Wire

3-wire operation is used to latch the run command input signal (FWD or REV) when using a
momentary contact input. This configuration is commonly used to operate the inverter with a set of
momentary push buttons.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV 06 Command source Cmd Source* 1 Fx/Rx - 1 - -
Px terminal Px Define
IN 65~71 16 3-Wire 0-42 -
configuration (Px: P1~P7)

To enable the 3-wire operation, the following circuit is necessary. The minimum input time (t) for 3-
wire operation is 1ms, and the operation stops when both forward and reverse operation
commands are entered at the same time.

[Terminal connections for 3-wire operation]

[3-wire operation]

5.6.10 2nd Source

The inverter can be operated (Start/Stop and Reference Frequency) by two different operating modes
and switch between them as required. Refer to 5.3.1 BAS-01 2nd Operating Mode - 2nd Source for
more details.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Px terminal setting Px Define
IN 65~71 17 2nd Source 0-42 -
options (Px: P1–P7)

168
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

5.6.11 Exchange

Power Source Transition is used to switch the power source to the motor from the inverter output
to the main supply power source (commercial power source), and vice versa.

Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
Px terminal Px Define
IN 65–71 18 Exchange 0-42 -
configuration (Px: P1–P7)
Multi-function relay Inverter
31-35 Relay1-5 17 0-43 -
items Line
OUT
Multi-function Comm
36 Q1 Define 18 0-43 -
output1 items Line

Supply Power Transition Setting Details

Code Description
Set one of the digital input terminals (P1~P7) to 18
(Exchange). Set the two output relays (Relay1 ~ Relay5) to 17
IN-65–71 (Inverter) and 18 (Comm Line) respectively. When the digital input
Px Define is activated, the output relays will change state. An external method
of switching the inverter output to the commercial line is required.
To reverse the transition, deactivate the digital input terminal.
Set Relay1 to 17 (inverter line) and Relay2 to 18 (comm line). Relay
operation sequence is as follows.

OUT-31~35
Relay 1~5 Define

OUT-36
Q1 Define

Relay2
(Comm
Line)

169
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

5.6.12 Up-Down Operation

The inverter can control the speed of the motor using digital inputs set to the Up and Down
functions. The Up/Down operation can be applied to systems that use upper-lower limit switches.
Two digital inputs are required. One set to Up (increase speed) and one set to Down (decrease
speed) operation.

Parameter Setting
Group Code Name LCD Display Unit
Setting Range
Up/down operation U/D Save 0 No
IN 59 0-1 -
frequency save Mode 1 Yes
19 Up
Px Define
IN 65–71 Px terminal configuration 20 Down 0–42 -
(P1~P7)
22 U/D Clear

The operation will follow the Up or Down inputs and will override other speed reference inputs.
Up-down Operation Setting Details

Code Description
Select two terminals for up-down operation and set them to 19 (Up) and 20 (Down),
respectively. With the run command active, acceleration begins when the Up terminal signal
is activated. Acceleration stops and constant speed operation begins when the signal is
deactivated.
During operation, deceleration begins when the Down signal is activated. Deceleration
stops and constant speed operation begins when the signal is deactivated. Also, when both
IN-65~71 Up and Down signals are entered at the same time, constant speed operation begins.
Px Define

When set to Yes, the operating frequency is saved automatically in the following conditions:
the run command (Fx or Rx) is removed, a fault occurs, or the inverter is powered off.
IN-59 When the run command is reapplied, or when the fault is cleared, or when power is
U/D Save restored, the inverter resumes operation at the saved frequency.
Mode To delete the saved frequency, set one of the multi-function (digital) terminals to 22 (U/D
Clear) and activate the input during constant speed operation. The saved frequency will be
deleted.

170
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

Code Description
IN-59 Up/Down Save Mode: No

IN-59 Up/Down Save Mode: Yes

IN-59
U/D Save Mode

• When the inverter resumes normal operation from:

• Run command applied
• Power Up with Run command
• Fault Reset with Auto Re-Start
• it resumes operation at the saved frequency.
To delete the saved frequency, apply a digital input set to “22 (U/D Clear)”
during normal operation. The saved frequency and the up/down operation
configuration will be deleted.

171
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

5.6.13 Frequency Hold by Analog Input

When using an analog input as the frequency reference, you can apply a hold of the inverter output
frequency by applying a digital input any point even though the analog input continues to change. Set
a digital input to 23 (Analog Hold). When the input is activated, the output frequency will be maintained
(held constant) until the input is deactivated.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
2 V1
4 V2
Frequency reference 5 I2
DRV 07 Freq Ref Src 0–11 -
source 9 Pulse
10* V3
11 I3
Px terminal Px Define
IN 65–71 23 Analog Hold 0–42 -
configuration (Px: P1–P7)
*‘10(V3)~11(I3)’ of DRV-07 are available when Extended IO option is installed. Refer to Extended IO
option manual for more detailed information.

5.6.14 I-Term Clear

When operating in PI Control mode, a digital input can be set to ‘24 (I-Term Clear)’. When activated,
all of the accumulated errors are deleted. Refer to section 6 PID Control Group (PID).

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Px terminal setting Px Define
IN 65~71 24 I-Term Clear 0-42 -
options (Px: P1–P7)

5.6.15 PID Openloop

When operating in PI Control mode, a digital input can be set to ‘25 (PID Openloop)’. When activated,
the inverter disables the PI Control. Refer to section 6.3.4 PID Switching (PID Open loop) for more
details.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Px terminal setting Px Define
IN 65~71 25 PID Openloop 0-42 -
options (Px: P1–P7)

172
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

5.6.16 PID PGain2

When operating in PI Control mode, a digital input can be set to ‘26 (PID Gain2)’. When activated, the
inverter switches from the PID PGain1 setting to the PID PGain2 setting. Refer to section 6 PID
Control Group (PID) for more details.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Px terminal setting Px Define
IN 65~71 26 PID Gain2 0-42 -
options (Px: P1–P7)

5.6.17 PID Ref Change

When operating in PI Control mode, a digital input can be set to ‘27 (PID Ref Change)’. When
activated, the inverter switches from the PID Ref 1 settings (PID-10 ~ PID-14) to the PID Ref 2
settings (PID-15 ~ PID-19). Refer to section 6 PID Control Group (PID) for more details.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Px terminal setting Px Define PID Ref
IN 65~71 27 0-42 -
options (Px: P1–P7) Change

5.6.18 Pre-Excite

A digital input can be set to ‘28 (Pre Excite) to stop and hold the motor prior to starting. Refer to
section 5.4.2.2 Start After DC Braking for more details.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Px terminal setting Px Define
IN 65~71 28 Pre Excite 0-42 -
options (Px: P1–P7)

5.6.19 Timer In

Add a timer function to the inverter. Set a digital input to activate the timer. Set outputs (Relay1 ~
5 or Q1) to respond to the input. Add On/Off delay times to the outputs.

Parameter Setting
Group Code Name LCD Display Unit
Setting Range
Px terminal Px Define
IN 65–71 29 Timer In 0~42 -
configuration (Px: P1–P7)
31 Multi-function relay1 Relay 1
Multi-function 22 Timer Out 0~43 -
33 Q1 Define
OUT output1
55 Timer on delay TimerOn delay 3.00 0.00–100 sec
56 Timer off delay TimerOff delay 1.00 0.00–100 sec

173
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

Timer Setting Details

Code Description
IN-65–71 Choose one of the digital input terminals and set it to 29 (Timer In).
Px Define Activate the terminal to start the timer function.
OUT-31 ~ 35
Set multi-function output terminals to be used as the timer output to 22
Relay1~Relay5,
(Timer out).
OUT-36 Q1 Define
OUT-55 Set the On Delay time. When the digital input is activated, the output
TimerOn Delay, relay will change state after the On Delay time has passed.
OUT-56 Set the Off Delay time. When the digital input is deactivated, the output
TimerOff Delay relay will change state after the Off Delay time has passed.

5.6.20 Dis Aux Ref

When using an Auxiliary Reference along with a Main Frequency Reference, a digital input can be set
to ‘29 (dis Aux Ref)’. When activated, the inverter ignores the Auxiliary Reference. Refer to section
5.3.2 BAS-03 Operating with Auxiliary References for more details.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Px terminal setting Px Define
IN 65~71 29 dis Aux Ref 0-42 -
options (Px: P1–P7)

5.6.21 FWD JOG / REV JOG

A digital input that is set to ’32 FWD JOG’ and/or ’33 REV JOG’ also starts the inverter. Refer to section
5.6.4.5.2 Jog Operation 2-Fwd/Rev Jog by Multi-function Terminal for more details.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Px terminal setting Px Define 32 FWD JOG
IN 65~71 0-42 -
options (Px: P1–P7) 33 REV JOG

5.6.22 Fire Mode

A digital input that is set to ’34 Fire Mode’ to operate the inverter under emergency situations. See section
5.8.10 PRT-44 Fire Mode on page 204 for more details.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Px terminal setting Px Define
IN 65~71 34 Fire Mode 0-42 -
options (Px: P1–P7)

174
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

5.6.23 Time Event En

A digital input can be set to ’35 Time Event En’. When activated, the scheduling set in the Event Timer of
Application Group 3 (AP3) is performed. Refer to 8.2 Application Group 3 (AP3) on page 269 for details
on the Event Timer.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Px terminal setting Px Define Time Event
IN 65~71 35 0-42 -
options (Px: P1–P7) En

5.6.24 Pre Heat

A digital input can be set to ’36 Pre Heat’. When activated, current is applied to the motor to remove
moisture and prevent freezing. Refer to 8.1.8 AP2-48 Pre-Heat Function on page 267 for details on setting
the current level and time.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Px terminal setting Px Define
IN 65~71 36 Pre Heat 0-42 -
options (Px: P1–P7)

5.6.25 Damper Open

A digital input may be set to ‘45 (Damper Open)’ to receive the damper open status input. Refer to
section 8.1 AP2-45 Damper Operation on page 265 for more details.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Px terminal setting Px Define
IN 65~71 37 Damper Open 0-42 -
options (Px: P1–P7)

5.6.26 Pump Clean

A digital input can be set to ’38 Pump Clean’ to perform the Pump Cleaning Operation. Refer to
section 8.1.3 AP2-15 Pump Clean Operation on page 259 for more details.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Px terminal setting Px Define
IN 65~71 38 Pump Clean 0-42 -
options (Px: P1–P7)

5.6.27 Sleep Wake Chg

A digital input can be set to ’39 Sleep Wake Chg’ to switch between two different Sleep/Wake Up
settings, Sleep/Wake Up 1 (AP1-07~AP1-10) and Sleep/Wake Up 2 (AP1-11 ~ AP1-14). Refer to
section 6.3.2 PID Sleep Mode on page 232 for more details.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Px terminal setting Px Define Sleep Wake
IN 65~71 39 0-42 -
options (Px: P1–P7) Chg

175
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

5.6.28 PID Step Ref L, PID Step Ref M, PID Step Ref H

Three digital inputs can provide up to 7 different Step References (setpoints). Refer to section 6 PID
Control Group (PID) on page 219 for more details.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
40 PID Step Ref L
Px terminal setting Px Define
IN 65~71 41 PID Step Ref M 0-42 -
options (Px: P1–P7)
42 PID Step Ref H

5.6.29 Digital Input Terminal Control

Each of the digital inputs can be set independently to function as On Delay and/or Off Delay. A
filter time constant can be applied to all the digital inputs. Longer time settings will delay the
response of the input. Additionally, the digital inputs can be configured independently as a
normally open input or a normally closed input. The status of the inputs can be viewed at IN-90.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
0 0000 0000 -
83 Enable On Delay DI On DelayEn -
1 1111 1111
0 0000 0000 -
84 Enable Off Delay DI Off DelayEn -
1 1111 1111
Multi-function input
85 DI On Delay 10 0–10000 msec
terminal On filter
IN
Multi-function input
86 DI Off Delay 3 0–10000 msec
terminal Off filter
Multi-function input 0 0000 0000 -
87 DI NC/NO Sel -
terminal selection 1 1111 1111
Multi-function input 0 0000 0000 -
90 DI Status -
terminal status 1 1111 1111
P8 and P9 terminals are on the Extended I/O PCB.

176
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

Multi-function Input Terminal Control Setting Details

Code Description
Each input terminal (P1~P9) can be set independently to function as On
Delay and/or Off Delay. Set an “On Delay” function for selected
terminals with IN-83. Set an “Off Delay” function for selected
terminals with IN-84.
IN-83 LCD bit representation in parameter view. When the top segment is
DI On Delay En black, bit is set to "ON".
IN-84 Item Bit Status (On) Bit Status (Off)
DI Off Delay En
LCD Display
P9 P8 P7 P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

IN-85
Set the On/Off delay times for the selected terminals in IN-83 and IN-
DI On Delay
84. When the terminal receives a change of state input it is
IN-86
recognized as On or Off after the set time.
DI Off Delay
Select terminal input contact types (NO or NC) for each input
terminal. Type A designates a normally open (NO) contact input,
close to activate. Type B designates a normally closed (NC) contact
input, open to activate.
LCD bit representation in parameter view. When the bottom segment
is black, bit is set to "OFF" (normally open).
IN-87 DI NC/NO Sel Type A Type B
Type
(NO) (NC)
LCD 1 1

Display 0 0
P9 P8 P7 P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Type B
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Type A

Display the status of each input terminal. In parameter view, when

the bottom segment is black, bit is "OFF" (status is open). When the
top segment is black, bit is "ON" (status is closed).
Type A Type B
Type
IN-90 DI Status (Open) (Closed)
LCD 1 1

Display 0 0
P9 P8 P7 P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Closed
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Open

177
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

5.7 Output Group (OUT)

5.7.1 OUT-01, OUT-07 Analog Outputs

Each of the analog output terminals (AO1, AO2) can represent one of a variety of functions. AO1
is switchable (SW5 on IO TB PCB) between 0/4-20mA or 0-10V outputs. AO2 is 0-10V output
only. Scaling and filtering can also be applied to the output signals. A 0-32kHz pulsed output can
be provided at terminal Q1 (OUT-36 set to ‘38, TO’).

5.7.1.1 Voltage and Current Analog Output

Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
01 Analog output1 AO1 Mode 0 Frequency 0–12 -
02 Analog output1 gain AO1 Gain 100.0 -1000.0–1000.0 %
03 Analog output1 bias AO1 Bias 0.0 -100.0–100.0 %
04 Analog output1 filter AO1 Filter 5 0–10000 ms
05 Analog constant output1 AO1 Const % 0.0 0.0–100.0 %
06 Analog output1 monitor AO1 Monitor 0.0 0.0–1000.0 %
OUT
07 Analog output2 AO2 Mode 0 Frequency 0–12 -
08 Analog output2 gain AO2 Gain 100.0 -1000.0–1000.0 %
09 Analog output2 bias AO2 Bias 0.0 -100.0–100.0 %
10 Analog output2 filter AO2 Filter 5 0–10000 ms
11 Analog constant output2 AO2 Const % 0.0 0.0–100.0 %
12 Analog output2 monitor AO2 Monitor 0.0 0.0–1000.0 %

Voltage and Current Analog Output Setting Details

Code Description
Select the function of the signal to output.
Setting Function
Outputs operation frequency as a standard. 10V
0 Frequency output is made from the frequency set at DRV-20
(Max Freq)
Output A 10V output represents 150% of inverter rated
1
OUT-01 Current current.
AO1 Mode Sets the outputs based on the inverter output
voltage. 10V output is made from a set voltage in
Output
OUT-07 2 MOT-07 (Motor Voltage).
Voltage
AO2 Mode If ‘0’ is set in MOT-07, 230V/460V inverter’s output
10V based on the actual input voltages.
Outputs inverter DC bus voltage as a standard.
3 DC Link Volt Outputs 10V when the DC bus voltage is 410Vdc
for 230V inverter’s, and 820Vdc for 460V models.
Output Monitors output wattage. A 10V output represents
4
Power 150% of inverter rated power.

178
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

Code Description
Outputs set frequency as a standard. Outputs 10V
7 Target Freq
at the maximum frequency (DRV-20).
Outputs frequency calculated with Acc/Dec function
8 Ramp Freq as a standard. May vary with actual output
frequency. Outputs 10V.
PID Ref Outputs command value of a PID controller as a
9
Value standard. Outputs approximately 6.6V at 100%.
PID Fdk Outputs feedback amount of a PID controller as a
10
Value standard. Outputs approximately 6.6V at 100%.
Outputs the output value of a PID controller as a
11 PID Output
standard. Outputs approximately 10V at 100%.
Outputs a fixed amount based on the setting of
12 Constant
OUT-05 (AO1 Const %).
The following example uses a 0-10V output at the AO1 terminal.
The Gain and Bias settings provide scaling adjustment of the analog
outputs. The graphs below illustrate adjustments of OUT-02 (AO1 Gain)
and OUT-03 (AO1 Bias) percentages and the effect on the analog output
(AO1). The X-axis is the % value of the selected output item and the Y-axis
is the corresponding output voltage (0–10 V) at the AO1 terminal.

OUT-02 AO1 Gain,

OUT-03 AO1 Bias
OUT-08 AO2 Gain
OUT-09 AO2 Bias

Frequency setting example: Using default values of 100% Gain and 0%

Bias and the maximum frequency set at DRV-20 (Max Freq) is 60 Hz.
When the output frequency is 30 Hz, the corresponding X-axis value is
50% or 5V output at AO1 terminal.
The percent value of the analog output is based on the following equation.
𝐹𝑟𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑦
𝐴𝑂1 = × 𝐴𝑂1 𝐺𝑎𝑖𝑛 + 𝐴𝑂1 𝐵𝑖𝑎𝑠
𝑀𝑎𝑥𝐹𝑟𝑒𝑞

OUT-04 AO1 Filter

Set filter time constant on the analog outputs.
OUT-10 AO2 Filter
OUT-05 If analog output at OUT-01 (AO1 Mode) is set to 12 (Constant), a fixed
A01 Const % current output can be set between 0–100% for calibration and other uses.
OUT-11 If analog output at OUT-07 (AO2 Mode) is set to 12 (Constant), a fixed
AO2 Const % voltage output can be set between 0 - 100% for calibration and other uses.
OUT-06
AO1 Monitor Monitors analog output values. Displays the output voltage (or current) as a
OUT-12 percentage (%) with 10V or 20 mA as 100%.
AO2 Monitor
179
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

Note
AO1 Current Output Tuning Mode on 4–20mA output, OUT-02 (AO1 Gain) and OUT-03 (AO1 Bias)
Bias Tuning
Set OUT-01 (AO1 Mode) to constant and set OUT-05 (AO1 Const %) to 0.0 %.
Set OUT-03 (AO1 Bias) to 20.0% and then check current output. 4mA output should be displayed. If the
value is less than 4mA, gradually increase OUT-03 (AO1 Bias) until 4mA is measured. If the value is
more than 4mA, gradually decrease OUT-03 (AO1 Bias) until 4mA is measured.
Gain Tuning
Set OUT-05 (AO1 Const %) to 100.0%
Set OUT-02 (AO1 Gain) to 80.0% and measure current output at 20mA. If the value is less than 20mA,
gradually increase OUT-02 (AO1 Gain) until 20mA is measured. If the value is more than 20mA, gradually
decrease OUT-02 (AO1 Gain) until 20mA is measured.
AO2 Output Tuning
The functions of each parameter for AO2 voltage output (parameters OUT-07~ OUT-12) are identical to
the descriptions for the above AO1, 4-20mA outputs.

5.7.1.2 OUT-61 Analog Pulse Output

The pulse output terminal (Q1/TO) can represent one of a variety of functions (OUT-61). Scaling
and filtering can also be applied to the signal.

Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
36 Multi-function output Q1 Q1 define 38 TO 0–42 -
0 Frequency
Output
1
Current
Output
2
Voltage
DCLink
3
Voltage
Output
4
61 Pulse output setting TO Mode Power 0-12 -
7 Target Freq
8 Ramp Freq
OUT PID Ref
9
Value
PID Fdb
10
Value
11 PID Output
12 Constant
-1000.0–
62 Pulse output gain TO Gain 100.0 %
1000.0
63 Pulse output bias TO Bias 0.0 -100.0-100.0 %
64 Pulse output filter TO Filter 5 0–10000 ms
Pulse output constant
65 TO Const % 0.0 0.0-100.0 %
output2
66 Pulse output monitor TO Monitor 0.0 0.0–1000.0 %

180
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

Analog Pulse Output Setting Details

Code Description
Pulse output TO and multi-function output Q1 share the same terminal. Set
OUT-36 to ‘38’, TO for a 0-32kHz pulsed output at Q1 terminal.
OUT-36
Q1 Define
When connecting the pulse signal between the inverters, connect pulse output
(Q1/TO-EG) to pulse input (TI-CM) directly.
The Gain and Bias settings provide scaling adjustment of the pulse output
signal. The graphs below illustrate adjustments of OUT-62 (TO Gain) and OUT-
63 (TO Bias) percentages and the effect on the pulse output signal (TO). The X-
axis is the % value of the selected output item and the Y-axis is the
corresponding frequency (0–32kHz) at the Q1/TO terminal.

OUT-62
TO Gain

OUT-63
TO Bias

For example, if the maximum frequency set with DRV-20 (Max Freq) is 60Hz
and present output frequency is 30Hz, then the x-axis value on the next graph is
50%.

The frequency output is based on the following equation:

𝐹𝑟𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑦
𝑇𝑂 = × 𝑇𝑂 𝐺𝑎𝑖𝑛 + 𝑇𝑂 𝐵𝑖𝑎𝑠
𝑀𝑎𝑥𝐹𝑟𝑒𝑞

OUT-64
Sets filter time constant on the analog output.
TO Filter
OUT-65
Displays a fixed output kHz signal as a percentage (%) with 32 kHz. as 100%.
TO Const %
OUT-66 Monitors output pulse rate. Displays the output pulse rate as a percentage (%)
TO Monitor with 32 kHz as 100%.

181
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

5.7.2 OUT-31 Digital Outputs

Multi-function Output Terminals (Relay1 ~ Relay5 and Q1) Settings

Setting
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
Range
Trip Out 010
30 Fault output item 000-111 bit
Mode
Multi-function
31 Relay 1 23 Trip 0-43 -
relay1 setting
Multi-function
32 Relay 2 14 Run 0-43 -
relay2 setting
Multi-function
33 Relay 3 0 None 0-43 -
relay3 setting
Multi-function
34 Relay 4 0 None 0-43 -
relay4 setting
OUT Multi-function
35 Relay 5 0 None 0-43 -
relay5 setting
Multi-function
36 Q1 Define 0 None 0-43 -
output Q1 setting
0 0000 0000
Multi-function
41 DO Status ~ bit
output monitor
1 1111 1111
Detection FDT
57 30.00 0.00–
frequency Frequency
Maximum Hz
Detection
58 FDT Band 10.00 frequency
frequency band

182
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

Multi-function Output Terminal and Relay Setting Details

Code Description
OUT-31
Relay1
~ Select Relay 1 ~ Relay 5 output functions.
OUT-35
Relay5
OUT-36
Q1 Select terminal (Q1) output options. Q1 is open collector TR output.
Define
Set output functions.
Setting Function
0 None No output signal.
FDT-1 Relay changes state when the output frequency reaches the reference
frequency within frequency bandwidth / 2.
Conditions are: Absolute value (Ref frequency - output frequency) <=
frequency bandwidth/2 (OUT-58 / 2).
Example: Frequency Reference is 20 Hz. Bandwidth
(OUT-58) is 10 Hz. Relay changes state at 15 Hz.

FDT-2 Relay changes state when the reference frequency and detection frequency
(OUT-57) are equal and fulfills FDT-1 condition at the same time.
Conditions are: [Absolute value (Ref frequency-detection frequency) <
frequency bandwidth/2] & [FDT-1]
Example: Frequency Reference is 30 Hz. Detection frequency (OUT-57) is
30 Hz. Frequency bandwidth (OUT-58) is 10 Hz. Relay changes state at 25
Hz.
2

FDT-3 Relay changes state when the output frequency is within the frequency
bandwidth (OUT-58) centered around the detection frequency (OUT-57).
Conditions are: Absolute value (output frequency–operating frequency) <
frequency bandwidth/2
3
Example: Detection frequency (OUT-57) is 30 Hz. Frequency bandwidth
(OUT-58) is 10 Hz. Relay changes state when the output frequency is
between 25 Hz. and 35 Hz.

183
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

Code Description

FDT-4 Relay changes state based on separate conditions for acceleration and
deceleration.
In acceleration: Operation frequency≧ Detected frequency
In deceleration: Operation frequency>(Detected frequency–Detected
frequency width/2)

Example: Detection frequency (OUT-57) is 30 Hz. Frequency bandwidth

(OUT-58) is 10 Hz. During acceleration, relay changes state when output
frequency reaches detection frequency. During deceleration, the relay
4 changes state when the output frequency is below the frequency
bandwidth/2.

5 Overload Relay changes state when inverter trips on motor overload.

IOL Relay changes state when inverter trips on inverter overload. See section
6
5.8.5.1 for more details.
7 Underload Relay changes state when inverter trips on motor underload.
9 Stall Relay changes state when the inverter detects a motor stall condition.
10 Over voltage Relay changes state when the inverter trips on Over Voltage.
11 Low Voltage Relay changes state when the inverter trips on Low Voltage.
12 Over Heat Relay changes state when the inverter trips on Overheat.
13 Lost Relay changes state when the inverter trips on Lost Command. Lost
command command includes lost reference frequency from:
Analog input
RS-485 communication
Option Cards (Extended I/O and communications)
Note
When using communications or RS-485 for speed reference, if speed
reference is lost the protection operates based on the time set at PRT-
13 (Lost Cmd Time).
14 RUN Relay changes state when a run command is applied and the inverter outputs
voltage. There is no output when reference frequency is at zero or during DC
braking.

184
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

Code Description
15 Stop Relay changes state when a stop command is applied and when there is no
inverter output voltage.
16 Steady Relay changes state during steady state operation.

17 Inverter line Used in combination with “Comm Line” function. Relay maintains state while
the motor is driven by the inverter output. For details, refer to 5.6.11
Exchange on page 169.
18 Comm line Relay changes state when a digital input set to “18, exchange” function is
applied. For details, refer to 5.6.11 Exchange on page 169.
19 Speed Relay changes state during speed search operation. For details, refer to 5.5.3
Search CON-70 Speed Search Operation on page 155.
20 Ready Relay changes state when the inverter is powered up, in stop mode and in
run mode. Opens with inverter faults.
22 Timer Out Used in combination with a digital input set to “Timer In” function. The relay
changes state when the digital input is activated and after the time delay
settings. For more details, refer to 5.6.19 Timer In on page 173.
23 Trip Relay changes state after a fault condition. Refer to 5.7.4 OUT-30 Fault
Output using Relay or Q1 Terminals on page 0186.
25 DB Relay changes state when the Dynamic Brake Duty Cycle (PRT-66) is
Warn %ED exceeded. Refer to 5.8.13 on page 211.
26 On/Off Relay changes state based on the analog input signal levels set with ADV-
Control 66~ADV-68. Refer to 05.7.6 OUT-67 on page 189.
27 Fire Mode Relay changes state when Fire Mode is activated. Refer to 5.8.10 PRT-44
Fire Mode on page 204.
28 Pipe Broken Outputs a signal when a broken pipe is detected. Refer to 5.8.12 PRT-60
Pipe Break Detection on page 210.
29 Damper Err Outputs a signal when damper open signal is not entered. For more details,
refer to 8.1 AP2-45 Damper Operation on page 256.
30 Lubrication Outputs a signal when a lubrication function is in operation.
31 Pump Clean Outputs a signal when a pump cleaning function is in operation.
32 Level Detect Outputs a signal when an LDT trip occurs.
33 Damper Outputs a signal when a damper open signal is set at IN-65~71 multi-function
Control terminals and run command is active.
36 AUTO State Outputs a signal in AUTO mode.
37 HAND State Outputs a signal in HAND mode.
38 TO Outputs a signal at Q1 as a pulsed output.
39 Except Date Outputs a signal when operating the exception day schedule.
40 KEB Relay changes state when the inverter is operating in KEB mode. This
Operating outputs in the energy buffering state before the input power restoration
regardless of KEB mode settings. Refer to 5.5.4 CON-77 Kinetic Energy
Buffering Operation on page 158.
41 Broken Belt Outputs a signal when a Broken belt is detected.
42 BR Control Used for external electro-mechanical brake control. Relay operates based on
ADV-41~ADV-47 settings. Refer to 5.4.9 ADV-41 Brake Control on page 148.
43 2nd Source Relay changes state when Auxiliary Mode is selected. Refer to 5.3.1 BAS-01
2nd Operating Mode - 2nd Source on page 126.

185
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

• FDT-1 and FDT-2 functions are related to the frequency setting of the inverter. If the inverter
enters standby mode by pressing the off button during auto mode operation, FDT-1 and
FDT-2 function operation may be different because the set frequency of the inverter is
different compared to the set frequency of the auto mode.
If monitoring signals such as ‘Under load’ or’ LDT’ are configured at multi-function output
terminals, signal outputs are maintained unless certain conditions defined for signal cutoff
are met.

5.7.3 OUT-41 Digital Output Status

Display the status of each output terminal. In parameter view, when the bottom segment is black, bit is
"OFF" (status is open). When the top segment is black, bit is "ON" (status is closed).

LCD bit representation in parameter view. When the bottom segment is black, bit is set to "OFF",
status is open. When top segment is black, bit is set to “ON”, status is closed.

0 0000 0000
Multi-function output
OUT 41 DO Status ~ bit
monitor
1 1111 1111

5.7.4 OUT-30 Fault Output using Relay or Q1 Terminals

With Relay1 ~ Relay5 or Q1 set to 23 (Trip), OUT-30 (Fault Output Mode) can further define relay
activation during low voltage faults, all faults and auto restart functions. Additionally, On and Off
delay times can also be applied to the outputs when set to 23 (Trip).

Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
010
Trip Out
30 Fault output mode 000-111 bit
Mode

31 Multi-function relay1 Relay 1 23 Trip 0-43 -

Multi-function relay2
32 Relay 2 14 Run 0-43 -
setting
Multi-function relay3
33 Relay 3 0 None 0-43 -
setting
OUT Multi-function relay4
34 Relay 4 0 None 0-43 -
setting
Multi-function relay5
35 Relay 5 0 None 0-43 -
setting
36 Multi-function output1 Q1 Define 0 None 0-43 -
TripOut
53 Fault output on delay 0.00 0.00–100.00 sec
OnDly
TripOut
54 Fault output off delay 0.00 0.00–100.00 sec
OffDly

186
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

Fault Output by Multi-function Output Terminal and Relay - Setting Details

Code Description
.Setting Function
Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
✓ Operates when low voltage faults occur
Operates when faults other than low voltage
✓
occur
Operates when auto restart fails (PRT-08,
✓
PRT-09)
OUT-30 LCD bit representation in parameter view. When the top segment is
Trip Out Mode black, bit is set to "ON".
Item Bit Status (On) Bit Status (Off)

LCD Display
bit 2 bit 1 bit 0

1 1 1

0 0 0

OUT-31~OUT-35 Configure Relay1~ Relay5 output function. Set OUT-31~35 (Relay1-

Relay1~Relay5 Relay5) to 23 (Trip). When a fault occurs, the output will be activated.
OUT-36 Configure the open collector output (Q1) to 23 (Trip). When a fault
Q1 Define occurs, the output will be activated.
OUT-53
When a trip occurs, the relays will be activated after the delay time set
TripOut On Dly,
in OUT-53 (On Dly). After a reset, the relays will be initialized after the
OUT-54
delay time set in OUT-54 (Off Dly).
TripOut OffDly

187
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

5.7.5 OUT-50 Multi-function Output Terminal Delay Time Settings

Set On/Off delay times to adjust the relay operation time. The delay times set in OUT-50 and
OUT-51 will be applied to all Relays (1~5) and Q1 except when any are set to (23) Trip.
Additionally, a NO or NC setting can be individually applied to the outputs.

Setting
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
Range
Multi-function
50 DO On Delay 0.00 0.00–100.00 sec
output On delay
Multi-function
51 DO Off Delay 0.00 0.00–100.00 sec
OUT output Off delay
Select multi- 0 0000 0000
DO NC/NO
52 function output ~ bit
Sel
terminal 1 1111 1111

Output Terminal Delay Time and NO/NC Setting Details

Code Description
OUT-50 When the output is operated based on OUT-31~36 settings, it will activate
DO On Delay after the delay time set in OUT-50.
OUT-51 When the output is initialized based on OUT-31~36 settings, it will
DO Off Delay deactivate after the delay time set in OUT-51.
Select relay output contact types (NO or NC) for each output relay. Type A
designates a normally open (NO) relay output. Type B designates a
normally closed (NC) relay output. LCD bit representation in parameter
view. When the bottom segment is black, bit is set to "OFF" (normally
open relay).
OUT-52 Type A Type B
DO NC/NO Sel
Type
(NO) (NC)
LCD 1 1

Display 0 0
R8 R7 R6 Q1 R5 R4 R3 R2 R1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Type B (NC)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Type A (NO)

Output Terminal Delay Times

188
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

5.7.6 OUT-67 Relay Output On/Off Control

This feature operates a digital output (Relay1~Relay5 or Q1) based on the analog input level. Set
the On level (OUT-68) to activate the output and the Off level (OUT-69) to deactivate the output.

Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
Output terminal on/off On/Off Ctrl
67 1 V1 - -
control mode Src
Output terminal on Output terminal off
OUT 68 On-C Level 90.00 %
level level– 100.00%
Output terminal off 0.00–Output
69 Off-C Level 10.00 %
level terminal on level
Multi-function
31~35 Relay 1~5
Relay1~Relay5
OUT 26 On/Off - -
Multi-function output
36 Q1 Define
Q1 item

Multi-function Output On/Off Control Setting Details

Code Description
OUT-67
Select an analog input to be used for On/Off control.
On/Off Ctrl Src
OUT-68
On-C Level,
Set the On/Off levels for the output (Relay1~5 or Q1).
OUT-69
Off-C Level

189
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

5.8 Protection Group (PRT)

Protection features provided by the H2 Series inverter include both motor and inverter protections.
Motor Protection - Overload, Underload, Over Heat (ETH), Stall Prevention, etc.
Inverter Protection - Open Phase, Inverter Overload, Fan Fault, etc.

5.8.1 PRT-01 Backspin Timer

The Backspin Timer is used to prevent starting for a specified time. When the inverter stops (or
trips), the backspin timer prevents the inverter from starting into a back spinning load. For pumps,
the run signal is blocked for the time it takes for the remaining flow rate to discharge completely
when the net head of the pump is large.

Code Keypad Display Description Setting Range Default Units

Time to block
PRT-01 Backspin Time 0.0~6000.0 0 sec
Run command

Backspin Timer Setting Details

When any value is set in PRT-01, a warning message will be displayed and all start or reset/restart
signals will be ignored for the set time. The time is based on time after stop, not time since start
was issued.
• When [PRT-01 Backspin Time] is set as “0.0”, the function is deactivated.
• When output frequency reaches “0” after a stop command or trip, the inverter cannot run for
[PRT-01 Backspin Time] and will display warning message of {Backspin Time}.
• If a start command is re-entered during deceleration, the inverter will operate immediately
without applying the [PRT-01 Backspin Time] time.
• After [PRT-01 Backspin Time], the inverter will automatically restart according to the [Reset
Restart] setting values. Refer to below diagram.

190
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

5.8.2 PRT-05 Phase Loss Protection

5.8.2.1 Open Phase Protection

Open-phase monitoring and protection can be set for both the input and output of the inverter. The
protection is used to prevent overcurrent levels at the inverter output due to an open phase. An
open phase at output may cause the motor to stall due to a lack of torque. Input phase open
detection is determined by DC Bus ripple voltage. The level can be set with PRT-06.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Input/output open- Phase Loss 00
05 Bits 00-11 bit
phase protection Chk
PRT
Open-phase input 15 (240V, 480V)
06 IPO V Band 1–100 V V
voltage band 40 (575V)

Input and Output Open-phase Protection Setting Details

Code Description
Input and output phase loss protection can be set independently.
LCD bit representation in parameter view. When the top segment is black,
bit is set to "ON".
Item Bit Status (On) Bit Status (Off)
PRT-05
Phase Loss Chk LCD Display
Setting Function
Bit 1 Bit 0
✓ Output Open Phase protection
✓ Input Open Phase Protection
PRT-06 IPO V The initial value of the ripple voltage is 15V with a setting range of 0 ~
Band 100V.

5.8.3 PRT-08 Automatic Reset and Restart

For continued operation, the inverter can be automatically reset and restarted after a fault. Enable the auto
reset/restart function with parameter PRT-08. The number of reset/restart attempts and the time delay
between attempts are set with parameters PRT-09 and PRT-10. Certain faults cannot be auto reset. These
include inverter overheating, and hardware diagnostic faults.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV 06 Command source Cmd Source 1 Fx/Rx-1 0–5 -
RST 00
08 Reset restart setup 00–11 Bit
Restart
PRT
Retry
09 No. of auto restart 6 0–10 -
Number
10 Auto restart delay time Retry Delay 5.0 0.1–600.0 sec

191
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

Automatic Reset and Restart - Setting details

Code Description
LCD bit representation in parameter view. When the top segment
is black, bit is set to "ON".
Item Bit Status (On) Bit Status (Off)
LCD Display

Reset Restart function

Setting Function
Bit 1 Bit 0
0 1 For faults other than LV
1 0 For LV faults
1 1 For both
PRT-08 The RST Restart function can be performed by two different
RST Restart methods based on the “bit” settings (00~11).
PRT-09 For faults other than LV: If Bit 0 is turned on, the inverter resets
Retry Number and restarts after a trip occurs.
For LV faults: If the Bit 1 is turned on, the inverter restarts after a LV
PRT-10 Fault.
Retry Delay
The number of attempts to reset and restart is set at PRT-09 (Auto
Restart Count). If a fault occurs during operation, the inverter
automatically restarts after the set time programmed at PRT-10
(Retry Delay). At each restart, the inverter counts the number of
attempts and subtracts it from the number set at PRT-09 until the
retry number count reaches 0.
After an auto restart, if a fault does not occur within 60 sec, it will
increase the restart count number.

At auto restart, the acceleration options are identical to those of

speed search operation. Parameters CON-72–75 can be set
based on the load. Information about the speed search function
refer to 5.5.3 CON-70 Speed Search Operation on page 155.

192
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

[Example of auto restart with PRT-09 setting of 2]

Normally when a fault occurs, the inverter cuts off the output and the motor will free-run. Another fault
may be triggered if the inverter begins its operation while motor load is in a free-run state.

Note
• Using Speed Search: See CON-71~ CON-75. During Auto reset/restart, a fault may be
triggered when the inverter restarts into a spinning load. To prevent faults, set speed
search CON-71, bit 1 to “ON” (set to 1). The inverter will perform a speed search after a
fault reset.

• In HAND mode, the auto restart resets the trip but does not restart the inverter.

When auto reset/restart is enabled and a run command applied, the inverter will
reset from a fault and the motor will automatically start to rotate.

193
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

5.8.4 PRT-11 Keypad Loss and Speed Reference Loss

When setting operating speed using an analog input, a pulsed input, through communications or
the keypad, the inverter can detect a keypad loss (PRT-11) and/or a speed reference loss based
on the settings of the following parameter settings.
A digital output can be used to provide a signal when communications with the keypad are lost and/or
the speed reference is lost. Set OUT-31~35 or OUT-36 to 24 (Lost Keypad) or 13 (Lost Command).

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
0 None
Keypad command loss Lost KPD 1 Warning
11 -
operation mode Mode 0 None 2 Free-Run
3 Dec
Speed command loss Lost Cmd
12 1 Free-Run - -
operation mode Mode
PRT Time to determine Lost Cmd
13 1.0 0.1–120.0 sec
speed command loss Time
Operation frequency
Start frequency–
14 at speed command Lost Preset F 0.00 Hz
Max. frequency
loss
Analog input loss
15 AI Lost Level 0 Half of x1 -
decision level
Multi-function Relay
31~35 Relay 1–5 Lost
OUT 1–5 13 - -
Command
36 Multi-function output 1 Q1 Define

Keypad Loss and Speed Reference Loss Setting Details

Code Description
Keypad Loss - Set the inverters response to a loss of keypad
communications with the inverter.
Setting Function
The speed command immediately becomes the
0 None
operation frequency without any protection function.
PRT-11 Set OUT-31~35 or OUT-36 to 24: Lost keypad. The
Lost KPD Mode 1 Warning inverter outputs a warning signal when abnormal
operating conditions arise.
The inverter blocks output. The motor performs in
2 Free-Run
free-run condition.
The motor decelerates and then stops at the time set at
3 Dec
PRT-07 (Trip Dec Time).
Speed Reference Loss - The inverter responds to a speed reference loss
based on the setting of PRT-12.
Setting Function
The speed reference immediately becomes the
0 None
operating frequency without any protection function.
PRT-12
The inverter blocks the output. The motor coasts to a
Lost Cmd Mode 1 Free-Run
stop.
The inverter decelerates the motor and then stops at the
2 Dec
time set at PRT-07 (Trip Dec Time).
3 Hold Input The inverter calculates the average input value for
194
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

10 seconds before the loss of the speed reference and

uses it as the speed reference.
The inverter calculates the average output value for
4 Hold Output 10 seconds before the loss of the speed reference and
uses it as the speed reference.
The inverter operates at the frequency set at PRT- 14
5 Lost Preset
(Lost Preset F).
Configure the voltage level and time delay for speed reference loss
detection when using analog input.
Setting Function
Based on the minimum analog input values set at IN-
08 (V1), IN-12 (V1’), IN-38 (V2) and IN-53 (I2),
protection operates when the input signal is reduced to
half of the initial value of the analog input and after the
PRT-15
0 Half of x1 time (PRT-13) has expired.
AI Lost Level
Example: Set the speed reference to ‘5 (I2)’ at DRV-07,
and set IN-53 (I2 min.) to 4 mA. When the 4mA input
PRT-13
drops to less than half (2mA), the protective function is
Lst Cmd Time
activated after the set time (PRT-13).
The protective function operates when the analog input
signal falls below the minimum values set at IN-08
1 Below of x1
(V1), IN-12 (V1’), IN-38 (V2) and IN-53 (I2) and after
the time (PRT-13) has expired.
NOTE: If the minimum value of the analog input is ‘0’, the LostCmd function
does not operate.
To run at a fixed speed, set the operation mode (PRT-12 Lost Cmd Mode) to
PRT-14
‘5 (Lost Preset)’. When the protection function operates, this sets the
Lost Preset F
frequency for continued operation.

EX: Speed Ref Loss below 5V. Set IN-06 (V1 Polarity) to ‘Unipolar’ and IN-08 to ‘5 (V)’. Set PRT-
15 (AI Lost Level) to ‘1 (Below x1)’ and PRT-12 (Lost Cmd Mode) to ‘2 (Dec)’ and then set PRT-13
(Lost Cmd Time) to 5 seconds. Then the inverter operates as follows:

Note
When using communications or RS-485 for speed reference, if speed reference is lost the
protection operates based on the time set at PRT-13 (Lost Cmd Time).

195
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

5.8.5 PRT-17 Overload Trip and Early Warning

The inverter provides motor overload protection and will trip on an Overload Fault based on
amount of current (% motor amps) and time. The inverter responds to an overload fault based on
the setting of parameter PRT-20 (OL Trip Select). Select 1 (Free-Run) or 2 (Dec) to activate the
overload function and to determine the stop method when an overload fault occurs. Relay1~
Relay5 (OUT-31~35) or Q1 (OUT-36) can be set to 5 (Overload) to provide an output signal.

The inverter can also provide an overload warning (OLW) based on the settings of parameters
PRT-17 (OL Warn Select), PRT-18 (OL Warn Level) and PRT-19 (OL Warn Time). Set parameter
PRT-17 to 1 (Yes) to activate the overload warning function. Set the output current level in
parameter PRT-18, set the time in PRT-19. Relay1~ Relay5 (OUT-31~35) or Q1 (OUT-36) can be
set to 5 (Overload) to provide an output warning signal. The inverter does not trip when
warning levels are reached.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
0 Normal Duty
04 Load Level Setting Load Duty 0-1 -
1 Heavy Duty
Overload warning
17 OL Warn Select 1 Yes 0–1 -
selection
Overload warning
18 OL Warn Level 110 30–120 %
level
PRT
Overload warning
19 OL Warn Time 10.0 0–30 sec
time
Motion at overload
20 OL Trip Select 1 Free-Run - -
trip
21 Overload trip level OL Trip Level 120 30–150 %
22 Overload trip time OL Trip Time 60.0 0–60.0 sec
Multi-function
31~35 Relay 1–5
relay1–relay5 item
OUT 5 Over Load - -
Multi-function output
36 Q1 Define
Q1 item
A fault or warning occurs when the motor reaches an overload state based on the motor’s rated
current and the PRT settings. The amount of current for trips and warnings can be set separately.

196
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

Overload Early Warning and Trip Setting Details

Code Description
Select the Overload Level.
Setting Function
Used in light loads like fans and pumps (overload
PRT-04 Normal
0 tolerance: 110%/120% of rated underload current for 1
Load Duty Duty
minute).
Used in heavy loads, like hoists and cranes (overload
Heavy
1 tolerance: 150% of rated heavy load current for 1
Duty
minute).
PRT-17 Set to ‘1 (Yes)’ to activate the overload warning function. If ‘0 (No)’ is selected,
OL Warn Select it will not operate.
When the input current to the motor is greater than the overload warning level
PRT-18
(OL Warn Level) and continues at that level during the overload warning time
OL Warn Level
(OL Warn Time), the output (Relay 1~5 or Q1) can send a warning signal
PRT-19
when set to ‘5’ Overload’. The inverter does not trip when warning levels
OL Warn Time
are reached.
Select the inverter protective action in the event of an overload fault.
Setting Function
PRT-20 0 None No protective action is taken.
OL Trip Select The inverter output is blocked and the motor will coast
1 Free-Run
to a stop.
3 Dec The inverter decelerates the motor to a stop.
PRT-21 When the current supplied to the motor is greater than the value of the
OL Trip Level overload trip level (OL Trip Level) and continues for the overload trip time (OL
PRT-22 Trip Time), the inverter output is either blocked or decelerates according to
OL Trip Time the PRT-20 selection.

Note
Overload warnings warn of an overload before an overload fault occurs. The overload warning
signal will not operate if the overload warning level (OL Warn Level) and the overload warning
time (OL Warn Time) are set higher than the overload trip level (OL Trip Level) and the overload
trip time (OL Trip Time).

197
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

5.8.5.1 Inverter Overload Protection (IOLT) and Warning

In addition to motor overload settings, the inverter has built in inverter overload protection. When
the inverter output current exceeds the rated current, a protective function is activated to prevent
damages to the inverter. This inverter overload protection is based on inverse proportional
characteristics.

An inverter overload warning signal (relay output) can be provided before the inverter overload
protection function operates. Set OUT-31~35 or OUT-36 to 6 (IOL). When the overcurrent time
reaches 60% of the allowed overcurrent time (120%, 1 min), the output relay will change state
(signal output at 120%, 36 sec).

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
31~35 Multi-function relay 1–5 Relay 1–5
OUT 6 IOL - -
36 Multi-function output 1 Q1 Define

5.8.6 PRT-23 Under Load Fault and Warning

The inverter can be set to trip and/or provide a warning when low motor current conditions exist
during operation. This will protect against pump cavitation, deadhead and dry running operating
conditions. Set PRT-27, Under load fault selection to Free-Run or Decelerate to enable the
protection. Current detection level is set with PRT-24. A digital output (OUT-31~35 or OUT-36)
can be set to 7 (Under Load) to provide an output signal. The following table lists the under load
fault and warning features of the H2 series inverter.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Under load Output
23 UL Source 0 0–1 -
detection Source Current
Under load
24 UL Band 10.0 0.0–100.0 %
detection Band
Under load warning
25 UL Warn Sel 1 Yes 0–1 -
PRT selection
Under load warning
26 UL Warn Time 10.0 0–600.0 sec
time
Under load trip
27 UL Trip Sel 1 Free-Run 0-2 -
selection
28 Under load trip timer UL Trip Time 30.0 0–600.0 sec

Under Load Trip and Warning Setting Details

Code Description
PRT-23 Select a source to detect the under load trip. An under load trip can be detected
UL Source using output current or output power.
Set a value for the under load fault occurrence. This value (UL Band) applies
PRT-24
to each frequency of the load characteristics curve made by the AP2-01 Load
UL Band
Tune.
Select the under load warning options. Set an output at OUT-31–35 and 36) to
PRT-25
‘7’ (Under load). The warning signals are output when under load conditions
UL Warn Sel
occur.
198
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

PRT-26 A protective function operates when under load level condition explained
UL Warn Time above is maintained for the warning time set.
Sets the inverter operation mode for situations when an under load trip
PRT-27 occurs. If set to ‘1 (Free-Run)’, the output is blocked in an under load fault
UL Trip Sel event. If set to ‘2 (Dec)’, the inverter decelerates the motor and stops when an
under load fault occurs.
PRT-28 A protective function operates when under load level conditions explained
UL Trip Time above are maintained for the trip time set.

To operate under load trip properly, a load tuning (AP2-01 Load Tune) must be performed in
advance. If you cannot perform a load tuning, manually set the load fit frequencies (AP2-02 Load Fit
Lfreq–AP2-10 Load Fit Hfreq). The Under Load protection does not operate while the Energy Save
function is in operation.

5.8.7 PRT-31 No Motor Trip

The inverter can detect a low motor current condition and will trip on “No Motor trip” if the output
current is below the PRT-32 detection level for the PRT-33 detection time. The inverter responds
to a no motor trip condition when PRT-31 (No Motor detection) is set to (1) Free-Run. PRT-31
may be set to (0) None (default) for testing with no motor connected.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Operation for no 0 None
31 No Motor Trip 0 None -
motor trip 1 Free-Run
No motor trip
PRT 32 No Motor Level 5 1–100 %
current level
No motor
33 No Motor Time 3.0 0.1–10 sec
detection time

No Motor Trip Setting Details

Code Description
PRT-32 If the output current value [based on the rated current (MOT-05)] is
No Motor Level lower than the value set at PRT-32 (No Motor Level), and if this
PRT-33 continues for the time set at PRT-33 (No Motor Time), a ‘no motor trip’
No Motor Time occurs.

If BAS-07 (V/F Pattern) is set to ‘1 (Square)’, set PRT-32 (No Motor Level) to a value lower than the
factory default. Otherwise, a ‘no motor trip,’ may occur due to a lack of output current

199
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

5.8.8 PRT-34 Motor Over Heat Sensor

A motor thermistor (PTC) can be connected to the inverter to monitor and protect the motor. The
source of current through the PTC can be provided by the 20mA output (AO1) of the inverter. The
voltage from the PTC can be applied to the inverter input terminals V1 or I2 (set as V2). Values for
monitoring and protection are in percent (%). The inverter will trip on a “Thermal Trip” fault when
the PTC input goes above the set fault level (PRT-36).

Setting
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
Range
Selecting inverter operation 0 None
Thermal-T
34 after detection of motor 1 Free-Run 0–2
Sel -
overheat 2 Dec
Selecting the input of the PTCThermal In 0 Thermal In (V1)
35 0–1
PRT sensor Src 1 V2 (I2 terminal)
Thermal-T
36 Fault level of the PTC sensor 50.0 0.0–100.0 %
Lev
Thermal-T 0 Low
37 Fault area of the PTC sensor 0–1
Area 1 High
01 Analog output 1 item AO1 Mode 14 Constant 0–18
OUT
02 Analog output 1 gain AO1 Gain 100 0–100 %

Motor Overheat Protect Sensor Input Detail Settings

Code Description
Sets the inverter operation when motor overheat (Thermal Trip) is
detected.
Setting Function
PRT-34 0 None Does not operate when motor overheat is detected.
Thermal-T Sel When motor overheat is detected, the inverter output
1 Free-Run
is blocked and the motor will free-run (coast).
When motor overheat is detected, the motor
2 Dec
decelerates and stops.
Selects the terminal when the PTC sensor signal is connected to the
inverter.
Setting Function
PRT-35
Configure the PTC sensor connection to terminal V1.
Thermal In Src 0 Thermal In
Set SW3 to the right as TI.
Configure the PTC sensor connection to terminal I2.
1 V2
Set SW4 to the right as V2.
PRT-36
Configure the fault level (in %) of the PTC sensor.
Thermal-T Lev
Setting Function
Thermal Trip fault when the PTC sensor input is
PRT-37 0 Low
lower than PRT-36.
Thermal-T Area
Thermal Trip fault when the PTC sensor input is higher
1 High
than PRT-36.
IN-20
Monitor PTC level at IN-20.
Thermal Monitor
OUT-01 AO1 Mode Used when supplying the constant current to the PTC sensor from the
OUT-02 AO1 Gain analog output terminal (A01).
200
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

Connections of a motor thermistor (PTC sensor).

When the AO1 (analog output) terminal is connected to the PTC thermistor (temperature sensor
installed in a motor), the inverter supplies constant current to the temperature sensor. Connect the
PTC signal wire (voltage) to one of the inverter’s analog input terminals. This allows the inverter to
detect the changes in the PTC resistance and translates it into voltage. When the inverter detects
a motor overheat, a “Thermal Trip” occurs after a fixed delay time. The “Thermal Trip” cannot be
reset until the PTC input goes below the PRT-36 level.

To receive the PTC signal at V1 input terminal, set switch SW3 (Analog Input V1/TI) on the IO TB
PCB to T1 (right). The sensor does not operate if SW3 is set to ’V1’.
Set PRT-34 to Free-Run or Decel to activate monitoring and trip function.
Set PRT-35 (Thermal InSrc) to ‘0 (Thermal In)’.
Set PRT-36 to a % above which will cause a “Thermal Trip”.
Set PRT-37 to high.

To receive the PTC signal at I2 input terminal, set switch SW4 (Analog Input I2/V2) on the IO TB
PCB to V2 (right). The sensor does not operate if SW4 is set to ‘I2’.
Set PRT-35 (Thermal InSrc) to ‘1 (V2)’.

201
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

5.8.9 PRT-40 Electronic Thermal Prevention (ETH)

ETH is an electronic thermal protective function that uses the output current and the speed of the
motor to predict a rise in motor temperature without a separate temperature sensor. Protection of
the motor is based on current, time and speed. The inverter responds to an ETH fault based on
the setting of parameters PRT-40 (ETH Trip) through PRT-43 (ETH Continuous).

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Electronic thermal
40 ETH Trip Sel 0 None 0–2
prevention fault selection -
41 Motor cooling fan type Motor Cooling 0 Self-cool - -
Electronic thermal one
PRT 42 ETH 1 min 120 100–150 %
minute rating
Electronic thermal
43 prevention continuous ETH Cont 100 50–150 %
rating

Electronic Thermal (ETH) Prevention Function Setting Details

Code Description
ETH can be selected to provide motor thermal protection. Select 1 (Free-
Run) or 2 (Dec) to activate the ETH function and to determine the stop
method when an ETH fault occurs. The LCD screen displays “E-
Thermal”.
PRT-40
Setting Function
ETH Trip Sel
0 None The ETH function is not activated.
The inverter output is blocked. The motor coasts to a
1 Free-Run
halt (free-run).
2 Dec The inverter decelerates the motor to a stop.
Select motor cooling type (fan configuration) attached to the motor.
Setting Function
The cooling fan is connected to the motor shaft and the
0 Self-cool cooling effect varies with motor speed. Most
universal induction motors have this design.
Motor includes a separately powered cooling fan which
1 Forced- cool
provides extended operation at low speeds.

PRT-41
Motor Cooling

202
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

The 1 minute trip level. The amount of current that can be continuously
PRT-42
supplied to the motor for 1 minute, Percentage is based on the motor-rated
ETH 1 min
current (MOT-05).
Sets the amount of continuous rated current (including service factor)
with the ETH function activated. The range below details the set values
that can be used during continuous operation without tripping.

PRT-43
ETH Cont

203
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

5.8.10 PRT-44 Fire Mode

Fire Mode operation is for use in emergency situations. When enabled, Fire Mode allows the inverter
to provide continuous operation ignoring the majority of faults. Primarily used for fire pump operation,
but can be applied when continuous operation is required due to emergencies.

When enabled, Fire mode forces the inverter to ignore all minor faults and repeats a Reset/Restart of
major faults, regardless of the Reset/Restart count limit. In Fire mode, the inverter continues to
operate based on the Fire mode run direction and frequency set at PRT-46 and PRT-47.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Fire mode
44 Fire Mode PW 3473 - -
password
0 None -
45 Fire mode setting Fire Mode Sel 0: None 1 Fire Mode
2 Test Mode
PRT Fire mode run 0 Forward -
46 Fire Mode Dir 0: Forward
direction 1 Reverse
Fire mode run Fire Mode
47 60.00 0–max Freq Hz
frequency Freq
Fire mode
48 Fire Mode Cnt 0 - -
operation count
Digital input
IN 65–71 Px Define 34: Fire Mode 0-42 -
configuration
Digital output
31–35 Relay1-5 27: Fire Mode 0-43 -
configuration
OUT
TR output
36 Q1 define 27: Fire Mode 0-43 -
configuration

The inverter runs in Fire mode when PRT-45 (Fire Mode Sel) is set to ‘1 (Fire Mode)’, and the multi-
function terminal (IN-65~71) configured for Fire mode (34: Fire Mode) is activated. The inverter
ignores all other commands and operates in the direction set at PRT-46 (Fire mode run direction) at the
speed set at PRT-47 (Fire mode run frequency). In Fire mode, the inverter ignores most faults except
‘Over Current 1’, ‘Over Voltage’ and ‘Ground Fault’ and continues to operate. If any of these faults occur,
the inverter automatically performs a reset-restart to continue the operation.

Fire Mode Function Setting Details

Code Description
Fire mode password is 3473.
PRT-44
A password must be created to enable Fire mode. PRT-45 (Fire Mode
Fire Mode PW
Sel) can be modified only after the password is entered.
Sets the Fire Mode.
Setting Function
0 None Fire mode is not used.
PRT-45 Normal Fire mode. When set to 1 (Fire Mode),
Fire Mode Sel 1 Fire Mode enables Fire Mode operation controlled with a digital
input..
Fire mode test mode. When set to 2 (Fire Mode
2 Test Mode Test), allows testing of Fire Mode operation. In Fire
test mode, faults are normally processed. Using test

204
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

Code Description
mode does not increase the count value at PRT-48
(Fire Mode Cnt).
PRT-46
Sets the run direction for Fire mode operation.
Fire Mode Dir
PRT-47
Sets the operation frequency for Fire mode.
Fire Mode Freq
Counts the number of the Fire mode operations. The number increases
only when PRT-45 (Fire Mode Sel) is set to ‘Fire Mode’. The count
PRT-48
increases up to 99, then it does not increase any more. Does not
Fire Mode Cnt
increase the count during Fire Mode testing.

If damper or lubrication operations are set for the inverter, Fire mode operation is performed after
the delay times set in the relevant operations. Note that Fire mode operation voids the
product warranty.
In Fire mode test mode, the inverter does not ignore the faults or perform a reset restart. All
the faults will be processed normally. Fire mode test mode does not increase the Fire mode
count (PRT-48). When the Fire mode operation is complete, the inverter stops operating and is
turned off.

205
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

5.8.11 PRT-50 Stall Prevention and Flux Braking

The stall prevention function is a protective function that prevents motor stall caused by overloads.
When high currents are sensed during acceleration and/or constant speed, the output frequency is
decreased automatically in an attempt to reduce current. Also during deceleration, as the DC bus
voltage increases, the deceleration time is extended.

Flux braking is used to determine the optimum deceleration time to avoid overvoltage trips and
without utilizing brake resistors. When using flux braking, the output frequency is increased and
the regenerative energy is expended at the motor.

Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting range Unit
Setting
Stall prevention and 0000
50 Stall Prevent 0000 - 1111 bit
flux braking
Start Freq– Stall
51 Stall frequency 1 Stall Freq 1 60.00 Hz
Freq 1
52 Stall level 1 Stall Level 1 130 30–150 %
Stall Freq 1–
53 Stall frequency 2 Stall Freq 2 60.00 Hz
Stall Freq 3
54 Stall level 2 Stall Level 2 130 30–150 %
PRT Stall Freq 2–
55 Stall frequency 3 Stall Freq 3 60.00 Hz
Stall Freq 4
56 Stall level 3 Stall Level 3 130 30–150 %
Stall Freq 3– Max
57 Stall frequency 4 Stall Freq 4 60.00 Hz
Freq
58 Stall level 4 Stall Level 4 130 30–150 %
7.5 - 125HP 0–150
59 Flux Braking Gain Flux Brake kp 0 150 - 800HP
0–10 %
31~3 Multi-function relay
Relay 1–5
5 1–5 item
OUT 9 Stall - -
Multi-function output
36 Q1 Define
1 item

206
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

Stall Prevention Function and Flux Braking Setting Details

Code Description
Stall prevention can be configured for acceleration, deceleration, or while
operating a motor at constant speed.
Setting Function
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
✓ Stall protection during acceleration
Stall protection while operating at a
✓
constant speed
✓ Stall protection during deceleration
✓ Flux braking during deceleration
LCD bit representation in parameter view. When the top segment is black,
bit is set to "ON".
Item Bit Status (On) Bit Status (Off)
LCD Display

Setting Function
0001 Stall protection If inverter output current exceeds the preset
during acceleration stall level (PRT- 52, 54, 56, 58) during
acceleration, the motor stops accelerating and
starts decelerating. If current stays above the
PRT-50 stall level, the motor decelerates to the start
Stall Prevent frequency (DRV-19). If the current decreases
below the stall level (PRT-52, 54, 56, 58), the
inverter and motor resume acceleration.
0010 Stall protection Similar to stall protection function during
while operating at acceleration, the output frequency
constant speed automatically decelerates when the current
exceeds the preset stall level while operating at
constant speed. When the current decreases
below the stall level, the inverter and motor
resume acceleration.
0100 Stall protection The inverter decelerates and keeps the DC bus
during deceleration voltage below the trip level to prevent an over
voltage fault during deceleration. As a result,
deceleration times can be longer than the set
time depending on the load.
1000 Flux braking during When using flux braking, deceleration time may
deceleration be reduced because regenerative energy is
expended at the motor.
1100 Stall protection and Stall protection and flux braking operate
flux braking during together during deceleration to achieve the
deceleration shortest and most stable deceleration
performance.

207
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

PRT-51 Additional stall protection levels can be configured for different frequencies,
Stall Freq 1 ~ based on the load type. As shown in the graph below, the stall level can be set
above the base frequency. The lower and upper limits are set using numbers
PRT-58 that correspond in ascending order. For example, the range for Stall
Stall Level 4 Frequency 2 (Stall Freq 2) becomes the lower limit for Stall Frequency 1
(Stall Freq 1) and the upper limit for Stall Frequency 3 (Stall Freq 3).

PRT-59 A gain used to decelerate without over voltage fault. It compensates for the
Flux Brake Kp inverter output voltage.

Note
Stall protection and flux braking operate together only during deceleration. Turn on the third and
fourth bits of PRT-50 (Stall Prevention) to achieve the shortest and most stable deceleration
performance without triggering an over voltage fault for loads with high inertia and short
deceleration times. Do not use this function when frequent deceleration of the load is required,
as the motor can overheat and be easily damaged.

208
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

Use caution when decelerating while using stall protection since the deceleration time can
take longer than the time set, depending on the load.
Acceleration stops when stall protection operates. This may make the actual acceleration
time longer than the preset acceleration time.
When the motor is operating, Stall Level 1 applies and determines the operation of stall
protection.
If the input voltage exceeds the nominal voltage, there is a possibility that the deceleration
stall does not work properly.

209
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

5.8.12 PRT-60 Pipe Break Detection

This function detects Pipe Breaks during PID operation. The fault or a warning signal will occur if
the feedback does not reach the level set by users during the operation with the maximum output
(PID maximum output or the maximum speed set).

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
0 None
Pipe Break Detection 1 Warning
60 PipeBroken Sel 0
setting 2 Free-Run
3 Dec
PRT
Pipe Break Detection PipeBroken
61 97.5 0–100 %
variation Dev
Pipe Break Detection
62 PipeBroken DT 10.0 0–6000.0 Sec
time
OUT 31~36 Relay output 1–5 Relay1–5 28 Pipe Broken -

Pipe Break Detection Details

Code Description
Select the operation when detecting Pipe Breaks.
Setting Function
PRT-60 0 None No operation
PipeBroken Sel 1 Warning The inverter displays a warning message.
2 Free-Run The inverter free-runs, then stops.
3 Dec The inverter decelerates, then stops.
PRT-61 Sets the Pipe Break Detection level. Set the detect level by multiplying the set
PipeBroken Dev value for PRT-61 by PID Reference.
PRT-62 Sets the detect delay time. Pipe Break operates if the Pipe Break situation is
PipeBroken DT maintained for a set amount of time.
OUT-31~36 An output relay or Q1 can be set to ’28, Pipe Broken’. When a Pipe Break
Define occurs the Relay is activated.

In the graph above, Pipe Break detection occurs if the feedback is smaller than the value
calculated by multiplying the two values set at PID-04 and PRT-61 (PID-04 x PRT-61) at the
inverter’s maximum output (when PID output is the maximum set value, or the inverter is running
at the frequency set at MOT-02).

210
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

5.8.13 PRT-66 Dynamic Braking (DB) Resistor Configuration

480V, 50 HP and larger inverters

575V, 30 HP and larger inverters
The above require both an external Dynamic Brake Unit (DBU) and Dynamic Brake Resistor
(DBR). Refer to 13.5 Dynamic Braking Resistor Specification on page 375.

240V, 7.5 HP ~ 25 HP
480V, 7.5 HP ~ 40 HP
575V, 7.5 HP ~ 25 HP
For the above, the braking unit (transistor, IGBT) and monitoring/control circuit is integrated inside the
inverter. An external brake resistor (DBR) is required, connected externally to the inverter.
Resistor data is provided for Brake Torque (BT) of 100% and 150% at a working rate of 5% and 10%
(PRT-66, %ED or duty cycle). If PRT-66, %ED is increased to 10%, the rated capacity (W) of the
brake resistor must be doubled. NOTE: When PRT-66, %ED is set to 0 (default), the braking unit
(transistor, IGBT) is disabled.

A digital output can be used to provide a warning when the duty cycle (%ED) has been exceeded. Set
OUT-31~35 or OUT-36 to 31 (DB Warn %ED).

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Braking resistor 0 Disabled
PRT 66 DB Warn %ED 0, 1–30 %
configuration 5 (575V only)
Multi-function
31~35 Relay 1–5
relay 1–5 item
OUT 25 DB Warn %ED - -
Multi-function
36 Q1 Define
output 1 item

211
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

Dynamic Breaking Resistor Setting Details

Code Description
Set the braking resistor configuration (%ED: Enable Duty). The braking
resistor configuration sets the rate at which the braking resistor operates for
one operation cycle. The maximum time for continuous braking is 15 sec and
the braking resistor signal is not output from the inverter after the 15 sec
period elapses. An example of braking resistor set up is as follows:

PRT-66
DB Warn %ED

• T_acc: Acceleration time to set frequency

• T_steady: Constant speed operation time at set frequency
• T_dec: Deceleration time to a frequency lower than constant speed
operation or the stop time from constant speed operation frequency
• T_stop: Stop time until operation resumes

Do not set the braking resistor to exceed the resistor’s power rating. If overloaded; it can
overheat and cause a fire. When using a resistor with a heat sensor, the sensor output can be
used as an external trip signal for the inverter’s multi-function input.

212
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

5.8.14 PRT-70 Level Detection

When the inverter is operating at or above the frequency set at PRT-74 (LDT Level), this function
is used to trigger a fault or set a relay output if the source value is out of the range of the user-
defined values. If the reset restart feature is turned on, the inverter continues to operate based on
the run command after the LDT fault is reset.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Level detection
70 LDT Sel Warning None/Warning/Trip
mode
Level detection
71 LDT Area Sel 1 .Above Level 0–1 -
range
Level detection
72 LDT Source 0: Output Current 0–12 -
source
Level detection
73 LDT Dly Time 2.0 0–9999 Sec
delay time
Level detection Source setting is Source setting is
74 LDT Level -
reference value used used
Level detection LDT Band Source setting is Source setting is
75 -
PRT bandwidth width used used
Level detection
76 LDT Freq 20.00 0.00–Max Freq (Hz) Hz
frequency
Level detection trip LDT Restart
77 60.0 0.0–3000.0 Min
restart time DT
LDT Auto restart
96 LDT Rst Cnt 1 0~6000 -
count
LDT Auto restart
97 LDT Rst Cnt M - 0~6000 -
cycle count
LDT Auto restart
98 cycle Initialization LDT Cnt Clr T
60 0~6000 Sec
time

Level Detection Setting Details

Code Description
Determines the inverter operation when a level detection trip occurs.
Setting Functions
PRT-70 0 None No operation
LDT Sel 1 Warning The inverter displays a warning message.
2 Free-Run The inverter free-runs, then stops.
3 Dec The inverter decelerates, then stops.
Sets the level detection range.
Setting Operation
PRT-71 Triggers a level detect fault when the inverter
0 Below
Level Detect operates below the frequency set by the user.
Triggers a level detect fault when the inverter operates
1 Above
above the frequency set by the user.
Selects a source for level detection.
PRT-72
Setting Function
LDT Source
0 Output Current Sets the output current as the source.

213
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

Code Description
1 DC Link Voltage Sets the DC link voltage as the source.
2 Output Voltage Sets the output voltage as the source.
3 kW Sets the output power as the source.
4 hp Sets the output power as the source.
5 V1 Sets the V1 terminal input as the source.
6 V2 Sets the V2 terminal input as the source.
7 I2 Sets the I2 terminal input as the source.
8 PID Ref Value Sets the PID reference as the source.
9 PID Fdb Val Sets the PID feedback as the source.
10 PID Output Sets the PID output as the source.
PRT-73
Sets the delay time for the operation set at PRT-70.
LDT Dly Time
Sets the source for the level detection.
The following are the setting ranges and default values by the source.
Source Default Value Setting Range
Output Current Rated current 0–150% of the rated current
DC Link 350 0–450 V
Voltage 700 0–900 V
Output 230 0–250
PRT-74 Voltage 460 0–500
LDT Level 90% of the Inverter 0–150% of the Inverter rated
kW
rated power power
V1 9.00 V 0.00–12.00
V2 9.00 -12.00–12.00
I2 18.00 0.00–25.00
PID Ref Value 50 PID Unit Min–PID Unit Max
PID Fdb Val 50 PID Unit Min–PID Unit Max
PID Output 50 -100.00%–100.00%
If the source is detected below the set level, it must be adjusted to be above
the ‘LDT Level + LDT Band Width’ value to release the level detection fault.
PRT-75
If the source is detected above the set level, it must be adjusted to be below
LDT Band Width
the ‘LDT Level - LDT Band Width’ value to release the level detection fault.
The level detection trip bandwidth is 10% of the maximum source value.
Sets the start frequency for the level detection. When setting the level
PRT-76
detection frequency, take into consideration the source type and the LDT
LDT Freq
level.
If PRT-08 (RST restart) is set to ‘YES,’ the inverter restarts after the time set
at PRT-77 elapses when an LDT trip is reset. The LDT Restart operates
PRT-77 each time an LDT trip is reset.
LDT Restart DT If PRT-77 is set to any other value than ‘0’ and the inverter is operating in
HAND mode, the inverter resets and the LDT trip is reset. However, the
inverter stays in OFF mode and does not restart the operation instantly.
When the LDT trip occurs, the number of automatic restarts is set by PRT- 96.
PRT-96 If an LDT trip occurs, the inverter automatically restarts after the time set in
LDT Rst Cnt PRT-77 (LDT Restart DT) has elapsed. The PRT-97 is incremented by 1
PRT-97 each time it is automatically restarted.
LDT Rst Cnt M When the value of PRT-97 becomes equal to PRT-96, it does not try to
PRT-98 restart automatically.
LDT Cnt Clr T The LDT trip will be restarted within the time set in PRT-98 after auto restart.
If not, PRT-97 is initialized to 0.
214
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

Code Description
OUT-31~35 Sets one of the output relays to ‘32 (LDT)’ to monitor the level detection
Relay 1–5 status.

<An example of PRT-71 set to (1: Above Level )>

As shown in the figure above, level detection can be carried out (relay output is ‘on’) as the output
frequency is above PRT-76 frequency for the PRT-73 time and above the PRT-74 detection level.
The LDT operation is reset if the LDT Source (PRT-72) value is less than the PRT-74 level
subtracted from the PRT-75 value (band width).

The LDT operation is carried out if the inverter operation is above PRT-74.
Modify PRT-74 and PRT-75 appropriately when modifying LDT Source of PRT-71.
PRT-74 and PRT-75 become default value if the LDT Source is modified.
PRT-77 (Restart DT) and PRT-08 (RST restart) features operate separately.
The inverter waits until the delay time set at PRT-73 (LDT Dly Time) before it operates based on
the setting in LDT-70 when the level detection time condition is met.

215
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

5.8.15 PRT-79 Fan Fault Detection

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Cooling fan fault
PRT 79 Fan Trip Mode Warning 0-1 -
selection
OUT 31~35 Multi-function relay 1–5 Relay 1–5 Fan
8 0-43 -
OUT 36 Multi-function output 1 Q1 Define Warning
* 150 HP and larger have internal cooling fans. These fans are also included in the Fan Fault
Detection. A warning “InFan Warning” will appear.

Fan Fault Detection Setting Details

Code Description
Set the cooling fan fault mode.
Setting Function
The inverter output is blocked and the fan trip is
PRT-79 0 Trip
displayed when a cooling fan error is detected.
Fan Trip Mode
When OUT-31–35 (Relay1–5) or OUT-36 (Q1 Define)
1 Warning are set to ‘8 (FAN Warning)’, the fan error signal is
output and the operation continues.
OUT-31–35 When the parameter value is set to ‘8 (FAN Warning)’, the fan error signal
Relay1–5 is output and operation continues. However, when the inverter’s inside
OUT-36 temperature rises above a certain level, output is blocked due to
Q1 Define activation of overheat protection.

5.8.16 PRT-80 Option Card Trip

The inverter monitors communication between installed option cards and will fault when a
communication error occurs between the option card and the inverter. The inverter responds to an
Option Trip based on the setting of PRT-80 (motion at option trip).

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Operation mode for
PRT 80 Opt Trip Mode 1 Free-Run 0–2 -
option card trip

Operation Mode on Option Trip Setting Details

Code Description

Setting Function
0 None No operation
PRT-80
Opt Trip Mode The inverter output is blocked and fault information is
1 Free-Run
shown on the keypad.
The inverter decelerates the motor based on the value set
2 Dec
at PRT-07 (Trip Dec Time).

216
 890053-00-01 Parameter Descriptions

5.8.17 PRT-81 Low Voltage Fault

When the internal DC bus voltage drops due to a power loss, the inverter turns off the output and
a low voltage fault occurs after the delay time set in PRT-81 (Low voltage fault delay time). When
the voltage recovers, the fault clears and the inverter is ready to resume operation. Relay 1~5
(OUT-31~35) or Q1 (OUT-36) can be set to 11 (Low Voltage) to provide an output signal.

Group CodeName LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit

Low voltage trip
PRT 81 LVT Delay 0.0 0–60.0 sec
decision delay time
31~35 Multi-function relay 1–5 Relay 1–5 Low
OUT 11 0-43 -
36 Multi-function output 1 Q1 Define Voltage

Low Voltage Fault Setting Details

Code Description
If the parameter value is set to ‘11 (Low Voltage)’, the inverter stops the output
PRT-81 first when a low voltage trip condition occurs, then a fault occurs after the low
LVT Delay voltage trip decision time elapses. The warning signal for a low voltage fault can
be provided using the outputs. However, the low voltage trip delay time (LVT Delay
time) does not apply to warning signals.

5.8.18 PRT-82 Selecting Low Voltage 2 Fault During Operation

Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Setting range Unit

Low voltage trip
PRT 82 decision during LV2 Trip Sel 0 No 0–1 -
operation

Setting PRT-82 to ‘1’ (Yes) which makes a low voltage condition a latched fault requiring a manual
reset. If the internal DC voltage decreases lower than a certain voltage, the inverter disconnects the
output and displays low voltage ‘2 (Low Voltage 2)'. Even if the voltage increases and goes back to
the normal state, unlike a low voltage fault, it remains in a fault state until manually reset.

5.8.19 PRT-90 Low Battery Voltage Warning

The H2 series has a battery low voltage warning feature. If the low battery voltage warning
function is set to ‘Yes,’ a low battery voltage warning occurs when the battery voltage is lower than
2 V (normal voltage is 3 V). Replace the battery when the low battery warning is displayed.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Low battery 0 None
PRT 90 Low Battery 0 None
voltage detection 1 Warning -

217
Parameter Descriptions 890053-00-01

Low Battery Voltage Warning Detail Settings

Code Description
The low battery voltage warning for the RTC function installed in the
PRT-90 inverter can be enabled or disabled. The low battery voltage warning
Low Battery occurs when the battery voltage is lower than 2 V.

For battery replacement, refer to 2.2.1 Battery Access on page 24.

Make sure that the battery doesn’t fall inside of the inverter.

5.8.20 PRT-91 Broken Belt

Broken belt is used to detect problems when a Belt or Coupling is broken while a pump is running.

Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting range Unit
Setting
0 None
Set broken belt
91 BrokenBelt Sel 0 None 1 Warning
function -
2 Free-Run
Function frequency of
92 BrokenBelt Freq 15.00 15.00~MaxFreq Hz
broken belt
PRT
93* Motor torque current Current Trq - 0~100.0 %
Function torque
94** BrokenBelt Trq 10.0 0~100.0 %
current of broken belt
Function Delay time
95 BrokenBelt Dly 10.0 0.0~600.0 sec
of broken belt
* Current output torque value compared to motor rated torque(%)
** Broken belt operation torque compared to motor rated torque(%)

After inverter is operating above the frequency set at PRT-92 and current torque reaches the limit
set at PRT-94 and delay time is above the PRT-95 setting, Broken Belt is activated.

218
 890053-00-01 PID Control

6 PID Control Group (PID)

PID control is one of the most common auto-control methods. It uses a combination of
proportional, integral, and differential (PID) controls that provide more effective control for
automated systems. The functions of PID control that can be applied to the inverter operation are
as follows:

Purpose Function
Control speed by using feedback of the existing speed
Speed Control comparing it to a target speed. The inverter adjusts the output to
maintain a constant speed (the target speed).
Control pressure by using feedback of the existing pressure
Pressure Control comparing it to a target pressure. The inverter adjusts the output
to maintain a constant pressure.
Control flow by using feedback of the existing flow comparing it
Flow Control to a target flow. The inverter adjusts the output to maintain a
constant flow.
Control temperature by using feedback of the existing
Temperature Control temperature comparing it to a target temperature. The inverter
adjusts the output to maintain a constant temperature.

6.1 PID Parameter List

LCD
Code Name Setting Range Initial Value Property* Ref.
Display
00 Jump Code Jump Code 1–99 50 O p.74
0 No
01 PID mode selection PID Sel 0 No Δ p.223
1 Yes
03 PID output monitor PID Output - - X p.223
04 PID reference monitor PID Ref Value - - X p.223
05 PID feedback monitor PID Fdb Value - - X p.223
06 PID error monitor value PID Err Value - - X p.223
0 KeyPad
1 V1
3 V2
4 I2
PID reference 1 source
10 PID Ref 1 Src 5 Int485 0 Keypad Δ p.223
selection
6 Fieldbus
8 Pulse
101 V3
11 I3
PID reference 1 keypad PID Ref 1 Set
11 Unit Min–Unit Max Unit Default O p.223
value
0 None
1 V1
3 V2
4 I2
PID reference 1 auxiliary PID
12 6 Pulse 0 None Δ p.223
source selection Ref1AuxSrc
7 Int 485
8 FieldBus
101 V3
11 I3
0 M + (G*A)
1 M * (G*A)
PID reference 1 auxiliary PID
13 2 M / (G*A) 0 M+(G*A) O p.223
mode selection Ref1AuxMod
3 M + (M * (G*A))
4 M + G * 2 * (A- 50)

219
PID Control 890053-00-01

LCD
Code Name Setting Range Initial Value Property* Ref.
Display
5 M * (G * 2 * (A- 50))
6 M / (G * 2 * (A-50))
7 M + M * G * 2 * (A-
50)
8 (M-A)^2
9 M^2 + A^2
10 MAX (M,A)
11 MIN (M,A)
12 (M + A) / 2
13 Root (M+A)
PID Ref1 Aux
14 PID reference auxiliary gain -200.0–200.0 (%) 0.0 O p.223
G
0 Keypad
1 V1
3 V2
4 I2
PID reference 2 auxiliary
15 PID Ref 2 Src 5 Int 485 0 KeyPad Δ p.223
source selection
6 Fieldbus
8 Pulse
91 V3
10 I3
PID reference 2 keypad PID Ref 2 Set Unit Default
16 Unit Min–Unit Max O p.223
setting
0 None
1 V1
3 V2
4 I2
PID reference 2 auxiliary PID
17 6 Pulse 0 None Δ p.223
source selection Ref2AuxSrc
7 Int 485
8 FieldBus
101 V3
11 I3
0 M + (G*A)
1 M * (G*A)
2 M / (G*A)
3 M + (M * (G*A))
4 M + G * 2 * (A- 50)
5 M * (G * 2 * (A- 50))
6 M / (G * 2 * (A-50))
PID reference 2 auxiliary PID
18 7 M + M * G * 2 * (A- 0 M+(G*A) O p.223
mode selection Ref2AuxMod
50)
8 (M-A)^2
9 M^2 + A^2
10 MAX (M,A)
11 MIN (M,A)
12 (M + A) / 2
13 Root (M+A)
PID reference 2 auxiliary PID Ref2 Aux
19 -200.0–200.0 (%) 0.0 O p.223
gain G
0 V1
2 V2
3 I2
PID Fdb 4 Int 485
20 PID feedback selection 0 V1 Δ p.223
Source 5 FieldBus
7 Pulse
81 V3
9 I3
0 None
1 V1
3 V2
4 I2
PID feedback auxiliary PID Fdb Aux
21 6 Pulse 0 None Δ p.223
source selection Src
7 Int 485
8 FieldBus
101 V3
11 I3
PID feedback auxiliary PID 0 M + (G*A)
22 0 M+(G*A) O p.223
mode selection FdbAuxMod 1 M * (G*A)

220
 890053-00-01 PID Control

LCD
Code Name Setting Range Initial Value Property* Ref.
Display
2 M / (G*A)
3 M + (M * (G*A))
4 M + G * 2 * (A- 50)
5 M * (G * 2 * (A- 50))
6 M / (G * 2 * (A-50))
7 M + M * G * 2 * (A-
50)
8 (M-A)^2
9 M^2 + A^2
10 MAX (M,A)
11 MIN (M,A)
12 (M + A) / 2
13 Root (M+A)
23 PID feedback auxiliary gain PID Fdb Aux G -200.0–200.0 (%) 0.0 O p.223
24 PID feedback band PID Fdb Band 0.00 – Unit Band (%) 0.00 O p.223
PID controller proportional PID P-Gain 1
25 0.00–300.00 (%) 50.00 O p.223
gain 1
PID controller integral time PID I-Time 1
26 0.0–200.0 (sec) 10.0 O p.223
1
PID controller differential PID D-Time 1
27 0.00–1.00 (sec) 0.00 O p.223
time 1
PID controller feed forward PID FF-Gain p.223
28 0.0–1000.0 (%) 0.0 O
gain
29 PID output filter PID Out LPF 0.00–10.00 (sec) 0.00 O p.223
30 PID output upper limit PID Limit Hi PID Limit Lo– 100.00 (%) 100.00 O p.223
31 PID output lower limit PID Limit Lo -100.00–PID Limit Hi 0.00 O p.223
PID controller proportional PID P-Gain 2
32 0.00–300.00 (%) 50.0 O p.223
gain 2
PID controller integral time PID I-Time 2
33 0.0–200.0 (sec) 10.0 O p.223
2
PID controller differential PID D-Time 2 0.00–1.00 (sec) 0.00
34 O p.223
time 2
0 PID Output p.223
35 PID output mode PID Out Mode 1 PID+ Main Freq 2 O p.223
2 PID or Main
0 No p.223
36 PID output inverse PID Out Inv 0 Δ p.223
1 Yes
37 PID output scale PID Out Scale 0.1–1000.0 (%) 100.0 Δ p.223
PID multi-step reference
40 PID Step Ref 1 Unit Min–Unit Max Unit Default O p.223
setting 1
PID multi-step reference
41 PID Step Ref 2 Unit Min–Unit Max Unit Default O p.223
setting 2
PID multi-step reference
42 PID Step Ref 3 Unit Min–Unit Max Unit Default O p.223
setting 3
PID multi-step reference
43 PID Step Ref 4 Unit Min–Unit Max Unit Default O p.223
setting 4
PID multi-step reference
44 PID Step Ref 5 Unit Min–Unit Max Unit Default O p.223
setting 5
PID multi-step reference
45 PID Step Ref 6 Unit Min–Unit Max Unit Default O p.223
setting 6
PID multi-step reference
46 PID Step Ref 7 Unit Min–Unit Max Unit Default O p.223
setting 7
50 PID controller unit selection PID Unit Sel Refer to the Unit List 1 % O p.223
0 CUST
1 %
2 PSI
3 ˚F
4 ˚C
5 inWC
6 inM
7 mBar
8 Bar
9 Pa
10 kPa
11 Hz
12 rpm
13 V
14 A

221
PID Control 890053-00-01

LCD
Code Name Setting Range Initial Value Property* Ref.
Display
15 kW
16 HP
17 mpm
18 ft
19 m/s
20 m3/s
21 m3/m
22 m3/h
23 l/s
24 l/m
25 l/h
26 kg/s
27 kg/m
28 kg/h
29 gl/s
30 gl/m
31 gl/h
32 ft/s
33 f3/s
34 f3/m
35 f3/h
36 lb/s
37 lb/m
38 lb/h
39 ppm
40 pps
0 x 100
1 x 10
51 PID unit scale PID Unit Scale 2 x1 2 x1 O p.223
3 x 0.1
4 x 0.01
X100 -30000 - Unit Max
X10 -3000.0 - Unit Max
PID control 0% setting Varies depending on
52 PID Unit 0% X1 -300.00 - Unit Max O p.223
figure PID-50 setting
X0.1 -30.000 - Unit Max
X0.01 -3.0000 - Unit Max
X100 Unit Min - 30000
X10 Unit Min - 3000.0
PID control 100% setting Differs depending on
53 PID Unit 100% X1 Unit Min - 300.00 O p.223
figure PID-50 setting
X0.1 Unit Min - 30.000
X0.01 Unit Min - 3.0000
[1] ‘V3 and I3’ are available when Extended IO Bd. is installed. Refer to Extended IO option manual for more detailed information.

222
 890053-00-01 PID Control

6.2 PID Basic Operation

PID operates by controlling the output frequency of the inverter in automated process control
systems to maintain speed, pressure, flow, or temperature.

Note
• Normal PID output (PID OUT) is bipolar and is limited by PID-30 (PID Limit Hi) and PID- 31
(PID Limit Lo) settings. DRV-20 (MaxFreq) value equals a 100% of PID OUT.
• The following are the variables used in PID operation, and how they are calculated:
- Unit MAX = PID Unit 100% (PID-53)
- Unit Min = (2xPID Unit 0% (PID-52)–PID Unit 100%)
- Unit Default = (PID Unit 100%-PID Unit 0%)/2
- Unit Band = Unit 100%-Unit 0%
• PID control may be utilized for the following operations:
Pre-PID/Soft fill, Auxiliary PID reference compensation, Flow compensation, Pipe
breakage detection.
• During a PID operation, the PID output becomes the frequency reference. The inverter
accelerates or decelerates to the frequency reference based on the Acc/Dec times.

PID Basic Operation Setting Details

Code Description
PID-01
Set to ‘1 (Yes)’ to enable PID control and use functions for the process PID.
PID Sel
PID-03 Displays the existing output value of the PID controller. The unit, gain, and
PID Output scale that were set in the PID group are applied on the display.
PID-04 Displays the existing reference value set for the PID controller. The unit, gain,
PID Ref Value and scale that were set in the PID group are applied on the display.
PID-05 Displays the latest feedback value as input to the PID controller. The unit, gain,
PID Fdb Value and scale that were set in the PID group are applied on the display.
Displays the difference between the existing reference and the feedback (error
PID-06
value). The unit, gain, and scale that were set in the PID group are applied on
PID Err Value
the display.
Selects the reference input (Setpoint source) for the PID control. The default
setting is to enter the setpoint at the Keypad, see PID-11 although other
sources may be used. The setpoint source cannot be set to the same source
as the PID feedback source (PID-20, PID Fdb Source).
Setting Function
0 Keypad Keypad
PID-10
1 V1 -10-10 V input voltage terminal
PID Ref 1 Src
3 V2 I2 analog input terminalWhen the analog voltage/current
input terminal selection switch (SW4) at the terminal block is
4 I2 set to I (current), input 0-20 mA current. If it is set to V
(voltage), input 0–10 V.
5 Int. 485 RS-485 input terminal
7 FieldBus Communication command via a communication option card

223
PID Control 890053-00-01

Code Description
8 Pulse TI Pulse input terminal (0-32 kHz Pulse input)
10 V3 V3 analog input terminal of Extended IO option card.
When the analog voltage/current input terminal selection
11 I3 switch (SW2) at the terminal block is set to I3 (current), input
0-20 mA current. If it is set to V3 (voltage), input 0–10 V.
PID-11 Enter a reference value (setpoint) if the PID Ref 1 Src (PID-10) is set to ‘0
PID Ref Set (Keypad)’.
Selects an auxiliary reference source (a second feedback source) if used with
the PID control. If an auxiliary source is selected, the reference is determined
using the input value at the Ref 1 source (set at PID-10) and the value set at
PID-13 PID Ref1AuxMod.
Setting Function
0 None Not used
1 V1 -10-10 V input voltage terminal
3 V2 I2 analog input terminal
PID-12 If the analog voltage/current input terminal selection switch
PID Ref1AuxSrc 4 I2 (SW4) at the terminal block is set to I (current), input 0-20
mA current. If it is set to V (voltage), input 0–10 V
6 Pulse TI Pulse input terminal (0-32 kHz Pulse input)
7 Int. 485 RS-485 input terminal
8 FieldBus Communication command via a communication option card
12 V3 V3 analog input terminal of Extended IO option card.
When the analog voltage/current input terminal selection
13 I3 switch (SW2) at the terminal block is set to I3 (current), input
0-20 mA current. If it is set to V3 (voltage), input 0–10 V.
PID-13 (PID Ref1AuxMod) provides formulas to calculate the reference 1
value. If PID-12 (PID Ref1AuxSrc) is set to any other value than ‘None,’ the
final reference 1 value is calculated using the input value at the source (set at
PID-10) and the input value set at PID-12).
0 M+(G*A)
1 M*(G*A)
2 M/(G*A)
3 M+(M*(G*A))
4 M+G*2*(A-50)
5 M*(G*2*(A-50))
PID-13 6 M/(G*2*(A-50))
PID Ref1AuxMod
7 M+M*G*2*(A-50)
8 (M-A)^2
9 M^2+A^2
10 MAX(M,A)
11 MIN(M,A)
12 (M+A)/2
13 Square Root(M+A)
M= Value by the PID Ref 1 source set at PID-10
G= Gain value set at PID-14
A= Value input by the Ref1 Aux Src set at PID-12
PID-14
Gain value for the formulas provided by PID-13.
PID Ref1 Aux G
PID-20 Selects the source of the feedback input for PID control. PID-20 (feedback)
PID Fdb Src cannot be set to the same source as PID-10 (PID Ref1 source) .

224
 890053-00-01 PID Control

Code Description
Setting Function
0 V1 -10-10 V input voltage terminal
2 V2 I2 analog input terminal
If the analog voltage/current input terminal selection switch
3 I2 (SW4) at the terminal block is set to I (current), input 0-20
mA current. If it is set to V (voltage), input 0–10 V
4 Int. 485 RS-485 input terminal
5 FieldBus Communication command via a communication option card
7 Pulse TI Pulse input terminal (0-32 kHz Pulse input)
Selects the external input source to be used as an auxiliary feedback source
for PID control. When the external input source is selected, the reference is
determined using the input value at the source (set at PID-10) and the value
set at PID-13 PID Ref1AuxMod.
Setting Function
0 None Not used
PID-21 1 V1 -10-10 V input voltage terminal
PID Fdb AuxSrc 3 V2 I2 analog input terminal
When the analog voltage/current input terminal selection
4 I2 switch (SW4) at the terminal block is set to I (current), input
0-20 mA current. If it is set to V (voltage), input 0–10 V
6 Pulse TI Pulse input terminal (0-32 kHz Pulse input)
7 Int. 485 RS-485 input terminal
8 FieldBus Communication command via a communication option card
The PID-22 (PID Fdb AuxMod) provides formulas to calculate the final
feedback value (PID-20 and PID-21). If PID-21 (PID Fdb AuxSrc) is set to any
other value than ‘None,’ the final feedback is calculated using the input values
at the two feedback sources (set at PID-20 and PID-21).
0 M+(G*A)
1 M*(G*A)
2 M/(G*A)
3 M+(M*(G*A))
4 M+G*2*(A-50)
5 M*(G*2*(A-50))
PID-22 6 M/(G*2*(A-50))
PID Fdb AuxMod
7 M+M*G*2*(A-50)
8 (M-A)^2
9 M^2+A^2
10 MAX(M,A)
11 MIN(M,A)
12 (M+A)/2
13 Square Root(M+A)
M= Value by the Feedback Src set at PID-20
G= Gain value set at PID-23
A= Value by the feedback auxiliary source set at PID-21
PID-23
Gain value used in a formula set at PID-22.
PID Fdb Aux G
Sets the maximum and minimum value by adding or subtracting the PID Fdb
PID-24 Band value (PID-24) from the reference value. When the feedback value is
PID Fdb Band between the maximum and minimum value, this parameter maintains the PID
output.
225
PID Control 890053-00-01

Code Description
Set the output ratio for differences (errors) between the reference (setpoint)
PID-25
and feedback. As P-Gain is increased, the error is more quickly corrected.
PID P-Gain1
However, if P-Gain is set too high, the mechanical system will begin to
PID-32
overshoot and at some point may begin to oscillate and become unstable.
PID P-Gain2
EX: If the P Gain 1 is set to 50%, then 50% of the error is output.
I-Time sets the time to output accumulated errors. When the error is 100%, the
time taken for 100% output is set. When the integral time (PID I-Time) is set to
1 second, 100% output occurs after 1 second of the error remaining at 100%.
PID-26 Differences in a normal state can be reduced by PID I-Time. When the multi-
PID I-Time 1 function terminal is set to ‘24 (I-Term Clear)’ and is activated, all of the
PID-33 accumulated errors are deleted.
PID I-Time 2 PID output (final frequency reference) is affected by the gains set at PID-25,
PID-32, and the Acc/Dec times (DRV-03 and DRV-04) to achieve the PID
output change. Therefore, consider the relationship between these values
when configuring the gains and the Acc/Dec times.
Sets the output amount for the rate of change in errors of the error signal by
PID-27 the D-Time and uses the result as a corrective signal to the system. Since this
PID D-Time 1 type of control acts to stabilize the transient response of the system, it may be
PID-34 thought of as electronic damping.
PID D-Time 2 EX: If the differential time (PID D-Time 1) is set to 1 ms and the rate of change
in errors per sec is 100%, output occurs at 1% per 10 ms.
PID-28 Sets the ratio that adds the target to the PID output. Adjusting this value leads
PID FF-Gain to a faster response.
Used when the PID controller output changes too quickly or the entire system
is unstable, due to severe oscillation. In general, a lower value (default
PID-29
value=0) is used to speed up response time, but in some cases a higher value
PID Out LPF
increases stability. The higher the value, the more stable the PID controller
output is, but the slower the response time.
PID-30
PID Limit Hi Used to set limits of the output of the inverter during PID control. The % is
PID-31 based on the 60 Hz. setting of the inverter.
PID Limit Lo
Selects one of the PID output modes to modify the final PID output.
Modifications can be made by adding input values and the main operation
frequency of the PID output to the final PID output value. The following table
PID-35 lists the 3 modes that are available.
PID Out Mode Setting
0 PID Output
1 PID+Main Freq
2 PID or Main
Set to “No” for normal PI Control. The inverters output will increase when the
PID-36 feedback signal decreases. (EX: Pressure Control).
PID Out Inv Set to “Yes” for inverse PI Control. The inverters output will increase when the
feedback signal increases. (EX: Temperature Control).
PID-37
Adjusts the amount of the controller output.
PID Out Scale
Three digital inputs can provide up to 7 different Step References (setpoints)
depending on which inputs are closed (001~111). See settings at IN-65~71 for
PID-40~46
PID Step Ref’s L, M and H. With no inputs closed (000), Setpoint is from PID-
Step Ref 1~7
10 and PID-11.

226
 890053-00-01 PID Control

Code Description
The 7 different setpoint settings can be entered at parameters PID-40 through
PID-46. See below table. These inputs when closed override the Reference
(setpoint) assigned in PID-10 and PID-11 (Keypad setpoint).
Terminals
P5 P6 P7
IN-69 IN-70 IN-71 Setpoint
PID Step PID Step PID Step
Ref L Ref M Ref H # Code Desc
0 0 0 0 PID-11 PID Ref 1 Set
1 0 0 1 PID-40 PID Step Ref 1
0 1 0 2 PID-41 PID Step Ref 2
1 1 0 3 PID-42 PID Step Ref 3
0 0 1 4 PID-43 PID Step Ref 4
1 0 1 5 PID-44 PID Step Ref 5
0 1 1 6 PID-45 PID Step Ref 6
1 1 1 7 PID-46 PID Step Ref 7
Sets the unit for the control variable.
0: CUST is a custom unit defined by the user.
Setting
0 CUST 21 m 3/m(m 3/min)
1 % 22 m 3/h(m 3/h)
2 PSI 23 l/s
3 OF 24 l/m
4 OC 25 l/h
5 inWC 26 kg/s
6 inM 27 kg/m
7 Bar 28 kg/h
PID-50 8 mBar 29 gl/s
PID Unit Sel 9 Pa 30 gl/m
10 kPa 31 gl/h
11 Hz 32 ft/s
12 Rpm 33 f3/s(ft3/min)
13 V 34 f3/h (ft3/h)
14 I 35 lb/s
15 kW 36 lb/m
16 HP 37 lb/m
17 mpm 38 lb/h
18 ft 39 ppm
19 m/s 40 pps
20 m3/s(m3/S)
Multiplies all PID Units (PID-50) by the scale factor.
PID-51 EX PSI: With initial settings of PID-11 (setpoint) at 50 PSI and PID-53 (PID
PID Unit Scale Unit 100%) at 100 PSI, changing PID-51 scale to “x10” now shows a setpoint
of 500 PSI and a max. of 1000 PSI.
PID-52
PID Unit 0 % Sets the Unit 0% and Unit 100% values as the minimum and maximum values
PID-53 set at PID-50.
PID Unit 100%
227
PID Control 890053-00-01

PID Command Block

228
 890053-00-01 PID Control

PID Feedback Block

229
PID Control 890053-00-01

PID Output Block

230
 890053-00-01 PID Control

PID Output Mode Block

231
PID Control 890053-00-01

6.3 Application Group 1 (AP1)

Application Group 1 (AP1) includes additional PID control related parameters and are described
below.

6.3.1 AP1 Parameter List

LCD
Code Name Setting Range Initial Value Property* Ref.
Display
00 Jump Code Jump Code 1–99 20 O p.74
05 Sleep boost amount Sleep Bst Set 0.00–Unit Max 0.00 O p.232
0.00, Low p.232
06 Sleep boost speed Sleep Bst Freq 60.00 O
Freq– High Freq
07 PID sleep mode 1 delay time PID Sleep 1 DT 0.0–6000.0 (sec) 20.0 O p.232
08 PID sleep mode 1 frequency PID Sleep1Freq 0.00, Low Freq– High Freq 0.00 O p.232
09 PID wakeup 1 delay time PID WakeUp1 DT 0.0–6000.0 (sec) 20.0 O p.232
10 PID wakeup 1 value PID WakeUp1Dev 0.00–Unit Band 20.00 O p.232
11 PID sleep mode 2 delay time PID Sleep 2 DT 0.0–6000.0 (sec) 20.0 O p.232
12 PID sleep mode 2 frequency PID Sleep2Freq 0.00, Low Freq– High Freq 0.00 O p.232
13 PID wakeup 2 delay time PID WakeUp2 DT 0.0–6000.0 (sec) 20.0 O p.232
14 PID wakeup 2 value PID WakeUp2Dev 0.00–Unit Band 20.00 O p.232
0 No
20 Soft Fill function options Soft Fill Sel 0 No O p.234
1 Yes
Pre- PID p.234
21 Pre-PID Freq Low Freq– High Freq 30.00 O
operation frequency
22 Pre- PID delay time Pre-PID Delay 0.0–600.0 (sec) 60.0 O p.234
23 Soft Fill escape value Soft Fill Set Unit Min–Unit Max 20.00 O p.234
24 Soft Fill reference increasing value Fill Step Set 0.00–Unit Band 2.00 O p.234
25 Soft Fill reference increasing cycle Fill Step Time 0–9999 (sec) 20 O p.234
26 Soft Fill changing amount Fill Fdb Diff 0.00–Unit Band 0.00 O p.234
0 No
30 Flow Comp function options Flow Comp Sel 0 No O p.237
1 Yes
31 Max Comp amount Max Comp Value 0.00–Unit Band 0.00 O p.237

6.3.2 PID Sleep Mode

With normal PI Control, when operation continues at a frequency lower than the PID operating
conditions, the inverter can enter sleep mode. A boost operation can be performed before sleep to
extend sleep mode. In PID sleep mode, when the PID feedback falls below the PID Wakeup level
and maintains the condition for the time set at AP1-09 (PID WakeUp1 DT), the inverter wakes up
and resumes PID operation.

Two configurations are available for PID sleep mode.

Sleep/Wake Up 1 (AP1-07~AP1-10) and Sleep/Wake Up 2 (AP1-11 ~ AP1-14). Each has settings
for sleep frequency, sleep delay time, wakeup variation, and wakeup delay time. A digital input set
to ’39 Sleep Wake Chg’ can be configured to switch between the two configurations.

232
 890053-00-01 PID Control

PID Operation Sleep Mode Setting Details

Code Description
Sets the sleep boost amount before entering Sleep Mode. Feedback
AP1-05
must reach the boost level (PID Reference+Sleep Bst Set) above the
Sleep Bst Set
setpoint before entering Sleep Mode.
AP1-06
Sets the inverter operating frequency to reach sleep boost level.
Sleep Bst Freq
AP1-07 If the operating frequency stays below the sleep mode frequency (AP1-
PID Sleep1 DT 08) for the set time (AP1-07), the inverter accelerates to the PID sleep
AP1-08 boost frequency (AP1-06). Then, when the feedback reaches the boost
PID Sleep1Freq amount (AP1-05) above the setpoint, the inverter enters sleep mode.
AP1-09 Set the Wake Up delay time and Wake Up deviation amount. When the
PID WakeUp1 DT PID feedback amount falls below the setpoint by the deviation amount
AP1-10 (AP1-10) for the delay time (AP1-09), the inverter wakes up and
PID WakeUp1Dev resumes PID operation.
When a digital input is set to ’39 Sleep Wake Chg’ and activated, PID
IN-65~71
Sleep/Wake Up is operated based on the parameter settings at AP1-
P1–P7 Define
11~14.
AP1-11
PID Sleep2 DT
AP1-12
PID Sleep2Freq Sleep/Wake Up 2 settings (AP1-11 ~ AP1-14) operate the same as
AP1-13 Sleep/Wake Up 1 (AP1-07 ~ AP1-10).
PID WakeUp2 DT
AP1-14
PID WakeUp2Dev

Note
PID Wakeup level may be calculated using the following formula:
PID Wakeup Level = PID-04 (PID Ref Value)–AP1-10 (PID WakeUp1Dev).
Or if using Sleep/Wake Up 2, PID-04 (PID Ref Value) - AP1-14 PID (WakeUp2Dev).

233
PID Control 890053-00-01

6.3.3 Pre-PID and Soft Fill Operation

Pre-PID and Soft Fill are two separate operations. Both are used to prevent excessive pressure
from building in the pipe system during the initial stages of pump operation.

Pre-PID - At start, Pre-PID (without PID control) begins and continues at the Pre-PID frequency
(AP1-21) for the time set at AP1-22. The Pre-PID operation continues until either the feedback
value reaches the Soft Fill Set (escape value, AP1-23) or the time (AP1-22) expires. If the system
has built up enough pressure (or other units) to meet the AP1-23 escape value, Normal PI Control
will begins. If the system has not built up pressure (or other units) to meet the AP1-23 escape
value, Soft Fill operation begins.

Soft Fill operation automatically changes the PI Reference (setpoint) set in PID-10 and PID-11 to
a "Soft Fill" PI Reference (setpoint). The Soft Fill PI Reference performs a series of steps that
increase over time to slowly fill a piping system. The steps are defined by parameters AP1-24 (Fill
Step Set) and AP1-25 Fill Step Time) as defined below. When the system has built up enough
pressure (or other units) to meet the AP1-23 escape value, Normal PI Control will start.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
20 Soft Fill options Soft Fill Sel 0 No 0–1 -
Pre PID operation Low Freq– High
21 Pre-PID Freq 30.00 Hz
frequency Freq
Pre-PID
22 Pre-PID duration 60.0 600.0 sec
Delay
Unit Min–Unit
23 Soft fill escape value Soft Fill Set 20.00 %
AP1 Max
Soft fill reference
24 Fill Step Set 2.00 0–Unit Band %
increment
Soft fill reference
25 Fill Step Time 20 0–9999 sec
increment cycle
Soft fill feedback
26 Fill Fdb Diff 0.00 0–Unit Band %
difference

Soft Fill Operation Setting Details

Code Description
AP1-20 Set to ‘Yes’ to enable both Pre-PID and Soft Fill operation.
Soft Fill Sel Set to ‘No’ to disable Pre-PID and Soft Fill operation.
Set the inverter output frequency during Pre-PID. The Pre-PID operation
AP1-21
continues until either the feedback value reaches the Soft Fill Set (escape
Pre-PID Freq
value, AP1-23) or the time (AP1-22) expires.

Set the Pre-PID time. The Pre-PID operation continues for this time period
AP1-22
until either the feedback value reaches the Soft Fill Set (escape value, AP1-
Pre-PID Delay
23) or this time expires.
Set the feedback amount. When feedback reaches this amount at any time
AP1-23
during Pre-PID or Soft Fill, the inverter exits the operation and normal PI
Soft Fill Set
Control begins.

234
 890053-00-01 PID Control

Code Description
Set the amount of each Soft Fill step. After Pre-PID operation time, if
feedback amount has not reached the Soft Fill Set (exit) amount (AP1-23),
AP1-24
Soft Fill operation begins. The PI Reference (setpoint) will automatically
Fill Step Set
change to this "Soft Fill PI Reference" (AP1-24) amount and start the Soft Fill
operation. The "Soft Fill PI Reference" becomes the new PI Ref (setpoint).
Soft Fill steps are based on AP1-24 and AP1-25.
Set the time for each Soft Fill step. This is the time of each Soft Fill PI Ref
AP1-25 step (AP1-24). The steps will increase by AP1-24 amount when the feedback
Fill Step Time reaches the Fill Feedback Difference (AP1-26). If the feedback remains
below the Soft Fill PI Ref., the inverter does not increase to the next step.
Set a difference amount to increase to the next Soft Fill step. This amount is
the difference between the Soft Fill PI Reference (AP1-24) amount and the
AP1-26 feedback amount. When the feedback increases to the AP1-26 amount
Fill Fdb Diff below the step amount (whichever step it is on), the inverter increases the
Soft Fill PI Ref. to the next step. If the feedback remains below the AP1-26
amount, the Soft Fill PI Ref. does not increase to the next step.

After Pre-PID and Soft Fill operation, normal PI Control begins. The PID Reference value (setpoint)
becomes the PID-11, PID Ref1 Set value.

235
PID Control 890053-00-01

6.3.4 PID Switching (PID Open loop)

When one of the multi-function terminals (IN-65~71) is set to ‘25 (PID Openloop)’ and is activated, the
PID operation stops and is switched to general operation. When the terminal is deactivated, the PID
operation starts again.

236
 890053-00-01 PID Control

6.3.5 Flow Compensation

In a system with a pipeline, longer pipes and higher flow rate cause greater pressure loss. A flow
compensation operation can compensate for pressure loss by increasing the value of the PID
reference.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Flow Comp 0 No
30 Flow Comp Sel - -
function options 1 Yes
AP1
Max Comp
31 Max Comp Value - 0–Unit Band -
amount

Flow Compensation Setting Details

Code Description
AP1-30
Sets the Flow Compensation function options.
Flow Comp Sel
AP1-31 Sets the maximum compensation amount. This function is based on a PID
Max Comp Value operation. The amount is in the same units used for the PID reference.

Longer pipes cause the actual pressure to decrease which in turn increases the difference
between the pressure reference and the actual pressure. When comparing two systems of equal
pipe lengths, more pressure loss is caused in the system with greater flow. This explains the
pressure difference between (A) and (B) in the figure (when the flows are different). To
compensate for the pressure loss, the value of AP1-31 is set to the maximum amount of
compensation when the inverter has the maximum frequency and adds to the PID reference after
calculating compensation amount based on the output frequency.
The final PID reference=PID-11+Compensation amount. Compensation amount is shown below.

237
Sensorless Vector Control 890053-00-01

7 Sensorless Vector Control

7.1 IM (Induction Motors)
Sensorless vector control provides a more accurate estimation of the motor rotation speed
compared to V/F control. When auto tuning is completed, the inverter calculates motor speed and
does not require any rotating speed feedback from the motor. Sensorless vector control can also
generate greater torque at a lower level of current.

• For high-performance operation, the parameters of the motor connected to the inverter
output must be measured. Configure the motor-related function group parameters
(MOT Group) by entering the motor specification values from the name plate
• Then, perform auto tuning by setting MOT-11 (Auto Tuning) to 1 (All - rotation type) or 2
(All - static type) to automatically measure other parameters before operating a
synchronous motor in sensorless vector control mode.
• To run high-performance sensorless vector control, the inverter and the motor must
have the same capacity. If the motor capacity is smaller than the inverter capacity by
more than two levels, control may be inaccurate. In that case, change the control mode
to V/F control.
• When operating with sensorless vector control, do not connect multiple motors to the
inverter output.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV 09 Control mode Control Mode 3 IM Sensorless - -
Motor Depends on the
01 Motor capacity 0-15 -
Capacity motor capacity
02 Base frequency Base Freq 60 40-120 Hz
03 Motor pole number Pole Number 4 2 - 48 -
Depends on the
04 Rated slip speed Rated Slip 0-3000 Hz
motor capacity
Depends on the
MOT 05 Rated motor current Rated Curr 1-1000 A
motor capacity
Depends on the
06 Motor no-load current Noload curr 0.5-1000 A
motor capacity
07 Rated motor voltage Motor Volt 230/460/575 170-600 V
Depends on the
08 Motor efficiency Efficiency 70-100 %
motor capacity
11 Auto tuning Auto Tuning 1 All - -
09 Pre-Excite time PreExTime 1 0.0-60.0 s
11 Hold Time Hold Time 0.00 0.0-60.0 s
Sensorless speed
ASR-SL P Depends on the
24 controller proportional 0-5000 %
Gain1 motor capacity
CON gain1
Sensorless speed ASR-SL I Depends on the
25 10-9999 ms
controller integral gain 1 Gain1 motor capacity
Sensorless speed ASR-SL P Depends on the
26 1-1000 %
controller proportional Gain2 motor capacity

238
 890053-00-01 Sensorless Vector Control

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
gain 2
Sensorless speed ASR-SL I Depends on the
27 1-1000 %
controller integral gain 2 Gain2 motor capacity
Flux estimator Depends on the
29 Flux P Gain 10-200 %
proportional gain motor capacity
Flux estimator integral Depends on the
30 Flux I Gain 10-200 %
gain motor capacity
Speed estimator S-Est P Depends on the
31 0-32767 -
proportional gain Gain1 motor capacity
Speed estimator integral Depends on the
32 S-Est I Gain1 100-1000 -
gain1 motor capacity
Speed estimator integral Depends on the
33 S-Est I Gain2 100-10000 -
gain2 motor capacity
Sensorless current
CON 48 controller proportional ACR P-Gain 75 0-1000 -
gain
Sensorless current
49 ACR I-Gain 120 10-1000 -
controller integral gain
50 Voltage controller limit V Con HR 10 0-100.0 %
51 Voltage controller I Gain V Con Ki 10 0~1000.0 %
Torque Controller Output Torque Out
52 0 0-2000 msec
Filter LPF
Torque Lmt
53 Torque limit setting 0 Keypad-1 0-11 -
Src
Forward direction FWD +Trq
54 180 0.0-200.0 %
retrograde torque limit Lmt
Forward direction FWD -Trq
55 180 0.0-200.0 %
regenerative torque limit Lmt
Reverse direction REV +Trq
56 180 0.0-200.0 %
retrograde torque limit Lmt
CON Reverse direction
57 REV -Trq Lmt 180 0.0-200.0 %
regenerative torque limit
Flux estimator 370 (230V,460V)
85 Flux P Gain 1 100-700 -
proportional gain 1 170 (575V
0-100
Flux estimator 0 (230V, 460V) (230V,460V)
86 Flux P Gain 2 -
proportional gain 2 90 (575V) 70-120 (575V)
Flux estimator
87 Flux P Gain 3 100 0-500 -
proportional gain 3
Flux estimator integral
88 Flux I Gain 1 50 0-200 -
gain 1
Flux estimator integral
89 Flux I Gain 2 50 0-200 -
gain2
Flux estimator integral
90 Flux I Gain 3 50 0-200 -
gain 3
CON
Sensorless voltage SL Volt Comp 35 (230V,460V)
91 0-60 -
compensation 1 1 110 (575V)
Sensorless voltage SL Volt Comp 20 (230V, 460V)
92 0-60 -
compensation 2 2 110 (575V)
Sensorless voltage SL Volt Comp
93 20 (230V,460V) 0-60 -
compensation 3 3

239
Sensorless Vector Control 890053-00-01

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Sensorless field
94 weakening start SL FW Freq 100 0.0-110.0 %
frequency
Sensorless gain
95 SL Fc Freq 2 0.00-8.00 Hz
switching frequency
Sensorless Slip SL Slip Comp
97 100 (575V only) 0-200 -
Compensation1 1
Sensorless Slip SL Slip Comp
98 50 (575V only) 0-200 -
Compensation2 2

7.1.1 Sensorless Vector Control Operation Setting

To run sensorless vector control operation, set DRV-09 (Control Mode) to 3 (IM sensorless), select the
capacity of the motor at MOT-01 (Motor Capacity), and enter the nameplate information of the motor
in the below parameters.

Code Input (Motor Name Plate Information)

MOT-02 Base Freq Base frequency
MOT-03 Pole Number Motor pole number
MOT-04 Rated Slip Rated slip
MOT-05 Rated Curr Rated current
MOT-07 Motor Volt Motor rated voltage
MOT-08 Efficiency Efficiency (when no information is on the name plate, default values are used.)

After setting the above, set MOT-11 (Auto tuning) to 1 (All - rotation type) or 2 (All - static type) and
run auto tuning. Rotation type auto tuning is more accurate than Static type. Set 1 (All -Rotation type)
if the motor can be rotated.

Note
Excitation Current
A motor can be operated only after magnetic flux is generated by current flowing through the
stator. When the motor is connected to the output of the inverter, excitation current flowing in
the stator creates the magnetic flux required to operate the motor.

Sensorless Vector Control Operation Setting Details

Code Description
Sets the excitation current application time. Pre-excitation is used at
CON-09
the start of the operation to perform excitation up to the motor’s rated
PreExTime
flux.
Sets the zero-speed control time (hold time) after deceleration in the
stopped position. The inverter applies an output (at zero speed) to hold
CON-11
the motor for the Hold Time, CON-11. The output is blocked after the
Hold Time
Hold Time.

240
 890053-00-01 Sensorless Vector Control

Code Description

Speed Controller P Gain1 and I Gain1 - Changes the speed PI

controller gains during sensorless vector control. P Gain1 is a
proportional gain for the speed deviation. If speed deviation becomes
higher than the torque, the output command increases accordingly. As
the P Gain1 value is increased, the faster the speed deviation
decreases. I Gain1 is the integral gain for the speed deviation. It is the
time taken for the gain to reach the rated torque output command while
CON-24 a constant speed deviation continues. As the I Gain1 value is
ASR-SL P Gain1, decreased, the faster the speed deviation decreases.
CON-25 Note
ASR-SL I Gain1
Speed controller gain can improve the speed control waveform while
monitoring the changes in speed. If speed deviation does not
decrease quickly, increase the speed controller P gain or decrease I
gain (time in ms). However, if the P gain is increased too high or I
gain is decreased too low, severe vibration may occur. If oscillation
occurs in the speed waveform, try to increase I gain (ms) or reduce P
gain to adjust the waveform.
Speed Controller P Gain2 and I Gain2 - The speed controller gain
can be increased to more than the medium speed for sensorless
vector control. P Gain2 is set as a percentage of the low speed gain
CON-24 ASR-SL P Gain1. If P Gain2 is less than 100.0%, the
responsiveness decreases. For example, if CON-24 ASR-SL P Gain1
CON-26 is 50.0% and CON-26 ASR-SL P Gain2 is 50.0%, the actual middle
ASR-SL P Gain2, speed or faster speed controller P Gain is 25.0%.
CON-27
ASR-SL I Gain2 CON-27 ASR-SL I Gain2 is also set as a percentage of the CON-25
ASR-SL I Gain1. For I Gain, the smaller the I Gain2 is set, the slower
the response time becomes. For example, if CON-25 ASR-SL I Gain1
is 100ms and CON-27 ASR-SL I Gain2 is 50.0%, the middle speed or
faster speed controller I Gain is 200 ms. The controller gain is set
according to the default motor parameters and Acc/Dec times.
CON-29 Flux P Gain,
CON-30 Flux I Gain, Flux Estimator P Gain and I Gain - Sensorless vector control requires the
CON-.85-87 Flux P rotor flux estimator. For adjustments of the flux estimator gains, refer to
Gain1~3, Sensorless Vector Control Operation Guide
CON-88-90 Flux I
Gain1~3
CON-31
S-Est P Gain1, Speed Estimator P Gain1 and I Gain1 - Speed estimator gain for
CON-32 sensorless vector control can be adjusted. For adjustments of the speed
S-Est I Gain1,
CON-33 estimator gains, refer to Sensorless Vector Control Operation Guide.
S-Est I Gain2
CON-48 Current Controller P Gain and I Gain - Adjusts the P and I gains of the
ACR SL P Gain, sensorless current controller. For adjustments of the sensorless current
CON-49 controller gains, refer to Sensorless Vector Control Operation Guide.

241
Sensorless Vector Control 890053-00-01

Code Description
ACR SL I Gain
CON-50
Voltage Controller - Adjusts the limit and I Gain of the sensorless voltage
V Con HR
controller. Used for maximum voltage output at 60 Hz. For adjustments of
CON-51
the voltage controller, refer to Sensorless Vector Control Operation Guide.
V Con Ki
CON-52 Sets the time constant for torque command by setting the torque
Torque Out LPF controller output filter.
Select a source for torque limit setting among keypad, analog inputs
(V1, V2 or I2), communications or pulsed input. Setting torque limits
adjusts the torque amount by limiting the speed controller output.
Setting Function
0 KeyPad-1
Sets the torque limit with the LCD display.
1 KeyPad-2
2 V1
Sets the torque limit with the analog input terminal
4 V2
of the terminal block.
5 I2
6 Int 485 Sets the torque limit with the communication
CON-53 terminal of the terminal block.
Torque Lmt Src 8 FieldBus Sets the torque limit with the FieldBus
communication option.
9 UserSeqLink This enters the torque reference by linking the
common area with the user sequence output.
12 Pulse Sets the torque limit with the pulse input of the
terminal block.

When CON-53 is set to “0 (Keypad-1)” or “1 (Keypad-2)”, set the

torque limits with CON-54 ~ CON-57. The torque limit can be set up to
200% of the motor rated torque. Set the retrograde (motoring) and
regenerative limits for forward and reverse operation.
CON-54
Sets the torque limit for forward retrograde (motoring) operation.
FWD +Trq Lmt
CON-55
Sets the torque limit for forward regenerative operation.
FWD –Trq Lmt
CON-56
Sets the torque limit for reverse retrograde (motoring) operation.
REV +Trq Lmt
CON-57
Sets the torque limit for reverse regenerative operation.
REV –Trq Lmt
Sensorless Motoring Dead Time Compensation Ratio
CON-91 Sensorless Generating Dead Time Compensation Ratio
CON-92 Adjust output voltage compensation values for sensorless vector
CON-93 control. For output voltage compensation, refer to 0 Sensorless Vector
SL Volt Comp1-3
Control Operation Guide.
CON-94
Field Weakening Start Frequency
SL FW Freq
CON-95
Gain Switching Frequency
SL Fc Freq
CON-97
Sensorless Motoring Slip Compensation Ratio
SL Slip Comp1
CON-98
Sensorless Generating Slip Compensation Ratio
SL Slip Comp2

Adjust the controller gain according to the load’s characteristics. However, the motor can
overheat or the system may become unstable depending on the controller gain settings.

242
 890053-00-01 Sensorless Vector Control

Note
Speed controller gain can improve the speed control waveform while monitoring the changes
in speed. If speed deviation does not decrease quickly, increase the speed controller P gain or
decrease I gain (time in ms). However, if the P gain is increased too high or I gain is decreased
too low, severe vibration may occur. If oscillation occurs in the speed waveform, try to increase
I gain (ms) or reduce P gain to adjust the waveform

7.1.2 Sensorless Vector Control Operation Guide

Problem Function code Troubleshooting

MOT-15 Tr For large motors, increase CON-09. Set the value of CON-
CON-09 PreExTime 09 to be more than 3 times the value of MOT-15.
CON-48 ACR SL P Reduce the value of CON-48 by decrements of 10.
The amount of starting Increase the value of Trg Lmt (CON-54~57) by increments
Gain
torque is insufficient.
CON-54–57 Trq Lmt of 10%.
CON-93 SL Volt
Comp3 Increase the value of CON-93 by increments of 5.
The output frequency is
higher than the base
CON-91 SL Volt
frequency during no-load Decrease the value of CON-91 by decrements of 5.
Comp1
operation at low speed
(10Hz or lower).
If the motor hunts at low speed, lower CON-24 or increase
CON-25 by increments of 50m/s. If hunting does not
CON-04 Carrier occur, increase the value of CON-24 to find the optimal
The motor hunts (irregular Freq operating condition.
vibration) or the amount of CON-24 ASR-SL P If the amount of torque is insufficient, increase the value of
torque is not sufficient Gain1 CON-91 by increments of 5.
while the load is increasing CON-25 ASR-SL I In the 5-10Hz range, decrease the value of CON-04 by
at low speed (10Hz or Gain1 increments of 1kHz (if CON-04 is set to exceed 3kHz).
lower). CON-91 SL Volt Note that vibration may result if the set P-gain value is too
Comp1 high or the set I-gain value is too low. If oscillation is
observed in the waveform, first increase the I-gain, and
then increase the P-gain to find the optimal values.
The motor hunts or CON-92 SL Volt
overcurrent trip occurs in Comp2 Increase the value of CON-92 and CON-93 in increments
regenerative load at low CON-93 SL Volt of 5.
speed (10 Hz or lower). Comp3
Over voltage trip occurs
due to sudden
acceleration/deceleration
CON-27 ASR-SL I
or sudden load fluctuation Decrease the value of CON-27 by decrements of 5%.
Gain2
(with no brake resistor
installed) at mid speed
(30Hz or higher).
Over current trip occurs Decrease the values of CON-54-57 by decrements of 10%
due to sudden load CON-54–57 Trq Lmt (if the parameter setting is 150% or higher).
fluctuation at high speed CON-94 SL FW Freq Increase/decrease the value of CON-94 by
(50 Hz or higher). increments/decrements of 5% (set below 100%).
CON-25 ASR-SL I
The motor hunts when the
Gain1 Increase the value of CON-25 by increments of 50m/s or
load increases from the
CON-26 ASR-SL I decrease the value of CON-26 by decrements of 5%.
base frequency or higher.
Gain2
The motor hunts as the CON-31 S-Est P At low speed (10Hz or lower), increase the value of CON-
load increases. Gain1 32 by increments of 5.

243
Sensorless Vector Control 890053-00-01

Problem Function code Troubleshooting

CON-32 S-Est I At mid speed (30 Hz or higher), increase the value of
Gain1 CON-31 by increments of 500. If the parameter setting is
CON-33 S-Est I too extreme, over current trip may occur at low speed,
Gain2 lower CON-31 and increase CON-32.
The motor speed level Select 4, Tr (static type) from MOT-11 and run Rotor time
MOT-11 Auto Tuning
decreases. constant tuning.
If over current trip occurs CON-48 ACR P Gain
Lower both the CON-48 and CON-49.
at starting. CON-49 ACR I Gain
The motor cannot reach
the speed reference when CON-50 V Con HR Increase the value at CON-50 in 1% increments if the
it is operated at or above motor cannot reach the speed reference.
the rated speed, or when Increase the value at CON-51 in 10% increments if the
the acceleration is not CON-51 V Con Ki motor acceleration is not responsive.
responsive.
Speed variation occurs at CON-50 V Con HR
rated motor speed, or If the motor is operated at the rated speed, decrease the
when excessive current value at CON-50 in 5% increments.
flows due to insufficient CON-51 V Con Ki If the motor response is slow, increase the value at CON-
voltage during high speed 51 in 5% increments.
operation.
CON-85 Flux P
Gain1
CON-86 Flux P
Control is unstable. Increase P Gains, Decrease I Gains.
Gain2
CON-87 Flux P
Gain3
CON-88 Flux I
If speed loss or OC trip
Gain1 Decrease I Gains.
occurs.
(below CON-95)
CON-89 Flux I
Gain2
Increase I Gains. If OLT occurs due to high I gains, lower I
If current imbalance occurs (CON-95 below 9Hz)
gains.
CON-90 Flux I
Gain3
CON-97 SL Slip
If Speed error is negative For 575V inverter only. Comp1 is for motoring mode,
Comp1
(-), compensate by Comp2 is for generating mode. Increase to reduce speed
CON-98 SL Slip
increasing Slip Comp. error.
Comp2
*Hunting: Symptom of irregular vibration of the equipment.

244
 890053-00-01 Sensorless Vector Control

7.2 PM (Permanent-Magnet) Motors

Sensorless vector control is an operation that carries out vector control without speed feedback
from the motor but, instead, with an estimation of the motor rotation speed calculated by the
inverter.

Note
575V inverters do not include SVC control of PM motors.

• For high-performance operation, the parameter values of the motor connected to the inverter output
must be estimated. Configure the motor-related function group parameters (MOT Group) by entering
the motor specification values from the name plate.
• Then, perform auto tuning by setting MOT-11 (Auto Tuning) to 4 [All (PM)] to automatically measure
other parameters before operating a PM synchronous motor in sensorless vector control mode.
• For high-performance PM sensorless vector control, the inverter and the motor must have the same
capacity. The inverter control may be inaccurate if the motor capacity and the inverter capacity do not
match.
• In sensorless vector control mode, do not connect multiple motors to the inverter output.

Code Keypad Display Description Setting Range Factory Default Units

0~4
DRV-09 Control Mode Control Mode 0: V/F Msg
4:PM Sensorless
40.00~180.00Hz
DRV-20 Max Freq Maximum frequency 60 Hz
(PM Sensorless)
1~20 Depends on
MOT-01 Motor Capacity Motor Capacity Msg
(1HP-125HP inverter capacity
MOT-02 Base Freq Base frequency 30~180 60 Hz
MOT-03 Pole Number Motorpole number 2~48 4 -
Depends on
MOT-05 Rated Curr Rated motor current 1.0~1000.0A A
motor capacity
MOT-07 Rated Volt Motor-rated voltage 0, 170~480V 230V/460V V
Depends on motor
MOT-09 Motor Efficiency Efficiency 64-100 %
capacity
MOT-10 AC Input Volt Motor input voltage 170~528V 240V/480V V
0~6
MOT-11 Auto Tuning Auto Tuning 0: None Msg
6:All PM
Depends on
MOT-16 Rs (PM) PM Stator resistance 0.000~9.999Ω Ω
motor capacity
MOT-17 Ld (PM) D-axis inductance 0.000~1000.0 0 mH
MOT-18 Lq (PM) Q-axis inductance 0.000~1000.0 0 mH
MOT-19 PM Flux Ref Flux reference 0.000~1.000 0.147 Wb
MOT-20 Lq(PM) Scale Q-axis inductance scale 50~150% 100 %
Auto tuning level for Ld
MOT-21 Ld,Lq Tune Lev 20.0~50.0% 33.3 %
and Lq

245
Sensorless Vector Control 890053-00-01

Code Keypad Display Description Setting Range Factory Default Units

Auto tuning frequency for
MOT-22 Ld,Lq Tune Hz 80.0~150.0% 150.0/100.0 %
Ld and Lq
Initial pole position
BAS-94 Init Angle Sel 0~2 1: Angle Detect Msg
estimation type
PD Repeat Initial pole position
BAS-95 0~10 2 -
Num estimation retry
Initial pole position
BAS-96 Pulse Interval 1~100msec 20 msec
estimation interval
Initial pole position
BAS-97 Pulse Curr % estimation pulse current 10~100% 25 %
(%)
Initial pole position
BAS-98 Pulse Volt % estimation pulse voltage 100~4000 500 -
(%)
CON-11 Hold Time Hold Time 0 0-60 sec
PM speed controller P
CON-34 ASR P Gain 1 0~5000 100 -
gain 1
PM speed controller I
CON-35 ASR I Gain 1 0~5000 150 -
gain 1
PM speed controller P
CON-36 ASR P Gain 2 0~5000 100 -
gain 2
PM speed controller I
CON-37 ASR I Gain 2 0~9999 150 -
gain 2
Speed estimator
CON-38 PM Flux FF % feedforward high speed 0~1000% 300 %
range (%)
PM SpdEst Kp PM speed estimator
CON-39 0~200% 30 %
0 proportional gain 0
PM speed estimator
CON-40 PM SpdEst Ki 0 0~200% 30 %
integral gain 0
PM SpdEst Kp PM speed estimator
CON-41 0~300% 70 %
1 proportional gain 1
PM speed estimator
CON-42 PM SpdEst Ki 1 0~300% 70 %
integral gain 1
PM SpdEst Kp PM speed estimator
CON-43 0~300% 100 %
2 proportional gain 2
PM speed estimator
CON-44 PM SpdEst Ki 2 0~300% 100 %
integral gain 2
PM EdGain PM D-axis back-EMF
CON-45 0~300% 100 %
Perc estimated gain (%)
PM EqGain PM Q-axis back-EMF
CON-46 0~300% 100 %
Perc estimated gain (%)
PMdeadVolt PM dead-time voltage
CON-47 50~200% 100 %
Per (%)
Current controller
CON-48 ACR P-Gain 0~10000 1200 -
proportional gain
Current controller integral
CON-49 ACR I-Gain 10~1000 120 -
gain
CON-50 V Con HR Voltage controller limit 0~100.0% 10 %
CON-51 V Con Ki Voltage controller I Gain 0~1000.0% 10 %
CON-52 Torque Out LPF Torque Controller Output 0-2000 0 msec

246
 890053-00-01 Sensorless Vector Control

Code Keypad Display Description Setting Range Factory Default Units

Filter
0 Keypad-1
1 Keypad-2
2 V1
4 V2
Torque Limit setting 5 I2
CON-53 Torque Lmt Src 0:Keyypad-1 -
options 6 Int 485
7 FieldBus
9 Pulse
10 V3
11 I3
Forward direction
CON-54 FWD +Trq Lmt 0-200% 180% [4] %
retrograde torque limit
Forward direction
CON-55 FWD -Trq Lmt 0-200% 180.00% %
regenerative torque limit
Reverse direction
CON-56 REV +Trq Lmt 0-200% 180.00% %
regenerative torque limit
Reverse direction
CON-57 REV -Trq Lmt 0-200% 180.00% %
retrograde torque limit

7.2.1 Sensorless Vector Control Operation for PM motor

To operate a PM synchronous motor in sensorless vector control mode, set DRV-09 (Control
Mode) to 4 (PM Sensorless), select the motor capacity at MOT-01 (Motor Capacity), and enter the
appropriate parameters in the motor (MOT) group with the motor specification values found on the
motor’s name plate. If a specific motor capacity does not exist in the setting options, select a
higher motor capacity that is closest to the actual motor capacity.

Keypad
Code Description Setting Value Setting Range Units
Display
DRV-09 Control Mode Control mode 4: PM Sensorless 0~4 -
Motor Depends on the motor 1~20
MOT-01 Motor capacity -
Capacity capacity (1HP-125HP
Depends on the motor
MOT-02 Base Freq Base frequency 30~180 Hz
capacity
Depends on the motor
MOT-03 Pole Number Motor pole number 2~48 -
capacity
Rated motor Depends on the motor
MOT-05 Rated Curr 1.0~1000.0A A
current capacity
Motor-rated Depends on the motor
MOT-07 Rated Volt 170~480V V
voltage capacity
MOT-10 AC Input Volt AC input voltage 170~528V V
Depends on the motor
DRV-20 Max Freq Max 40.00~180.00Hz Hz
capacity

247
Sensorless Vector Control 890053-00-01

7.2.2 PM Auto Tuning

After entering the parameters, set MOT-11 (Auto tuning) to 4 [All(PM)] and perform the auto tuning
operation. When auto tuning is complete, the MOT-16 (Rs), MOT-17 Ld (PM), MOT-18 Lq (PM),
and MOT-19 (PM Flux Ref) parameters are automatically measured and saved.

Keypad
Code Description Setting Value Setting Range Units
Display
0~6
MOT-11 Auto Tuning Auto Tuning 0: None Msg
6:All PM
PM Stator Depends on
MOT-16 Rs (PM) 0.000~9.999Ω Ω
resistance motor capacity
D-axis
MOT-17 Ld (PM) 0 0.000~1000.0 mH
inductance
Q-axis
MOT-18 Lq (PM) 0 0.000~1000.0 mH
inductance
MOT-19 PM Flux Ref Flux reference 0.147 0.000~1.000 Wb
Q-axis
MOT-20 Lq(PM) Scale inductance 100 50~150% %
scale
Ld,Lq Tune Auto tuning
MOT-21 33.3 20.0~50.0% %
Lev level for Ld, Lq
Auto tuning
Ld,Lq Tune
MOT-22 frequency for 150.0/100.0 80.0~150.0% %
Hz
Ld and Lq

PM Sensorless Vector Control Operation Setting Details

Code Description
Changes the speed PI controller gain during a PM synchronous motor
operation in sensorless vector control mode. For a PI speed controller, P gain
is a proportional gain for the speed deviation. If the speed deviation becomes
greater than the torque, the output command will increase accordingly. The
higher the value becomes, the faster the speed deviation will decrease.

CON-34 ASR P Gain 1 The speed controller I gain is the integral gain for speed deviation. It is the
CON-35 ASR I Gain 1 time taken for the gain to reach the rated torque output command while
CON-36 ASR P Gain 2 constant speed deviation continues. The lower the value becomes, the faster
CON-37 ASR I Gain 2 the speed deviation will decrease.

As the motor inertia varies by motor, the gain values should be changed
according to the motor speeds. CON-34 and CON-35 set the low speed P/I
controller gain values, while CON-36 and CON-37 set the high speed P/I
controller gain values, so that an appropriate gain value can be used for
different motor speeds.
Sets the high-speed portion of the feed forward rate against the back-EMF
during a PM synchronous motor operation in sensorless vector control mode.
Feed forwarding enhances operation of the speed estimator.
CON-38 PM Flux FF %
Increase the value at CON-38 in 10% increments to suppress motor
oscillation under load. A fault may occur if this value is set too high.

248
 890053-00-01 Sensorless Vector Control

Code Description
Set these parameters to change the speed estimator gain during a PM
synchronous motor operation in sensorless vector control mode.

CON-39, 40 is applied at starting.

CON-39 PM SpdEst Kp 0
If faults occur or excessive oscillation is observed at starting and low speeds,
CON-40 PM SpdEst Ki 0
decrease the value at CON-39, 40 until the motor operates stably.
CON-41 PM SpdEst Kp 1
CON-42 PM SpdEst Ki 1
CON-41, 42 Gain is applied from low speed to medium speed.
CON-43 PM SpdEst Kp 2
CON-44 PM SpdEst Ki 2
CON-43, 44 gain is applied at medium speed or higher.

When oscillation is occurring, lower the gain value appropriate for the speed.
And when pulsation is occurring in normal status, the value of I gain should
be set higher.
To ensure that the back-EMF with rotor position information can be
appropriately estimated during a PM synchronous motor operation in
sensorless vector control mode, set these values as a percentage of the
proportional gain, which is designed to have stable estimator polarity.
CON-45 PM EdGain Perc
CON-46 PM EqGain Perc Higher values result in faster responses, with higher chances of increased
motor vibration.

Excessively low values may result in motor startup failure due to slow
response rate.
Sets the output compensation values during a PM synchronous motor
operation in sensorless vector control mode. If the motor fails to operate at low
CON-47 PMdeadVolt Per speeds at or below 5% of the rated motor speed, increase the values set at
CON-47 by 10% increments. Decrease the values in 10% decrements if a
clanking noise occurs at motor startup and motor stop.
Sets the gain values for the PI current controller in a synchronous motor.

The P gain is the proportional gain for the current deviation. The current
deviation decreases faster with higher values, as the deviation in voltage
CON-48 ACR P-Gain output command increases with increased deviation. The I gain is the integral
CON-49 ACR I-Gain gain for the current deviation. Deviation in normal operation decreases with
higher values.

However, the gain values are limited by the carrier frequency. A fault may
occur due to interference if you set the gain values too high

249
Sensorless Vector Control 890053-00-01

7.2.3 Detecting the Initial Pole Position

Initial pole position detection is a process to match the rotor position calculated by the inverter and
the actual rotor position in a motor. In a permanent-magnet (PM) synchronous motor, rotor flux is
generated from the permanent magnet attached to the rotor. Therefore, to run the motor in vector
control mode, the exact rotor position (flux position) must be detected for accurate control of the
torque generated by the motor.

Keypad Setting
Code Description Setting Value Units
Display Range
0: None
1: Angle
BAS-94 Init Angle Sel Initial pole position estimation type 0~2 -
Detect
2: Alignment
PD Repeat
BAS-95 Pole position estimation retry count 2 0~10 -
Num
BAS-96 Pulse Interval Pole position detection interval 20 1~100msec msec
Pole position detection pulse current
BAS-97 Pulse Curr % 25 10~100% %
(%)
Pole position detection pulse
BAS-98 Pulse Volt % 500 100~4000 -
voltage %

Pole Position Setting Details

Code Description
Select the type of initial pole position detection.
When BAS-94 is set to 0 (None), the motor is operated according to the pole
position estimated by the inverter’s sensorless control algorithm, instead of
actually detecting the physical position of the rotor pole.
When BAS-94 is set to 1 (Angle Detect), the motor is operated according to the
BAS-94 Init Angle Sel
pole position detected by changes in the current. The voltage pulse input is
used to detect the pole position and results in a small amount of noise at motor
startup.
When BAS-94 is set to 2 (Alignment), the inverter forcefully align the rotor
position by supplying DC current for a certain period of time.

7.2.4 CON-69 Speed Search Operation for PM motor

This operation is used to prevent faults that can occur when the inverter starts a motor that is
idling. Because this feature estimates the motor rotation speed based on the inverter output
current, it does not give the exact speed.

Code Keypad Display Description Setting Value Setting Range Units

PM speed search
CON-69 SS Pulse Curr 15% 10~100 %
pulse current
CON-70 SS Mode Speed search mode 2: Flying Start-3 2 Flying Start-3 -
0000
Speed Search operation
CON-71 Speed Search 0000-1111 bit
selection
Output block time before
CON-75 SS Block Time 1.0sec 0~60.0 sec
speed search

250
 890053-00-01 Sensorless Vector Control

Speed Search Setting Details

Code Description
CON-69 SS Pulse Curr Sets the speed search current based on the motor’s rated current.
2: Flying Start-3

CON-70 SS Mode This speed search is available when operating a PM synchronous motor. It is used when
DRV-09 (Control Mode) is set to 4 (PM Sensorless).

CON-71 Speed Search Refer to 5.5.3 CON-70 Speed Search Operation on pg.155 for details on bit settings.
CON-75 SS Block Time This setting helps prevent overvoltage faults due to counter electromotive force.

Guidelines for Running a PM Synchronous Motor in Sensorless Vector Control Mode

Problem Relevant function code Troubleshooting

If an overcurrent trip occurs at startup, try
CON-48 ACR P-Gain decreasing the value at CON-48 in 10%
Starting torque is insufficient. CON-47 PMdeadVolt decrements.
Per Try increasing the value at CON-47 in 10%
increments.
The motor hunts when starting CON-47 PMdeadVolt Try decreasing the value at CON-47 in 10%
up. Per decrements.
The motor hunts with
regenerative load at low speed CON-47 PMdeadVolt Try increasing the value at CON-47 in 10%
(10Hz or lower), or an “OCT” Per increments.
fault occurs.
If the motor hunts at low speeds, try increasing
the value at CON-35 in 50 msec increments. If
the motor does not hunt, try increasing the value
The motor hunts* or the torque is
CON-04 Carrier Freq at CON-34 in 10% increments until the motor
not sufficient while the load is
CON-34 ASR P Gain 1 runs in an optimal operation condition.
increasing at low speed (10Hz or
CON-35 ASR I Gain 1 If the motor hunts and the torque is not sufficient
lower).
at 5–10Hz speed range, and if the carrier
frequency at CON-04 is set to more than 3 kHz,
try decreasing the value in 1 kHz decrements.
The motor hunts excessively CON-34 ASR P Gain 1
during no-load operation when CON-35 ASR I Gain 1 Try decreasing the speed controller gains at
rated current is supplied to the CON-36 ASR P Gain 2 CON-34–37 in 30% decrements.
motor. CON-37 ASR I Gain 2
Refer to the motor’s name plate and set the pole
number at MOT-03 (Pole Number), or enter a
The value at MOT-19 (PM Flux calculated pole number: Pole Number = (120 x
Ref) becomes “0” after MOT-03 Pole Number BaseFreq/BaseRPM)
performing an auto tuning MOT-07 Rated Volt
operation by setting MOT-11 to 6 MOT-02 Base Freq Refer to the motor’s name plate and set the
[All (PM)]. rated voltage MOT-07 and base frequency
MOT-02 and then run auto tuning again by
setting MOT-110 (Auto Tuning) to 6 All (PM).
MOT-16 Rs Motor operation may fail if a static PM auto
Faults occur after a static auto MOT-17 Ld (PM) tuning result is not accurate. Refer to the motor’s
tuning. MOT-18 Lq (PM) name plate and set the motor-related
MOT-19 PM Flux Ref parameters again.
“OVT” occurs due to abrupt
Try decreasing the value at CON-37 in 5%
acceleration, deceleration, or CON-37 ASR I Gain 2
decrements.
massive load change while the

251
Sensorless Vector Control 890053-00-01

Problem Relevant function code Troubleshooting

motor is operated at mid-speed
(above 30Hz).
If the motor is operated at the rated speed, try
decreasing the value at CON-50 in 5%
Speed variation occurs during an
CON-38 PM Flux FF % increments.
operation at rated motor speed,
CON-50 V Con HR If the motor response is slow, try increasing the
or during an overloaded high
CON-51 V Con Ki value at CON-51 in 5% increments (or, try
speed operation.
increasing the value at CON-38 in 100%
increments).
Try increasing the value at CON-43 in
CON-43 PM SpdEst Kp increments of 10 and the value at CON-4 in
“OC1” fault or jerking occurs 2 increments of 1.
during a high speed operation. CON-44 PM SpdEst Ki
2 Note that a fault may occur if the values at CON-
43 and CON-44 are set too high.
Try increasing the value at CON-35 (low speed
Jerking occurs during a low
CON-35 ASR I Gain 1 range speed controller I gain) to eliminate
speed operation.
jerking.
CON-34 ASR P Gain 1
A “clanking” noise is heard at the Try increasing the values at CON-34 and CON-
CON-35 ASR I Gain 1
beginning of startup or during 35 in 10% increments, or try decreasing the
CON-47 PMdeadVolt
deceleration. value at CON-47 in 10% decrements.
Per
Try increasing the value at CON-50 in 1%
The motor cannot reach the
increments if the motor cannot reach the speed
speed reference when it is
CON-50 V Con HR reference.
operated at or above the rated
CON-51 V Con Ki Try increasing the value at CON-51 in 10%
speed, or when the acceleration
increments if the motor acceleration is not
is not responsive.
responsive.
“OC1” trip occurs after an abrupt CON-34 ASR P Gain 1 Try decreasing the values at CON-34 and CON-
regenerative load (over 100%). CON-35 ASR I Gain 1 35 in 10% decrements.
The motor jerks during CON-40 PM SpdEst Ki Try increasing the speed estimator proportional
acceleration. 0 gain 0 at CON-40 in increments of 5.
A massive current rises when the
Try increasing the value at CON-35 in 10%
motor is stopped during a 20:1 CON-35 ASR I Gain 1
increments.
speed startup.
An oscillation occurs when an CON-39 PM SpdEst Kp
abrupt load is applied to the 0 Try increasing the values at CON-39 and CON-
motor during a low speed CON-40 PM SpdEst Ki 40 in 10% increments.
operation. 0
During a PM speed search, the
speed search stops at around
20% of the base frequency, and Try decreasing the value at CON-69 in 5%
CON-69 SS Pulse Curr
the motor is stopped and starts decrements.
again after a massive current
rises.
During a high-speed operation in
PM control mode utilizing the CON-78 KEB Start Lev
kinetic energy buffering, a CON-79 KEB Stop Lev Try increasing the values at CON-78 and CON-
massive current rises at around CON-81 KEB P Gain 79 in 5% increments, or try doubling the gain
20% of the base frequency, the CON-82 KEB I Gain values at CON-81 and CON-82.
motor is stopped, and it fails to
start.
1. When the motor is overloaded, This happens when the Lq parameter value is
MOT-17 Lq (PM)
the maximum torque limit current decreasing due to certain causes, such as self-
MOT-20 Lq (PM Scale
is supplied to the motor at saturation.
startup, and the motor fails to
252
 890053-00-01 Sensorless Vector Control

Problem Relevant function code Troubleshooting

operate due to an inverter Try increasing the value (100%) at MOT-20 in
overload fault. 5% increments.
2. Speed search fails when the a
load exceeding the rated load is
applied to the motor at each
speed section, or a current equal
to or exceeding 150% of the
rated current is supplied to the
motor.
During a PM synchronous motor operation in
A fault occurs when the motor sensorless vector mode, the motor starts up
tries to start up or accelerate CON-71 Speed Search after the initial pole position detection is made.
from a free run at certain speed To accelerate the motor in a free-run state,
range. enable speed search at acceleration by setting
bit 0 (0001) at CON-71 (Speed Search).
During a low speed operation,
The motor control may become unstable due to
the output speed search
CON-35 ASR I Gain 1 input voltage deviation during a low-speed
becomes unstable when a
CON-47 PMdeadVolt operation with low voltage input.
massive load exceeding the
Per Try decreasing the values at CON-35 and CON-
rated load is abruptly applied to
47 in 10% decrements.
the motor.

253
Sensorless Vector Control 890053-00-01

254
 890053-00-01 Application Groups

8 Application Groups
The H2 Series inverter includes three Application Groups (AP1, AP2 and AP3). AP1 includes
additional PID control related parameters and can be found in the PID group, section 6.3.
Application Groups 2 & 3 include the following additional pump related features.
AP2 - Load tuning, Pump cleaning operation, Damper control, Oil Pump control and Motor Pre-
Heat functions.
AP3 includes the Time Event scheduler that allows the inverter to be programmed to operate at
specific times over a 7 day period.

255
Application Groups 890053-00-01

8.1 Application Group 2 (AP2)

Application Group 2 includes additional pump and fan related parameters. These are Pump Load
Curve Tuning, Pump Clean Operation, Check Valve timing, Damper status monitoring, Oil Pump
starter control and Motor Pre-Heat function.
8.1.1 AP2 Parameter List

LCD Initial
Code Name Setting Range Property* Ref.
Display Value
00 Jump Code Jump Code 1–99 40 O p.74
0 No
011 Load curve Tuning Load Tune 0 No Δ p.257
1 Yes
Base Freq*15%–Load Fit Hfreq
02 Load Curve - Low Freq Load Fit Lfreq 30.00 Δ p.257
(AP2-08)
03 Current at Low Freq Load Fit LCurr 0.0–80.0 (%) 40.0 Δ p.257
04 Power at Low Freq Load Fit LPwr 0.0–80.0 (%) 30.0 Δ p.257
08 Load Curve - High Freq Load Fit HFreq Load Fit LFreq– HighFreq 51.00 Δ p.257
09 Current at High Freq Load Fit HCurr Load Fit LCurr – 200.0 (%) 80.0 Δ p.257
10 Power at High Freq Load Fit HPwr Load Fit LPwr – 200.0 (%) 80.0 Δ p.257
11 Load curve - Current Load Curve Cur - - X p.257
12 Load curve - Power Load Curve Pwr - - X p.257
0 None
Pump Clean 1 DI Dependent
15 Pump clean setting 1 0 None O p.259
Mode1 2 Output Power
3 Output Current
0 None
Pump Clean 1 Start
16 Pump clean setting2 0 None Δ p.259
Mode2 2 Stop
3 Start and Stop
17 Pump clean load setting PC Curve Rate 0.1–200.0 (%) 100.0 O p.259
18 Pump clean reference band PC Curve Band 0.0–100.0 (%) 5.0 O p.259
19 Pump clean operation delay time PC Curve DT 0.0–6000.0 (sec) 60.0 O p.259
20 Pump clean start delay time PC Start DT 0.0–6000.0 (sec) 10.0 O p.259
0 speed operating time at Fx/Rx
21 PC Step DT 0.1–6000.0 (sec) 5.0 O p.259
switching
22 Pump clean Acc time PC Acc Time 0.0–600.0 (sec) 10.0 O p.259
23 Pump clean Dec time PC Dec Time 0.0–600.0 (sec) 10.0 O p.259
24 Forward step maintaining time Fwd SteadyTime 0.0–600.0 (sec) 10.0 O p.259
Forward step maintaining
25 Fwd SteadyFreq 0.00, Low Freq– High Freq 30.00 O p.259
frequency
26 Reverse step running time Rev SteadyTime 0.0–600.0 (sec) 10.0 O p.259
27 Reverse step running frequency Rev SteadyFreq 0.00, Low Freq– High Freq 30.00 O p.259
Pump clean number of Fx/Rx
28 PC Num of Steps 1–10 2 O p.259
steps
Pump clean function cycle
29 Repeat Num Mon - - X p.259
monitoring
30 Number of pump clean repetitions Repeat Num Set 0–10 2 O p.259
0 Stop
31 Operation after pump clean end PC End Mode 0 Stop Δ p.259
1 Run
32 Pump clean continuous limit time PC Limit Time 6–60 (min) 10 O p.259
Pump clean continuous limit
33 PC Limit Num 0–10 3 O p.259
numbers
38 Dec Valve operation frequency Dec Valve Freq Low Freq– High Freq 40.00 O p.263
39 Dev Valve Dec time Dev Valve Time 0.0–6000.0 (sec) 0.0 O p.263
40 Start and End ramp settings Start&End Ramp 0 No 0 No Δ p.264

256
 890053-00-01 Application Groups

LCD Initial
Code Name Setting Range Property* Ref.
Display Value
1 Yes
41 Start Ramp Acc time Start Ramp Acc 0.0–600.0 (sec) 10.0 O p.264
42 End Ramp Dec time End Ramp Dec 0.0–600.0 (sec) 10.0 O p.264
45 Damper check time Damper check T 0.0–600.0 (sec) 5.0 O p.265
46 Lubrication operation time Lub Op Time 0.0–600.0 (sec) 5.0 O p.266
482 Pre heat level Pre Heat Level 1–100 (%) 20 O p.267
49 Pre-heat duty Pre-Heat Duty 1–100 (%) 30 O p.267
50 DC input delay time DC Inj Delay T 0.0–600.0 (sec) 60.0 O p.267

8.1.2 AP2-01 Load Tuning

Load tuning refers to an operation that detects the load applied to a specific section of the inverter
operation (current and voltage) and creates an ideal load curve for the under load and pump clean
operations. The two set points to define the section are user-definable, and are set at 50% and
85% of the base frequency (MOT-02 Base Freq) by default. The load tuning result values are
saved at parameters AP2-02~AP2-10. These values are user definable as well.

The minimum set point for the load tuning begins at 15% of the base frequency (MOT-02 Base
Freq), and the maximum set point can be set up to the base frequency. If the frequency limit is set
to ‘1 (Yes)’ at ADV-24 (Freq Limit), the range is limited within the frequencies set at ADV-25 (Freq
Limit Lo) and ADV-26 (Freq Limit Hi).

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Load curve 0 No
01 Load Tune No
Tuning 1 Yes -
Load curve Low Base Freq*15%–
02 Load Fit LFreq 30.00
Freq Load Fit HFreq Hz
Current for Low
03 Load Fit LCurr 40.0 0.0–200.0 %
Freq
Power for Low
04 Load Fit LPwr 30.0 0.0–200.0 %
Freq
Load curve High Load Fit Load Fit LFreq–High
AP2 08 51.00
Freq HFreq Freq Hz
Current for High
09 Load Fit HCurr 80.0 0.0–200.0 %
Freq
Power for High
10 Load Fit HPwr 80.0 0.0–200.0 %
Freq
Load current for Load Curve
11 - - %
frequency Cur
Load power for Load Curve
12 - - %
frequency Pwr

257
Application Groups 890053-00-01

Load Tuning Setting Details

Code Description
The inverter performs an automatic tuning to generate an ideal system
load curve.
AP2-01 Load Tune Setting Function
0 None Load tuning is not used.
1 Load Tune Start load tuning.
AP2-02 Load Fit LFreq Defines the first frequency set point for load tuning (user definable).
Displays the current and power measured at the frequency set at AP2-
AP2-03 Load Fit LCurr
02 as a percentage (%) value, based on motor rated current and rated
AP2-04 Load Fit LPwr
power. Values for AP2-03 and AP2-04 are user definable.
AP2-08 Load fit HFreq Defines the second frequency set point for load tuning(user definable).
Displays the current and power measured at the frequency set at AP2-
AP2-09 Load Fit HCurr
08 as a percentage (%) value, based on motor rated current and rated
AP2-10 Load Fit HPwr
power. Values for AP2-09 and AP2-10 are user definable.
AP2-11 Load Curve Cur Monitors the load curve value set at AP2-1 (Load Tune) based on the
AP2-12 Load Curve PWR current output frequency.

When a load tuning is performed, the inverter measures for 10 seconds the motor current and
power, at the frequencies set at AP2-02 and AP2-09. The motor current and power values
measured here are used to generate an ideal load curve.

Note
Load tuning is not available while the inverter is operating.

• If the frequencies for AP2-02 (Low Freq) and AP2-08 (High Freq) are set too close to each
other, the resulting load curve may not reflect the actual (ideal) load curve. Therefore, it is
recommended that you keep the AP2-02 and AP2-08 frequencies as close to the factory
defaults as possible.
• If a secondary motor is in use, note that the existing load curve for the main motor will be
applied to the secondary motor unless a load tuning has been performed for the secondary
motor.

258
 890053-00-01 Application Groups

8.1.3 AP2-15 Pump Clean Operation

The pump clean operation is used to remove the scales and deposits attached on the impeller
inside a pump. This operation keeps the pump clean by performing a repetitive run-and-stop
operation of a pump. This prevents loss in pump performance and premature pump failures.

Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
0 None
DI
1
Dependent
Pump Clean
15 Pump clean mode 1 0: None Output -
Mode1 2
Power
Output
3
Current
0 None
1 Start
Pump Clean
16 Pump clean mode 2 0: None 2 Stop -
Mode2
Start &
3
Stop
Pump clean load PC Curve
17 100 100.0–200.0 %
setting Rate
Pump clean reference PC Curve
18 5 0.0–100.0 %
band Band
Pump clean operation
19 PC Curve DT 60 0–6000.0 sec
delay time
Pump clean start
20 PC Start DT 10 0–6000.0 Sec
delay time
0 speed operating
21 time at Fx/Rx PC Step DT 5 1.0–6000.0 Sec
AP2
switching
22 Pump clean Acc time PC Acc Time 10 0–600.0 Sec
23 Pump clean Dec time PC Dec Time 10 0–600.0 Sec
24 Forward step run time Fwd Steady T 10 1.0–6000.0 Sec
Forward step run Fwd 0.00, Low Freq–
25 30 Hz
frequency SteadyFreq High Freq
26 Reverse step run time Rev Steady T 10 1.0–6000.0 Sec
Reverse step run Rev 0.00, Low Freq–
27 30 Hz
frequency SteadyFreq High Freq
Number of Fx/Rx PC Num of
28 5 0–10 -
steps for pump clean Steps
Pump clean cycle Repeat Num
29 - - -
monitoring Mon
Pump clean repeat Repeat Num
30 5 0–10 -
number Set
Operation after pump 0 Stop
31 PC End Mode 0 -
clean 1 Run
Pump clean PC Limit
32 10 6-60 min
continuous time limit Time
Pump clean
33 continuous number PC Limit Num 3 0-10
limit
259
Application Groups 890053-00-01

<Basic Pump Clean Operation>

When a pump clean start command is given, the inverter waits until the delay time set at AP2-19
elapses, accelerates by the acceleration time set at AP2-22, and operates at the frequency set at
AP2-25. The pump runs for the time set at AP2-24, decelerates by the time set at AP2-23, and
then stops. This operation repeats in the forward and reverse directions (one after another) for the
number of times set at AP2-28 (PC Num of Step). Each time the steps (Fx/Rx) switch, the inverter
waits at a stop state for the time set at AP2-21 before going on with the next step. One step in the
forward direction and another step in the reverse direction makes one cycle. The number of pump
clean cycles is set at AP2-30. In the figure above, AP2-28 is set to ‘1’, and AP2-30 is set to ‘1’.

260
 890053-00-01 Application Groups

Pump Clean Function Setting Details

Code Description
Sets the pump mode.
Setting Function
0 None Pump Clean function is not used.
Set one of the terminal inputs to ‘46 (Pump
DI
1 Clean Sel)’ and performs the pump clean
defendant
AP2-15 operation by turning on the terminal.
PumpClean Mode Performs a pump clean operation when a
2 Power pump consumes more power than it is
supposed to consume in a normal operation.
Performs a pump clean operation when a
3 Current pump consumes more current than it is
supposed to consume in a normal operation.
Sets the pump clean start mode.
Setting Function
Pump clean is performed only by the
0 None
function set at AP2-20.
AP2-16 Pump clean is performed each time the
1 Start
PumpClean Sel inverter starts operating.
Pump clean is performed each time the
2 Stop
inverter stops operating.
Pump clean is performed each time the
3 Start & Stop
inverter starts or stops operating.
If AP2-15 is set to ‘Power’ or ‘Current,’ multiply the load
AP2-17 characteristic curve set at AP2-2–AP2-10 by the value set at
PC Curve Rate AP2-17 (100[%]+AP2-17[%]), and reset the load characteristic
curve for the pump clean operation (refer to the load tune
AP2-18 features for AP2-2–AP2-10 setting values).
PC Curve Band Apply (rated inverter current x AP2-18 setting value) and (rated
motor x AP2-18 setting value) to the pump clean load curve
AP2-19 calculated by AP2-17 to calculate the final pump clean load
PC Curve DT curve. The inverter performs pump clean operation when the
inverter continues operating for the time set at AP2-19.
When AP2-15 is set to ‘Power’ or ‘Current’, a pump clean is
AP2-20 performed if the inverter operation power or current stays above
Clean Start DT the pump clean load characteristic curve (defined by AP2-17 and
AP2-18) for the time set at AP2-19.
Sets the time for the inverter to maintain 0 speed (stop) before
AP2-21
the inverter switches from forward to reverse operation during
Clean Step DT
pump clean.
AP2-22 PumpClean AccT
Sets the Acc/Dec times for pump clean operations.
AP2-23 PumpClean DecT
AP2-24 Fwd Steady Time
Sets the time to maintain forward and reverse operations.
AP2-26 Rev Steady Time
AP2-25 Fwd SteadyFreq
Sets the forward and reverse operation frequencies.
AP2-27 Rev SteadyFreq
Determines the number of steps (acceleration/deceleration/stop)
AP2-28 in one cycle. Each operation, either in the forward or reverse
PC Num of Steps direction, constitutes one step. If set to ‘2,’ one forward step and
one reverse step constitute one cycle.
261
Application Groups 890053-00-01

Code Description
Determines the inverter operation after pump clean operation.
Setting Function
0 Stop This stops the inverter after pump cleaning.
AP2-31 The inverter operates based on the inverter’s
PC End Mode command status after the pump cleaning. (If a
1 Start terminal command is received, the inverter
performs the operation it was performing before
the pump clean operation.)
AP2-29 Repeat Num Mon Displays the number of the current pump cleaning cycle.
AP2-30 Sets the number of cycles for one pump clean operation set at
Repeat Num Set AP2-21–AP2-28.
Frequent pump clean operations may indicate a serious system
AP2-32
problem. To warn the users of potential system problems, an
PC Limit Time
error (CleanRPTErr) occurs if the number of pump clean
AP2-33
operation exceeds the number set at AP2-33 within the time
PC Limit Num
period set at AP2-32.

Note
• When the run prevent feature is active and an operation in the prevented direction is
required to perform a pump clean operation, the inverter operates at the 0 speed for the
time set at AP2-24 and AP2-26 (Steady Time).
• To stop the pump clean operation, press the OFF button on the keypad or turn it off at the
terminal input.

• If the pump clean operation is configured for terminal input and it is turned on, and if ADV- 10
(PowerOn Resume) is set to ‘Yes’, a pump clean operation is performed when the inverter
is turned on.
• When performing a pump clean operation via terminal input,
- if the terminal input is turned off instantly after it is turned on (the operation is
triggered), 1 pump clean cycle is operated.
- if ADV-10 (PowerOn Resume) is set to ‘Yes’, and the terminal input is turned off
instantly after it is turned on (the operation is triggered), and if the inverter is turned
off during a pump clean then is turned back on again, the pump clean operation is not
resumed (because the input terminal is not on when the inverter is turned on).
- if the terminal input is kept on after it is initially turned on, 1 pump clean cycle is
operated.

262
 890053-00-01 Application Groups

8.1.4 AP2-38 Decelerating Valve Ramping

This function is used to prevent pump damage due to abrupt deceleration. When the pump
operation frequency reaches the valve ramp frequency (AP2-38 Dec Valve Freq) while decelerating
rapidly based on the deceleration ramp time (set at AP2-42), it begins to slow down the
deceleration based on the deceleration valve ramp time (set at AP2-39 DecValve Time).
Decelerating valve ramp operates when ADV-24 (Freq Limit) is set to ‘1 (Yes)’.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Dec valve ramping Dec Valve Low Freq– High
38 40.00 Hz
start frequency Freq Freq
AP2
Dec valve ramping DecValve
39 0.0 0–6000.0 Sec
time Time
0 No
24 Frequency limit options Limit Mode 0: No
1 Yes -
Low Freq minimum Start Freq– Max
ADV 25 Freq Limit Lo 30.00 Hz
value Freq
Low Freq maximum Freq Limit Lo– Max
26 Freq Limit Hi 60.00 Hz
value Freq

Deceleration Valve Ramping Setting Details

Code Description
Sets the start frequency where the slow deceleration begins in order to prevent
AP2-38 pump damage when the inverter stops. Decelerating valve ramping is
DecValve Freq performed from the frequency set at AP2-38 to the frequency limit set at ADV-25
(low frequency limit for pump operation).
AP2-39 Sets the time it takes to decelerate from the frequency set at AP2-38 to the
DecValve Time frequency limit set at ADV-25 (low frequency limit for pump operation).

The time set at AP2-39 refers to the absolute time that it takes for the pump to decelerate from the frequency
set at AP2-38 to the frequency limit set at ADV-25.

263
Application Groups 890053-00-01

8.1.5 AP2-40 Start & End Ramp Operation

This function is used to rapidly accelerate the pump to the normal operating level, or to rapidly
decelerate the pump and stop it. Start & End ramp operation is performed when ADV-24 (Freq
Limit) is set to ‘1 (Yes).’

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Start & End Ramp 0 No
40 Start&End Ramp 0: No
Gradient 1 Yes -
AP2
41 StartRampAcc StartRampAcc 10.0 0–600.0 Sec
42 EndRampDec EndRampDec 10.0 0–600.0 Sec
Frequency limit 0 No
24 Freq Limit 0: No
options 1 Yes -
Low Freq minimum Start Freq– Max
ADV 25 Freq Limit Lo 30.00 Hz
value Freq
Low Freq maximum Freq Limit Lo–
26 Freq Limit Hi 60.00 Hz
value Max Freq

Start & End Ramp Operation Setting Details

Code Description
Sets the pump Start & End Ramp options.
AP2-40 Setting Function
Start&End Ramp 0 No The Start & End Ramp operation is not used.
1 Yes Use the Start & End Ramp operation.
Refers to the time it takes to reach the minimum pump operation frequency
AP2-41
for a Start & End Ramp operation (Freq Limit Lo) set at ADV- 25 when the
Start Ramp Acc
inverter starts (it is different from DRV-03 acceleration slope).
Refers to the time it takes to reach the 0 step (stop) from the minimum pump
AP2-42
operation frequency for a Start & End Ramp operation (Freq Limit Lo) set at
End Ramp Dec
ADV-25 (it is different from DRV-03 deceleration slope).

In the figure above, AP2-41 defines the acceleration time to the minimum operation frequency
ADV-25 (Freq Limt Lo). AP2-42 defines the deceleration time from the minimum operation
frequency to a stopped state. Time A (normal acceleration time set at DRV-03) and Time B (normal
deceleration time set at DRV-04) in the figure will change according to the Acc/Dec slopes defined
by AP2-41 and AP2-42.
264
 890053-00-01 Application Groups

8.1.6 AP2-45 Damper Operation

A damper is a device that controls the flow in a ventilation system. If a damper is used in a system,
the inverter may be configured to operate according to the damper’s operation status. One of the
digital input terminals (IN-65–71) may be set to ‘45 (Damper Open)’ to receive the damper open
status input. During a damper operation, one of the relay outputs OUT-31–35 (Relay 1–5) may
also be set to ‘33 (Damper Control)’ to output a signal based on the damper’s operation status.
The inverter starts operating when both the run command and the damper open signal are
activated. A relay output setting at OUT- 31~35 is not necessary.

When the time difference between the inverter run command and the damper open signal
exceeds the delay time set at AP2-45 (Damper DT), damper error (Damper Err) occurs. If the
damper open relay output and damper control input are set at the same time, and if the damper
open signal is not received until the time set at AP2-45 (Damper DT) is elapsed (when the inverter
is not operating), damper error (Damper Err) occurs.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Damper check
AP2 45 Damper DT - 0.1–600.0 sec
time
P1–P7 Px
P1~P7
IN 65~71 terminal 37(Damper open) 0-42 -
Define
configuration
Multi-function
OUT 31~35 Relay 1~5 33(Damper Control) 0-43 -
relay 1–5

Damper Operation Setting Details

Code Description
Sets the damper open delay time. Detects the inverter run command or the
damper open signal (whichever is received first) and outputs a damper error
AP2-45 Damper DT
(Damper Err) if the other signal is not received until the time set at AP2-45
elapses.
IN-65~71 Sets one of the multi-functional terminals to ’45 (Damper Open)’ to
P1–P7 define enable damper operation.
OUT-31–35 Sets one of the relay outputs to ’33 (Damper Control)’ to provide a
Relay 1–5 relay output when the inverter run command is turned on.

Note
Damper operation is one of the essential system features that are available in both HAND and
AUTO modes.

265
Application Groups 890053-00-01

8.1.7 AP2-46 Lubrication Operation

Lubrication operation can be used for oil pump starters. The inverter outputs the lubrication signal
through one of the output relays when the inverter receives a run command. The inverter does not
start operating until the time set at AP2-46 (Lub Op Time) has elapsed and the Lubrication signal is
turned off.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Lubrication
AP2 46 Lub Op Time 0.1–600.0 (sec)
operation time
Multi-function relay
OUT 31-35 Relay 1–5 30 (Lubrication) 0-43 -
1–5

Lubrication Operation Setting Details

Code Description
AP2-46 Outputs the lubrication signal for a set time when the inverter run command is
Lub Op Time turned on. The inverter starts operating when the set time has elapsed.
OUT-31–35 Sets one of the output relays (OUT-31–35) to ‘30 (Lubrication)’ to enable
Relay 1–5 the Lubrication function.

Note
• The lubrication function can be used to delay inverter operations, depending on the
working environment, since the inverter waits for the time set at AP2-46 (Lub Op Time)
each time a run command is received.
• Lubrication operation is one of the essential system features that are available in both
HAND and AUTO modes.

266
 890053-00-01 Application Groups

8.1.8 AP2-48 Pre-Heat Function

This function uses current to heat up the motor to remove moisture and prevent freezing when it is not
in operation.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Initial heating
48 Pre Heat Level 20 1–100 %
output current
Initial heating
AP2 49 Pre Heat Duty 30 1–100 %
output duty
DC input delay
50 DC Inj Delay T 60.0 0.0–600.0 sec
time
Terminal block
IN 65~71 P1–P7 Define 36 (Pre Heat) 0-42 -
input P1–P7

Pre-Heat Setting Details

Code Description
Sets the current to be used for initial heating. Sets the current to motor no-
AP2-48 Pre Heat Curr
load current % value.
Sets the duty (time) for the current to be used for initial heating, from 10
AP2-49 Pre Heat Duty
seconds to % value.
Sets a delay time to prevent from an over current trip that may occur
AP2-50 DC Inj Delay T
when a DC input is applied after the inverter has stopped.
IN-65–71 P1–7 Define Assign a digital input as the Pre Heat (36) function. Activate when closed.

The initial heating function continually operates when the digital input terminal is activated and until
the inverter is started. When an inverter run command is made while the heating function is
operating, the inverter starts operation immediately.

When the digital input is active, the initial heating operation starts after the inverter operation stops.

267
Application Groups 890053-00-01

The diagram above shows the operation waveform related to AP2-50 DC Inj Delay T. The Pre
Heat function performs when the inverter stop mode is set to Free Run and the Pre Heat signal is
supplied. Then, if the inverter operation command is on, the inverter maintains acceleration and a
fixed frequency. If the inverter operation command is off, the motor is in Free Run and the Pre
Heat operations starts after the time amount set in AP2- 50.

If the value for AP2-48 Pre Heat Curr is above the rated motor current value, it is limited by
the rated motor current value.
If the value for AP2-48 Pre Heat Curr is too high or the DC current output time is too long, the
motor may overheat or be damaged and the Inver IOLT may also malfunction. Reduce the DC
output current amount and DC output time to prevent from such damages.

268
 890053-00-01 Application Groups

8.2 Application Group 3 (AP3)

8.2.1 Time Event Scheduling

Time Event function enables the inverter to be fully automated. The user can program the inverter
to operate among 4 Time Periods. Each period contains start/stop times for 7 days- 24 hours to
program operation of the inverter. The inverter utilizes the RTC (Real-Time Clock) feature to set
operating times.

To use the Time Event, set the current date and time. Three parameters need to be set to
configure the Time event feature: Time Period Module, Time Event, and Exception Date.

An RTC battery is installed on the I/O CPU board of the H2 inverter and allows for approximately 5 to 6
years of inverter operation.

Time Period Description

Time Period Module Used to set the time periods of operation.
Time Event Module Used to set the functions of the time periods.
Exception Date Used to specify the exception date. Exception date has the highest priority.

4 Time period Module types, 8 Time Event Module types, and 8 Exception day types can be used
to configure time events. The Time Event function works based on a series of configuration using
the modules listed in the table above.

8.2.2 AP3 Time Event Parameter List

Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
01/01/2000 ~
01 Current date Now Date 01/01/2000 Hz
12/31/2099 (Date)
02 Current time Now Time 0: 00 0: 00–23: 59 Sec
03 Current day of the week Now Weekday 0000001 0000000–1111111 -
Summer T
04 Summer Time Start date 04/01 01/01 ~ Summer T Stop Day
Start
Summer T Summer T Start ~
05 Summer Time Finish date 11/31 Day
Stop 12/31(Date)
AP3
10 Period connection status Period Status - - -
11 Time Period 1 Start time Period1 StartT 24: 00 00:00 ~ 24:00 Min
Period1 StartT ~
12 Time Period 1 End time Period1 Stop T 24: 00 Min
24:00(Min)
13 Time Period 1 Day of the week Period1 Day 0000000 0000000~1111111 -
14 Time Period 2 Start time Period2 StartT 24: 00 00:00 ~ 24:00 Min
Period2 StartT ~
15 Time Period 2 End time Period2 Stop T 24: 00 Min
24:00(Min)
16 Time Period 2 Day of the week Period2 Day 00000000 0000000~1111111 -
Time Period 3 Start time
17 Period3 StartT 24: 00 00:00 ~ 24:00 Min
configuration
AP3
Period3 StartT ~
18 Time Period 3 End time Period3 Stop T 24: 00 Min
24:00(Min)
19 Time Period 3 Day of the week Period3 Day 0000000 0000000~1111111
269
Application Groups 890053-00-01

Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
-
20 Time Period 4 Start time Period4 StartT 24: 00 00:00 ~ 24:00 Min
Period4 StartT ~
21 Time Period 4 End time Period4 StopT 24: 00 Min
24:00(Min)
22 Time Period 4 Day of the week Period4 Day 0000000 0000000~1111111 -
30 Except1 Date Start time Except1 StartT 24: 00 00:00 ~ 24:00 Min
Except1 StartT ~
31 Except1 Date End time Except1 Stop T 24: 00 Min
24:00(Min)
32 Except1 Date Except1 Date 01/01 01/01–12/31 Day
33- Exception Date 2–Exception Date 8 Parameter (The same condition and setting as Exception
53 Date 1)
0 No
70 Time Event functions Time Event En 0: No
1 Yes
71 Time Event configuration status T-Event Status - -
000000000000
72 Time Event 1 Connection T-Event1Period 000000000000
~111111111111
T-
73 Time Event 1 functions 0: None 0 None
Event1Define
1 Fx
2 Rx
3 Speed-L
4 Speed-M
5 Speed-H
7 Xcel-L
8 Xcel-M
9 Xcel-H
10 Xcel Stop
11 Run Enable
12 2nd Source
13 Exchange
14 Analog Hold
15 I-Term Clear
16 PID Openloop
AP3 17 PID Gain 2
18 PID Ref Change
19 2nd Motor
20 Timer In
21 dis Aux Ref
22 Reserved
23 Reserved
24 Pre Heat
25 Reserved
26 Reserved
27 Sleep Wake Chg
28 PID Step Ref L
29 PID Step Ref M
30 PID Step Ref H
74– Time Event 2–Time Event 8 Parameter
87 (The same setting range and initial value as Time Event 1)

270
 890053-00-01 Application Groups

Time Event Function Setting Details

Code Description
Sets the current date, time, and day of the week. The Time Event function
is based on the setting. When the user sets the summer time start date, the
current time is subtracted by one hour. ex) [AP3- 04 Summer T Start] is set to
AP3-01 Now Date April 1, and if it is 1:59 on April 1, it will not be 2:00 a minute later and it will
AP3-02 Now Time be 1:00 on April 1. If [AP3-05 Summer T Stop] is set to December 25th,
AP3-03 Now Weekday then it will be 1:59 on December 25th, and it will be 3:00 on December 25
instead of 2:00 a minute later. Summer time is different for each country. The
parameter is based on 2 o'clock. If there is no charge on the RTC battery, it
is initialized to 00:00 on January 1, 2000 when the inverter power is off / on.
AP3-04 Summer T Start
Set the Summer time start and finish date.
AP3-05 Summer T Stop
Select the desired date format.
Configuration Function
0 YYYY/MM/DD Year/Month/Day is displayed.
AP3-06 Date format
1 MM/DD/YYYY Month/Day/Year is displayed (USA).
The format of Day/Month/Year is displayed
2 DD/MM/YYYY
(Europe).
Bits 0–3 are used to indicate the time module that is currently in use among
the 4 different time modules set at AP3-11–AP3-22.
AP3-10 Period Status
Bits 4–11 are used to indicate the exception day that is set at AP3- 30–AP3-
53.
AP3-11–AP3-20
The start time for the 4 time periods can be set up to 4.
Period 1–4 Start T
AP3-12–AP3-21
The end time for the 4 time periods can be set up to 4.
Period 1–4 Stop T
The Time period date for the operation can be set up to 4. It can be set on a
weekly basis. If the bit is ‘1 (on)’, it indicates the relevant day is selected. If
the Bit is ‘0 (off)’, it indicates the relevant day is
AP3-13–AP3-22 not selected.
Period 1~4 Day
Bit
6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday
AP3-30–AP3-51
The operation start time for the 8 Exception days can be set.
Exception1–8 Start T
AP3-31–AP3-52
The operation end time for the 8 Exception days can be set.
Exception1–8 Stop T
AP3-32–AP3-53
The date for the 8 Exception days can be set.
Exception1–8 Date
Enables or disables the Time Event
AP3-70 Setting Function
Time Event En 0 No Time Event is not used.
1 Yes Time Event is used.
AP3-71 It shows which T-Event from 1–8 is being performed.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
T-Event Status T-Event 8 T-Event 7 T-Event 6 T-Event 5 T-Event 4 T-Event 3 T-Event 2 T-Event 1
Select the desired module of the Time Module and Exception Day set in
AP3-72–86 AP3-11–AP3-53 for the relevant events.
T-Event1–8 Period If the bit is 1, it indicates the relevant Time Module or Exception Day is
selected. If the Bit is 0, it indicates the Time Module or Exception Day is not
271
Application Groups 890053-00-01

Code Description
selected.
bit
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Exception

Exception

Exception

Exception

Exception

Exception

Exception

Exception
Period 4

Period 3

Period 2

Period 1
Date 8

Date 7

Date 6

Date 5

Date 4

Date 3

Date 2

Date 1
Select the desired Event.
Setting
0 None 16 PID Openloop
1 Fx 17 PID Gain2
2 Rx 18 PID Ref Change
3 Speed-L 19 2nd Motor
4 Speed-M 20 Timer In
5 Speed-H 21 Dis Aux Ref
AP3-73–87
7 Xcel-L 22
T-Event1–8 Define
8 Xcel-M 23
9 Xcel-H 24 Pre Heat
10 Xcel Stop 25
11 Run Enable 26
12 2nd Source 27 Sleep Wake Chg
13 Exchange 28 PID Step Ref L
14 Analog Hold 29 PID Step Ref M
15 I-Term Clear 30 PID Step Ref H

272
 890053-00-01 Application Groups

Time Period Parameter Setting

There are 4 Time Period Sets in the Time Event. Each Time Period Set has:

Period 1–4 Start (Start time), Period 1–4 Stop T (End time), and Period 1–4 Day (Operation day)
for which they can be set.

Time Period Schedule

Every Sunday, Monday, Wednesday, Thursday, and Friday at 06: 00 (On) and 18:
00 (Off)
Time Schedule
Time Period 1 Code Function Setting
AP3-11 Period1 StartT 06: 00
AP3-12 Period1 StopT 18: 00
AP3-13 Period1 Day 1101110

Every Sunday and Saturday for 24 hours (On)

Time Schedule
Time Period 2 Code Function Setting
AP3-14 Period2 StartT 00: 00
AP3-15 Period2 StopT 24: 00
AP3-16 Period2 Day 1000001

Every Sunday, Thursday, Friday, and Saturday at 10: 00 (On) and 14: 00 (Off)
Time Schedule
Time Period 3 Code Function Setting
AP3-17 Period3 StartT 10: 00
AP3-18 Period3 StopT 14: 00
AP3-19 Period3 Day 1000111

The tables above show the parameter values for Time Period 1, Time Period 2, and Time Period 3.
When the parameters are set for the Time Periods 1-3, this indicates the Time Event function turns on
and off on the following days and time.

<Time Period setting Time Chart>

273
Application Groups 890053-00-01

Parameters Setting for Exception Date

There are 8 Exception date modules in the Time Event function. They are used to specify the
operation on particular days (public holidays, etc.). The settings for the start time and the end time
are the same as the settings for the modules and can be set for particular days.

The Exception dates can be set redundantly with the Time periods. If the Time Periods and the
Exception Dates are set redundantly, the inverter operates on the Exception Dates set.

Title Setting Range Description

Except1–8 Start T 00: 00–24: 00 Hour: Minutes (by the minute)
Except1–8 Stop T 00: 00–24: 00 Hour: Minutes
Except1–8 Date 1/1–12/31 Select the particular date (between 1/1 and 12/31)

Time Period Schedule

Every Sunday, Monday, Wednesday, Thursday, and Friday at 06: 00 (On) and 18: 00
(Off)
Time Schedule
Exception Code Function Setting
Date 1
AP3-30 Except1 StartT 06: 00
AP3-31 Except1 StopT 18: 00
AP3-32 Except1 Day 12/25

Every Sunday and Saturday for 24 hours (On)

Time Schedule
Exception
Date 2 Code Function Setting
AP3-33 Except2 StartT 00: 00
AP3-34 Except2 StopT 24: 00
AP3-35 Except2 Day 01/01

Every Sunday, Thursday, Friday, and Saturday at 10: 00 (On) and 14: 00 (Off)

Exception Time Schedule

Date 3 Code Function Setting
AP3-36 Except3 StartT 10: 00
AP3-37 Except3 StopT 14: 00
AP3-38 Except3 Day 01/01

Title Setting Range Remarks

Except1–8 StartT 00: 00–24: 00 Hour: Minutes (by the minute)
Except1–8 Stop T 00: 00–24: 00 Hour: Minutes
Except1–8 Date 1/1–12/31 Select the particular date (between 1/1 and 12/31)

274
 890053-00-01 Application Groups

<The Time Chart for the Exception Day>

Connection settings for Time Period and Time Event

There are 8 Time event modules in the Time Event function. The parameters for T-Events 1–8 are
used to set the connections to each module for the Time Period and the Exception Date. The
parameters for T-Event 1–8 are used to specify the operation on particular days. Each Time event
module can be set for the connections to 4 Time period modules and 8 Exception days. Time
event modules are set as a bit unit in the parameters for Events 1–8. The diagram below shows the
connections between the Time event modules and the time period modules. The Time Event 1 is
connected to Time Period 4. The Time Event 8 is connected to Time Periods 1–4 and the
Exception Dates 2.

275
Application Groups 890053-00-01

Time Event Module Function Settings

The functions to be performed in the Time Event for T-Events 1–8 can be set with the 30 functions listed in
AP3-73~AP3-87. There are 8 Time event modules in the Time Event. The parameters for T-Events 1–8 are
used to set the connections to each module for the Time Period and the Exception Date. The parameters
for T-Events 1–8 are used to specify the operation on particular days.

Example of the Time Event operations

If the Time events are set as the parameters below, the inverter operates as illustrated.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Command
06 Cmd Ref Src 5: Time Event 0–9 -
Source
DRV Frequency
command
07 Freq Ref Src 0: KeyPad 0–11 -
source
Time Period 1
11 Period1 StartT 10: 00 00: 00–24: 00 Min
Start time
Time Period 1
12 Period1 Stop T 20: 00 00: 00–24: 00 Min
End time
Time Period 1
0000000–
13 Day of the Period1 Day 0110000
1111111
week
Time Period 2
14 Period2 StartT 12: 00 00: 00–24: 00 Min
Start time
Time Period 2
15 Period2 Stop T 17: 00 00: 00–24: 00 Min
End time
Time Period 2
0000000–
16 Day of the Period2 Day 00100000
1111111 -
week
Time Event 0 No
70 Time Event En 1: YES
configuration 1 Yes -
Time Event 1
000000000001–
72 connection T-Event1Period 00000000001
111111111111
configuration
0 None
1 Fx
AP3
2 Rx
3 Speed-L
4 Speed-M
5 Speed-H
Time Event 1 7 Xcel-L
73 T-Event1Define 1: Fx
functions 8 Xcel-M
9 Xcel-H
10 Xcel Stop
11 Run Enable
12 2nd Source
13 Exchange
14 Analog Hold

276
 890053-00-01 Application Groups

15 I-Term Clear
16 PID
Openloop
17 PID Gain 2
18 PID Ref Change
19 2nd Motor
20 Timer In
21 dis Aux Ref
24 Pre Heat
27 Sleep Wake
Chg
28 PID Step Ref L
29 PID Step Ref M
30 PID Step Ref H
74 Time Event 2 T-Event1Period 00000000010 000000000001–
connection 111111111111
75 Time Event 2 T-Event2Define 3: Speed-L Refer to AP3-73 on pg.
functions 272

The parameters in the table above shows the frequency command sources for the keypad and the
operation command sources for the Time Event.

The following is an example of an inverter operation utilizing the Time Period modules 1 and 2
with Time Events 1 and 2:

Time Period 1 is used to operate the inverter on Mondays and Tuesdays from 10AM to 8PM. Time
Period 2 is used to operate the inverter on Tuesday from 12PM to 5PM.

Time Event 1 triggers forward operations based on the frequency input on the keypad and
continues the operation for the time set at Time Period module 1. Time Event 2 operates the
inverter at Speed-L for the time set at Time Period module 2.

On Mondays, the inverter operates in the forward direction based on the frequency input on the
keypad from 10AM to 8PM (Time Event 1). On Tuesdays, it operates again in the forward direction
based on the keypad frequency input from 10AM to 12PM (Time Event 1), and then operates at
Speed-L from 12PM to 5PM (Time Event 2). When the operation assigned by Time Event 2 is
complete, the inverter resumes its Time Event 1 operation (the inverter operates based on the
keypad frequency input from 5PM to 8PM).

277
Application Groups 890053-00-01

<An example of Time Event>

Note
When repetitive frequency commands related to the frequency input command occur while
the Time Event function is performing, Time Event performs its function in the order of the
frequency command sources set in Freq Ref Src for DRV-07 (followed by Jog operation and
multi-step acc/dec).

If a fault occurs during a time event operation, the inverter stops the operation and stays in a trip
state. When this happens, there are two options to resume the stopped operation:
• Set PRT-08 (RST Restart) to ‘YES’ to allow the inverter to automatically restart after the
trip condition is reset.
• Refresh the setting at AP3-70 (Time Event En). Set AP3-70 to ‘Yes’ from ‘No’. If one of the
input terminals (IN-65–71 Px Define) is assigned to it, turn the switch off then turn it back
on to resume the time event operation.

278
 890053-00-01 Application Groups

279
LCD Display Modes 890053-00-01

9 LCD Display Modes

9.1 LCD Display Mode Selection
The keypad enables movement among display modes and within each mode. It enables users to
select, configure and view parameters and functions in each mode.

The following figure illustrates how to move through the display modes when you press the MODE
button on the keypad. Continue to press the MODE button until you get to the desired mode.

User & Macro mode (U&M) is only displayed when a User Group has been created or a Macro group
has been selected. Also, the Trip mode (TRP) is not displayed unless the inverter has an existing
fault or a fault history.

Monitor Mode (MON) - Ref section 9.2

Parameter Mode (PAR) - Ref section 9.3
User & Macro Mode (U&M) - Ref section 9.4
Trip Mode (TRP) - Ref section 9.5
Configure Mode (CNF) - Ref section 9.6

280
 890053-00-01 LCD Display Modes

9.2 Monitor Mode (MON)

The inverter boots up in the Monitor Mode (MON). The inverter’s operating conditions can be
monitored at the Monitor Mode display. A maximum of four items can be displayed.

Monitor Mode Setting Details

Code Description
Select items to display in the Monitor Mode display. Monitor mode is the first displayed
mode when the inverter is powered on. A total of four items can be displayed
simultaneously. These include the AnyTime parameter (upper right corner of LCD) and
Monitor Lines -1, -2 and -3. Parameters CNF-20~23 all share the same setting options
as listed in the table below.

Setting Function
0 Frequency During stop, displays the set frequency. During operation,
displays the actual output frequency (Hz).
1 Speed During stop, displays the set speed (rpm). During
operation, displays the actual operating speed (rpm).

2 Output Current Displays output current.

3 Output Voltage Displays output voltage.
4 Output Power Displays output power.
CNF-20 5 WHour Displays inverter power consumption.
AnyTime Para Counter
6 DCLink Displays DC bus voltage within the inverter.
CNF-21 Voltage
Monitor Line-1 7 DI Status Displays input terminal status of the terminal block.
Starting from the right, displays P7–P1.
CNF-22
8 DO Status Displays output terminal status of the terminal block.
Monitor Line-2
Starting from the right,
Q1, Relay5 <- Relay1.
CNF-23
9 V1 Monitor[V] Displays the input voltage value at terminal V1 (V).
Monitor Line-3

10 V1 Monitor[%] Displays input voltage terminal V1 value as a percentage.

If -10V, 0V, +10V is measured,
-100%, 0%, 100% will be displayed.
13 V2 Monitor[V] Displays input voltage terminal V2 value (V).
14 V2 Monitor[%] Displays input voltage terminal V2 value as a percentage.

15 I2 Monitor [mA] Displays input current terminal I2 value (A).

16 I2 Monitor[%] Displays input current terminal I2 value as a percentage.
17 PID Output Displays output of PID controller.
18 PID Ref Value Displays reference value of PID controller.
19 PID Fdb Value Displays feedback value of PID controller.
20 Now Date Displays the set Date (AP3-01).
21 Now Time Displays the set Time (AP3-02).
22 Now Weekday Displays the set day (AP3-03).
CNF-24
Selecting 1(Yes) initializes CNF-20–23.
Mon Mode Init

281
LCD Display Modes 890053-00-01

Inverter power consumption

Values are calculated using voltage and current. Power is calculated every second and the
results are accumulated. Setting CNF-62 (WH Count Reset) value to 1(Yes) will reset
cumulated energy consumption. Power consumption is displayed as shown below:
Less than 1,000 kW: Units are in kW, displayed in 999.9 kW format.
1–99 MW: Units are in MW, displayed in 99.99 MWh format.
100–999 MW: Units are in MW, displayed in 999.9 MWh format.
More than 1,000 MW: Units are in MW, displayed in 9,999 MWh format and can be displayed
up to 65,535 MW. (Values exceeding 65,535MW will reset the value to 0, and units will return
to kW. It will be displayed in 999.9 kW format).

9.3 Parameter Mode (PAR)

The PAR Mode includes all the inverter parameter groups. Refer to section 4.2 Parameter Lists on
page 81 for all groups included in the Parameter Mode.

9.4 User & Macro Mode (U&M)

Create a unique list of most often used parameters (USR Group). Register user-selected parameters
from the existing parameter groups.

9.4.1 User Group Setting Details

When completed, use the MODE button to move to the U&M Mode and access the USR Group
parameters.

Code Description
At CNF-42, Select 1 (UserGrp SelKey) from the multi-function key
setting options. When parameters are selected and registered in the
USR group, the U&M Mode will appear and display user group (USR
Grp) item on the LCD Keypad.

Follow the procedures below to register parameters to a user group.

No Procedure
1 Set CNF-42 to 1 (UserGrp SelKey). A icon will be
displayed at the top of the LCD display.
2 In the parameter mode (PAR Mode), move to the parameter
you need to register and press the [MULTI] key. For example,
CNF-42 if the [MULTI] key is pressed in the frequency reference in
Multi-Key Sel DRV 01 (Cmd Frequency), the screen below will be displayed.

❶ Group name and parameter number of the parameter

❷ Name of the parameter

282
 890053-00-01 LCD Display Modes

Code Description
❸ Parameter number to be used in the user group. Pressing
the [PROG/ENT] button on the parameter number (40
Parameter) will register DRV-01 as parameter 40 in the user
group.
❹ Existing parameter registered as the user group parameter
40
❺ Setting range of the user group parameter. Entering 0
cancels the settings.
3 Set a parameter number (❸) to use to register the parameter
in the user group. Select parameter number and press
[PROG/ENT]button.
4 Changing the value in ❸ will also change the value in ❹. If
no parameter is registered, ‘Empty Code’ will be displayed.
Entering 0 cancels the settings.
5 The registered parameters are listed in the user group in U&M
mode. You can register one parameter multiple times if
necessary. For example, a parameter can be registered as
parameter 2, parameter 11, and more in the user group.

Follow the procedures below to delete individual parameters from the

user group.

No. Settings
1 Set CNF- 42 to ‘1’ (UserGrp SelKey). A icon will be
displayed at the top of the LCD display.
2 In the USR group in U&M mode, move the cursor to the
parameter that is to be deleted.
3 Press the [MULTI]button.
4 Move to YES on the deletion confirmation screen, and press
the [PROG/ENT]button.
5 Deletion completed.
CNF-45
Set to 1(Yes) to delete all registered parameters in the user group.
UserGrp AllDel

283
LCD Display Modes 890053-00-01

9.4.2 Macro Groups (MC1, MC2, MC3)

The Macro selection function pulls together various parameters into one group that are common to specific
applications and load type. The H2 Series inverter includes 3 macros (Pump, Fan and Constant Torque).
Groups MC1, MC2, or MC3 are displayed in the U&M Mode when the user selects the macro with
parameter CNF-43. Parameters within each macro can be modified. Macro groups cannot be added by the
user.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
0 Basic
1 Pump
CNF 43 Macro selection Macro Select 0-3 -
2 Fan
3 Constant Torque

Accessing Macro Group - When a macro is selected at CNF-43 or during the Quick Start menu, press the
Mode button to move to the U&M Mode that will now be displayed along with the MCx group of parameters.
This MCx group will show all parameters in the specific macro group. The default settings within the MCx
group are shown in the following tables and can be modified.

The parameters within each macro are tied to the same parameters in the various parameter groups.
Changes made to macro group parameters are reflected in the other groups. Selecting '0 (Basic)' initializes
all parameter changes to default settings.

9.4.2.1 MC1 - Pump Macro

The Pump Macro includes typical pump related parameter settings. Some of these are a ‘Squared’ V/Hz
pattern for variable torque loads along with “S-Curve” acceleration and deceleration. A minimum frequency
of 30 Hz. is set along with reverse run prevention. The PID group parameters are included but are not
enabled. If enabled with MC1-43 (PID-01), the default control is normal PID and units are in PSI. The
shaded settings are different from the standard inverter parameter settings.

MC1 ---> Pump

Related
Macro
Code Parameter Parameter Name Setting Value/Units
Group
Code
MC1 01 PRT 04 Load Duty 0 Normal
02 DRV 03 Acc Time 20.0 sec
03 DRV 04 Dec Time 30.0 sec
04 DRV 06 Cmd Source 1 Fx/Rx-1
05 DRV 07 Freq Ref Src 5 I2
06 DRV 09 Control Mode 0 V/Hz.
07 DRV 11 Jog Frequency 10.00 Hz
08 DRV 12 Jog Acc Time 20.0 sec
09 DRV 13 Jog Dec Time 30.0 sec
10 DRV 15 Torque Boost 0 Manual
11 DRV 16 Fwd Boost 2.0 %
12 DRV 17 Rev Boost 2.0 %
13 MOT 01 Motor Capacity Defaults
14 MOT 02 Base Freq 60.00 Hz

284
 890053-00-01 LCD Display Modes

15 MOT 03 Pole Number 4 Pole

16 MOT 04 Rated Slip Defaults
17 MOT 05 Rated Curr Defaults
18 MOT 06 NoloadCu rr Defaults
19 BAS 07 V/F Pattern 1 Square
20 BAS 69 Xcel Change Fr 0.00 Hz
21 BAS 70 Acc Time-1 20.0 sec
22 BAS 71 Dec Time-1 20.0 sec
23 ADV 01 Acc Pattern 1 S-Curve
24 ADV 02 Dec Pattern 1 S-Curve
25 ADV 03 Acc S Start 40 %
26 ADV 04 Acc S End 40 %
27 ADV 05 Dec S Start 40 %
28 ADV 06 Dec S End 40 %
29 ADV 07 Start Mode 0 Accel
30 ADV 08 Stop Mode 0 Decel
31 ADV 09 Run Prevent 2 Reverse
32 ADV 24 Freq Limit 1 Yes
33 ADV 25 Freq Limit Lo 30.0 Hz
34 ADV 26 Freq Limit Hi 60.0 Hz
35 ADV 50 E-Save Mode 2 Auto
36 ADV 51 Energy Save 20 %
37 ADV 52 E-Save Det T 10 sec
38 ADV 64 Fan Control 2 Temperature
39 IN 65 P1 Define 1 Fx
40 OUT 31 Relay 1 23 Trip
41 OUT 32 Relay 2 14 Run
42 OUT 33 Relay 3 0 None
43 PID 01 PID Sel 0 No
44 PID 03 PID Output Monitor %
45 PID 04 PID Ref Value Monitor PSI
46 PID 05 PID Fdb Value Monitor PSI
47 PID 10 PID Ref 1 Src 0 Keypad
48 PID 11 PID Ref 1 Set 50.00 PSI
49 PID 20 PIDFdb Source 0 V1
50 PID 25 PID P-Gain 1 50.00 %
51 PID 26 PID I-Time 1 10.0 sec
52 PID 30 PID Limit Hi 100.00 %
53 PID 31 PID Limit Lo 0.00 %
54 PID 36 PID Out Inv 0 No
55 PID 50 PID Unit Sel 2 PSI
56 PID 51 PID Unit Scale 2 x1
57 AP1 20 Soft Fill Sel 0 No
58 AP1 21 Pre-PID Freq 30.00 Hz
59 AP1 22 Pre-PID Delay 60.0 sec
60 PRT 12 Lost Cmd Mode 1 Free-Run
61 PRT 13 Lost Cmd Time 1.0 sec
62 PRT 14 Lost Preset F 0.00 Hz
63 PRT 15 AI Lost Level 0 Half of x1

285
LCD Display Modes 890053-00-01

64 PRT 20 OL Trip Select 1 Free-Run

65 PRT 21 OL Trip Level 120 %
66 PRT 22 OL Trip Time 60.0 sec
67 PRT 31 No Motor Trip 1 Free-Run
68 PRT 32 No Motor Level 5 %
69 PRT 33 No Motor Time 3.0 sec
70 PRT 40 ETH Trip Sel 1 Free-Run
71 PRT 41 Motor Cooling 0 Self-cool
72 PRT 42 ETH 1 min 115 %
73 PRT 43 ETH Cont 100 %
74 PRT 60 PipeBroken Sel 2 Free-Run
75 PRT 61 PipeBroken Lev 90.0 %
76 PRT 62 PipeBroken DT 10.0 sec

9.4.2.2 MC2 Fan Macro

The Fan Macro includes typical fan related parameter settings. Some of these are a ‘Squared’ V/Hz
pattern for variable torque loads along with “S-Curve” acceleration and deceleration. A minimal DC Start is
set along with reverse run prevention. The shaded settings are different from the standard inverter
parameter settings.

MC2 ---> Fan

Related
Macro
Code Parameter Parameter Name Setting Value/Units
Group
Code
MC2 01 PRT 04 Load Duty 0 Normal
02 DRV 03 Acc Time 20.0 sec
03 DRV 04 Dec Time 30.0 sec
04 DRV 06 Cmd Source 1 Fx/Rx-1
05 DRV 07 Freq Ref Src 5 I2
06 DRV 09 Control Mode 0 V/Hz.
07 DRV 15 Torque Boost 0 Manual
08 DRV 16 Fwd Boost 2.0 %
09 DRV 17 Rev Boost 2.0 %
10 MOT 01 Motor Capacity Defaults
11 MOT 02 Base Freq 60.00 Hz
12 MOT 03 Pole Number 4 Pole
13 MOT 04 Rated Slip Defaults
14 MOT 05 Rated Curr Defaults
15 MOT 06 NoloadCu rr Defaults
16 BAS 07 V/F Pattern 1 Square
17 ADV 01 Acc Pattern 1 S-Curve
18 ADV 02 Dec Pattern 1 S-Curve
19 ADV 03 Acc S Start 40 %
20 ADV 04 Acc S End 40 %
21 ADV 05 Dec S Start 40 %
22 ADV 06 Dec S End 40 %
23 ADV 07 Start Mode 1 DC-Start

286
 890053-00-01 LCD Display Modes

MC2 ---> Fan

24 ADV 08 Stop Mode 0 Dec

25 ADV 09 Run Prevent 2 Reverse
26 ADV 12 DC-Start Time 3.00 sec
27 ADV 13 DC Inj Level 25 %
28 ADV 24 Freq Limit 0 No
29 ADV 25 Freq Limit Lo 0.50 Hz
30 ADV 26 Freq Limit Hi 60.0 Hz
31 ADV 50 E-Save Mode 0 None
32 ADV 51 Energy Save 0 %
33 ADV 52 E-Save Det T 20.0 sec
34 ADV 64 Fan Control 2 Temperature
35 IN 65 P1 Define 1 Fx
36 OUT 31 Relay 1 23 Trip
37 OUT 32 Relay 2 14 Run
38 OUT 33 Relay 3 0 None
39 PRT 12 Lost Cmd Mode 1 Free-Run
40 PRT 13 Lost Cmd Time 1.0 sec
41 PRT 14 Lost Preset F 0.00 Hz
42 PRT 15 AI Lost Level 0 Half of x1
43 PRT 20 OL Trip Select 1 Free-Run
44 PRT 21 OL Trip Level 120 %
45 PRT 22 OL Trip Time 60.0 sec
46 PRT 31 No Motor Trip 1 Free-Run
47 PRT 32 No Motor Level 5 %
48 PRT 33 No Motor Time 3.0 sec
49 PRT 40 ETH Trip Sel 1 Free-Run
50 PRT 41 Motor Cooling 0 Self-cool
51 PRT 42 ETH 1 min 115 %
52 PRT 43 ETH Cont 100 %

287
LCD Display Modes 890053-00-01

9.4.2.3 MC3 Constant Torque Macro

The constant torque macro sets the V/Hz curve (MC3-16) to Linear for constant torque loads along
with an overload setting (MC3-36) of 150% / 1 min. It also sets Load Duty parameter MC3-01 (PRT-
04) to Heavy Load. Note that this will change motor group (MOT) parameters to one setting lower than
the inverter rating. Ex: if a 100 HP inverter is used, MOT-01, Motor Capacity will be set to 75 HP. An
Auto Torque Boost (MC3-07) is also set. All other parameters are at default settings. The shaded
settings are different from the standard inverter parameter settings.

MC3 ---> Constant Torque

Related
Macro
Code Parameter Parameter Name Setting Value/Units
Group
Code
MC3 01 PRT 04 Load Duty 1 Heavy
02 DRV 03 Acc Time 20.0 sec
03 DRV 04 Dec Time 30.0 sec
04 DRV 06 Cmd Source 1 Fx/Rx-1
05 DRV 07 Freq Ref Src 0 Keypad
06 DRV 09 Control Mode 0 V/Hz.
07 DRV 15 Torque Boost 2 Auto-2
08 DRV 16 Fwd Boost 2.0 %
09 DRV 17 Rev Boost 2.0 %
10 MOT 01 Motor Capacity Defaults
11 MOT 02 Base Freq 60.00 Hz
12 MOT 03 Pole Number 4 Pole
13 MOT 04 Rated Slip Defaults
14 MOT 05 Rated Curr Defaults
15 MOT 06 NoloadCu rr Defaults
16 BAS 07 V/F Pattern 0 Linear
17 ADV 01 Acc Pattern 0 Linear
18 ADV 02 Dec Pattern 0 Linear
19 ADV 07 Start Mode 0 Accel
20 ADV 08 Stop Mode 0 Decel
21 ADV 09 Run Prevent 0 None
22 ADV 24 Freq Limit 0 No
23 ADV 25 Freq Limit Lo 0.50 Hz
24 ADV 26 Freq Limit Hi 60.0 Hz
25 ADV 64 Fan Control 0 During Run
26 IN 65 P1 Define 1 Fx
27 IN 66 P2 Define 2 Rx
28 OUT 31 Relay 1 23 Trip
29 OUT 32 Relay 2 14 Run
30 OUT 33 Relay 3 0 None
31 PRT 12 Lost Cmd Mode 0 None
32 PRT 13 Lost Cmd Time 1.0 sec
33 PRT 14 Lost Preset F 0.00 Hz
34 PRT 15 AI Lost Level 0 Half of x1
35 PRT 20 OL Trip Select 1 Free-Run

288
 890053-00-01 LCD Display Modes

MC3 ---> Constant Torque

36 PRT 21 OL Trip Level 150 %

37 PRT 22 OL Trip Time 60.0 sec
38 PRT 31 No Motor Trip 1 Free-Run
39 PRT 32 No Motor Level 5 %
40 PRT 33 No Motor Time 3.0 sec
41 PRT 40 ETH Trip Sel 1 Free-Run
42 PRT 41 Motor Cooling 0 Self-cool
43 PRT 42 ETH 1 min 115 %
44 PRT 43 ETH Cont 100 %

9.5 Trip Mode (TRP)

If the inverter trips, it immediately displays the fault in the TRP Mode. The “OFF” button on the LCD
keypad will be flashing.
• Use the down arrow button to view the inverter data at the time of the fault.
• Faults can be reset by pressing the “OFF” button or from an external reset.
• Use the MODE button to move out of the TRP Mode to other display Modes.
• Trip mode (TRP) is not displayed unless the inverter has an existing fault or a fault history.

The inverter stores last 5 Faults. Last-1 is most recent.

Use Down Arrow button to view Fault data (TRP Codes 01 ~ 10). See table below.
Use Right Arrow button to move through the faults (1 -> 5).
Use Left Arrow button to move through the faults (5 -> 1).

Setting
Code Name LCD Display Initial Value
Range
00 Trip type display Trip Name(x) - -
01 Frequency reference at trip Output Freq - -
02 Output current at trip Output Current - -
Acceleration/ Deceleration - -
03 Inverter State
state at trip
04 DC section state DCLink Voltage - -
05 NTC temperature Temperature - -
06 Input terminal state DI State - 0000 0000
07 Output terminal state DO State - 00 0000
81 Trip time after Power on Trip On Time - 00/00/00 00: 00
91 Trip time after operation start
Trip Run Time - 00/00/00 00: 00
Trip Delete? 0 No
10 Delete Fault History
Yes? Or No? 1 Yes
[1] Information is displayed in [YY/MM/DD Hr: Min (0/00/00 00:00)] format.

0 No
CNF-44 Clear Fault History Erase All Trip
1 Yes
CNF-44 can be used to clear the Fault History.

289
LCD Display Modes 890053-00-01

9.5.1 Fault and Warning List

The following is a list of faults and warnings that can occur while using the H2 inverter. For details,
refer to 11, Troubleshooting on page 342.

Category LCD Display Details

Over Current1 Over current trip
Over Voltage Over voltage trip
External Trip External signal, trip at digital input
NTC Open Temperature sensor fault
Over Current2 ARM short current fault
Option Trip-x* Option fault*
Over Heat Over heat fault
Out Phase Open Output open-phase fault
In Phase Open Input open-phase fault
Ground Trip Ground fault
Fan Trip Fan fault
E-Thermal Motor overheat fault
TB Trip Terminal Board Connection fault
IO Board Trip IO Board connection fault
No Motor Trip No motor fault
Latch type Low Voltage2 Low voltage fault during operation
ParaWrite Trip Write parameter fault
Pipe Broken Pipe Break fault
Damper Err Damper Err trip
Major fault Over Load Motor overload fault
Under Load Motor under load fault
PC Repeat Err Pump clean repeat fault
Level Detect Level detect trip
Inverter OLT Inverter overheating trip
Thermal Trip Motor overheating trip
Lost Keypad Lost keypad trip
Broken Belt Broken belt trip
Pipe Broken Pipe Broken trip
Ext Brake External brake fault
Fuse Open Fuse Open trip (315~500kW)
InFAN Trip Inner Fan trip (110~500kW)
Low Voltage Low voltage fault
BX Emergency stop fault
Level type Lost Command Command loss trip
Lost Keypad Lost keypad trip
EEP Err External memory error
ADC Off Set Analog input error
Hardware Watch Dog-1
damage (Fatal) Watch Dog-2 CPU Watch Dog fault

290
 890053-00-01 LCD Display Modes

Buttons (HAND, OFF and AUTO) on

KPD H.O.A Lock
LCD - locked out with DRV-05
Lost Command Command loss fault warning
Over Load Overload warning
Under Load Under load warning
Inv Over Load Inverter overload warning
Fan Warning Fan operation warning
DB Warn %ED Braking resistor braking rate warning
Low Battery Low battery warning
Connection or communication issue
Check Line Plz
between the LCD and the Control PCB.
Warning
Fire Mode Fire mode warning
Pipe Broken Pipe Break warning
Level Detect Level detect warning
Lost Keypad Lost keypad warning
Load Tune Load curve tuning warning
Broken Belt Broken belt warning
ParaWrite Fail Smart copier error warning
Rs Tune Err Auto tuning warning(Rs)
Lsig Tune Err Auto tuning warning(Lsigma)
InFAN Warning Inner Fan Warning 150~800HP
(110~500kW)

Note
• Latch type fault: The inverter requires a manual reset.
• Level type fault: The inverter will clear the fault when the condition is corrected or initialized.
• Fatal type fault: There is no way to reset the fault other than cycling power to the inverter.

291
LCD Display Modes 890053-00-01

9.6 Configure Mode (CNF)

The configure mode includes parameters to view and program various inverter features including:
• View inverter and keypad software versions
• Set 4 parameters to view in the Monitor menu
• Initialize parameter settings
• Assign MULTI button function
• Assign User Group parameters
• Select macro
• Read, Write and Save parameters
• Set time and date

9.6.1 Configure Mode Parameter List

Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Initial Value Ref.

00 Jump code Jump Code 1–99 42 p.74
01 Keypad language selection Language Sel 0 English 0 English -
02 LCD contrast adjustment LCD Contrast Adjust LCD contrast - -
10 Inverter S/W version Inv S/W Ver 201.00 - -
11 Keypad S/W version Keypad S/W Ver 201.01 - -
12 Keypad title version KPD Title Ver 3.01 - -
20 Display item Anytime Para 0 Frequency 0 Frequency p.281
21 Monitor mode display 1 Monitor Line-1 1 Speed 0 Frequency p.281
22 Monitor mode display 2 Monitor Line-2 2 Output Current 2 OutputCurrent p.281
23 Monitor mode display 3 Monitor Line-3 3 Output Voltage 3 OutputVoltage p.281
4 Output Power
5 Whour Counter
6 DCLink Voltage
7 DI Status
8 DO Staus
9 V1 Monitor(V)
10 V1 Monitor(%)
13 V2 Monitor(V)
14 V2 Monitor(%)
15 I2 Monitor(mA)
16 I2 Monitor(%)
17 PID Output
18 PID Ref Value
19 PID Fdb Value
20 Now Date
21 Now Time
22 Now Weekday
0 No
24 Monitor mode initialize Mon Mode Init 0 No p.281
1 Yes
0 None
30 Option slot 1 type display Option-1 Type 0 None -
5 LonWorks
31 Option slot 2 type display Not Used - - -
32 Option slot 3 type display Not Used - - -
0 No
1 All Grp
2 DRV Grp
3 MOT Grp
4 BAS Grp
5 ADV Grp
40 Parameter initialization Parameter Init 6 CON Grp 0 No p.294
7 IN Grp
8 OUT Grp
9 COM Grp
10 PID Grp
11 AP1 Grp
12 AP2 Grp

292
 890053-00-01 LCD Display Modes

Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Initial Value Ref.

13 AP3 Grp
14 PRT Grp
15 APO Grp
0 View All
41 Display changed Parameter Changed Para 0 View All p.295
1 View Changed
0 None
42 Multi key item Multi-Key Sel 1 UserGrp SelKey 0 None p.295
2 Now Time
0 Basic
1 Pump
43 Macro function item Macro Select 0 Basic p.295
2 Fan
3 Constant Torque
0 No
44 Trip history deletion Erase All Trip 0 No p.296
1 Yes
0 No
45 User registration code deletion UserGrp AllDel 0 No p.282
1 Yes
0 No
46 Read parameters Parameter Read 0 No p.296
1 Yes
0 No p.296
47 Write parameters Parameter Write 0 No
1 Yes
0 No p.296
48 Save parameters Parameter Save 0 No
1 Yes
50 Hide parameter mode View Lock Set 0-9999 Unlocked p.297
Password protection (hide
51 View Lock Pw 0-9999 Password p.297
parameters)
52 Lock parameter edit Key Lock Set 0–9999 Unlocked p.297
Password for locking parameter
53 Key Lock Pw 0–9999 Password p.297
edit
60 Additional title update Add Title Up Not Used -
Simple/Basic parameter setting 0 No
61 Run QuickStart 1 Yes p.298
enabled on Power Up 1 Yes
62 Power consumption initialization WHCount Reset Not Used
Accumulated
70 On-time 00000DAY 00:00 - p.298
inverter motion time
Accumulated inverter operation
71 Run-time 00000DAY 00:00 - p.298
time
Accumulated inverter operation 0 No p.298
72 Time Reset 0 No
time initialization 1 Yes
731 Real Time Real Time Date-Format View1
Accumulated cooling fan
74 Fan Time 00000DAY 00:00 - p.298
operation time
Reset of accumulated cooling fan 0 No
75 Fan Time Rst 0 No p.298
operation time 1 Yes
[1] The date format can be changed according to the AP3-06 settings.

293
LCD Display Modes 890053-00-01

9.6.2 CNF-20 Monitor Mode (MON)

On the LCD keypad, the inverter’s operating conditions can be monitored at the Monitor Mode
display. A maximum of four items can be selected and monitored simultaneously. The items are
selected in the Configure (CNF) Group. Monitoring mode displays three different items (CNF-21,
22 and 23) and one additional item (CNF-20) in the status bar at the top of the screen. Refer to
section 9.2 Monitor Mode (MON) on page 281 for details on configuring Monitor Mode items.

Setting Uni
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting
Range t
Display item condition
20 Anytime Para 0 Frequency - -
display window
21 Monitor mode display 1 Monitor Line-1 0 Frequency - Hz
CNF
22 Monitor mode display 2 Monitor Line-2 2 Output Current - A
23 Monitor mode display 3 Monitor Line-3 3 Output Voltage - V
24 Monitor mode initialize Mon Mode Init 0 No - -

9.6.3 CNF-40 Parameter Initialization

The parameters changed by the user can be initialized to the factory default settings. Initialize
parameters in all groups by selecting 1 (All Grp) or select specific groups . The parameters cannot
be initialized if the inverter is operating or during a fault condition.

Parameter Setting
Group Code Name LCD Display Unit
Setting Range
Parameter
CNF 40 Parameter Init 0 No 0–14
initialization

Parameter Initialization Setting Details

Code Description

LCD
Setting Function
Display
0 No No -
Initialize all data. Select 1(All
Grp) and press [PROG/ENT]
1 Initialize all groups All Grp button to start initialization. On
completion, 0 (No) will be
displayed.
2 Initialize DRV group DRV Grp
CNF-40 3 Initialize MOT group
Parameter Init 4 Initialize BAS group BAS Grp
5 Initialize ADV group ADV Grp Initialize data by groups.
6 Initialize CON group CON Grp Select initialize group and
7 Initialize IN group IN Grp press [PROG/ENT] button to
8 Initialize OUT group OUT Grp start initialization. On
9 Initialize COM group COM Grp completion, 0 (No) will be
10 Initialize PID group PID Grp displayed.
11 Initialize AP1 group AP1 Grp
12 Initialize AP2 group AP2 Grp
13 Initialize AP3 group AP3 Grp

294
 890053-00-01 LCD Display Modes

Code Description
14 Initialize PRT group PRT Grp
15 Initialize APO group APO Grp

9.6.4 CNF-41 Changed Parameter Display

This feature displays all the parameters that are different from the factory defaults. Use this feature
to track changed parameters.

Parameter Setting
Group Code Name LCD Display Unit
Setting Range
Changed parameter Changed
CNF 41 0 View All - -
display Para

Changed Parameter Display Setting Details

Code Description
Setting Function
CNF-41
0 View All Display all parameters
Changed Para
1 View Changed Display changed parameters only

9.6.5 CNF-42 User & Macro Mode (U&M)

Create a unique list of most often used parameters (USR Group). Register user-selected
parameters from the existing parameter groups. The user group can carry up to a maximum of 64
parameter registrations. Refer to section 9.4 User & Macro Mode (U&M) on page 282 for User
Group setting details.

Parameter Setting
Group Code Name LCD Display Unit
Setting Range
Multi-function button UserGrp
42 Multi Key Sel 1 - -
settings SelKey
CNF
Delete all user registered UserGrp
45 0 No - -
parameters AllDel

9.6.6 CNF-43 Macro Selection

The H2 Series inverter includes 3 macro groups of parameters (Pump, Fan and Constant Torque). A
Macro group contains various parameters in one group that are common to specific applications.
Refer to 9.4.2 Macro Groups (MC1, MC2, MC3) on page 284 for more details.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
0 Basic
1 Pump
CNF 43 Macro selection Macro Select 0-3 -
2 Fan
3 Constant Torque

295
LCD Display Modes 890053-00-01

9.6.7 CNF-44 Delete Trip History

The fault history can be deleted by programming CNF-44 to ‘1, Yes’. Refer to 9.5 Trip Mode (TRP) on
page 289 for more details.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
0 No
CNF 44 Trip History deletion Erase All Tript 0-1 -
1 Yes

9.6.8 CNF-46 Read, Write, and Save Parameters

Use read, write and save function parameters of the inverter to copy parameters from the inverter
to the LCD keypad or from the LCD keypad to the inverter.

Parameter Setting
Group Code Name LCD Display Unit
Setting Range
Parameter
46 Parameter read 1 Yes - -
Read
Parameter
CNF 47 Parameter write 1 Yes - -
Write
Parameter
48 Parameter save 1 Yes - -
Save

Read, Write, and Save Parameter Setting Details

Code Description
Copies saved parameters from the inverter to the LCD keypad. Saved
CNF-46
parameters already on the LCD keypad will be deleted and replaced
Parameter Read
with copied parameters.
Copies saved parameters from the LCD keypad to the inverter. Saved
parameters on the inverter will be deleted and replaced with copied
CNF-47
parameters. If an error occurs during parameter writing, previous
Parameter Write
saved data will be used. If there is no saved data on the LCD Keypad,
‘EEP Rom Empty’ message will be displayed.
Parameters changes are saved to RAM. The changed values will be
CNF-48
lost if the power is cycled. Select 1 (Yes) at CNF-48 to save the
Parameter Save
changed parameters to inverter memory.

296
 890053-00-01 LCD Display Modes

9.6.9 CNF-50 Parameter View Lock

Use parameter view lock to hide parameters after registering and entering a user password.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Parameter view
50 View Lock Set Unlocked 0–9999
lock
CNF
Parameter view
51 View Lock Pw Password 0–9999
lock password

Parameter View Lock Setting Details

Code Description
Register a password to be used with CNF-50. Follow the steps below
to register a password.
No Procedure
1 Pressing [PROG/ENT] button on CNF-51 will show the
previous password input window. If registration is made for the
CNF-51 first time, enter 0. It is the factory default.
View Lock Pw 2 If a password had been set, enter the saved password.
3 If the entered password matches the saved password, a new
window prompting the user to enter a new password will be
displayed (the process will not progress to the next stage until
the user enters a valid password).
4 Register a new password.
5 After registration, parameter CNF-51 will be displayed.
To enable parameter view lock, enter a registered password. [Locked]
CNF-50 sign will be displayed on the screen to indicate that parameter view
View Lock Set lock is enabled. To disable parameter view lock, re-enter the password.
The [locked] sign will disappear.

9.6.10 CNF-52 Parameter Lock

Use parameter lock to prevent unauthorized changes to parameter settings. To enable parameter
lock, register a user password first in CNF-53. To lock and unlock parameter changes, enter the
password in CNF-52.

Parameter Setting
Group Code Name LCD Display Unit
Setting Range
52 Parameter lock Key Lock Set Unlocked 0–9999 -
CNF Parameter lock
53 Key Lock PW Password 0–9999 -
password

297
LCD Display Modes 890053-00-01

Parameter Lock Setting Details

Code Description
Register a password to prohibit parameter modifications. Follow the
procedures below to register a password.
No Procedures
1 Press the [PROG/ENT] button on CNF-53 parameter and the
saved password input window will be displayed. If password
registration is being made for the first time, enter 0. It is the
CNF-53 factory default.
Key Lock Pw 2 If a saved password has been set, enter the saved password.
3 If the entered password matches the saved password, then a
new window to enter a new password will be displayed. (The
process will not move to next stage until the user enters a valid
password).
4 Register a new password.
5 After registration, Parameter CNF-53 will be displayed.
To enable parameter lock, enter the registered password. [Locked] sign
will be displayed on the screen to indicate that parameter lock is
CNF-52 enabled. Once enabled, pressing the [PROG/ENT] button on function
Key Lock Set parameter CNF-52 will not allow the display edit mode to run. To enable
parameter modification, re-enter the password. The [Locked] sign will
disappear.

If parameter view lock and parameter lock functions are enabled, no inverter operation
related function changes can be made. It is very important that you memorize the
password.

9.6.11 CNF-61 Quick Start Menu

The inverter will display the Quick Start menu on every power up. Parameter CNF-61 (Run Quick
Start?) is set to “Yes” by default. To disable the Quick Start menu at power up, set CNF-61 to “No”.
Refer to section 2.6 Run Quick Start on page 52 for more details.

Parameter Setting
Group Code Name LCD Display
Setting Range
Run 0 No
CNF 61 Quick Start menu setting 0-1
QuickStart? 1 Yes

9.6.12 CNF-70 Operation Time Monitor

Monitors inverter and fan operation time.

Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
Accumulated Inverter
70 On-time 0/00/00 00:00 - min
Power On time
Accumulated inverter
71 Run-time 0/00/00 00:00 - min
CNF operation time
Initialize inverter
72 operation Time Reset 0 No 0–1 -
accumulated time

298
 890053-00-01 LCD Display Modes

Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
Cooling fan operation
74 Fan time 0/00/00 00:00 - min
accumulated time
Initialize Cooling fan Fan Time
75 0 No 0–1 -
operation time Reset

Operation Time Monitor Setting Details

Code Description
CNF-70 Displays accumulated power supply time (On-time). Information is displayed in
On-time [YY/MM/DD Hr: Min (0/00/00 00: 00)] format.
CNF-71 Displays accumulated time (Run-time) of voltage output by run command input.
Run-time Information is displayed in [YY/MM/DD Hr: Min (0/00/00 00: 00)] format.
Setting 1(Yes) will delete power supply accumulated time (On-time) and
CNF-72
operation accumulated time (Run-time) and is displayed as 0/00/00 00:00
Time Reset
format.
CNF-74 Displays accumulated time of inverter cooling fan operation. Information will be
Fan time displayed in [YY/MM/DD Hr: Min (0/00/00 00: 00)] format.
CNF-75 Setting 1(Yes) will delete cooling fan operation accumulated time (Fan-time)
Fan Time Reset and will display it in 0/00/00 00:00 format.

299
Communications 890053-00-01

10 RS-485 Communication Features

This section explains how to control the inverter with a PLC or a computer over a long distance
using the RS-485 communication features. Connect the communication cables and set the
communication parameters in the inverter. Refer to the communication protocols and parameters
to configure and use the RS-485 communication features.

10.1 Communication Standards

Following the RS-485 communication standards, H2 products exchange data with a PLC and
computer. The RS-485 communication standards support the Multi-drop Link System and offer an
interface that is strongly resistant to noise. Please refer to the following table for details about the
communication standards.

Item Standard
Communication method/ RS-485/Bus type, Multi-drop Link System
Transmission type
Inverter type name H2
Number of connected Maximum of 16 inverters / Maximum1,200 m (recommended
inverters/ Transmission distance: within 700 m)
distance
Recommended cable size 0.75 mm², (18 AWG), Shielded Type Twisted-Pair (STP) Wire
Installation type Dedicated terminals (S+/S-/SG) on the control terminal block
Power supply Supplied by the inverter - isolated power source from the
inverter’s internal circuit
Communication speed 1,200/2,400/4800/9,600/19,200/38,400/57,600/115,200 bps
BACNET: 9600/19200/38400/76800 bps
Control procedure Asynchronous communications system
Communication system Half duplex system
Character system Modbus-RTU: Binary
Stop bit length 1-bit/2-bit
Frame error check 2 bytes
Parity check None/Even/Odd

300
 890053-00-01 Communications

10.2 Communication System Configuration

In an RS-485 communication system, the PLC or computer is the master device and the inverter
is the slave device. When using a computer as the master, the RS-232/RS-485 converter must be
integrated with the computer, so that it can communicate with the inverter. Specifications and
performance of converters may vary depending on the manufacturer, but the basic functions are
identical. Please refer to the converter manufacturer’s user manual for details about features and
specifications.

Connect the wires and configure the communication parameters on the inverter by referring to the
following illustration of the communication system configuration.

10.2.1 Communication Line Connection

Make sure that the inverter is turned off completely, and then connect the RS-485 communication
line to the S+/S-/SG terminals of the terminal block. The maximum number of inverters you can
connect is 16. For communication lines, use shielded twisted pair (STP) cables.

The maximum length of the communication line is 1,200 meters, but it is recommended to use no
more than 700 meters of communication line to ensure stable communication.

Please use a repeater to enhance the communication speed when using a communication line
longer than 1,200 meters or when using a large number of devices. A repeater is effective when
smooth communication is not available due to noise interference.

When wiring the communication line, make sure that the SG (ground) terminals on the PLC and
inverter are connected. SG terminals prevent communication errors due to electronic noise
interference.

301
Communications 890053-00-01

10.2.2 Setting Communication Parameters

Before proceeding with setting communication configurations, make sure that the communication
lines are connected properly. Turn on the inverter and set the communication parameters.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Built-in communication
01
inverter ID
Int485 St ID 1 1–MaxComID7 -

0 Modbus-RTU
Built-in communication
02 Int485 Proto 0 ModBus-RTU 4 BACnet -
protocol
5 Metass-N2
COM Built-in communication Int485
03 3 9600 bps 0–8 -
speed BaudR
Built-in communication
04 Int485 Mode 0 D8/PN/S1 0–3 -
frame setting
Transmission delay after
05 Resp Delay 5 0–1000 msec
reception
7
*If COM-02 is set to ‘0’ (Modbus RTU), MaxComID is ‘250’. If set to ‘4’ (BACnet), MaxComID is ‘127’.

10.2.2.1.1 Communication Parameters Setting Details

Code Description
COM-01
Sets the inverter station ID between 1 and MaxComID.
Int485 St ID
Select one of the three built-in protocols: Modbus-RTU, BACnet or
Metasys-N2.
Setting Function
COM-02
0 Modbus-RTU Modbus-RTU compatible protocol
Int485 Proto
4 BACnet BAC net protocol
5 Metasys-N2 Metasys-N2 protocol
Set a communication setting speed up to 115,200 bps.
The maximum setting range changes depending on the protocol.
Setting Communication Speed
0 1200 bps
1 2400 bps
2 4800 bps
COM-03 3 9600 bps
Int485 BaudR 4 19200 bps
5 38400 bps
6 56 Kbps (57,600 bps)
7 76.8 Kbps (76,800 bps)
8 115.2 Kbps (115,200 bps)
BACnet: If the COM-02 Int485 Proto setting is BACnet, the available
communication speed settings are 9600 bps, 19200 bps, 76.8 kbps.
302
 890053-00-01 Communications

Code Description
Metasys-N2: If the COM-02 Int485 Proto setting is Metasys-N2, the
communication speed is fixed to 9600 bps and COM-03 Int485 BaudR
is not shown.
Set a communication configuration. Set the data length, parity check
method, and the number of stop bits.
Setting Function
0 D8/PN/S1 8-bit data / no parity check / 1 stop bit
1 D8/PN/S2 8-bit data / no parity check / 2 stop bits
COM-04
2 D8/PE/S1 8-bit data / even parity / 1 stop bit
Int485 Mode
3 D8/PO/S1 8-bit data / odd parity / 1 stop bit
If the COM-02 Int485 Proto setting is Metasys-N2, the communication
frame composition is fixed to D8/PN/S1 and COM- 04 Int485 Mode is
not visible.
Set the response time for the slave (inverter) to react to the request
from the master. Response time is used in a system where the slave
device response is too fast for the master device to process. Set this
parameter to an appropriate value for smooth master-slave
communication.

COM-05
Resp Delay

303
Communications 890053-00-01

10.2.3 Setting Operation Command and Frequency

After setting the DRV-06 Cmd Source parameter to ‘3 (Int 485)’ and DRV-07 Freq Ref Src
parameter to ‘6 (Int 485)’, you can set common area parameters for the operation command and
frequency via communication. For details about the operation command, refer to 5.1.35.1.3.4 RS-
485 Communication as a Command Source
105 and for details about the frequency command, refer to 5.1.4.6 Setting a Frequency Reference
via RS-485 Communication on page 115.

To select the built-in RS485 communication as the source of command, set DRV-07 to ‘6 (Int485)’
on the keypad. Then, set common area parameters for the operation command and frequency via
communication.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Command
06 Cmd Source 3 Int 485 0–5 -
source
DRV
Frequency
07 Freq Ref Src 6 Int 485 0–11 -
setting method

10.2.4 Command Loss Protective Operation

Configure the command loss decision standards and protective operations run when a
communication problem lasts for a specified period of time.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Speed command loss Lost Cmd
12 0 None 0–5 -
operation mode Mode
Time to determine Lost Cmd
13 6 1.0 0.1–120.0 sec
PRT speed command loss Time
Operation frequency 0.00, Low
14 at speed command Lost Preset F 0.00 Freq–High Hz.
loss Freq

Command Loss Protective Operation Setting Details

Code Description
Select the operation when a communication error has occurred and has
lasted longer than the time set at PRT-13.
Setting Function
PRT-12 The speed command immediately becomes the
0 None
Lost Cmd Mode operation frequency without any protection function.
PRT-13 The inverter blocks output. The motor performs in
1 Free-Run
Lost Cmd Time free-run condition.
2 Dec The motor decelerates and then stops.
Operates continuously with the speed of the inputted
3 Hold Input
speed command until the loss of the speed command.
304
 890053-00-01 Communications

The inverter calculates the average input value for 10

seconds before the loss of the speed command and
uses it as the speed reference.
Operates continuously with the operate frequency
before the speed loss. The inverter calculates the
4 Hold Output average output value for 10 seconds before the loss of
the speed command and uses it as the speed
reference.
The inverter operates at the frequency set at PRT-14
5 Lost Preset
(Lost Preset F).
PRT-14 0.00, Low Freq–
Set the frequency for continued operation.
Lost Preset F High Freq

305
Communications 890053-00-01

10.3 Modbus-RTU Communication

10.3.1 Setting Virtual Multi-function Inputs

Multi-function inputs can be controlled using a communication address (0h0385). Set parameters
COM-70–77 to the functions to operate, and then set the BIT relevant to the function to 1 at 0h0385
to operate it. Virtual multi-function inputs operate independently from IN-65–71 digital multi-
function inputs and cannot be set redundantly. Virtual multi-function input can be monitored using
COM-82 (Virt Dl Status). Before you configure the virtual multi-function inputs, set the DRV
parameter according to the command source.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Communication Virtual DI x
70–77 0 None 0–55 -
multi-function input x (x: 1–8)
COM Communication
Virt DI 0000 0000 –
82 multi-function input bit
Status 1111 1111
monitoring

Example: When sending an Fx command by controlling virtual multi-function input in the common
area via Int485, set COM-70 to ‘FX’ and set address 0h0385 to ‘0h0001’.

10.3.2 Saving Parameters Defined by Communication

If you turn off the inverter after setting the common area parameters or keypad parameters via
communication and operate the inverter, the changes are lost and the values changed via
communication revert to the previous setting values when you turn on the inverter.

Set CNF-48 to ‘1 (Yes)’ to allow all the changes over communication to be saved, so that the
inverter retains all the existing values even after the power has been turned off.

Setting address 0h03E0 to ‘0’ and then setting it again to ‘1’ via communication allows the existing
parameter settings to be saved. However, setting address 0h03E0 to ‘1’ and then setting it to ‘0’
does not carry out the same function.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
0 No
CNF 48 Save parameters Parameter Save 0 No -
1 Yes

306
 890053-00-01 Communications

10.3.3 Total Memory Map for Communication

Communication Area Memory Map Details

Communication common
0h0000–0h00FF H2 Series compatible area
compatible area
Areas registered at COM-31–38 and COM-
0h0100–0h01FF
51–58
Parameter registration type 0h0200–0h023F Area registered for User Group
area
0h0240–0h027F Area registered for Macro Group
0h0280–0h02FF Reserved
0h0300–0h037F Inverter monitoring area
0h0380–0h03DF Inverter control area
0h03E0–0h03FF Inverter memory control area
0h0400–0h0FFF Reserved
0h1100 DRV Group
0h1200 MOT Group
0h1300 BAS Group
0h1400 ADV Group
Communication common 0h1500 CON Group
area 0h1600 IN Group
0h1700 OUT Group
0h1800 COM Group
0h1900 PID Group
0h1A00 AP1 Group
0h1B00 AP2 Group
0h1C00 AP3 Group
0h1D00 PRT Group
0h1E00 APO Group

307
Communications 890053-00-01

10.3.4 Parameter Group for Data Transmission

By defining a parameter group for data transmission, the communication addresses registered in
the communication function group (COM) can be used in communication. Parameter group for
data transmission may be defined to transmit multiple parameters at once, into the communication
frame.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Output Para Status-x
31–38 communication - 0000–FFFF Hex
address x (x: 1–8)
COM
Input Para Control-x
51–58 communication - 0000–FFFF Hex
address x (x: 1–8)

Currently Registered CM Group Parameter

Address Parameter Assigned content by bit

Status Parameter-1– Parameter communication code value registered at
0h0100–0h0107
Status Parameter-8 COM-31–38 (Read-only)
Control Parameter-1– Parameter communication code value registered at
0h0110–0h0117
Control Parameter-8 COM-51–58 (Read/Write access)

Note
When registering control parameters, register the operation speed (0h0005, 0h0380, 0h0381)
and operation command (0h0006, 0h0382) parameters at the end of a parameter control
frame. For example, when the parameter control frame has 5 parameter control items (Para
Control - x), register the operation speed at Para Control-4 and the operation command to
Para Control-5.

10.3.5 Parameter Group for User/Macro Group

By defining user/macro parameter groups, communication can be carried out using the user defined
group (USR Grp) and macro group (MCx Grp) addresses that are registered at the U&M mode.
Parameter groups can only be defined when using the keypad.

Currently Registered User Group Parameters

Address Parameter Assigned Content by Bit

0h0200 User Grp. Code 1 Parameter value registered at U&M > USR ➔ 1 (Read/Write)
0h0201 User Grp. Code 2 Parameter value registered at U&M > USR ➔ 2 (Read/Write)
. . .
. . .
0h023E User Grp. Code 63 Parameter value registered at U&M > USR ➔ 63 (Read/Write)
0h023F User Grp. Code 64 Parameter value registered at U&M > USR ➔ 64 (Read/Write)

308
 890053-00-01 Communications

Currently Registered Macro Group Parameters

Address Parameter Assigned Content by Bit

0h0240 Macro Grp. Code 1 Parameter value registered at U&M > MC ➔1
0h0241 Macro Grp. Code 2 Parameter value registered at U&M > MC ➔1
. . .
. . .
. . .
0h02A2 Macro Grp. Code 98 Parameter value registered at U&M > MC ➔ 98
0h02A3 Macro Grp. Code 99 Parameter value registered at U&M > MC ➔ 99

10.3.6 Modbus-RTU Protocol

10.3.6.1 Function Code and Protocol

In the following section, station ID is the value set at COM-01 (Int485 St ID), and the starting
address is the communication address (starting address size is in bytes). For more information
about communication addresses, refer to 10.3.7 Compatible Common Area Parameter on page
312.

Reading up to 8 Consecutive Inverter Parameters Based on the Set Number - Read Holding
Register (Func. Code: 0x03) and Read Input Register (Func. Code: 0x04)

Read Holding Registers (Func. Code: 0x03) and Read Input Registers (Func. Code: 0x04) are
processed identically by the inverter.

Codes Description
Starting address 1 of the inverter parameters (common area or keypad) to
Start Addr.
be read from.
No. of Reg. Number of the inverter parameters (common area or keypad) to be read.
Byte number of normal response values based on the number of registers
Byte Count
(No. of Reg).
Except. Code Error codes

10.3.6.1.1 Request

Slave Station Start Addr Start Addr No of Reg No of Reg

Func. Code CRC (Lo) CRC (Hi)
ID (Hi) (Lo) (Hi) (Lo)
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte

10.3.6.1.2 Normal Response

Slave Station Func. Byte Value Value

Value (Hi) … Value (Hi) CRC (Lo) CRC (Hi)
ID Code Count (Lo) (Lo)
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte … 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte
* The number of Value(Hi) and Value(Lo) is changed by the [Request No. of Reg].
309
Communications 890053-00-01

10.3.6.1.3 Error Response

Slave Station ID Func. Code Except. Code CRC(Lo) CRC(Hi)

1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte
* Func. Code of the error response is [Request Func. Code] + 0x80.

10.3.6.1.4 Writing One Inverter Parameter Value (Func. Code: 0x06)

Codes Description
Addr. Address 1 of the inverter parameter (common area or keypad) to be written to.
Reg. Value The inverter parameter (common area or keypad) value to write with.
Except. Code Error codes

10.3.6.1.5 Request

Slave Station
Func.Code Addr (Hi) Addr(Lo) Value(Hi) Value(Lo) CRC(Lo) CRC(Hi)
ID
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte

10.3.6.1.6 Normal Response

Slave Station
Func.Code Addr (Hi) Addr(Lo) Value(Hi) Value(Lo) CRC(Lo) CRC(Hi)
ID
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte

10.3.6.1.7 Error Response

Slave Station ID Func. Code Except. Code CRC(Lo) CRC (Hi)

1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte
* Func. Code of the error response is [Request Func. Code] + 0x80.

10.3.6.1.8 Writing Multiple Registers (Func. Code: 0x10)

Codes Description
Starting address 1 of the inverter parameters (common area or keypad) to
Start Addr.
be written to.
No. of Reg. Number of the inverter parameters (common area or keypad) to be written.
Reg. Value The inverter parameter (common area or keypad) values to write with.
Except. Code Error codes

310
 890053-00-01 Communications

10.3.6.1.9 Request

Start Start No of No of Reg. Reg.

Slave Func. Byte CRC CRC
Addr. Addr. Reg. Reg. Value Value
Station ID Code Count (Lo) (Hi)
(Hi) (Lo) (Hi) (Lo) (Hi) (Lo)
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte

10.3.6.1.10 Normal Response

Slave Station Start Addr Start Addr No of Reg. No of Reg.

Func. Code CRC (Lo) CRC (Hi)
ID (Hi) (Lo) (Hi) (Lo)
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte

10.3.6.1.11 Error Response

Slave Station ID Func. Code Except. Code CRC(Lo) CRC(Hi)

1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte
* Func. Code of the error response is [Request Func. Code] + 0x80.

10.3.6.2 Exception Code

Code
01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION
02 ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS
03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE
06 SLAVE DEVICE BUSY
14 WRITE PROTECTION

Example of Modbus-RTU Communication In Use

When the Acc time (Communication address 0x1103) is changed to 5.0 sec and the Dec time
(Communication address 0x1104) is changed to 10.0 sec.

Frame Transmission from Master to Slave

Starting # of Byte
Item Station ID Function Data 1 Data 2 CRC
Address Register Count
Hex 0x01 0x10 0x1102 0x0002 0x04 0x0032 0x0064 0x1202
COM- 01 Preset Start 50 100
Desc. Int485 St Multiple Address-1 - - (Acc time (Dec time -
ID Register (0x1103-1) 5.0 sec) 10.0 sec)

Frame Transmission from Slave to Master

Item Station Id Function Starting Address # of Register CRC
Hex 0x01 0x10 0x1102 0x0002 0xE534
Preset Multiple Starting Address-1
Desc. COM-01 Int485 St ID
Register (0x1103-1) - -

311
Communications 890053-00-01

10.3.7 Compatible Common Area Parameter

The following are common area parameters compatible with Benshaw inverters (SG, GX, GM2,
S/SW Series and H2 Series (Addresses 0h0000-0h0011 are for compatible common area
parameters. Addresses 0h0012-0h001B are for the H2 Series inverter parameters.)

Comm.
Parameter Scale Unit R/W Assigned Content by Bit
Address
Inverter
0h0000 - - R F: H2
model
0: 0.75kW, 1: 1.5kW, 2: 2.2kW
3: 3.7kW 4: 5.5kW, 5: 7.5kW
6: 11kW, 7: 15kW, 8: 18.5kW
9: 22kW, 10: 30kW, 11: 37kW
Inverter
0h0001 - - R 12: 45kW ,13: 55kW, 14: 75kW,
capacity
15: 90kW, 16: 110kW, 17: 132kW
18: 160kW, 19: 185kW, 20: 220kW
21: 250kW, 22: 315kW, 23: 355kW
24: 400kW, 25: 500kW
0: 240 V product
Inverter input
0h0002 - - R 1: 480 V product
voltage
2: 575 V product
(Example) 0h0064: Version 1.00
0h0003 Version - - R
(Example) 0h0065: Version 1.01
0h0004 Reserved - - R -
Command
0h0005 0.01 Hz R/W -
frequency
B15 Reserved
0: Keypad Freq,
2-8: Terminal block
multi-step speed
17: Up, 18: Down
19: STEADY
B14-B9 22: V1, 24: V2, 25: I2,
26: PULSE
Operation 27: Built-in 485
0h0006 command - - R 28: Communication
(option) option
30: JOG, 31: PID
0: Keypad
1: Fx/Rx-1
B8-B6 2: Fx/Rx-2
3: Built-in 485
4: Communication option
5: Time Event

312
 890053-00-01 Communications

Comm.
Parameter Scale Unit R/W Assigned Content by Bit
Address
B5 Reserved
16:Emergency stop
8: W: Trip initialization
R/W (0➔1), R: Trip status
B4-B0
4: Reverse operation (R)
2: Forward operation (F)
0: Stop (S)
Acceleration
0h0007 0.1 sec R/W -
time
Deceleration
0h0008 0.1 sec R/W -
time
Output
0h0009 0.1 A R -
current
Output
0h000A 0.01 Hz R -
frequency
Output
0h000B 1 V R -
voltage
DC link
0h000C 1 V R -
voltage
Output
0h000D 0.1 kW R -
power
B15 0: HAND, 1: AUTO
1: Frequency command
source by communication
B14 (built-in, option)
1: Operation command
source by communication
B13 (built-in, option)
Reverse operation
B12
command
B11 Forward operation command
B10 Reserved
B9 Jog mode
Operation B8 Drive stopping
0h000E - - R
status B7 DC Braking
B6 Speed reached
B5 Decelerating
B4 Accelerating
Fault - operates according to
B3
OUT-30 setting
Operating in reverse
B2
direction
Operating in forward
B1
direction

B0 Stopped

313
Communications 890053-00-01

Comm.
Parameter Scale Unit R/W Assigned Content by Bit
Address
B15 Reserved
B14 Reserved
B13 Reserved
B12 Reserved
B11 Reserved
B10 H/W-Diag
B9 Reserved
Fault B8 Reserved
0h000F - - R
information B7 Reserved
B6 Reserved
B5 Reserved
B4 Reserved
B3 Level Type trip
B2 Reserved
B1 Reserved
B0 Latch Type trip
B15
Reserved
–B7
B6 P7
Input B5 P6
0h0010 terminal - - R B4 P5
information B3 P4
B2 P3
B1 P2
B0 P1
B15 Reserved
B14 Reserved
B13 Reserved
B12 Reserved
B11 Reserved
B10 Reserved
B9 Reserved
Output B8 Reserved
0h0011 terminal - - R
information B7 Reserved
B6 Reserved
B5 Q1
B4 Relay 5
B3 Relay 4
B2 Relay 3
B1 Relay 2
B0 Relay 1
0h0012 V1 0.1 % R V1 input voltage
0h0013 Thermal 0.1 % R Input Thermal

314
 890053-00-01 Communications

Comm.
Parameter Scale Unit R/W Assigned Content by Bit
Address
0h0014 V2 0.1 % R V2 input voltage
0h0015 I2 0.1 % R I2 input Current
Motor
Displays existing motor rotation
0h0016 rotation 1 Rpm R
speed
speed
0h0017–
Reserved - - - -
0h0019
Select
0h001A - - R 0: Hz unit, 1: rpm unit
Hz/rpm
Display the
number of
Display the number of poles for the
0h001B poles for the - - R
selected motor
selected
motor

315
Communications 890053-00-01

10.3.8 H2 Expansion Common Area Parameter

10.3.8.1 Monitoring Area Parameter (Read Only)

Comm.
Parameter Scale Unit Assigned content by bit
Address
0h0300 Inverter model - - H2: 000Fh
0.75 kW: 4008h, 1.5 kW: 4015h
2.2 kW: 4022h, 3.7 kW: 4037h
5.5 kW: 4055h, 7.5 kW: 4075h
11 kW: 40B0h, 15 kW: 40F0h
18.5 kW: 4125h, 22 kW: 4160h
30 kW: 41E0h, 37 kW: 4250h,
0h0301 Inverter capacity - - 45 kW: 42D0h,55 kW: 4370h,
75 kW: 44B0h,90 kW: 45A0h,
110 kW: 46E0h, 132 kW: 4840h
160 kW: 4A00h, 185kW: 4B90h,
220 kW: 4DC0h, 250 kW: 4FA0h,
315 kW: 53B0h, 355 kW: 5630h,
400 kW: 5900h, 500 kW: 5F40h
Inverter input 200 V 3-phase forced cooling: 0231h
voltage/power 400 V 3-phase forced cooling: 0431h
0h0302 (Single phase, 3- - - 600 V 3-phase forced cooling: 0831h
phase), cooling
method
(ex) 0h0064: Version 1.00
0h0303 Inverter S/W version - -
0h0065: Version 1.01
0h0304 Reserved - - -
B15
B14 0:Normal State
4:Warning occurred
B13 8:Fault occurred
B12
B11–
-
B8
1: Speed searching
B7
2: Accelerating
Inverter Operation 3: Operating at constant
0h0305 - -
State B6 rate
4: Decelerating
5: Decelerating to stop
B5
6: H/W OCS
7: S/W OCS
B4
8: Dwell operating
B3 0: Stopped
1: Operating in forward
B2 direction

316
 890053-00-01 Communications

Comm.
Parameter Scale Unit Assigned content by bit
Address
B1 2: Operating in reverse
direction
B0 3: DC operating

B15
B14
B13 Operation command
B12 source 0: Keypad
1: Communication option
B11 3: Built-in RS 485
B10 4: Terminal block
B9
B8
Inverter operation
0h0306 frequency command - - B7 Frequency command
source source 0: Keypad speed
B6 1: Keypad torque
B5 2-4: Up/Down operation
B4 speed
5: V1, 7: V2, 8: I2
B3 9: Pulse
B2 0: Built-in RS 485
11: Communication option
B1 13: Jog
14: PID
B0 25-31: Multi-step speed
frequency
0h0307 Keypad S/W version - - (Ex.) 0h0064: Version 1.00
0h0308 Keypad title version - - (Ex.) 0h0065: Version 1.01
(Ex.) 0h0064: Version 1.00 (Ex.)
0h0309 IO Board Version - -
0h0065: Version 1.01
0h030A–
Reserved - - -
0h30F
0h0310 Output current 0.1 A -
0h0311 Output frequency 0.01 Hz -
0h0312 Output rpm 0 Rpm -
0h0313 Reserved - - -
0h0314 Output voltage 1 V -
0h0315 DC Link voltage 1 V -
0h0316 Output power 0.1 kW -
0h0317 Reserved - - -
0h0318 PID reference 0.1 % PID reference value
0h0319 PID feedback 0.1 % PID feedback value
Display the number
Displays the number of poles for the
0h031A of poles for the 1st - -
first motor
motor

317
Communications 890053-00-01

Comm.
Parameter Scale Unit Assigned content by bit
Address
Display the number
Displays the number of poles for the
0h031B of poles for the 2nd - -
2nd motor
motor
Display the number
Displays the number of poles for the
0h031C of poles for the - -
selected motor
selected motor
0h031D Select Hz/rpm - - 0: Hz, 1: rpm
0h031E
Reserved - - -
–0h031F

B15– B7 Reserved

B6 P7 (I/O board)
B5 P6 (I/O board)
Digital input
0h0320 B4 P5 (I/O board)
information
B3 P4 (I/O board)
B2 P3 (I/O board)
B1 P2 (I/O board)
B0 P1 (I/O board)
B15– B9 Reserved

B8-B6 Reserved
B5 Q1
Digital output
0h0321 - - B4 Relay 5
information
B3 Relay 4
B2 Relay 3
B1 Relay 2
B0 Relay 1

B15– B8 Reserved
B7 Virtual DI 8 (COM-77)
B6 Virtual DI 7 (COM-76)
Virtual digital input B5 Virtual DI 6 (COM-75)
0h0322 - -
information B4 Virtual DI 5 (COM-74)
B3 Virtual DI 4 (COM-73)
B2 Virtual DI 3 (COM-72)
B1 Virtual DI 2 (COM-71)
B0 Virtual DI 1 (COM-70)
Display the selected
0h0323 - - 0: 1st motor/1: 2nd motor
motor
Analog input V1 or Thermal (I/O
0h0324 AI1 0.01 %
board)
0h0325 AI2 0.01 % Analog input V2 or I2 (I/O board)
0h0326 Reserved - - Reserved
0h0327 Reserved - - Reserved
318
 890053-00-01 Communications

Comm.
Parameter Scale Unit Assigned content by bit
Address
0h0328 AO1 0.01 % Analog output 1 (I/O board)
0h0329 AO2 0.01 % Analog output 2 (I/O board)
0h032A Reserved 0.01 % Reserved
0h032B Reserved 0.01 % Reserved
0h032C Reserved - - Reserved
0h032D Reserved - - Reserved
Consumption
0h032E 0.1 kWh Consumption energy (kWh)
energy (kWh)
Consumption
0h032F 1 MWh Consumption energy (MWh)
energy (MWh)

B15 PC Repeat Err

B14 Over Heat Trip

B13 Reserved
B12 External Trip
B11 Damper Err
B10 Pipe Break
B9 NTC Open
Latch type trip
0h0330 - - B8 Reserved
information - 1
B7 Reserved
B6 In Phase Open
B5 Out Phase Open
B4 Low Voltage2
B3 E-Thermal
B2 Inverter OLT
B1 Under Load
B0 Over Load
B15 Reserved
B14 MMC Interlock
B13 Reserved
B12 Reserved
B11 Reserved
B10 Option Trip-1
B9 No Motor Trip
Latch type trip
0h0331 - - B8 Reserved
information - 2
B7 IO Board Trip
B6 Broken Belt
B5 ParaWrite Trip
B4 TB Trip
B3 Fan Trip
B2 Thermal Trip
B1 Level Detect
319
Communications 890053-00-01

Comm.
Parameter Scale Unit Assigned content by bit
Address
B0 Reserved
B15– B4 Reserved

Level type trip B3 Lost Keypad

0h0332 - -
information B2 Lost Command
B1 Low Voltage
B0 BX
B15– B3 Reserved
H/W Diagnosis Trip B2 Watchdog-1 error
0h0333 - -
information
B1 EEP Err
B0 ADC Offset
B15 Broken Belt
B14 Low Battery
B13 Load Tune
B12 Fan Exchange
B11 CAP. Warning
B10 Level Detect
B9 Reserved
Warning B8 Lost Keypad
0h0334 - -
information-1
B7 Pipe Break
B6 Fire Mode
B5 DB Warn %ED
B4 Fan Warning
B3 Lost Command
B2 Inv Over Load
B1 Under Load
B0 Over Load
B15 Reserved
– Reserved
B4 Reserved
Latch type trip
0h0335 - - B3 Overcurrent2 Trip
information -3
B2 Overvoltage Trip
B1 Overcurrent1 Trip
B0 Ground Fault
B15 Reserved
~ Reserved
Warning B3 KPD H.O.A Lock
0h0336 - -
information-2 B2 Lsig Tune Err
B1 Rs Tune Err
B0 ParaWrite Fail

320
 890053-00-01 Communications

Comm.
Parameter Scale Unit Assigned content by bit
Address
0h0337–
Reserved - - Reserved
0h0339
0h033A Proc PID Output 0.01 % Process PID Output (%)
Proc PID UnitScale Proc Proc Unit Scaled Process PID reference
0h033B
Ref Unit Unit value
Proc PID UnitScale Proc Proc Unit Scaled Process PID feedback
0h033C
Fdb Unit Unit value
Total number of days the inverter has
0h0340 On Time date 0 Day
been powered on
Total number of minutes excluding the
0h0341 On Time Minute 0 Min
total number of On Time days
Total number of days the inverter has
0h0342 Run Time date 0 Day
driven the motor
Total number of minutes excluding the
0h0343 Run Time minute 0 Min
total number of Run Time days
Total number of days the heat sink fan
0h0344 Fan Time date 0 Day
has been running
Total number of minutes excluding the
0h0345 Fan Time minute 0 Min
total number of Fan Time days
0h0346–
Reserved - - Reserved
0h0348
0h0349 Reserved - - -
0h034A Option 1 - - 0: None, 5: LonWorks
0h034B Reserved - - Reserved
0h034C Reserved Reserved
0h034D–
Reserved - - Reserved
0h034F
0h0355 Reserved - - Reserved
0h0356 Reserved - - Reserved
B15
Reserved
–B2
0h035C Application Status - -
B1 Fire Mode
B0 Pump Clean
0h035D Inv Temperature 0 °C Heatsink Temperature
0h035E Power Factor 0.1 - Output power factor

321
Communications 890053-00-01

10.3.8.2 Control Area Parameter (Read/Write)

Comm. Parameter Scale Unit Assigned Content by Bit

Address
0h0380 Frequency command 0.01 Hz Command frequency setting
0h0381 RPM command 1 Rpm Command rpm setting
B15–B4 Reserved
B3 0 ➔ 1: Free-run stop
B2 0 ➔ 1: Trip initialization
B1 0: Reverse command, 1:
Forward command
0h0382 Operation command - - B0 0: Stop command, 1: Run
command
Example: Forward operation command
0003h,
Reverse operation command 0001h
0h0383 Acceleration time 0.1 sec Acceleration time setting
0h0384 Deceleration time 0.1 sec Deceleration time setting
B15–B8 Reserved
B7 Virtual DI 8 (COM-77)
B6 Virtual DI 7 (COM-76)
B5 Virtual DI 6 (COM-75)
B4 Virtual DI 5 (COM-74)
0h0385 Virtual digital input - - B3 Virtual DI 4 (COM-73)
control (0: Off, 1: On)
B2 Virtual DI 3 (COM-72)
B1 Virtual DI 2 (COM-71)
B0 Virtual DI 1 (COM-70)
B15–B9 Reserved
B8-B6 Extended IO PCB
B5 Q1
0h0386 Digital output control B4 Relay 5
(0: Off, 1: On) - -
B3 Relay 4
B2 Relay 3
B1 Relay 2
B0 Relay 1
0h0387 KPD H.O.A Lock 1 - 0 : Locked, 1 : During Run, 2 : Unlocked
0h0388 PID reference 0.1 % Process PID reference
0h0389 PID feedback value 0.1 % Process PID feedback
0h038A Motor rated current 0.1 A -
0h038B Motor rated voltage 1 V -
0h038C– Reserved - - Reserved
0h038D
0h038E Proc PID Unit Proc Proc Unit Scale Process PID reference
322
 890053-00-01 Communications

Comm. Parameter Scale Unit Assigned Content by Bit

Address
Reference Unit Unit
0h038F Proc PID Unit Proc Proc Unit Scale Process PID feedback
Feedback Unit Unit
0h0390– Reserved - - Reserved
0h0399
Set the CNF-20 value (refer to 9.6.2 on page
0h039A Anytime Para - - 294)
Set the CNF-21 value (refer to 9.6.2 on page
0h039B Monitor Line-1 - - 294)
Set the CNF-22 value (refer to 9.6.2 on page
0h039C Monitor Line-2 - - 294)
Set the CNF-23 value (refer to 9.6.2 on page
0h039D Monitor Line-3 - - 294)
0h039E– Reserved Reserved
0h039F
0h03A0 PID Ref 1 Aux Value 0.1 % PID Aux 1 reference
0h03A1 PID Ref 2 Aux Value 0.1 % PID Aux 2 reference
0h03A2 PID Feedback Aux 0.1 % PID Aux feedback
Value
0h03A3 Proc PID Aux 1 Unit Proc Proc Unit Scale PID Aux 1 reference
Scale Unit Unit
0h03A4 Proc PID Aux 2 Unit Proc Proc Unit Scale PID Aux 2 reference
Scale Unit Unit
0h03A5 Proc PID Fdb Aux Unit Proc Proc Unit Scale PID Aux feedback
Scale Unit Unit
0h03A6– Reserved Reserved
0h03AF
0h03B0 Reserved Reserved
0h03B1 Reserved Reserved
0h03B2 Reserved Reserved
0h03B3 Reserved Reserved
0h03B4 Reserved Reserved
0h03B5 Reserved Reserved
0h03B6 Reserved Reserved
0h03B7 Reserved Reserved
0h03B8 Reserved Reserved

323
Communications 890053-00-01

Note
A frequency set via communication using the common area frequency address (0h0380,
0h0005) is not saved even when used with the parameter save function. To save a changed
frequency to use after a power cycle, follow these steps:
1 Set DRV-07 to ‘Keypad-1’ and select a target frequency.
2 Set the frequency via communication into the parameter area frequency address
(0h1101).
3 Perform the parameter save (0h03E0: '1') before turning off the power. After the
power cycle, the frequency set before turning off the power is displayed.

324
 890053-00-01 Communications

10.3.8.3 Inverter Memory Control Area Parameter (Read and Write)

Comm. Change
Address Parameter Scale Unit During Function
Running
0h03E0 Save parameters - - X 0: No, 1: Yes
0h03E1 Monitor mode initialization - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
0: No, 11:AP1 Grp
1: All Grp 12: AP2 Grp
2: DRV Grp 13: AP3 Grp
3: MOT Grp 14: PRT Grp
0h03E2 Parameter initialization - - X 4: BAS Grp Setting is
5: ADV Grp prohibited
6: CON Grp during faulted
state.
7: IN Grp
8: OUT Grp
9: COM Grp
10: PID Grp
0h03E3 Display changed - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
0: Basic
1: Compressor
2: Supply Fan
0h03E4 Macro Function Setting - - X 3: Exhaust Fan
4: Cooling Tower
5: Circul. Pump
6: Vacuum Pump
7: Constant Torq
0h03E5 Delete all fault history - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
0h03E6 Delete user-registrated - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
codes
Write: 0–9999
0h03E7 Hide parameter mode 0 Hex O Read: 0: Unlock, 1: Lock
Write: 0–9999
0h03E8 Lock parameter mode 0 Hex O Read: 0: Unlock, 1: Lock
0h03E9 Easy start on (easy - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
parameter setup mode)
0h03EA Initializing power - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
consumption
0h03EB Initialize inverter - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
operation accumulative
time

325
Communications 890053-00-01

0h03EC Initialize cooling fan - - O 0: No, 1:Yes

accumulated operation
time
Note
• When setting parameters in the inverter memory control area, the values are reflected to
the inverter operation and saved. Parameters set in other areas via communication are
reflected to the inverter operation, but are not saved. All set values are cleared following an
inverter power cycle and revert back to its previous values. When setting parameters via
communication, ensure that a parameter save is completed prior to shutting the inverter
down.
• Set parameters very carefully. After setting a parameter to ‘0’ via communication, set it to
another value. If a parameter has been set to a value other than ‘0’ and a non-zero value
is entered again, an error message is returned. The previously-set value can be identified
by reading the parameter when operating the inverter via communication.
• The addresses 0h03E7 and 0h03E8 are parameters for entering the password. When the
password is entered, the condition will change from Lock to Unlock, and vice versa. When
the same parameter value is entered continuously, the parameter is executed just once.
Therefore, if the same value is entered again, change it to another value first and then re-
enter the previous value. For example, if you want to enter 244 twice, enter it in the
following order: 244 ➔ 0 ➔ 244.
• If the communication parameter settings are initialized by setting the address 0h03E2 to [1:
All Grp] or [9: COM Grp], or if any Macro function item is modified by setting the address
0h03E4, all the communication parameter settings are reverted to the factory default. If
this happens, the inverter may not be able to properly receive responses from the upper-
level devices due to the changes in the settings.
• If there is an undefined address in the addresses for reading multiple consecutive data
defined in the common area, the undefined address returns 0xFFFF while all the others
return normal response. If all the consecutive addresses are undefined, one return code is
received from the first undefined address only.
• If there is an undefined address in the addresses for writing into multiple consecutive data
defined in the common area, or if the value that is being written is not a valid one, no error
response about the wring operation is returned. If all the consecutive addresses are
undefined, or if all the date is invalid, one return code is received from the first undefined
address only.

It may take longer to set the parameter values in the inverter memory control area because all
data is saved to the inverter. Be careful as communication may be lost during parameter setup if
parameter setup is continues for an extended period of time.

326
 890053-00-01 Communications

10.4 BACnet Communication

10.4.1 What is BACnet Communication?

BACnet (Building Automation and Control network) is a communication network frequently used in
building automation. BACnet introduces the concept of object-oriented systems, and defines
standardized objects. By exchanging data, this function makes communication possible between
products from different companies. It also standardizes some of the general services carried out by
using these standard objects.

10.4.2 BACnet Communication Standards

Application Items Specification

Interface 5 Pin Pluggable connector
Connection Data transmission RS-485 MS/TP, Half-duplex
Cable Twisted pair (1 pair and shield)
BACnet MS/TP Stated in ANSI/ASHRAE Standards 135-2004
Baud Rate Supports 9600, 19200, 38400, 76800 bps
Communication MAC Address 1–127
Start/Stop bit Start 1 bit, Stop ½ bit
Parity check None/Even/Odd

10.4.3 BACnet Quick Communication Start

Follow the instructions below to configure the BACnet network

1 Set five multi-function input terminals (IN-65–71 PxDefine) to ‘Interlock 1’ – ‘Interlock 5’
respectively, in the correct motor order.
Note
• When auto change mode selection (AP1–55) is set to ‘0 (None)’ or ‘1 (Aux)’, and if 5
motors are operated, including the main motor, the interlock numbers 1,2,3,4,5 refer
to the motors connected to Relay 1,2,3,4,5 (If interlock numbers 1,2,3,4,5 are
connected to Relay 1,2,3,4,5 at the inverter output terminal).
• If auto change mode selection (AP1-55) is set to ‘2 (Main)’, and the main and auxiliary
motors are connected to the inverter output terminal Relay 1,2,3,4, Interlock 1,2,3,4
are the motors connected to Relay 1,2,3,4. Set COM-04 Int485 Mode.

2 Set the Device Object Instances for COM-21 and 22 and define the values. The device object
instances must have unique values.
3 Set COM-01 (Int485 St ID) by entering a value (for BACnet, the Int485 station ID must be set within a
range of 0–127). The station ID value set at COM-01 must be within the value range defined by the
Max Master Property of different Master for MS/TP token passing.
4 Test the network and make sure the BACnet communication is working properly.

327
Communications 890053-00-01

Group Code Name LCD display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
0 12001)
1 24001)
2 48001)
3 9600
03 Communication Baudrate 9600 bps 4 19200
Speed
5 38400
6 56Kbps1)
7 76.8Kbps
8 115.2Kbps1)
0 D8/PN/S1
COM Communication 1 D8/PN/S2
04 Mode Int485 Mode D8/PN/S1
2 D8/PE/S1
3 D8/PO/S1
Maximum
20 number of BAC Max 127 1–127 -
BACnet Masters Master

21 BACnet device BAC Dev Inst1 237 0–4194 -

number 1
22 BACnet device BAC Dev Inst2 0 0–999 -
number 2
23 BACnet device BAC 0 0–32767 -
password PassWord
1) 1200 bps, 2400 bps, 4800 bps, 56Kbps, 115.2Kbps cannot be set in communication speed
setting in case of BACnet communication.

328
 890053-00-01 Communications

10.4.3.1.1 BACnet Parameter Setting Details

Code Description
Refers to MACID setting parameter used in BACnet. All MACIDs of the
COM-01 inverter using BACnet must be set before connecting to BUS. MACID
Int485 ST ID (MAC must have the unique value from the Network to be connected to MACID.
ID) If BACnet is used, the value must be within 0–127.
Communication is not available if the value is not included in the range.
COM-03 Sets the communication speed to use in the network.
Baud Rate
COM-83 Range for Max Master that is the number of devices currently connected
BAC Mas Master to the communication Line is 1–127, and the default value is 127.
BACnet Device Instance is used to identify BACnet Device, and must be set
as the unique value in the BACnet network. It is used efficiently when
finding BACnet Device of other Devices while installing.
COM-84–85 The following formula is used to calculate the Device Instance value:
(COM-84 X 1000) + COM-85
BAC Dev Inst 1–2
Therefore, in the Device Instance value, COM-84 takes the thousands
and higher places (fourth digit and over) and COM-85 takes the hundreds
and lower places (third digit and below). COM-84 and COM-85 have the
ranges of 0–4194 and 0–999 respectively, because Device Instance can
have the value within 0–4,194,302.
Refers to the password used for Warm/Cold Start. COM-86 Password
parameter can be set within 0–32767, and the default value is 0. If the
COM-86 parameter setting range is set to 1–32768, the Password value set at
Note BACnet Master and the value set at COM-86 must be the same to operate
BAC Password
MaxMaster and MAWarm/Cold Start.
If COM-86 Password is set to ‘0’, the password of BACnet Master is
ignored and Warm/Cold Start is operated.
Note
MaxMaster and MACID affect performing Network communication. It is recommended to set
as small value as possible, and to set the continuous value for MACID. If the values are set as
explained above, efficient Token Passing Configuration is possible because each Master tries to
give Token to Device set as its own (MACD+1).

329
Communications 890053-00-01

10.4.4 Protocol Implementation

The following table summarizes the information required to implement a BACnet system. Refer to
each section of the table to implement a BACnet system properly.

Category Items Remarks

I-Am (Answer to Who-Is, when
broadcast or reset after power-up)
I-Have (Answer to Who-Has)
Read Property
Write Property
BACnet Services Device Communication Control Ignores Password in Device
Communication Control
Warm/Cold Starts (Supports Password)
Start Backup, End Backup, Start
Reinitialize Device Restore, End Restore, or Abort Restore
services are NOT available.

BACnet communication card Supported Standards: MS/TP Available

Data Link Layer supports an MS/TP Master Data speed: 9600, 19200, 38400,
Link Layer and 76800 bps
MAC ID/Device Set at COM-01 Int485 ST ID (MAC
Object Instance ID).
configuration The Device Object Instances are
set at COM-21 and COM-22.
MAX Master Set at COM-20 (MAX Master Value).
Property

10.4.5 Object Map

Object Type
Property Device BI BV AI AO MSI MVI
Object Identifier O O O O O O O
Object Name O O O O O O O
Object Type O O O O O O O
System Status O
Vendor Name O
Vendor Identifier O
Model Name O

330
 890053-00-01 Communications

Object Type
Property Device BI BV AI AO MSI MVI
Firmware Revision O
Appl Software Revision O
Location O
Protocol Version O
Protocol Revision O
Services Supported O
Object Types Supported O
Object List O
Max APDU Length O
APDU Timeout O
Number APDU Retries O
Max Master O
Max Info Frames O
Device Address Binding O
Database Revision O
Preset Value O O O O O O
Description O O O O O O O
Status Flags O O O O O O
Event State O O O O O O
Reliability O O O O O O
Out-of-Service O O O O O O
Number of states O O
State text O O
Units O O
Polarity O
Active Text O O
Inactive Text O O

* BI–Binary Input / BV–Binary Value / AI–Analog Input / AV–Analog Value / MSI–Multistate Input /
MSV–Multistate Value
You can read/write in Location and Description only if it is the device object. You can write a
maximum of 29 words.

331
Communications 890053-00-01

10.4.5.1 Analog Value Object Instance

Instance ID Object Name Description Setting Range Units R/W

AV1 CommTimeoutSet Command timeout setting 0.1–120.0 Secs R/W

AV2 AccelTimeSet Accelerate time setting 0.0–600.0 Secs R/W

AV3 DecelTimeSet Decelerate time setting 0.0–600.0 Secs R/W

AV4 CommandFreqSet Command frequency 0.00–DRV-20 Hz R/W

setting**
AV5 PIDReferenceSet PID reference setting 0–100.0 % R/W

AV6 PIDFeedbackSet PID feedback setting 0–100.0 % R/W

When PowerOn Resume (COM-96) is set to ‘yes’, value is saved even if the power of the
inverter is disconnected. When PowerOn Resume (COM-96) is set to ‘no’, value is not
saved if the power of the inverter is disconnected.
A value higher than the maximum frequency (DRV-20) cannot be used. The maximum
frequency can be set by using the keypad. This value can be used when Freq Ref Src (DRV-
07) is set to ‘Int 485’.
AV2, AV3 and AV4 are used to provide acceleration/deceleration rate and frequency
reference commands. These can be written in AUTO mode only.

10.4.5.2 Multi-state Value Object Instance

Instance ID Object Name Description Setting Range Units R/W

0: None
Command lost 1: FreeRun
MSV1 LostCommand operation setting 2: Dec MSG R/W
3: HoldInput
4: HoldOutput
5: LostPreset

332
 890053-00-01 Communications

10.4.5.3 Binary Value Object Instance

Instance ID Object Name Description Active /Inactive Text R/W

BV1 StopCmd Stop command False/True R/W
BV2 RunForwardCmd Run forward command False/True R/W
BV3 RunReverseCmd Run reverse command False/True R/W
BV4 ResetFaultCmd Fault reset command False/True R/W
BV5 FreeRunStopCmd Free run stop command False/True R/W

BV6 Relay1Cmd Relay 1 On/Off command False/True R/W

BV7 Relay2Cmd Relay 2 On/Off command False/True R/W

BV8 Relay3Cmd Relay 3 On/Off command False/True R/W

BV9 Relay4Cmd Relay 4 On/Off command False/True R/W

BV10 Relay5Cmd Relay 5 On/Off command False/True R/W

BV11 Q1Cmd Q 1 On/Off command False/True R/W

10.4.5.4 Analog Input Object Instance

Instance ID Object Name Description Units R/W

AI1 InvCap (kW) Inverter capacity kW R

AI2 InvCap (HP) Inverter capacity HP R

AI3 InvVoltageClass Inverter voltage type Volts R

AI4 OutputCurrent Output current Amps R

AI5 OutputFreq Output frequency Hz R

AI6 OutputVolgate Output voltage Volts R

AI7 DCLinkVoltage DC Link voltage Volts R

AI8 OutputPower Output power kW R

AI9 AI1 Value of Analog 1 % R

AI10 AI2 Values of Analog 2 % R

333
Communications 890053-00-01

Instance ID Object Name Description Units R/W

AI11 OutputRPM Output speed RPM R

AI12 Pole Pole number of the motor - R

Information of the inverter state (Refer to

AI13 InvStatus address 0h0305 in the common - R
area)(Note1)
Latch type trip information1 (Refer to
AI14 LatchTripInfo1 address 0h0330 in the common - R
area)(Note1)
Latch type trip information2 (Refer to
AI15 LatchTripInfo2 address 0h0331 in the common - R
area)(Note1)
Latch type trip information3 (Refer to
AI16 LatchTripInfo3 address 0h0335 in the common - R
area)(Note1)
Level type trip information (Refer to
AI17 LevelTripInfo address 0h0332 in the common - R
area)(Note1)
H/W Diagnosis trip information (Refer to
AI18 HWDIagInfo address 0h0333 in the common area)* - R

Warning information
AI19 WarningInfo (Refer to address 0h0334 in the common - R
area)*
AI20 KiloWattHour Output power by kW/h kW/h R

AI21 MegaWattHour Output power by MW/h MW/h R

AI22 PowerFactor Power factor - R

AI23 RunTimeDay Run time by day Day R

AI24 RunTimeMin Run time by minute Day R

AI25 PidOutValue PID Output Value % R

AI26 PidReferenceValu e PID Reference Value % R

AI27 PidFeedbackValue PID Feedback Value % R

* Refer to Compatible Common Area Parameter page 312.

334
 890053-00-01 Communications

10.4.5.5 Binary Input Object Instance

Instance ID Object Name Description R/W

BI1 Stopped Stop state R
BI2 RunningForward Running forward R
BI3 RunningReverse Running reverse R
BI4 Tripped Trip occurred R
BI5 Accelerating Accelerating R
BI6 Decelerating Decelerating R
BI7 SteadySpeed Operating at steady speed R
BI8 RunningDC Operating at a 0 step speed R
BI9 Stopping Stopping R
BI10 FwdRunCommandState Forward run command state R
BI11 RevRunCommandState Reverse run command state R
BI12 P1 P1 state R
BI13 P2 P2 state R
BI14 P3 P3 state R
BI15 P4 P4 state R
BI16 P5 P5 state R
BI17 P6 P6 state R
BI18 P7 P7 state R
BI19 Relay1 Relay1 state* R
BI20 Relay2 Relay2 state* R
BI21 Relay3 Relay3 state* R
BI22 Relay4 Relay4 state* R
BI23 Relay5 Relay5 state* R
BI24 Q1 Q1 state R
BI25 SpeedSearch Speed search operating R
BI26 HWOCS H/W OCS occurred R
BI27 SWOCS S/W OCS occurred R
BI28 RunningDwell Dwell operating state R
BI29 SteadyState Steady state R
BI30 Warning Warning state R

OUT-31–35 (Relay1–5) must be set to ‘0 (none)’ to control outputs via communication.

335
Communications 890053-00-01

10.4.5.6 MultiState Input Object Instance

Instance ID Object Name Description Units R/W

MSI1 UnitsDisplay Displays Unit setting 1 Hz R

2 RPM

10.4.5.7 Error Message

Display Description
serviceserror+7 Inconsistent parameters
propertyerror+9 Invalid data type
serviceserror+10 Invalid access method
serviceserror+11 Invalid file start

serviceserror+29 Service request denied

objecterror+31 Unknown object
propertyerror+0 Property other
propertyerror+27 Read access denied
propertyerror+32 Unknown property
propertyerror+37 Value out of range
propertyerror+40 Write access denied
propertyerror+42 Invalid array index
clienterror+31 Unknown device
resourceserror+0 Resources other
clienterror+30 Time out
abortreason+4 Segmentation not supported
rejectreason+4 Invalid tag
clienterror+0xFF No invoke id
securityerror+26 Password failure

336
 890053-00-01 Communications

10.5 Metasys-N2 Communication

10.5.1 Metasys-N2 Quick Communication Start

Follow the instructions below to configure the Metasys-N2 network.

1 Set COM-02 (Int485 Proto) to ‘5 (Metasys-N2)’.
2 Set the network communication speed to ‘9600 bps.’
3 Configure the communication modes and make sure that they are fixed to Data Bit 8 / No Parity Bit/
Start Bit 1 / Stop Bit 1.
4 Test the network and make sure Metasys-N2 communication is working properly.

10.5.2 Metasys-N2 Communication Standard

Item Standards

Communication speed 9600 bps

Control procedure Asynchronous communications system

Communication system Half duplex system

Cable Twisted pair (1 pair and shield)

LS485: ASCII (8bit)

Character system Modbus-RTU: Binary (7/8 bit) Metasys-N2: ASCII (8bit)

Start/Stop bit Start 1bit, Stop 1bit

RS485: Checksum (2byte)
Error check Modbus-RTU: CRC16 (2byte) Metastys-N2: CRC16 (2byte)

Parity check None

337
Communications 890053-00-01

10.5.3 Metasys-N2 Protocol I/O Point Map

10.5.3.1 Analog Output

The output point map controlling the inverter from the Metasys-N2 master.

No. Name Range Unit Description

AO1 Command 0.0–Max Freq Hz Command frequency setting**
Frequency
AO2 Accel Time 0.0–600.0 Sec ACC time setting*
AO3 Decel Time 0.0–600.0 Sec DEC time setting*
0 KeyPad
1 Fx/Rx-1

AO4 Drive mode 2 Fx/Rx-2 - Drive mode setting

3 Int. 485
4 FieldBus
5 Time Event
0 –KeyPad-1
1 –KeyPad-2
2 V1
3 –Reversed
4 V2
AO5 Freq mode - Frequency mode setting
5 I2
6 Int485
7 FieldBus
8 Reversed
9 Pulse

• When PowerOn Resume (COM-96) is set to ‘yes’, value is saved even if the power of the
inverter is disconnected. If PowerOn Resume (COM-96) is set to ‘no’, value is not saved
when the power of the inverter is disconnected.
• Cannot set the value higher than the maximum frequency (DRV-20). The maximum
frequency can be set by using the keypad. This value can be used when Freq Ref Src (DRV-
07) is set to ‘Int 485’.

338
 890053-00-01 Communications

10.5.3.2 Binary Output

The output point map controlling the inverter from the Metasys-N2 master.

No. Name Range Description

BO1 Stop Command 1: Stop Stop command
BO2 Run Forward Command 1: Forward Run Forward run command
BO3 Run Reverse Command 1: Reverse Run Reverse run command
BO4 Reset Fault 1: Reset Fault reset command
BO5 Free-Run Stop 1: Bx Free-run stop command

10.5.3.3 Analog Input

Metasys-N2 master monitors inverter state.

No. Name Unit Description
AI1 Output Current Amps Output current
AI2 Output Frequency Hz Output frequency
AI3 Output Speed RPM Output speed
Trip code information
AI4 Trip Code - (Refer to Common Area parameter address 0h000F)*

‘Latch’ type fault information 1

AI5 Latch Trip Info1 - (Refer to Common Area parameter address 0h0330)*

AI6 Latch Trip Info2 - ‘Latch’ type fault information 2

(Refer to Common Area parameter address 0h0331)*

‘Latch’ type fault information 3

AI7 Latch Trip Info3 - (Refer to Common Area parameter address 0h0335)*

‘Level’ type fault information

AI8 Level Trip Info - (Refer to Common Area parameter address
0h0332)(1)
H/W Diagnosis Trip H/W Diagnosis fault information
AI9 Info - (Refer to Common Area parameter address
0h0333)(1)
Warning information
AI10 Warning Info - (Refer to Common Area parameter address
0h0334)(1)
* Refer to Compatible Common Area Parameter page 312.

339
Communications 890053-00-01

10.5.3.4 Binary Input

Metasys-N2 master unit monitors the inverter input and output status in binary codes. The following
table lists the binary codes used and their meanings.

No. Name Description

BI1 Stopped 1 – Stopped
BI2 Running Forward 1 – Forward operation is running.
BI3 Running Reverse 1 – Reverse operation is running.
BI4 Tripped 1 – Fault occurred.
BI5 Accelerating 1 –Accelerating
BI6 Decelerating 1 –Decelerating
BI7 Reached Full Speed 1 –Running at a steady speed (frequency
reference)
BI8 DC Braking 1 – Running on DC power source
BI9 Stopping 1–Stopping is in progress.
BI10 P1 Input 1–True / 0 - False
BI11 P2 Input 1–True / 0–False
BI12 P3 Input 1–True / 0–False
BI13 P4 Input 1–True / 0–False
BI14 P5 Input 1–True / 0–False
BI15 P6 Input 1–True / 0–False
BI16 P7 Input 1–True / 0–False
BI17 Relay1 State 1–On / 0 - Off
BI18 Relay2 State 1–On / 0 - Off
BI19 Relay3 State 1–On / 0 - Off
BI20 Relay4 State 1–On / 0 - Off
BI21 Relay5 State 1–On / 0 - Off
BI22 Q1 (OC1) State 1–On / 0 - Off

340
 890053-00-01 Communications

10.5.3.5 Error Code

Defined Codes Description

00 The device has been reset. Currently waiting for the ‘Identity Yourself’
command.
01 Undefined command
02 Checksum error has occurred.
03 Data size exceeded the input buffer (message is bigger than the device
buffer size).
05 Data field error (input message size does not fit the command type)
10 Invalid data (message value is out of the range)
11 Invalid command for data type (command does not fit the message frame)

12 Command is not accepted (device has ignored a command due to a

fault. The master device sends a ‘Status Update Request’).

341
Troubleshooting 890053-00-01

11 Troubleshooting
This chapter explains how to troubleshoot problems when the inverter protective functions are
activated (faults and warnings). If the inverter does not work normally after following the suggested
troubleshooting steps, contact BENSHAW Technical Support..

11.1 Trip and Warning

When the inverter detects a fault, it stops the operating (trips) and displays the fault message in the
TRP (Trip) Group. Detailed information about the fault can be viewed on the LCD display at
parameters TRP-01 ~ TRP-10. Warnings are also displayed at the TRP Group with the same details
as the faults. When more than 2 trips occur at roughly the same time, the keypad displays the
higher priority fault code. Use the [Up], [Down], [Left] or [Right] arrow buttons on the keypad to view
the fault information. The fault conditions are categorized as follows:

Level: When the fault is corrected, the fault or warning signal is reset and the fault is not saved in the
fault history.

Latch: When the fault is corrected and a reset is performed (keypad or external), the fault or
warning signal clears. The fault is saved in the Fault History (TRP Group).

Fatal: When the fault is corrected, the fault or warning signal is reset only after the inverter power is
cycled (Off then On), When powered off, wait until the charge indicator light goes off then turn the
inverter on again. If the inverter is still in a faulted condition after powering it on again, please
contact the supplier or the BENSHAW customer service center.

11.1.1 Faults

Protection Functions for Output Current and Input Voltage

LCD Display Type Description

Displayed when inverter output current exceeds 180% of the
Over Current1 Latch
rated current.
Displayed when internal DC bus voltage exceeds the
specified value.
Over Voltage Latch 240V Inverter 410V  10
OV Fault 480V Inverter 820V  10
575V Inverter 980V  10
Displayed when internal DC bus voltage is less than the
specified value. NOTE: The LV Trip level will vary depending
on MOT-10 (Input Voltage) setting.
Low Voltage Level 240V Inverter 180V  10
Low voltage
480V Inverter 360V  10
Fault
575V Inverter 430V  10
Low Voltage2 Latch Displayed when internal DC bus voltage is less than the
342
 890053-00-01 Troubleshooting

LCD Display Type Description

specified value during inverter operation. Requires reset.
Displayed when a ground fault occurs on the output side of
the inverter and causes the current to exceed the specified
Ground Trip Latch
value. The specified value varies depending on inverter
capacity.
Displayed based on inverse time-limit thermal characteristics
E-Thermal Latch to prevent motor overheating. Operates when PRT-40 is set
to a value other than ‘0’.
Displayed when the 3-phase inverter output has one or more
Out Phase Open Latch phases in an open circuit condition. Operates when bit 0 of
PRT-05 is set to ‘1’.
Displayed when the 3-phase inverter input has one or more
In Phase Open Latch phases in an open circuit condition. Operates only when bit
1 of PRT-05 is set to ‘1’.
Displayed when the inverter has been protected from
overload and resultant overheating based on inverse time-
Inverter OLT Latch
limit thermal characteristics. Allowable overload rates for the
inverter are 120% for 1 min (ND rating) and 140% for 5 sec.
Displayed when the motor is not connected during inverter
No Motor Trip Latch
operation. Operates when PRT-31 is set to ‘1’, Free-Run.
Displayed when PRT-20 is set to a value other than ‘0’ and
Over Load Latch the conditions set with PRT-21 and PRT-22 are detecting a
motor overload.
Displayed when PRT- 27 is set to a value other than ‘0’ and
Under Load Latch the conditions set with parameters PRT-23 ~ PRT 28 are
detecting an under load condition.
Displayed when output current is less than the brake release
Ext-Brake Latch current (ADV-41) for longer than the brake release delay time
(ADV-42).

Protection Functions Using Abnormal Internal Circuit Conditions and External Signals

LCD Display Type Description

Displayed when the temperature of the inverter heat sink
Over Heat Latch
exceeds the specified value.
Displayed when the DC circuit in the inverter detects a
Over Current2 Latch
specified level of excessive, short circuit current.
Displayed when an external fault signal is activated at the
multi-function terminal. Set one of the multi-function input
External Trip Latch
terminals at IN-65~71 to ‘4 (External Trip)’ to enable external
trip.
Inverter Output Disable: Displayed when the inverter output is
blocked by a signal activated at the multi-function terminal.
BX Level
Set one of the multi- function input terminals at IN-65~IN-71
to ‘5 (BX)’ to enable output block function.

343
Troubleshooting 890053-00-01

LCD Display Type Description

Displayed when an error is detected in the memory
(EEPRom), analog-digital converter output (ADC Off Set) or
CPU watchdog (Watch Dog-1, Watch Dog-2).

H/W-Diag Fatal EEP Err: An error in reading/writing parameters due to

keypad or memory (EEPRom) fault.

ADC Off Set: An error in the current sensing circuit (U/V/W

terminal, current sensor, etc.).
Displayed when an error is detected in the temperature
NTC Open Latch
sensor of the Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor (IGBT).
Displayed when an error is detected in the cooling fan. Set
Fan Trip Latch
PRT-79 to ‘0’ to activate fan trip.
Occurs when an abnormality is detected in the cooling fan
InFan Trip Latch inside the inverter (150 ~ 800 HP). Activates when PRT-79 is
set to 0 (Trip).
Triggered when the input from an external temperature
Thermal Trip Latch sensor (PTC) is higher (or lower) than the level set by the
user. Refer to parameters PRT-34 ~ PRT-38.
Triggered when a communication error occurs between the
keypad and the inverter, when the keypad is the command
Lost KeyPad Latch
source, and PRT-11 (Lost KPD Mode) is set to any other
value than ‘0’.
Fuse Open Latch Internal input fuse open for inverters 500 HP and larger.

TB Trip Latch Abnormality at the I/O TB PCB.

Communication abnormality between I/O CPU PCB and
I/O Board Trip Latch
Control PCB.
Connection or communication issue between the LCD and
Check Line Plz Level
the Control PCB.

H2 Pump related Faults

LCD Display Type Description

Triggered when the damper open signal or run command
Damper Err Latch signal is longer than the value set at AP2-45 (Damper
CheckT) during a fan operation.
Triggered when the pump clean operation is operated
PC Repeat Err Latch frequently. The conditions may be modified with the AP2-36~
AP2-37 settings.
Triggered when a pipe is broken during the pump operation.
Pipe Broken Latch
Associated parameters PRT-60 ~ PRT-62.
Triggered when the inverter output current or power is lower
Level Detect Latch
or higher than the set values. Associated parameters PRT-

344
 890053-00-01 Troubleshooting

71 ~ PRT-77.
Triggered when PRT-91 is set to Free Run. Related settings
Broken Belt Latch
in PRT-92 ~ PRT-95

Option Protection

LCD Display Type Description

Displayed when a frequency or operation command error is
detected during inverter operation by controllers other than
Lost Command Level the keypad (e.g., using a terminal block and a
communication mode). Activate by setting PRT-12 to any
value other than ‘0’.
Displayed when the I/O board or external communication
IO Board Trip Latch card is not connected to the inverter or has a bad
connection.
Displayed when communication fails during parameter
ParaWrite Trip Latch writing. Occurs due to a control cable fault or a bad
connection.
Displayed when a communication error is detected between
Option Trip-1 Latch the inverter and the communication board. Occurs when a
communication option card is installed.

11.1.2 Warning Messages

LCD Display Description

Displayed when PRT-17 is set to ‘1 (Yes)’ to enable OL warning and
motor is overloaded. Related parameters PRT-17 ~ PRT-19. Set output
Over Load
relays or Q1 (OUT-31–35 or OUT-36) to ‘5’ (Over Load)’ to receive the
overload warning output signals.
Displayed when PRT-25 is to ‘1 (Yes)’ and the motor is underloaded.
Related parameters PRT-25 ~ PRT- Set output relays or Q1 (OUT-31–
Under Load
35 or OUT-36) to ’7 (Under Load)’ to receive the underload warning
output signals.
Displayed when the overload time equivalent to 60% of the inverter
overheat protection (inverter IOLT) level is accumulated. Set output
INV Over Load
relays or Q1 (OUT-31–35 or OUT-36) to ‘6 (IOL)’ to receive the inverter
overload warning output signal.
Lost command warning alarm occurs even with PRT-12 set to ‘0’. The
warning alarm occurs based on the condition set at PRT-13-15. Set
Lost Command
output relays or Q1 (OUT-31–35 or OUT-36) to ‘13 (Lost Command)’ to
receive the lost command warning output signals.
Displayed when an error is detected from the cooling fan while PRT-79 is
Fan Warning set to’1 (Yes)’. Set output relays or Q1 (OUT-31–35 or OUT-36) to ‘8
(Fan Warning)’ to receive the fan warning output signals.
Displayed when the DB resistor usage rate exceeds the set value. Set
DB Warn %ED
the detection level at PRT-66.
345
Troubleshooting 890053-00-01

Fire Mode forces the inverter to ignore certain faults and continues to
Fire Mode operate. Set output relays or Q1 (OUT-31–35 or OUT-36) to ‘27 (Fire
Mode)’ to receive the fire mode warning output signals.
Displayed when a pipe is broken during pump operation. Set output
Pipe Broken relays or Q1 (OUT-31–35 or OUT-36) to ‘28 (Pipe Broken)’ to receive
the pipe break warning output signals.
Displayed when a communication error occurs between the keypad and
the inverter, when PRT-11 (Lost KPD Mode) is set to any other value
Lost Keypad than ‘0’, and a run command is given from the keypad. Set output relays
or Q1 (OUT-31–35 or OUT-36) to ‘24 (Lost KPD)’ to receive the lost
keypad warning output signals.
Displayed during a level detect state. Set PRT-70 to ‘1 (warning)’ to
Level Detect
enable.
Displayed when the RTC battery voltage drops to (or below) 2 V. To
Low Battery
receive a warning output signal, set PRT-90 (Low Battery) to ‘Yes’.
Displayed when PRT-91 is set to warning and the inverter senses the
Broken Belt
condition of a broken belt.
Displayed when the function of load tuning is not normal . Values of
Load Tune
‘AP2-03 and AP2-04’ are more than the values of ‘AP2-09 and AP2-10’.
PareWrite Fail Displayed when the smart copier download/upload is not normal.
Displayed when the function of Rs tuning is not normal . For example,
Rs Tune Err
auto tuning is performed without wiring the motor.
Displayed when the function of Lsigma tuning is not normal . For
Lsig Tune Err
example, auto tuning is performed without wiring the motor.
If [DRV-05 KPD H.O.A Lock] is set to locked, message flashes for one
KPD H.O.A Lock
second when any HAND-OFF-AUTO button is pressed.
Occurs when an abnormality is detected in the cooling fan inside the
InFan Warning
inverter 150 HP ~ 800 HP (110 kW to 500 kW).
Backspin timer is a protection function enabled when the timer (PRT-
01) is set to any value above “0”. During the set time, inverter displays
the warning message and ignores the run command signal and the fault
Backspin Time
auto reset & restart signals. After the PRT-01 Backspin Time expires,
the inverter automatically restarts according to the reset & restart signal
status.

346
 890053-00-01 Troubleshooting

11.2 Troubleshooting Faults

When a fault or warning occurs due to a protection function, refer to the following table for possible
causes and remedies.

Type Cause Remedy

The load is greater than the motor’s Ensure that the motor and inverter have
rated capacity. appropriate capacity ratings.
Over Load
The set value for the overload trip level Increase the set value for the overload trip
(PRT-21) is too low. level.
There is a motor-load connection Replace the motor and inverter with
problem. models with lower capacity.
Under Load The set value for underload level (PRT-
Reduce the set value for the underload
24) is less than the system’s minimum
level.
load.
Acc/Dec time is too short, compared to
Increase Acc/Dec time.
load inertia (GD2).
The inverter load is greater than the Replace the inverter with a model that has
Over rated capacity. increased capacity.
Current1 Operate the inverter after the motor has
The inverter supplied an output while
stopped or use the speed search function
the motor was idling.
(CON-70).
The mechanical brake of the motor is
Check the mechanical brake.
operating too fast.
Deceleration time is too short for the
Increase the acceleration time.
load inertia (GD2).
Over Voltage A generative load occurs at the Use the braking unit.
inverter output.
Determine if the input voltage is above the
The input voltage is too high.
specified value.
Determine if the input voltage is below the
The input voltage is too low.
specified value.
A load greater than the power capacity
is connected to the system ( a welder,
Low Voltage Increase the power capacity.
direct motor connection, etc.)
The magnetic contactor connected to
the power source has a faulty
Replace the magnetic contactor.
connection.
The input voltage has decreased Determine if the input voltage is above the
during the operation. specified value.
Low Voltage2 An input phase-loss has occurred. Check the input wiring.
The power supply magnetic contactor
Replace the magnetic contractor.
is faulty.
A ground fault has occurred in the
Check the output wiring.
Ground Trip inverter output wiring.
The motor insulation is damaged. Replace the motor.
The motor has overheated. Reduce the load or operation frequency.
The inverter load is greater than the Replace the inverter with a model that has
E-Thermal
rated capacity. increased capacity.
The set value for electronic thermal Set an appropriate electronic thermal
347
Troubleshooting 890053-00-01

Type Cause Remedy

protection is too low. level.
The inverter has been operated at low Replace the motor with a model that
speed for an extended duration. supplies extra power to the cooling fan.
The magnetic contactor on the output Check the magnetic contactor on the
Out Phase
side has a connection fault. output side.
Open
The output wiring is faulty. Check the output wiring.
The magnetic contactor on the input Check the magnetic contactor on the
side has a connection fault. input side.
In Phase The input wiring is faulty. Check the input wiring.
Open Replace the DC bus capacitors. Contact
The DC bus capacitors need to be
the retailer or the BENSHAW customer
replaced.
service center.
The load is greater than the rated Replace the motor and inverter with
Inverter OLT motor capacity. models that have increased capacity.
The torque boost level is too high. Reduce the torque boost level.
There is a problem with the cooling Determine if a foreign object is obstructing
system. the air inlet, outlet, or vent.
The inverter cooling fan has been
Over Heat Replace the cooling fan.
operated for an extended period.
Keep the ambient temperature below 50
The ambient temperature is too high.
C.
Output wiring is short-circuited. Check the output wiring.
Over Do not operate the inverter. Contact the
There is a fault with the electronic
Current2 retailer or the BENSHAW customer
semiconductor (IGBT).
service center.
The ambient temperature is too low. Keep the ambient temperature above - 10
NTC Open There is a fault with the internal C. Contact the retailer or the BENSHAW
temperature sensor. customer service center.
A foreign object is obstructing the Remove the foreign object from the air
Fan Lock
fan’s air vent. inlet or outlet.
/ In Fan
The cooling fan needs to be replaced. Replace the cooling fan.
Check:
Check Line 1. LCD Cable(s) and Connections
LCD communication issue.
Plz 2. Change LCD
3. Replace Control PCB

348
 890053-00-01 Troubleshooting

11.3 Troubleshooting Other Faults

When a fault other than those identified as faults or warnings occurs, refer to the following table for
possible causes and remedies.

Type Cause Remedy

The inverter is in operation (driving Stop the inverter to change to
mode). program mode and set the parameter.
Check the correct parameter access
The parameter access is incorrect.
level and set the parameter.
Parameters
Check the password, disable the
cannot be set. The password is incorrect.
parameter lock and set the parameter.
Check the power input to resolve the
Low voltage is detected.
low voltage and set the parameter.
The frequency command source is set Check the frequency command
incorrectly. source setting.
The operation command source is set Check the operation command
incorrectly. source setting.
Power is not supplied to the terminal Check the terminal connections
R/S/T. R/S/T and U/V/W.
The charge lamp is turned off. Turn on the inverter.
Turn on the operation command.
The operation command is off.
(RUN).
Unlock the motor or lower the load
The motor is locked.
level.
The load is too high. Operate the motor independently.
An emergency stop signal is input. Reset the emergency stop signal.
The wiring for the control circuit terminal Check the wiring for the control
The motor does is incorrect. circuit terminal.
not rotate. The input option for the frequency Check the input option for the
command is incorrect. frequency command.
The input voltage or current for the Check the input voltage or current for
frequency command is incorrect. the frequency command.
The PNP/NPN mode is selected
Check the PNP/NPN mode setting.
incorrectly.
Check the frequency command and
The frequency command value is too
input a value above the minimum
low.
frequency.
Check that the stop state is normal, if
The [OFF] button is pressed.
so resume operation normally.
Increase the amount of the torque
boost. If the fault remains, replace
Motor torque is too low.
the inverter with a model with
increased capacity.
Determine if the cable on the output
The wiring for the motor output cable is
side is wired correctly to the phase
The motor rotates incorrect.
(U/V/W) of the motor.
in the opposite
The signal connection between the
direction to the
control circuit terminal (forward/reverse Check the forward/reverse rotation
command.
rotation) of the inverter and the wiring.
forward/reverse rotation signal on the
349
Troubleshooting 890053-00-01

Type Cause Remedy

control panel side is incorrect.
Remove the reverse rotation
Reverse rotation prevention is selected.
The motor only prevention.
rotates in one The reverse rotation signal is not Check the input signal associated
direction. provided, even when a 3-wire with the 3-wire operation and adjust
sequence is selected. as necessary.
Reduce the load.
Increase the Acc/Dec time.
Check the motor parameters and set
The load is too heavy. the correct values.
Replace the motor and the inverter
with models with appropriate capacity
for the load.
The ambient temperature of the motor is Lower the ambient temperature of
too high. the motor.
The motor is Use a motor that can withstand
overheating. phase-to-phase voltages surges
greater than the maximum surge
voltage.
The phase-to-phase voltage of the
Only use motors suitable for
motor is insufficient.
applications with inverters.
Connect the AC reactor to the
inverter output (set the carrier
frequency to 3 kHz).
The motor fan has stopped or the fan is Check the motor fan and remove any
obstructed with debris. foreign objects.
Reduce the load.
Increase the amount of the torque
boost.
The load is too high.
Replace the motor and the inverter
The motor stops
with models with capacity appropriate
during
for the load.
acceleration.
If the output current exceeds the
The current is too big. rated load, decrease the torque
boost.
Reduce the load.
The motor stops
Replace the motor and the inverter
when connected The load is too high.
with models with capacity appropriate
to load.
for the load.
The frequency command value is low. Set an appropriate value.
The motor does
Reduce the load and increase the
not accelerate.
The load is too high. acceleration time. Check the
mechanical brake status.
The acceleration time is too long. Change the acceleration time.
The combined values of the motor
Change the motor related
properties and the inverter parameter
parameters.
The acceleration are incorrect.
time is too long. The stall prevention level during
Change the stall prevention level.
acceleration is low.
The stall prevention level during
Change the stall prevention level.
operation is low.
350
 890053-00-01 Troubleshooting

Type Cause Remedy

Replace the motor and inverter with
There is a high variance in load.
Motor speed models with increased capacity.
varies during The input voltage varies. Reduce input voltage variation.
operation. Motor speed variations occur at a Adjust the output frequency to avoid
specific frequency. a resonance area.
The motor rotation
Set a V/F pattern that is suitable for
is different from The V/F pattern is set incorrectly.
the motor specification.
the setting.
The deceleration time is set too long. Change the setting accordingly.
The motor
If motor parameters are normal, it is
deceleration time
likely to be a motor capacity fault.
is too long even The motor torque is insufficient.
Replace the motor with a model with
with Dynamic
increased capacity.
Braking (DB)
resistor The load is higher than the internal
Replace the inverter with a model
torque limit determined by the rated
connected. with increased capacity.
current of the inverter.
While the inverter Change the carrier frequency to the
is in operation, a minimum value.
control unit Noise occurs due to switching inside the
Install a micro surge filter in the
malfunctions or inverter.
inverter output.
noise occurs.
Connect the inverter to a ground
terminal.
Check that the ground resistance is
less than 100Ω for 200 V inverters
When the and less than 10Ω for 400 V
inverter is inverters.
An earth leakage breaker will interrupt
operating, the Check the capacity of the earth
the supply if current flows to ground
earth leakage leakage breaker and make the
during inverter operation.
breaker is appropriate connection, based on the
activated. rated current of the inverter.
Lower the carrier frequency.
Make the cable length between the
inverter and the motor as short as
possible.
The motor Check the input voltage and balance
vibrates severely Phase-to-phase voltage of 3-phase the voltage.
and does not power source is not balanced. Check and test the motor’s
rotate normally. insulation.
Resonance occurs between the motor's
Slightly increase or decrease the
natural frequency and the carrier
carrier frequency.
frequency.
The motor
Slightly increase or decrease the
makes humming,
Resonance occurs between the motor's carrier frequency.
or loud noises.
natural frequency and the inverter’s Use the frequency jump function to
output frequency. avoid the frequency band where
resonance occurs.
In situations of noise inflow on the
The motor The frequency input command is an
analog input side that results in
vibrates/hunts. external, analog command.
command interference, change the

351
Troubleshooting 890053-00-01

Type Cause Remedy

input filter time constant (IN-07).
Ensure that the total cable length
The wiring length between the inverter between the inverter and the motor is
and the motor is too long. less than 200 m (50 m for motors
rated 3.7 kW or lower).
The motor does Adjust the DC braking parameter.
not come to a It is difficult to decelerate sufficiently, Increase the set value for the DC
complete stop because DC braking is not operating braking current.
when the inverter normally. Increase the set value for the DC
output stops. braking stopping time.
The frequency reference is within the Set the frequency reference higher
The output jump frequency range. than the jump frequency range.
frequency does The frequency reference is exceeding Set the upper limit of the frequency
not increase to the upper limit of the frequency command higher than the frequency
the frequency command. reference.
reference. Because the load is too heavy, the stall Replace the inverter with a model
prevention function is working. with increased capacity.
The cooling fan The control parameter for the cooling fan Check the control parameter setting
does not rotate. is set incorrectly. for the cooling fan.

352
 890053-00-01 Maintenance

12 Maintenance
This chapter explains:
• Periodic Inspections
• Battery Replacement
• Storage and Disposal of the product.

The Benshaw model H2 series inverter’s are an industrial electronic product with advanced
semiconductor components. A reasonable life expectancy of 8 to 10 years can be expected however,
there are factors that may affect their continued long term operation. Environmental issues
(temperature and humidity) and mechanical issues (vibration and connections) are the most common
reasons for premature failure of inverters. To avoid problems, it is recommended to perform periodic
inspections of the inverter.

• Be sure to remove the drive’s power input while performing maintenance. Lock
out all sources of power.
• Preventive maintenance should always be performed by a trained technician.
• Be sure to perform maintenance only after checking that the DC bus voltage has
discharged. The voltage between terminal P1-N (or P2-N) should be less than
30VDC. The DC bus capacitors in the electronic circuit can still be charged even
after the power is turned off. The DC bus LED is not a definitive indication of the
absence of DC voltage.

12.1 Periodic Inspection Summary

Refer to the attached Table for specific frequency of inspection.

• The conditions of the installed location

o Observe any physical damage to enclosure or enclosure degradation.
o Any signs of liquid leakage into the enclosure.
o Any signs of corrosion or rust resulting from leakage into the enclosure.

• The conditions of the inverter cooling. Causes for abnormal heating are:
o Check for any deposits or dirt inside the enclosure, in the cooling fans/filters and the
inverter fan(s). Remove with compressed air.
o Check the rotating condition of the cooling fan(s).

• Abnormal vibration
o Are there any loose nuts or bolts as a result of the vibration?
o Loose connections will show signs of heated connectors and wires. Tighten or replace.

353
Maintenance 890053-00-01

12.2 Periodic Inspection Items

Customer
Period
use
Inspection

Monthly
Inspection Inspection Method Criterion Check/

1 year

2 year
Item
Initial
/Date
Environment

Temperature:
Measure/ -10°C~+40°C
Ambient Is the ambient Monitor
Temperature/ temperature and humidity X (Thermometer,
Humidity within the design range? Hygrometer, Humidity:
Recorder) Under 90%
non-
condensing
Any signs of physical
damage to the enclosure X
of the inverter?
Any signs of liquid leaking
into enclosure of the X
inverter?
Are there any signs of
rust inside the inverter X
Physical enclosure? Visual Yes/No
Are there any signs of
rust inside the panel
X
Physical Inspection

where the inverter is

housed.?
Are there any abnormal
vibrations or oscillations X
of the inverter/Panel?
Are there any signs of
overheated connections
X
(discolored lugs,
insulation melted)?
Physical Are there any signs of
(Cables and rusted or coroded X
Connections) connections?
Are there any signs of Visual Yes/No
X
cracked terminal blocks?
Is there any damage to
X
cable insulation?
Inspect fans and filters for
debris and dust X
Physical
accumulation.
(Fans)
Inspect fans for free
X
rotation.
Disconnect the
Checks/Measurements
Non-Powered inverter

inverter three
phase input and
IGBT Module Refer to
measure the
resistance between "How to
Check the resistance R, S, T and P, N. Check Power
between each of the X Components”
terminals. Disconnect the using Digital
inverter three or Analog
Input
phase output and meter.
Diode/SCR
measure the
Modules
resistance between
U, V, W and P, N.
DC Bus Is there any visible
X Visual check Yes/No
Capacitors leakage coming out?

354
 890053-00-01 Maintenance

Customer
Period
use
Inspection

Monthly
Inspection Inspection Method Criterion Check/

1 year

2 year
Item
Initial
/Date
Inspect the pressure relief
vent (or pin). Is there any X
swelling or rupture?
Motor (Note 1) X Megger Test 500 MΩ

Is the input voltage from inverter

Powered inverter - Not Running

the main within spec of X Measure the rating

the inverter? voltage between +/-15%
Input Voltages
the terminals R, S,
Checks/Measurements

Is the input voltage from T.

the main balanced within X 2%
spec of the inverter?
Measure the DC
Voltage between Input Voltage
DC Bus Is the DC Bus Higher or
X the Pos. and Neg. x SQRT2
Voltage Lower than normal?
terminals of the (+/- 10%)
inverter.
Turn OFF the
Is there any abnormal Must rotate
Cooling Fan X power and turn the
oscillations or noise? smoothly.
fan by hand.

Identify the inverter

Trip Circuit input trip circuit.
Is inverter trip circuit inverter must
(Input to X Open or Close
funciotnal? trip.
inverter) external trip
mechanism.

Measure the Tol. +/-

Is there any voltage
voltage between 2%230V
imbalance between X
the output terminals (5V)460V
phases of the output?
U, V and W. (10V).
Output
Powered inverter - Running

Voltages
Display parameter Tol. -10%
Checks/Measurements

Does the displayed + 20%

for Output Voltage,
Output Voltage agree with X
compare to
measurement? Note 2
measured value.

Is there any current Measure the

Tol. +/-3%
imbalance between X current out of each
phases of the output? phase U, V, W.
Note 2
Output
Current Display parameter
Does the displayed
for Output Current, Tol. +/-5%
Output Current agree with X
compare to
measurement?
measured value.
Note 2

Are there any abnormal Auditory, sensory, Mounting

X
vibrations or noise? visual check. and Coupling
Motor
Is there any unusual Check for overheat
X
odor? and damage.

Do not run an insulation resistance test (Megger) on the inverter or with inverter connected to supply and motor,
Note 1
damage will occur.
Note 2 Multimeter measurements of inverter output could vary depending on the type of meter.

355
 Maintenance 890053-00-01

12.3 Storage
If you are not using the product for an extended period, adhere to the following guidelines:

• Store the product in the same environmental conditions as specified. Refer to section 0.
• When storing the product for a period longer than 3 months, store it between 14°F and 86°F
• (-10˚Cto 30˚C) to prevent depletion of the electrolytic capacitors. See Caution below.
• Do not expose the inverter to snow, rain, fog, or dust.
• Package the inverter in a way that prevents contact with moisture. Keep the moisture level below
70% in the package by including a desiccant, such as silica gel.
• Do not allow the inverter to be exposed to dusty or humid environments. If the inverter is installed
in such environments (for example, a construction site) and the inverter will be unused for an
extended period, remove the inverter and store it in a safe place.

If the VFD has been stored for one year, capacitors start to lose their charging
characteristics and can become depleted. To prevent depletion, turn on the product
once a year and allow the device to operate for 30-60 min. Run the device under
no-load conditions.

12.4 Disposal
When disposing of the product, categorize it as general industrial waste. Recyclable materials are
included in the product, so recycle them whenever possible. The packing materials and all metal parts
can be recycled. The plastic can also be recycled.

356
 890053-00-01 Maintenance

357
Technical Specifications 890053-00-01

13 Technical Specifications
13.1 Input and Output Specifications
240 V, 7.5 HP - 25 HP (5.5–18.5 kW)
Model VFD-RSI-XXX–H2-2C 007 010 015 020 025
HP 7.5 10 15 20 25
Normal Duty kW 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5
120% OL
240V Amps 22 30 42 56 69
3φ Input HP 5 7.5 10 15 20
Heavy Duty kW 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15
150% OL
Amps 17 24 32 46 60
HP 3.0 5.0 7.5 10.0 -
240V Normal Duty
1φ Input 120% OL Amps 11 16 23 30 37
Rated Capacity (kVA) 8.4 11.4 16.0 21.3 26.3
0–400 Hz (V/Hz, Slip Comp.)
Output Frequency 0-120 Hz (IM Sensorless)
0-180 Hz (PM Sensorless)
Output Voltage (V) 3-Phase 0–240 V
Three-
3-Phase 200–240 VAC (-15%–+10%)
Phase
Voltage (V)
Single-
1-Phase 240 VAC (-5%–+10%)
Phase
Rated Three-
Input 50–60 Hz (+/-5%)
Input Phase
Frequency Single-
60 Hz(+/-5%) only
Phase
Rated Current (A) 23.7 32.7 46.4 62.3 77.2
Weight lbs. 7.3 7.3 7.3 10.1 15.6
(kg) (3.3) (3.3) (3.3) (4.6) (7.1)
Heat Dissipation (W) 180 248 330 451 600
Degree of Protection IP20, UL Open (UL Type 1 achieved with optional conduit box)
• The horse power rating is based on a standard 4-pole motor rating.
• The KVA rating is based on a 220 V supply voltage for 240 V inverters and 440 V for 480 V inverters.
• The rated output current is limited based on the carrier frequency set at CON-04.

358
 890053-00-01 Technical Specifications

480 V, 7.5 HP - 30 HP (5.5–22 kW)

Model VFD-RSI-XXX–H2-4C 007 010 015 020 025 030
HP 7.5 10 15 20 25 30
Normal
Duty kW 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22
480V 120% OL Amps 12 16 24 30 38 45
3φ
HP 5.0 7.5 10 15 20 25
Input
Heavy Duty kW 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5
150% OL
Amps 8 12 15 22 28 35
480V Normal HP 3-5 5 10 10 15 20
1φ Duty
Input 120% OL Amps 6.8 9.2 14 17 22 26
Rated Capacity (kVA) 9.1 12.2 18.3 23.0 29.0 34.3
0–400 Hz (V/Hz, Slip Comp.)
Output Frequency 0-120 Hz (IM Sensorless)
0-180 Hz (PM Sensorless)
Output Voltage (V) 3-Phase 0–480 V
Three-
3-Phase 380–480 VAC (-15%–+10%)
Phase
Voltage (V)
Single-
1-Phase 480 VAC (-5%–+10%)
Phase
Rated Three-
Input 50–60 Hz (+/-5%)
Input Phase
Frequency Single-
60 Hz(+/-5%) only
Phase
Rated Current (A) 12.2 17.5 26.5 33.4 42.5 50.7
Weight lbs. 7.3 7.3 7.5 10.1 10.6 16.5
(kg) (3.3) (3.3) (3.4) (4.6) (4.8) (7.5)
Heat Dissipation (W) 172 237 322 451 615 740
Degree of Protection IP20, UL Open (UL Type 1 achieved with optional conduit box)

359
Technical Specifications 890053-00-01

480 V, 40 HP - 125 HP (30.0–90.0 kW)

Model VFD-RSI-XXX–H2-4C 040 050 060 075 100 125
HP 40 50 60 75 100 125
Normal Duty 30 37 45 55 75 90
kW
120% OL
480V Amps 61 75 91 107 142 169
3φ Input HP 30 40 50 60 75 100
Heavy Duty 22 30 37 45 55 75
kW
150% OL
Amps 41 55 67 81 106 136
480V Normal Duty HP 25 30 30 40 50-60 60
1φ Input 120% OL Amps 36 39 47 55 73 86
Rated Capacity (kVA) 46.5 57.1 69.4 82.0 108.2 128.8
0–400 Hz (V/Hz, Slip Comp.)
Output Frequency 0-120 Hz (IM Sensorless)
0-180 Hz (PM Sensorless)
Output Voltage (V) 3-Phase 0–480 V
Three-
3-Phase 380–480 VAC (-15%–+10%)
Phase
Voltage (V)
Single-
1-Phase 480 VAC (-5%–+10%)
Phase
Rated Three-
Input 50–60 Hz (+/-5%)
Input Phase
Frequency Single-
60 Hz(+/-5%) only
Phase
Rated Current (A) 69.1 69.3 84.6 100.1 133.6 160.0
Weight lbs. 16.5 57.3 77.2 77.2 94.8 94.8
(kg) (7.5) (26) (35) (35) (43) (43)
Heat Dissipation (W) 880 1170 1443 1710 2090 2775
Degree of Protection IP20, UL Open (UL Type 1 achieved with optional conduit box)

360
 890053-00-01 Technical Specifications

480 V, 150 HP - 800 HP (110.0–500.0 kW)

Model VFD-RSI-XXX–H2- 150 200 250 300 400 500 650 800
4C
Normal HP 150 200 250 300 400 500 650 800
Duty kW 110 132 160 185 250 315 400 500
110% OL Amps 223 264 325 370 481 613 770 962
480V
3φ Heavy HP 125 150 200 250 300 400 500 600
Input Duty kW 90 110 132 160 185 250 315 375
150% OL Amps 169 195 255 303 375 478 591 740
Rated Capacity
170 201 248 282 367 467 587 733
(kVA)
0–400 Hz (V/Hz, Slip Comp.)
Output Frequency 0-120 Hz (IM Sensorless)
Output Voltage (V) 3-Phase 0–480 V
Voltage Three-
3-Phase 380–500VAC (-15%–+10%)
(V) Phase
Rated Input Three-
Input 50–60 Hz (+/-5%)
Frequency Phase
Rated Current (A) 215.1 254.6 315.3 358.9 469.3 598.1 751.3 938.6
Weight lbs. 123 123 164.7 164.7 264.6 409 409 584
(kg) (55.8) (55.8) (74.7) (74.7) (120) (185.5) (185.5) (265)
Heat Dissipation (W) 3960 4752 5600 6475 8500 10.4k 13.2k 16k
7.5HP ~ 300 HP (5.5kW ~ 185kW): IP20, UL Open (UL Type 1 achieved
with optional conduit box).
Degree of Protection
400 HP ~ 800 HP (250kW ~ 500kW): IP00, UL Open (UL Type 1
achieved with optional conduit box).

361
Technical Specifications 890053-00-01

575 V, 7.5 HP - 30 HP (5.5–22 kW)

Model VFD-RSI-XXX–H2-61 007 010 015 020 025 030
HP 7.5 10 15 20 25 30
Normal Duty
kW 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22
110% OL
575V Amps 9 12 17 23 27 34
3φ Input HP 5 7.5 10 15 20 25
Heavy Duty
kW 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5
150% OL
Amps 6.6 9 12 17 23 27
ND Rated Capacity (kVA) 9 12 16.9 22.9 26.9 33.9
Rated Output Output Frequency 0–120 Hz (V/Hz, Slip Comp., IM Sensorless)
Output Voltage (V) 3-Phase 0–600 V
Voltage (V) Three- Phase 3-Phase 525-600 VAC (-15%–+10%)
Input Frequency Three- Phase 60 Hz (+/-5%)
Rated Input
ND Rated Current (A) 8 10.7 15.3 20.9 25 30.8
HD Rated Current (A) 6.5 8.9 12 17.2 23.5 27
Weight lbs. 20.86 21.21 21.87 22.09 22.35 31.53
(kg) (9.46) (9.62) (9.92) (10.02) (10.14) (14.3)
Heat Dissipation (W) 132 167 266 478 696 799
Degree of Protection UL Type 1 with installed conduit box
• The horse power rating is based on a standard 4-pole motor rating.
• The KVA rating is based on the Normal Duty rating and 575 V for 575 V inverters.
• The rated output current is limited based on the carrier frequency set at CON-04.

362
 890053-00-01 Technical Specifications

575 V, 40 HP - 125 HP (30.0–90.0 kW)

Model VFD-RSI-XXX–H2-6C 040 050 060 075 100 125
HP 40 50 60 75 100 125
Normal Duty
kW 30 37 45 55 75 90
110% OL
575V Amps 43 55 64 80 104 128
3φ Input HP 30 40 50 60 75 100
Heavy Duty
kW 22 30 37 45 55 75
150% OL
Amps 34 43 55 64 80 104
ND Rated Capacity (kVA) 42.8 54.8 63.7 79.7 103.6 127.5
Rated
Output Frequency 0–120 Hz (V/Hz, Slip Comp., IM Sensorless)
Output
Output Voltage (V) 3-Phase 0–600 V
Three-
Voltage (V) 3-Phase 525-600 VAC (-15%–+10%)
Phase
Input Three-
Rated Input 60 Hz (+/-5%)
Frequency Phase
ND Rated Current (A) 40.2 52 60 74 102 123
HD Rated Current (A) 35.2 45 57 65 87 110
Weight lbs. 32.32 55.07 74.12 74.25 96.12 96.43
(kg) (14.66) (24.98) (33.62) (33.68) (43.60) (43.74)
Heat Dissipation (W) 786 954 1327 1559 1850 2355
Degree of Protection IP20, UL Open (UL Type 1 achieved with optional conduit box)
• The horse power rating is based on a standard 4-pole motor rating.
• The KVA rating is based on the Normal Duty rating and 575 V for 575 V inverters.
• The rated output current is limited based on the carrier frequency set at CON-04.

363
Technical Specifications 890053-00-01

13.2 Product Specification Details

Items Description
V/F control, Slip Compensation, Sensorless Vector (IM and PM*) with
Control method Torque Limits (240V and 480V only)
* PM maximum 125 HP, 480V. Does not apply to 575V inverters.

Frequency setting Digital command: 0.01 Hz

resolution Analog command: 0.06 Hz (60 Hz standard)
Frequency accuracy 1% of maximum output frequency
Control V/F pattern Linear, Square reduction, User V/F
7.5 HP~125 HP 240V, 480V: 120% / 1 min.
Overload capacity 5.5 kW~90 kW 575V: 110% / 1 min.
(Normal Duty) 150 HP~800 HP
480V: 110% / 1 min.
110 kW~500 kW
Overload capacity 5 HP~600 HP 480V: 150% / 1 min.
(Heavy Duty) 3.7 kW~375 kW 575V: 110% / 1 min.
Torque boost Manual torque boost, automatic torque boost
Operation Type
Start/Stop Keypad, Terminal Strip, Communications
Analog Input: (1) 0/4–20 mA, (1) 0–10 V
Frequency (Speed)
Digital Input: Keypad, Fixed Speed, Pulse Train
Settings
Communication: RS-485 (Modbus), Fieldbus Options
Basic Advanced
Quick Start Menu Sensorless Vector Control
Start/Stop Operation IM and PM motors
Start/Stop Modes Auto Tuning
Frequency Reference Sources Torque Limits
Auxiliary Frequency Reference PID Control
Multi-Step Speeds Slip Compensation
Multi-Step Accel/Decel Times Event Timer (RTC)
Operation
2nd Source (HOA) Energy Save Mode
Accel/Decel Times Regen Avoidance
Functions Accel/Decel Patterns VFD Fan Control
Dwell Frequency Operation
Jog Other
Auto Start Timer Relay Input/Output Function
Auto Reset/Restart Pre Heat
Jog and Jog Start Oil Pump Starter Control
V/Hz. Control Pattern Damper Monitor and Control
Linear, Squared, User V/Hz
Torque Boost Loss of Power
Ride Through (KEB)
FWD/REV Run Prevention Safe Stop

364
 890053-00-01 Technical Specifications

Items Description
Frequency Limits Speed Search
Jump Frequencies
3-Wire Control Braking
Fire Mode DC Injection Braking
Stall Prevention
Power Braking
Flux Braking
External Brake Control
H2 Pump Software
MMC - Multi-Motor Control Broken Pipe Detection
Lead/Lag and Alternating BACnet and Metasys-N2
Pre-Fill, Soft Fill Pump Load Tuning
Start and End Ramp Decel Valve Ramp
Backspin Timer Time Event Scheduling
Pump Clean Operation Flow Compensation
Energy Saving Operation
Analog (1) 0/4–20 mA, (1) 0–10 V, Pulse Train
(7), Select PNP (Source) or NPN (Sink) mode. NO/NC selectable.
Digital
Functions of the digital inputs are set with parameters IN-65 through
inputs
IN-71.
Forward/Reverse Operation 2nd Source - HOA/LOR
Reset Up/Down Operation
External Trip Analog Hold
Emergency Stop PID Disable
Input
Output Disable (Bx) Jog Start FWD/REV
Functions Jog Pre-Excite
Fixed Speed - Step Freq's Timer Input
Run Enable/Disable (Safety) Fire Mode
3-Wire Control Select Event Timer
Damper Monitor and Control Pre-Heat

Pulse train 0–32 kHz, Low Level: 0–0.8 V, High Level: 3.5–12 V
(1) Fault relay N.O.: Less than AC 250 V, 2A, DC 30 V, 3A
(Form C) N.C.: Less than AC 250 V, 1A, DC 30 V, 1A
(4) Relays
N.O.: Less than AC 250 V, 5 A
Programmable
(Form A) Less than DC 30 V, 5 A
(1) open
Output collector Less than DC 26 V, 50 mA
terminal

AO1 0(4) - 20 mA, Switch selectable to 0–10 Vdc

(2) Analog
Outputs A02 0-10VDC
Frequency, Current, Voltage, Power, DC Bus Voltage, Fixed, more.
Pulse train Maximum 32 kHz, 0–12 V

365
Technical Specifications 890053-00-01

Items Description
Motor Over Load Fan Trip
Under Load Internal Fan Trip
Over Current 1 Motor Over Heat (PTC Input)
Over Voltage Lost Keypad
Low Voltage Fuse Open
Low Voltage2 Pipe Broken
Ground Fault Broken Belt
E-Thermal Lost Speed Reference
Trip Out Phase Open I/O Board Trip
In Phase Open
Inverter Over Load Fan/Pump related trips
Protection No Motor Trip Damper Trip
functions Inverter Over Heat Level Detect Trip
Over Current 2 MMC Interlock Trip
External Trip Pump Cleaning Trip
Hardware Diagnostic

Overload/underload, Lost Command, Inverter overload, DB (braking)

Alarm rate alarm, Pump Clean, Pipe Broken, Broken Belt, Fire Mode, Level
Detection (LDT).
Instantaneous Less than 8 ms: Continue Operation
Power Loss More than 8 ms: KEB and/or Auto restart operation
Cooling type Forced fan cooling structure
UL Open, IP 20: 7.5 HP ~ 300 HP (5.5 kW ~ 185 kW)
Protection structure UL Open, IP 00: 400 HP ~ 800 HP (250 kW ~ 500kW)
UL Type 1 with conduit box (option) installation (up to 800 HP).
14°F~104°F (- 10°C~40°C)
Ambient temperature 2.5% / amp current derating up to 122°F (50°C) max.
No ice or frost should be present.
Ambient humidity Relative humidity less than 95% RH (to avoid condensation)
Structure/ Storage
working -4°F–149°F (-20 C-65 C)
temperature.
environment
Prevent contact with corrosive gases, flammable gases, oil stains, dust,
Environment and other pollutants.
7.5 HP ~ 800 HP (5.5 kW ~ 500 kW) Pollution Degree 2
Maximum 3,280 ft (1,000m) above sea level for standard operation.
Altitude Above derate the inverter rated voltage and the rated output current by
1% for every 328 ft (100m) up to 13,123 ft (4,000m) max.
Vibration Less than 1.0 G (9.8 m/sec2).
Pressure 10 ~ 15 PSI (70-106 kPa)

366
 890053-00-01 Technical Specifications

13.3 External Dimensions

240V: 7.5 HP ~ 15 HP (5.5 ~ 11 kW)

480V: 7.5 HP ~ 15 HP (5.5 ~ 11 kW)

240V
kW HP VFD H1 H2 H3 W1 W2 D1 A B
5.5 7.5 VFD-RSI-007-H2-2C
9.13 8.52 0.41 6.30 5.39 7.13 0.20 0.20
7.5 10 VFD-RSI-010-H2-2C
(232) (216.5) (10.5) (160) (137) (181) (5) (5)
11 15 VFD-RSI-015-H2-2C

480V
kW HP VFD H1 H2 H3 W1 W2 D1 A B
5.5 7.5 VFD-RSI-007-H2-4C
9.13 8.52 0.41 6.30 5.39 7.13 0.20 0.20
7.5 10 VFD-RSI-010-H2-4C
(232) (216.5) (10.5) (160) (137) (181) (5) (5)
11 15 VFD-RSI-015-H2-4C
Units: Inches (mm)

367
Technical Specifications 890053-00-01

240V: 20 HP ~ 25 HP (15 ~ 18.5 kW)

480V: 20 HP ~ 40 HP (15 ~ 30 kW)

240V
kW HP VFD H1 H2 H3 W1 W2 D1 A B
11.42 10.78 0.45 7.09 6.18 8.08 0.20 0.20
15 20 VFD-RSI-020-H2-2C
(290) (273.7) (11.3) (180) (157) (205.3) (5) (5)
13.78 13.03 0.51 8.66 7.63 8.79 0.24 0.24
18.5 25 VFD-RSI-025-H2-2C
(350) (331) (13) (220) (193.8) (223.2) (6) (6)

480V
kW HP VFD H1 H2 H3 W1 W2 D1 A B
15 20 VFD-RSI-020-H2-4C 11.42 10.78 0.45 7.09 6.18 8.08 0.20 0.20
18.5 25 VFD-RSI-025-H2-4C (290) (273.7) (11.3) (180) (157) (205.3) (5) (5)
22 30 VFD-RSI-030-H2-4C 13.78 13.03 0.51 8.66 7.63 8.79 0.24 0.24
30 40 VFD-RSI-040-H2-4C (350) (331) (13) (220) (193.8) (223.2) (6) (6)

Units: Inches (mm)

368
 890053-00-01 Technical Specifications

480V: 50 HP ~ 125 HP (37 ~ 90 kW)

kW HP VFD H1 H2 H3 W1 W2 W3 D1 A B
17.72 16.87 0.55 10.83 9.13 11.18 0.28 0.28
37 50 VFD-RSI-050-H2-4C -
(450) (428.5) (14) (275) (232) (284) (7) (7)
45 60 VFD-RSI-060-H2-4C 20.08 19.15 0.63 12.80 11.10 11.18 0.28 0.28
-
55 75 VFD-RSI-075-H2-4C (510) (486.5) (16) (325) (282) (284) (7) (7)
75 100 VFD-RSI-100-H2-4C 21.65 20.65 0.63 12.81 10.84 12.17 0.35 0.35
-
90 125 VFD-RSI-125-H2-4C (550) (524.5) (16) (325) (275) (309) (9) (9)
Units: Inches (mm)

369
Technical Specifications 890053-00-01

480V: 150 HP ~ 300 HP (110 ~ 185 kW)

kW HP VFD H1 H2 H3 W1 W2 W3 D1 A B
110 150 VFD-RSI-150-H2-4C 27.80 27.11 0.37 11.81 7.87 9.45 15.21 0.35 0.35
132 200 VFD-RSI-200-H2-4C (706) (688.5) (9.5) (300) (200) (240) (386) (9) (9)
160 250 VFD-RSI-250-H2-4C 27.76 26.99 0.37 14.96 11.81 11.81 15.59 0.35 0.35
185 300 VFD-RSI-300-H2-4C (705) (685.5) (9.5) (380) (300) (300) (396) (9) (9)
Units: Inches (mm)

370
 890053-00-01 Technical Specifications

480V: 400 HP ~ 800 HP (250 ~ 500 kW)

kW HP VFD H1 H2 H3 W1 W2 W3 D1 A B
36.31 35.26 0.61 17.32 12.61 17.34 0.43 0.43
250 400 VFD-RSI-400-H2-4C -
(922.3) (895.5) (15.5) (440) (320) (440) (11) (11)
315 500 VFD-RSI-500-H2-4C 39.37 38.27 0.59 23.62 16.54 19.69 0.55 0.55
-
400 650 VFD-RSI-650-H2-4C (1000) (972) (15) (600) (420) (500) (14) (14)
41.50 40.20 0.79 30.55 19.69 19.69 0.55 0.55
500 800 VFD-RSI-800-H2-4C -
(1054) (1021) (20) (776) (500) (500) (14) (14)
Units: Inches (mm)

371
Technical Specifications 890053-00-01

575V: 7.5 HP ~ 20 HP (5.5 ~ 18.5 kW)

kW HP VFD H1 H2 H3 H4 W1 W2 D1 A B
5.5 7.5 VFD-RSI-007-H2-61

7.5 10 VFD-RSI-010-H2-61
18.90 10.78 7.44 0.30 7.09 6.18 8.08 0.20 0.20
11 15 VFD-RSI-015-H2-61
(480) (273.7) (189) (7.5) (180) (157) (205.3) (5) (5)
15 20 VFD-RSI-020-H2-61

18.5 25 VFD-RSI-025-H2-61
Units: Inches (mm)

372
 890053-00-01 Technical Specifications

575V: 25 HP ~ 40 HP (22 ~ 30 kW)

kW HP VFD H1 H2 H3 H4 W1 W2 D1 A B
22 30 VFD-RSI-030-H2-61 21.65 13.03 7.87 0.31 8.69 7.63 8.79 0.24 0.24
30 40 VFD-RSI-040-H2-61 (550) (331) (200) (8) (220.8) (193.8) (223.2) (6) (6)

575V: 50 HP ~ 125 HP (37 ~ 90 kW)

kW HP VFD H1 H2 H3 W1 W2 W3 D1 A B

17.72 16.87 0.55 10.83 9.13 11.18 0.28 0.28

37 50 VFD-RSI-050-H2-6C -
(450) (428.5) (14) (275) (232) (284) (7) (7)

45 60 VFD-RSI-060-H2-6C 20.08 19.15 0.63 12.80 11.10 11.18 0.28 0.28

-
55 75 VFD-RSI-075-H2-6C (510) (486.5) (16) (325) (282) (284) (7) (7)

75 100 VFD-RSI-100-H2-6C 21.65 20.65 0.63 12.81 10.84 12.17 0.35 0.35
-
90 125 VFD-RSI-125-H2-6C (550) (524.5) (16) (325) (275) (309) (9) (9)

Units: Inches (mm)

373
Technical Specifications 890053-00-01

13.4 Terminal Screw Specification

Power Input/Output Terminal Screw Specification

R/S/T, U/V/W Screw Torque

Product kW HP
Terminal Screw Size in-lbs (Nm)
5.5 7.5
11 - 12
7.5 10 M4
(1.2 - 1.4)
240V 11 15
15 20 18 - 21
M5
18.5 25 (2.0 - 2.4)
5.5 7.5
11 - 12
7.5 10 M4
(1.2 - 1.4)
11 15
15 20
18.5 25 18 - 21
M5
22 30 (2.0 - 2.4)
30 40
37 50
45 60
49 - 58
55 75 M8
(5.5 - 6.6)
75 100
90 125
480V 110 150 78 - 106
M10
132 200 (8.8 - 11.96)
160 250
158 - 186
185 300 M12
(17.87 - 21.07)
250 400
315 500 53 - 80
M8 X 2 (6 - 9)
400 650 M12 X 1 158 - 186
(17.87 - 21.07)
78 - 106
M10 X 2 (8.8 ~ 11.96)
500 800
M16 X 1 425 - 444
(48.05 ~ 50.11)
5.5 7.5
7.5 10
11 15
18 - 21
15 20 M5
(2.0 - 2.4)
18.5 25
22 30
575 V
30 40
37 50
45 60
49 - 58
55 75 M8
(5.5 - 6.6)
75 100
90 125

Control Circuit Terminal Screw Specification

Screw Torque
Terminal Terminal Screw Size
in-lbs (Nm)
P1–P7 / CM,VR,V1,I2 / TI / S+, S-, SG /
1.95 - 2.2
A1/B1/C1, A2-C2, A3-C3, A4-C4, A5-C5 / M3
(0.22 ~ 0.25)
AO1, AO2 / 24V, Q1, EG

Apply rated torques to the terminal screws. Loose screws may cause short
circuits and malfunctions. Tightening the screw too much may damage the
terminals and cause short circuits and malfunctions. Use copper wires only
with 600 V, 90°C rating for the power terminal wiring, and 300 V, 75°C rating
for the control terminal wiring.

374
 890053-00-01 Technical Specifications

13.5 Dynamic Braking Resistor Specification

Brake Torque 100% (Normal Duty) Brake Torque 150% (Heavy Duty)
VFD Brake Resistor Specification VFD Brake Resistor Specification
Internal Wattage Wattage
Benshaw VFD Part Resistor Wattage [W] Resistor Wattage [W]
H.P. Brake [W] [W]
Number (Ω) (%ED=10%) (Ω) (%ED=10%)
IGBT (%ED=5%) (%ED=5%)
7.5 VFD-RSI-007-H2-2C Yes 33 600 1200 20 800 1600
10 VFD-RSI-010-H2-2C Yes 20 800 1600 15 1200 2400
15 VFD-RSI-015-H2-2C Yes 15 1200 2400 10 2400 4800
20 VFD-RSI-020-H2-2C Yes 10 2400 4800 8 2400 4800
25 VFD-RSI-025-H2-2C Yes 8 2400 4800 6 2600 5200

7.5 VFD-RSI-007-H2-4C Yes 120 700 1400 85 1000 2000

10 VFD-RSI-010-H2-4C Yes 90 1000 2000 60 1200 2400
10 VFD-RSI-015-H2-4C Yes 60 1200 2400 40 2000 4000
20 VFD-RSI-020-H2-4C Yes 45 2000 4000 32 2400 4800
25 VFD-RSI-025-H2-4C Yes 35 2400 4800 20 3600 7200
30 VFD-RSI-030-H2-4C Yes 30 2400 4800 20 3600 7200
40 VFD-RSI-040-H2-4C Yes 20 3600 7200 16 5000 10000

50 VFD-RSI-050-H2-4C No 16.9 3200 6400 12 5000 10000

60 VFD-RSI-060-H2-4C No 11.4 4800 9600 10 6400 12800
75 VFD-RSI-075-H2-4C No 11.4 4800 9600 8.4 7200 14400
100 VFD-RSI-100-H2-4C No 8.4 6400 12800 6 10000 20000
125 VFD-RSI-125-H2-4C No 4.0 16000 32000 5 13000 26000
150 VFD-RSI-150-H2-4C No 4.0 16000 32000 4 16000 32000
200 VFD-RSI-200-H2-4C No 4.0 16000 32000 3.4 20000 40000
250 VFD-RSI-250-H2-4C No 3.4 20000 40000 2.8 24000 48000
300 VFD-RSI-300-H2-4C No 2.8 24000 48000 2.4 26000 52000
400 VFD-RSI-400-H2-4C No
500 VFD-RSI-500-H2-4C No Contact Benshaw for sizing of both the Contact Benshaw for sizing of both the
650 VFD-RSI-650-H2-4C No DBU and Resistor DBU and Resistor

800 VFD-RSI-800-H2-4C No

7.5 VFD-RSI-007-H2-61 Yes 160.0 700 1400 100 1100 2200

10 VFD-RSI-010-H2-61 Yes 120.0 900 1800 80 1400 2800
15 VFD-RSI-015-H2-61 Yes 80.0 1400 2800 54 2000 4000
20 VFD-RSI-020-H2-61 Yes 60.0 1800 3600 40 2700 5400
25 VFD-RSI-025-H2-61 Yes 48.0 2400 4800 32 3400 6800
30 VFD-RSI-030-H2-61 No 40.0 2800 5600 27 4000 8000
40 VFD-RSI-040-H2-61 No 30.0 3600 7200 20 5400 10800

50 VFD-RSI-050-H2-6C No 24.0 4500 9000 16 6800 13600

60 VFD-RSI-060-H2-6C No 20.0 5400 10800 13 8400 16800
75 VFD-RSI-075-H2-6C No 16.0 6800 17600 11 10000 20000
100 VFD-RSI-100-H2-6C No 12.0 9000 18000 8 14000 28000
125 VFD-RSI-125-H2-6C No 10.0 11000 22000 7 17000 34000

375
Technical Specifications 890053-00-01

• If the ED% is increased to 10%, the rated capacity (W) of the brake resistor must be doubled.
• Related parameter: PRT-66 (ED%) Range 0 - 30%.
• Output Relays (OUT-31~ OUT-35 can be set to (25): DBWarn%ED which toggles the output
when duty cycle is exceeded.

376
 890053-00-01 Technical Specifications

13.5.1 Basic Wiring - DBR and DBU

Dynamic Brake Resistor (DBR) and Dynamic Brake Unit DBU)

480V:150HP~800HP

377
Technical Specifications 890053-00-01

13.6 Continuous Rated Current Derating

13.6.1 Derating for Single Phase Input

A Single-phase power source can be safely applied to three-phase (240V and 480V only) rated
inverter’s provided that care is taken to properly oversize the inverter. The output is always three
phase. Below is a summary of operating conditions that occur in the inverter when powered with a
single-phase power source compared to a three-phase source. For more detail, see Benshaw
Application Note - Sizing inverter’s for use with a Single-Phase Power Source.

Frequency - The DC bus ripple becomes 120 Hz vs. the normal 360 Hz. from a three-phase power
source. The result is the DC bus ripple voltage is higher and the DC Bus circuit is subject to higher
stress in order for the inverter to deliver equivalent power. Output current ratings are valid for a 60
Hz single-phase power source only.

Input Current - The input current through the two phases of the diode bridge converter will
approximately double.

Harmonics - Input current harmonics increase resulting in current distortion levels of 90% THDi and
greater compared to approximately 40% with a three-phase power source. The result is a lower input
power factor. A line reactor is always required. Size the reactor based on inverter rating.

Voltage - A stricter input voltage tolerance of –5% applies compared to -15% when powering the
inverter with a three-phase power source. The average bus voltage will be lower than the equivalent
from a three-phase power source. The minimum input voltage must be no less than 228Vac for 240
volt models and 456Vac for 480 volt models. It will be necessary to maintain a rigid incoming line
voltage so that adequate motor voltage can be produced. To minimize the effect of voltage deprivation
at the motor, consider operating the motor at reduced speed (reduced power) or using a motor with a
base voltage that is lower than the incoming AC power source rating (EX: 480V source, 415V motor).

The result of all the above is that derating the inverter’s output current and horsepower is required.
Improper selection of the inverter will result in poor performance and premature failure. Refer to the
ratings table in 13.1 Input and Output Specifications on page 358. Identify the inverter’s rated
output current with single phase input conditions. This rating must meet or exceed the motor
current rating.

Precautions
• Add a line reactor matched to the inverter rating. A three phase reactor can be wired as single
phase. Connect single-phase power source to R(L1) and T(L3).
• Output current ratings are valid for a 60Hz power source only.
• Verify minimum input voltage.
• If an input phase open fault occurs, turn off the input phase open protection (PRT-05).
• Set Motor Data and Protections - Set the parameters that are related to motor
• information (MOT Group), Overload trip (PRT-20~22) and E-thermal functions (PRT-40~43).

378
 890053-00-01 Technical Specifications

13.6.2 Derating based on Carrier Frequency

The continuous rated current of the inverter is derated when the carrier frequency (CON-04) is
increased. Refer to the following tables for derating percentages based on inverter Voltage and HP
rating.

Current Derate %
Carrier Frequency (kHz.)
Voltage kW HP Default 1~3 4~8 9~15
240 5.5~18.5 7.5~25 3 100 70 60
5.5~18.5 7.5~25 3 100 65 55
480
22~30 30~40 3 100 65 50

Current Derate %
Carrier Frequency (kHz.)
Voltage kW HP Default 1~1.5 2 3 4 5 6~7 8~10
37~55 50~75 3 100 100 100 60 60 60 60
75~90 100~125 3 100 100 100 55 55 55 -
480 110~315 150~500 2 100 100 76 76 76 - -
400 650 1.5 100 95 75 75
-
500 800 1.5 100 92 65 65

Current Derate %
Carrier Frequency (kHz.)
Voltage kW HP Default 2.3kHz 3kHz 5kHz 7kHz 10kHz 15kHz
5.5~22 7.5~30 2.3 100 100 87 74 55 30
30 40 2.3 100 100 87 74 55 -
575 37~55 50~75 2.3 100 100 88 77 60 -
75 100 2.3 100 94 77 60 - -
90 125 2.3 100 92 71 50 - -

379
Technical Specifications 890053-00-01

13.6.3 Derating based on Input Voltage

The continuous rated current of the inverter can be limited when higher than normal input voltages are
applied. The default settings for AC Input Voltage (MOT-10) are 240V, 480V and 600V. For input
voltages higher than the 240V, 480V and 600V, up to a maximum of +10%, refer to the following
graphs for current derating percentages.

13.6.4 Derating based on Ambient Temperature

The continuous rated output current of the inverter is limited when installed in an environment with
higher than normal ambient temperatures. The operating temperature rating of the inverters is 104°F
(40°C). The required derating is 2.5% of the output amps for every degree (°C) above 104°F (40°C),
up to a maximum of 122°F (50°C).

380
 890053-00-01 Technical Specifications

13.7 Heat Emission and Efficiency

The following table provides data on the heat generated by the inverters. Heat emissions are based
on operation at room temperature at the default carrier frequency.

kW Efficiency Total Losses Internal External

Voltage Part Number HP
Rating (%) (Watts) Losses (W) Losses (W)
VFD-RSI-007-H2-2C 5.5 7.5 97.50 180 39 141
240V

VFD-RSI-010-H2-2C 7.5 10 97.50 248 39 209

VFD-RSI-015-H2-2C 11 15 97.60 330 39 291
VFD-RSI-020-H2-2C 15 20 97.90 451 39 412
VFD-RSI-025-H2-2C 18.5 25 98.00 600 39 561
kW Efficiency Total Losses Internal External
Voltage Part Number HP
Rating (%) (Watts) Losses (W) Losses (W)
VFD-RSI-007-H2-4C 5.5 7.5 97.70 172 43 129
VFD-RSI-010-H2-4C 7.5 10 97.70 237 43 194
VFD-RSI-015-H2-4C 11 15 97.70 322 43 279
VFD-RSI-020-H2-4C 15 20 97.90 451 43 408
VFD-RSI-025-H2-4C 18.5 25 97.90 615 43 572
VFD-RSI-030-H2-4C 22 30 98.00 740 43 697
VFD-RSI-040-H2-4C 30 40 98.00 880 107 773
VFD-RSI-050-H2-4C 37 50 98.10 1170 107 1,063
VFD-RSI-060-H2-4C 45 60 98.10 1443 107 1,336
480V

VFD-RSI-075-H2-4C 55 75 98.20 1710 107 1,603

VFD-RSI-100-H2-4C 75 100 98.20 2090 107 1,983
VFD-RSI-125-H2-4C 90 125 98.30 2775 107 2,668
VFD-RSI-150-H2-4C 110 150 98.40 3960 257 3,703
VFD-RSI-200-H2-4C 132 200 98.40 4752 257 4,495
VFD-RSI-250-H2-4C 160 250 98.50 5600 272 5,328
VFD-RSI-300-H2-4C 185 300 98.50 6475 272 6,203
VFD-RSI-400-H2-4C 250 400 98.60 8500 286 8,214
VFD-RSI-500-H2-4C 315 500 98.70 10.4k 479 9,916
VFD-RSI-650-H2-4C 400 650 98.70 13.2k 479 12,721
VFD-RSI-800-H2-4C 500 800 98.80 16k 671 15,329
kW Efficiency Total Losses Internal External
Voltage Part Number HP
Rating (%) (Watts) Losses (W) Losses (W)
VFD-RSI-007-H2-61 5.5 7.5 97.70 224 43 129
VFD-RSI-010-H2-61 7.5 10 97.70 282 43 194
VFD-RSI-015-H2-61 11 15 97.70 376 43 279
VFD-RSI-020-H2-61 15 20 97.90 527 43 408
VFD-RSI-025-H2-61 18.5 25 97.90 644 43 572
575V

VFD-RSI-030-H2-61 22 30 98.00 773 43 697

VFD-RSI-040-H2-61 30 40 98.00 992 107 773
VFD-RSI-050-H2-6C 37 50 98.10 1245 107 1,063
VFD-RSI-060-H2-6C 45 60 98.10 1496 107 1,336
VFD-RSI-075-H2-6C 55 75 98.20 1848 107 1,603
VFD-RSI-100-H2-6C 75 100 98.20 2553 107 1,983
VFD-RSI-125-H2-6C 90 125 98.30 2942 107 2,668

381
UL Mark 890053-00-01

UL mark

The UL mark applies to products in the United States and Canada. This mark indicates that UL
has tested and evaluated the products and determined that the products satisfy the UL standards
for product safety. If a product received UL certification, this means that all components inside the
product had been certified for UL standards as well. Suitable for Installation in a Compartment
Handing Conditioned Air.

CE mark

The CE mark indicates that the products carrying this mark comply with European safety and
environmental regulations. European standards include the Machinery Directive for machine
manufacturers, the Low Voltage Directive for electronics manufacturers and the EMC guidelines for
safe noise control.
Low Voltage Directive
We have confirmed that our products comply with the Low Voltage Directive (EN 61800-5-1).
EMC Directive
The Directive defines the requirements for immunity and emissions of electrical equipment used
within the European Union. The EMC product standard (EN 61800-3) covers requirements stated
for drives.

EAC mark

The EAC (EurAsian Conformity) mark is applied to the products before they are placed on the
market of the Eurasian Customs Union member states.
It indicates the compliance of the products with the following technical regulations and
requirements of the Eurasian Customs Union:
Technical Regulations of the Customs Union 004/2011 “On safety of low voltage equipment”
Technical Regulations of the Customs Union 020/2011 “On electromagnetic compatibility of
technical products”

382
 890053-00-01 Revision History

Manual Revision History

Revision History

Rev. Date Edition Software Date Changes

00 Dec-20 Standard 201.00 11/26/2020 Initial Release
01 June-2022 Standard 575V Added 575V Inverters

383
 890053-00-01

BENSHAW
615 Alpha Drive
Pittsburgh, PA 15238
Phone: (412) 968-0100
Fax: (412) 968-5415

BENSHAW Canada
550 Bright Street
Listowel, Ontario N4W 3W3
Phone: (519) 291-5112
Fax: (519) 291-2595

384